B205 - B209 - D007 - D009 SM Ricoh 3025 SM

B205/B209/D007/D008
SERVICE MANUAL
002531MIU
B205/B209/D007/D008
SERVICE MANUAL
B205/B209/D007/D008
SERVICE MANUAL
002531MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
© 2006 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE COMPANY
GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
B205 DSm725 LD225 Aficio 3025 8025
B209 DSm730 LD230 Aficio 3030 8030
D007 DSm725e LD325 MP 2510 8025e
D008 DSm730e LD330 MP 3010 8030e
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 10/2005 Original Printing
1 10/2006 D007/D008 Addition
B205/B209/D007/D008
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-1
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................1-2
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-3
1.2 COPIER INSTALLATION ..........................................................................1-4
1.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS .......................................1-4
1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART........................................................1-5
1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-6
1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................1-7
Tapes and Retainers.............................................................................1-7
Developer .............................................................................................1-8
Toner Bottle ........................................................................................1-12
Emblem, Decals..................................................................................1-13
1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION ......................................................1-15
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-15
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-16
1.4 LCT INSTALLATION ...............................................................................1-19
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-19
1.5 ARDF INSTALLATION ............................................................................1-23
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-23
1.6 INTERCHANGE UNIT INSTALLATION...................................................1-28
1.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK...................................................................1-28
1.7 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION .........................................................1-31
1.7.1 COMPONENT CHECK...................................................................1-31
1.8 SHIFT TRAY............................................................................................1-35
1.8.1 COMPONENT CHECK...................................................................1-35
1.9 BY-PASS FEED UNIT INSTALLATION...................................................1-38
1.9.1 COMPONENTS CHECK ................................................................1-38
1.10 DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLATION ............................................................1-41
1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-41
1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-42
1.11 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION .............................................................1-44
SM i B205/B209/D007/D008
1.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-44
1.12 1000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION .............................................1-47
1.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-47
1.13 500-SHEET FINISHER (B442) INSTALLATION....................................1-51
1.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK..................................................................1-51
1.14 PLATEN COVER (B406) .......................................................................1-54
1.15 KEY COUNTER.....................................................................................1-55
1.16 OPTICS ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER...........................................1-57
1.17 TRAY HEATER .....................................................................................1-58
1.18 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) ...............................1-60
1.19 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT) ........................................................1-63
1.20 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B770)..................................................1-66
1.21 HDD (B773) ...........................................................................................1-68
1.22 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ......................................1-70
Before You Begin… ............................................................................1-70
Seal Check and Removal ...................................................................1-71
Installation...........................................................................................1-72
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............................... 2-1
2.1 PM TABLE.................................................................................................2-1
2.2 MAIN MOTOR DRIVE GEAR ....................................................................2-4
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ................................................3-1
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS ................................................................................3-1
3.3 LUBRICANTS............................................................................................3-1
3.4 GENERAL CAUTIONS ..............................................................................3-2
3.4.1 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT) .................................................3-2
3.4.2 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT..............................................................3-2
3.4.3 SCANNER UNIT...............................................................................3-2
3.4.4 LASER UNIT.....................................................................................3-3
3.4.5 FUSING UNIT...................................................................................3-3
3.4.6 PAPER FEED ...................................................................................3-3
3.4.7 OTHERS...........................................................................................3-3
3.5 SCANNER UNIT........................................................................................3-4
3.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.........................................................................3-4
3.5.2 SCANNER EXTERIOR/OPERATION PANEL ..................................3-5
3.5.3 LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY ...............................................................3-6
3.5.4 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS .............................................................3-7
B205/B209/D007/D008 ii SM
3.5.5 EXPOSURE LAMP ...........................................................................3-8
3.5.6 SCANNER MOTOR/LAMP STABILIZER..........................................3-9
3.5.7 SCANNER WIRES .........................................................................3-10
3.6 LASER UNIT ...........................................................................................3-13
3.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS .....................................................3-13
3.6.2 LASER UNIT...................................................................................3-14
3.6.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................3-15
3.6.4 LD UNIT..........................................................................................3-16
3.6.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR....................................3-17
3.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................3-18
3.7.1 PCU REMOVAL..............................................................................3-18
3.7.2 PICK-OFF PAWLS .........................................................................3-19
3.7.3 OPC DRUM ....................................................................................3-20
3.7.4 CHARGE ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLER .....................................3-21
3.7.5 CLEANING BLADE.........................................................................3-22
3.7.6 DEVELOPER..................................................................................3-23
3.7.7 AFTER REPLACEMENT OF PCU COMPONENTS .......................3-27
3.8 TRANSFER UNIT ....................................................................................3-28
3.8.1 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT............................................................3-28
3.8.2 IMAGE DENSITY SENSOR............................................................3-29
3.9 FUSING/EXIT ..........................................................................................3-30
3.9.1 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................3-30
3.9.2 THERMISTORS..............................................................................3-30
3.9.3 THERMOSTATS.............................................................................3-31
3.9.4 HOT ROLLER AND FUSING LAMP ...............................................3-33
3.9.5 PRESSURE ROLLER/CLEANING ROLLER ..................................3-35
3.9.6 PAPER EXIT SENSOR/PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR................3-36
3.10 PAPER FEED........................................................................................3-37
3.10.1 FEED ROLLER: TRAY 1 ..............................................................3-37
3.10.2 FEED ROLLER: TRAY 2 ..............................................................3-38
3.10.3 PAPER END SENSOR.................................................................3-39
3.10.4 PAPER TRAY LIFT MOTORS ......................................................3-40
3.10.5 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ...........................................................3-41
3.10.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES...........................................................3-42
Lower Paper Feed Clutch ...................................................................3-42
Upper Paper Feed Clutch. ..................................................................3-42
3.10.7 RELAY CLUTCHES......................................................................3-43
3.10.8 PAPER SIZE DETECTOR ............................................................3-44
3.10.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR...........................................................3-45
3.10.10 RELAY SENSORS .....................................................................3-46
Upper Relay Sensor............................................................................3-46
Lower Relay Sensor............................................................................3-46
3.10.11 DUST COLLECTION BOX..........................................................3-47
3.11 PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS...................................................................3-48
3.11.1 CONTROLLER BOARD ...............................................................3-48
3.11.2 NVRAM.........................................................................................3-49
3.11.3 SBCU BOARD ..............................................................................3-50
3.11.4 POWER PACK .............................................................................3-51
3.11.5 MAIN MOTOR ..............................................................................3-52
SM iii B205/B209/D007/D008
3.11.6 PSU ..............................................................................................3-53
3.11.7 IPU................................................................................................3-54
3.11.8 HDD..............................................................................................3-55
Important Notes About HDD Replacement .........................................3-56
3.12 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING ..................................3-57
3.12.1 PRINTING.....................................................................................3-57
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side...........................................3-57
Blank Margin .......................................................................................3-58
Main Scan Magnification .....................................................................3-58
Parallelogram Image Adjustment ........................................................3-59
3.12.2 SCANNING...................................................................................3-60
Registration: Platen Mode...................................................................3-60
Magnification.......................................................................................3-60
Standard White Density Adjustment ...................................................3-61
3.12.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .........................................................3-62
Registration.........................................................................................3-62
Sub Scan Magnification ......................................................................3-62
3.12.4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION ................................................3-63
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-1
4.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS..............................................................4-2
4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ....................................................................4-18
4.2.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON .................................4-18
4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE .........................................4-19
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis ......................................................4-19
4.3 PAPER FEED TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................4-21
4.4 SKEWED IMAGE ....................................................................................4-22
4.5 IMAGE PROBLEMS ................................................................................4-23
4.5.1 SKEWED, TRAPEZOID AND PARALLELOGRAM IMAGES..........4-23
Skewed Images ..................................................................................4-23
Trapezoid Images ...............................................................................4-23
Parallelogram Images .........................................................................4-24
4.5.2 CHECKING IMAGES WITH THE TRIMMING PATTERN ...............4-25
4.5.3 CORRECTING THE IMAGES.........................................................4-26
Correcting Skewed Images .................................................................4-26
Correcting Trapezoid Images..............................................................4-29
Correcting Parallelogram Images........................................................4-30
4.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS.................................................4-31
4.6.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-31
4.6.2 SWITCHES.....................................................................................4-33
4.7 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-34
B205/B209/D007/D008 iv SM
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK....................................................5-1
5.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.....................................5-2
Entering and Exiting SP mode ..............................................................5-2
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-3
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing............5-4
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................5-4
5.1.3 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ............................................5-5
SP1XXX: Feed......................................................................................5-6
SP2XXX: Drum ...................................................................................5-15
SP4-XXX: Scanner .............................................................................5-27
SP5XXX: Mode ...................................................................................5-38
SP6XXX: Peripherals..........................................................................5-73
SP7XXX: Data Log .............................................................................5-75
SP8-xxx: Data Log2 ............................................................................5-80
5.1.4 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP2902-3) .....................................5-114
5.1.5 INPUT CHECK .............................................................................5-115
Main Machine Input Check (SP5803) ...............................................5-115
ARDF Input Check (SP6007) ............................................................5-118
Finisher Input Check (SP6117) .........................................................5-119
5.1.6 OUTPUT CHECK .........................................................................5-121
Main Machine Output Check (SP5804).............................................5-121
ARDF Output Check (SP6008) .........................................................5-123
Finisher Output Check (SP6118) ......................................................5-123
5.1.7 SMC DATA LISTS (SP5990) ........................................................5-124
5.1.8 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5801) .................................................5-125
5.1.9 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4301)...............................................5-126
5.1.10 DF APS SENSOR OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP6901).......................5-127
5.1.11 NIP BAND WIDTH MEASUREMENT (SP1109) .........................5-128
5.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE............................................................................5-129
5.3 SOFTWARE RESET .............................................................................5-130
5.4 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET ............................5-130
5.4.1 SYSTEM SETTING RESET..........................................................5-130
5.4.2 COPIER SETTING RESET...........................................................5-131
5.5 USER TOOLS .......................................................................................5-132
5.5.1 HOW TO USE UP MODE .............................................................5-132
UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display........................5-132
System Settings ................................................................................5-132
Copier/Document Server Features ...................................................5-132
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings .................................................5-133
Inquiry ...............................................................................................5-133
Counter .............................................................................................5-134
5.6 LEDS .....................................................................................................5-135
Controller ..........................................................................................5-135
SBCU................................................................................................5-135
SM v B205/B209/D007/D008
5.7 DIP SWITCHES.....................................................................................5-135
Controller ..........................................................................................5-135
SBCU................................................................................................5-135
5.8 USING THE DEBUG LOG.....................................................................5-136
5.8.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ...........5-136
5.8.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD ....................5-140
5.8.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY ...........................................5-140
5.8.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .........................................................5-141
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key ..............5-141
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ...........................5-141
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log .....................5-141
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................ 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS........................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-3
6.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS................................6-4
6.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-7
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE...............................................................................6-8
6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-8
6.2.2 CONTROLLER BOARD .................................................................6-10
6.3 COPY PROCESS ....................................................................................6-13
6.4 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-15
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-15
6.4.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-16
6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION: PLATEN MODE ............................6-17
6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-19
6.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-19
6.5.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT).......................................................6-20
6.5.3 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY.................................................................6-21
6.5.4 ORIGINAL TYPE SETTINGS .........................................................6-22
6.5.5 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT).................................................6-23
Overview .............................................................................................6-23
Image Processing Path.......................................................................6-24
SP Modes for Each Image Processing Step .......................................6-25
Auto Shading ......................................................................................6-30
Pre-Filtering ........................................................................................6-30
Main Scan Magnification/Reduction....................................................6-30
Mirroring for ADF Mode ......................................................................6-30
Characteristic Detection......................................................................6-31
Filtering ...............................................................................................6-31
Background Erase ..............................................................................6-32
ID Gamma (g) Correction....................................................................6-32
Gradation Processing .........................................................................6-32
Line width correction ...........................................................................6-33
6.5.6 VIDEO CONTROL UNIT (GAVD) ...................................................6-34
B205/B209/D007/D008 vi SM
Fine Character and Image (FCI) .........................................................6-34
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE ................................................................................6-35
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-35
6.6.2 AUTO POWER CONTROL (APC) ..................................................6-36
6.6.3 LD SAFETY SWITCH .....................................................................6-37
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU) ........................................................6-38
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-38
6.7.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-39
6.8 DRUM CHARGE .....................................................................................6-40
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-40
6.8.1 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION ..............................6-41
Correction for Environmental Conditions ............................................6-41
6.8.2 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION TIMING............................6-42
6.8.3 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING ..........................................6-43
6.9 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-44
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-44
6.9.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-45
6.9.3 DEVELOPER MIXING ....................................................................6-46
6.9.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-47
6.9.5 TONER SUPPLY ............................................................................6-48
Toner bottle replenishment mechanism ..............................................6-48
Toner supply mechanism....................................................................6-49
6.9.6 TONER DENSITY CONTROL ........................................................6-50
Overview .............................................................................................6-50
Toner density sensor initial setting......................................................6-52
Toner density measurement ...............................................................6-52
Vsp/Vsg detection ...............................................................................6-52
Toner supply reference voltage (Vref) determination ..........................6-52
Toner supply determination ................................................................6-52
Toner Supply Motor On Time Determinations.....................................6-53
6.9.7 TONER SUPPLY IN ABNORMAL SENSOR CONDITIONS ...........6-54
ID sensor ............................................................................................6-54
TD Sensor...........................................................................................6-54
6.9.8 TONER NEAR END/END DETECTION AND RECOVERY ............6-54
Toner Near End Detection ..................................................................6-54
Toner Near End Recovery ..................................................................6-55
Toner End Detection ...........................................................................6-55
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-55
6.10 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING.....................................6-56
6.10.1 DRUM CLEANING........................................................................6-56
6.10.2 TONER RECYCLING ...................................................................6-57
6.11 PAPER FEED........................................................................................6-58
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-58
6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM ............................................6-59
6.11.3 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM........................6-60
6.11.4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM ..........................................................6-61
6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION ...........................................................6-63
6.11.6 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION .....................................................6-64
6.11.7 FEED PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT FOR PAPER SIZE................6-66
SM vii B205/B209/D007/D008
Overview .............................................................................................6-66
Paper Size Thresholds........................................................................6-66
Feed Pressure Adjustment .................................................................6-67
Effect of the Amount of Remaining Paper...........................................6-67
6.11.8 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ...........................................................6-69
6.11.9 SPECIAL PAPER SETTING .........................................................6-70
6.11.10 SIDE AND END FENCES...........................................................6-71
Side Fences ........................................................................................6-71
End Fence ..........................................................................................6-71
6.11.11 PAPER REGISTRATION............................................................6-72
6.12 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION .................................6-73
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-73
6.12.2 IMAGE TRANSFER CURRENT TIMING ......................................6-74
6.12.3 TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING................................................6-75
6.12.4 PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM...........................................6-76
6.13 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT ......................................................6-77
6.13.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-77
6.13.2 FUSING DRIVE AND RELEASE MECHANISM ...........................6-78
6.13.3 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM .....................6-79
6.13.4 PRESSURE ROLLER...................................................................6-80
6.13.5 CLEANING MECHANISM ............................................................6-81
6.13.6 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..........................................6-82
Temperature Control...........................................................................6-82
Fusing Lamp Control...........................................................................6-83
6.13.7 OVERHEAT PROTECTION..........................................................6-84
6.13.8 PAPER EXIT.................................................................................6-85
6.14 ENERGY SAVER MODES ....................................................................6-86
6.14.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-86
6.14.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE..............................................................6-87
Entering the energy saver mode .........................................................6-87
What happens in energy saver mode .................................................6-87
Return to stand-by mode ....................................................................6-87
6.14.3 AUTO OFF MODE........................................................................6-88
Entering off stand-by and off modes ...................................................6-88
Off Stand-by mode..............................................................................6-88
Off Mode .............................................................................................6-88
Returning to stand-by mode................................................................6-88
SPECIFICATIONS
7. SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................ 7-1
7.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................7-1
7.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ...................................................................7-4
7.2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ................................................................7-4
7.2.2 OPTIONS TABLE .............................................................................7-6
Copier options.......................................................................................7-6
Fax option .............................................................................................7-6
Printer/scanner options .........................................................................7-6
B205/B209/D007/D008 viii SM
APPENDIX 1 (for B205/B209/D007/D008)
1. RSS (REMOTE SERVICE SYSTEM) ............................. Appendix-1

1.1 RSS SET UP .................................................................................Appendix-1
1.2 SP MODE SETTINGS ...................................................................Appendix-4
1.3 CHECKING ITEMS USING RSS ...................................................Appendix-4
1.3.1 READ ONLY ITEMS.............................................................Appendix-4
1.3.2 AUTO CALL AND READ ITEMS ..........................................Appendix-5
SC Calls ...................................................................................Appendix-5
CC Manual Calls ......................................................................Appendix-5
CC Auto Call ............................................................................Appendix-6
Alarm Calls...............................................................................Appendix-6
1.3.3 READ AND WRITE ITEMS...................................................Appendix-7
1.3.4 EXECUTE ITEMS.................................................................Appendix-7
1.4 JAM HISTORY ..............................................................................Appendix-7
1.4.1 JAM CONDITION TABLE .....................................................Appendix-8
Copier ......................................................................................Appendix-8
Document Feeder ....................................................................Appendix-9
1.4.2 PAPER SIZE ........................................................................Appendix-9
1.5 OTHERS......................................................................................Appendix-10
1.5.1 SC630 [RDS COMMUNICATION ERROR] ........................Appendix-10
1.5.2 PM PROCEDURE OR OTHER MAINTENANCE ...............Appendix-10
PAPER BANK B390

SEE SECTION B390 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B391

1,000-SHEET FINISHER B408

1-BIN TRAY UNIT B413

DUPLEX UNIT B414

SM ix B205/B209/D007/D008
BY-PASS TRAY B415
INTERCHANGE UNIT B416

BRIDGE UNIT B417

500-SHEET FINISHER B442

INTERNAL SHIFT SORT TRAY B459

FAX OPTION B766

PRINTER/SCANNER B767/PRINTER B846
SEE SECTION B767/B846 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
DOCUMENT FEEDER B810

PRINTER/SCANNER OPTION D318

SEE SECTION D318 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
B205/B209/D007/D008 x SM
Conventions Used in this Manual
This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol What it means

Refer to section number
See Core Tech Manual for

details
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
= Clamp
Sideways, LEF
Lengthwise, SEF
(Long Edge Feed)
(Short Edge Feed)
Cautions, Notes, etc.

The following headings provide special information:
WARNING
FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH.
CAUTION
Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.
Important
• Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals,
loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
IMPORTANT
• ALWAYS OBEY THESE GUIDELINES TO AVOID SERIOUS PROBLEMS SUCH AS MISFEEDS,
DAMAGE TO ORIGINALS, LOSS OF VALUABLE DATA AND TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE
MACHINE. BOLD IS ADDED FOR EMPHASIS.
NOTE: This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the
machine.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
REVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
4. If a job has started before the copier completes the warm-up or initializing
period, keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components
because the starts making copies as soon as the warm-up period is
completed.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
6. Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire
or an explosion might occur.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS
Toner is non-toxic, but if you get it in your eyes by accident, it may cause
temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as
first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate the toner cassettes. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when
exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of toner cassettes in accordance with local regulations. (This is a
non-toxic unit.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. The NVRAM on the Controller board has a lithium battery which can explode
if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. Do
not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in
accordance with local regulations.
3. The danger of explosion exists if batteries on the FCU, MBU and JBIG are
incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING FOR LASER UNIT

WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can
seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
LASER-4.WMF
Safety Precautions for This Machine

Before moving the mainframe:
• Disconnect all peripheral units (finisher, LCT, etc.) from the mainframe.
• Pull the slide handles out of the mainframe and use them to lift the mainframe.
INSTALLATION
POSITION 1
TAB
DOCUMENT FEEDER B810
FAX OPTION B766
POSITION 2
TAB
PAPER BANK B390
POSITION 3
TAB
TROUBLESHOOTING
POSITION 4
TAB
PRINTER/SCANNER B767/B846
PRINTER/SCANNER D318
SERVICE TABLES
POSITION 5
TAB
DUPLEX UNIT B414
POSITION 6
TAB
BY-PASS TRAY B415
SPECIFICATIONS
POSITION 7
TAB
APPENDIX
POSITION 8
TAB
BRIDGE UNIT B417

INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight.)
4. Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 30 m3/hr/person
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3
6. Avoid an area which is exposed to sudden temperature changes. This includes:
1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
7. Do not place the machine in an area where it will be exposed to corrosive
gases.
8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea
level.
9. Place the copier on a strong and level base. (Inclination on any side should be
no more than 5 mm.)
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: With in 5 mm (0.2") of level
SM 1-1 B205/B209/D007/D008
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Place the copier near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
C
A: In Front: Over 750 mm (29.6")
B: Left: Over 100 mm (0.4")
C: To Rear: Over 100 mm (0.4")
D: Right: Over 100 mm (0.4")
B D
E
F
G
E: 620 mm (24.4")
F: 640 mm (25.2")
G: 550 mm (21.7")
H: 1137 mm (44.8")
NOTE: The 750 mm recommended for the space at the front is only for pulling out
the paper tray. If an operator stands at the front of the copier, more space
is required.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-2 SM
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
Installation
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the copier and easily accessible.
Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
2. Avoid multi-wiring.
3. Be sure to ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A

220 V ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 7 A
110V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 13 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10 %
3. Do not set anything on the power cord.
SM 1-3 B205/B209/D007/D008
COPIER INSTALLATION
1.2 COPIER INSTALLATION

1.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS
CAUTION
Rating voltage for peripherals.
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
1. ADF 2. Bridge Unit or Shift Tray

1. Rating voltage output connector 1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V for accessory Max. DC24 V
3. Duplex Unit 4. By-pass Tray

1. Rating voltage output connector 1. Rating voltage output connector
for accessory Max. DC24 V for accessory Max. DC24 V
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-4 SM
1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART
Installation
The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently.
Unpack the copier
Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit, LCT, or Finisher?
Yes No
Place the copier on the Paper Tray Unit or LCT
Install the Paper Tray Unit or LCT
Install the copier
Does the user require the Memory Unit?

Yes No
Install the Memory Unit
Does the user require the By-pass Tray?

Yes No
Install the By-pass Tray
Does the user require the Shift Tray?

Yes No
Install the Shift Tray
Does the user require the Finisher?

Yes No
Install the Bridge Unit
Install the Finisher
Does the user require the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit ?
Yes No
Install the Interchange Unit
Install the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit
Install the ARDF or Platen Cover (if required)
SM 1-5 B205/B209/D007/D008
COPIER INSTALLATION
1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description Q'ty
1. Paper Tray Decal................................................................ 1
2. Emblem Cover .................................................................... 1
3. Emblem .............................................................................. 1
4. Model Name Decal ............................................................. 1
5. End Fence .......................................................................... 1
6. HDD Caution Decal (-17, -29, -57 only) .............................. 1
7. Operating Instructions – System Setting............................. 1
8. Operating Instructions – Copy Reference ........................... 1
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-6 SM
1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation
Tapes and Retainers
[A]
[B]
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
If the optional paper tray or the optional LCT is going to be installed now, put the
copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first, then install these options, then install
the copier.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused if the machine is moved to another location in the future.
1. Remove the tapes and the shipping retainer [A] on the exterior of the copier.
2. Install the end fence [B].
SM 1-7 B205/B209/D007/D008
COPIER INSTALLATION
Developer
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
1. Spread the vinyl sheet provided with the developer kit on a flat surface.
2. Open the right door [A]
3. Open the front door [B].
4. Push the latch [C] and remove the PCU [D].
NOTE: Do not hold the PCU by the OPC cover [E]
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-8 SM
Installation
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
5. Remove the front screw [A] ( x1)

6. Remove the rear screws [B] ( x2)
7. Release the rear tab [C] then front tab [D], then separate the top and bottom.
Important: Be sure to release the rear tab first and the front tab second.
SM 1-9 B205/B209/D007/D008
COPIER INSTALLATION
[B]
[A]
[C]
8. Open the developer pack [A].

9. While turning the black gear [B], slowly move the pack left and right and pour
half of the developer over the auger [C].
10. Continue to turn the black gear until the developer is level.
11. While continuing to turn the black gear, slowly move the pack left and right and
pour the remaining half of the developer over the auger until the developer is
level.
Important
• Be careful. Do not spill developer on the gears and sponges.
• If you accidentally spill developer on the gears or sponges, remove it with a
magnet or the tip of a magnetized screwdriver.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-10 SM
Installation
Re-assembly
1. Make sure that all of the holes and tabs are engaged at , , , and . Then
push down to lock the tabs on the front and rear end of the PCU.
2. Make sure that the holes for the screws on the front and rear end of the PCU
are aligned correctly. If the holes are not aligned correctly, make sure that the
tabs at the front, rear, and left side of the PCU are engaged correctly.
Important
• Reattach the rear screws ( x2) first, then reattach the front screw ( x1).
• Do not push down on the top of the PCU when you attach the rear and front
screws
SM 1-11 B205/B209/D007/D008
COPIER INSTALLATION
Toner Bottle
[D]
[F]
[E]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[G]
1. Raise the toner bottle holder lever [A], push lever [B] down, and pull the toner
bottle holder [C] out.
2. Shake the toner bottle [D].
NOTE: Do not remove the toner bottle cap [E] until after shaking.
3. Unscrew the bottle cap [E] and insert the bottle into the holder.
NOTE: Do not touch the inner bottle cap [F].
4. Reposition the holder and press down the holder lever to secure the bottle.
5. Open the right cover.
6. Rotate the green fusing pressure lever [G] to the up position.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-12 SM
Emblem, Decals
Installation
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
1. Attach the emblem [A] and panel [B] to the front door [C].
NOTE: Push the panel in until the emblem and panel move into their positions.
You will hear a click.
2. Pull the paper tray out and turn the paper size dial to select the appropriate size.
Adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size.
NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull out the tray fully, then push down the
green lock at the rear of the tray.
3. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [D] to each paper tray.
NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also used for the optional paper tray or
the optional LCT. Keep any remaining decals for use with these
optional units.
SM 1-13 B205/B209/D007/D008
COPIER INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
4. If the optional bridge unit will not be installed, swing the sensor feeler [A] out.
5. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen cover (see "ARDF Installation"
( 1.5) or "Platen Cover Installation" ( 1.14)).
6. If the HDD will be installed for a –17, -29, –57 model, attach the HDD caution
decal [B] to the front cover.
7. Connect the copier and turn the machine on.
8. Go into the SP mode and do SP2801 (Developer Initialization).
9. Do some test copies to make sure that the machine operates correctly.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-14 SM
Installation
1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
Description Q’ty
1. Securing Bracket ................................................................ 2
2. Screw – M4 x 10 ................................................................. 4
SM 1-15 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
[A]
[C]
[B]
CAUTION
1. Remove the strips of tape.

2. Set the copier [A] on the paper tray unit [B].
NOTE: When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the cable [C].
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-16 SM
Installation
[C]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
3. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).

4. Connect the cable [B] to the copier, as shown.
5. Attach a securing bracket [C] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x
1 each).
6. Re-install the connector cover.
7. Remove the 2nd paper tray [D] and secure the paper tray unit [E] ( x 2).
SM 1-17 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
8. Reinstall the 2nd paper tray and attach the appropriate paper tray number
decal [A] to the paper tray.
NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main
copier.
9. Rotate the adjuster [B] until the machine cannot be pushed across the floor.
10. Load paper into the paper trays and select the proper paper size.
11. Turn on the main switch.
12. Check the machine’s operation and copy quality.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-18 SM
1.4 LCT INSTALLATION
Installation
Description Q’ty
1. Securing Bracket ................................................................ 2
2. Screw – M4 x 10 ................................................................. 4
3. Paper Size Decal ................................................................ 1
SM 1-19 B205/B209/D007/D008
LCT INSTALLATION
[A]
[C]
[B]
CAUTION

2. Set the copier [A] on the LCT [B].
NOTE: When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the cable [C].
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-20 SM
Installation
[C]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
3. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).

4. Connect the cable [B] to the copier, as shown.
5. Attach a securing bracket [C] to each side of the LCT, as shown ( x 1 each).
6. Re-install the connector cover.
7. Remove the 2nd paper tray and secure the LCT [D] ( x 2).
SM 1-21 B205/B209/D007/D008
LCT INSTALLATION
[B]
[A]
[C]
8. Load paper into the LCT.

9. Reinstall the 2nd paper tray and attach the appropriate paper tray number
decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the LCT.
NOTE: The paper tray number decal is in the accessory box for the main
copier.
10. Rotate the adjuster [C] until the machine cannot be pushed across the floor.
11. Load paper into the paper tray and turn on the main switch.
12. Check the machine’s operation and copy quality.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-22 SM
1.5 ARDF INSTALLATION
Installation
Description Q’ty
1. Scale Guide ........................................................................ 1
2. DF Exposure Glass............................................................. 1
3. Stud Screw ......................................................................... 2
4. Knob Screw ........................................................................ 2
5. Original Size Decal ............................................................. 2
6. Screwdriver Tool................................................................. 1
7. Cloth Holder........................................................................ 1
8. Cloth ................................................................................... 1
9. Attention Decal – Top Cover............................................... 1
10. Attention Decal – Scanner ................................................ 1
3 6 1
4
5 2
SM 1-23 B205/B209/D007/D008
ARDF INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-24 SM
[F] [C]
Installation
[E] [G]
[D] [A]
[G]
[B]
[H]
[H]
[I]
2. Remove the left scale [A] ( x 2).

3. Peel off the backing [B] of the double-sided tape attached to the glass holder.
4. Place the DF exposure glass [C] on the glass holder.
NOTE: When installing the DF exposure glass, make sure that the white point
[D] is on the lower front side of the glass, as shown.
5. Peel off the backing [E] of the double-sided tape attached to the rear side of the
scale guide [F], then install it ( x 2 removed in step 2).
6. Install the two stud screws [G].
7. Mount the DF on the copier, then slide the DF to the front as shown.
8. Secure the DF unit with two screws [H].
9. Connect the cable [I] to the copier.
SM 1-25 B205/B209/D007/D008
ARDF INSTALLATION
[B]
[A]
[C]
10. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it on the exposure glass.
11. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the
exposure glass.
12. Close the ARDF.
13. Attach the appropriate scale decal [C] as shown.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-26 SM
[A]
Installation
[B]
[D]
[C]
14. Attach the decal [A] to the top cover as shown, choosing the language most
suitable for the machine installed.
15. Line up arrow on the decal [B] with the center of the ADF exposure glass as
shown, and attach it to the cover. As with step 14, choose the language most
suitable for the machine installed.
16. Attach the cloth holder [C] to the left side of the scanner as shown.
17. Insert the cloth [D] in the cloth holder.
18. Turn the main power switch on. Then check if the document feeder works
properly.
19. Make a full size copy. Then check to make sure the registrations (side-to-side
and leading edge) and image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the
registrations and image skew (refer to the service manual).
SM 1-27 B205/B209/D007/D008
INTERCHANGE UNIT INSTALLATION
1.6 INTERCHANGE UNIT INSTALLATION

1.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
Description Q’ty
1. Interchange Unit ................................................................. 1
2. Connector Cover................................................................. 1
3. Tapping Screw M3 x 8 ........................................................ 1
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-28 SM
Installation
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D] [E]
[H]
[F]
[G]
CAUTION
1. Remove all tapes.

2. Open the right cover [A] of the copier.
3. Open cover [B]
4. Remove the metal clip [C].
NOTE: To remove the clip, push the small tab [D] on the clip into the slot [E],
then the clip can be removed.
5. Remove the cover [B].
If the optional 1-bin tray unit (B413) will be installed, do steps 6 and 7.
6. Loosen the screw, push down tab [F] with a screwdriver, and remove the front
right cover [G].
7. Slide out the exit cover [H].
SM 1-29 B205/B209/D007/D008
INTERCHANGE UNIT INSTALLATION
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
8. Open the cover [A] of the interchange unit.

9. Install the interchange unit (2 connectors) [B].
10. Secure the interchange unit with the knob screws [C].
11. Attach the connector cover [D] ( x 1).
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-30 SM
1.7 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
Installation
Description Q’ty
1. 1-Bin Tray Unit.................................................................... 1
2. Tray .................................................................................... 1
3. Sub-Tray ............................................................................. 1
4. Tray Guide .......................................................................... 1
5. Paper Guide........................................................................ 1
6. Tapping Screw M3 x 8 ........................................................ 1
6
5
1
3
4
SM 1-31 B205/B209/D007/D008
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
[A]
CAUTION
NOTE: Before installing this 1-bin tray unit, the optional interchange unit (B416)
must be installed.
2. If the optional bridge unit has been installed, open the right jam removal cover
[A] of the bridge unit.
If the optional bridge unit is not installed, skip this step.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-32 SM
Installation
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
3. If the front right cover [A] is installed, remove it.

4. Install the 1-bin tray unit [B] ( x 1).
5. Connect the connector [C].
6. Reinstall the front right cover.
7. Peel off the backing [D] of the double-sided tape attached to the paper guide
[E]. Then attach the paper guide to the underside of the scanner unit as shown.
SM 1-33 B205/B209/D007/D008
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
[A]
[C]
[B]
8. Install the tray guide [A].

9. Install the tray [B].
10. Install the sub-tray [C].
11. Turn on the main power switch and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-34 SM
1.8 SHIFT TRAY
Installation
Description Q’ty
1. Shift Tray Unit ..................................................................... 1
2. Paper Guide - Large ........................................................... 1
3. Paper Guide - Small ........................................................... 2
4. Stepped Screw ................................................................... 1
2
3
4
1
SM 1-35 B205/B209/D007/D008
SHIFT TRAY
[A]
[C]
[B] [C]
CAUTION

2. Remove the plate [A].
3. Install the large paper guide [B] and two small paper guides [C], as shown.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-36 SM
Installation
[C]
[B]
[D] [A]
4. Install the stepped screw [A].

5. Install the shift tray unit [B], as shown.
NOTE: 1) Set the shift tray on the stepped screw.
2) The shift tray must be installed under the paper guide [C] installed in
step 3.
6. Connect the cable [D] to the copier.
7. Turn on the main power switch.
8. Check the shift tray operation.
SM 1-37 B205/B209/D007/D008
BY-PASS FEED UNIT INSTALLATION
1.9 BY-PASS FEED UNIT INSTALLATION

1.9.1 COMPONENTS CHECK
Description Q’ty
1. By-pass Tray Unit ............................................................... 1
2. Unit Holder.......................................................................... 1
3. Tapping Screw ................................................................... 2
4. Allen Key............................................................................. 1
4
1
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-38 SM
Installation
[B]
[A]
[B]
CAUTION
2. Remove the entrance cover [A] ( x 2) and two screws [B].
SM 1-39 B205/B209/D007/D008
BY-PASS FEED UNIT INSTALLATION
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[D]
[C]
3. Install the unit holder [A] using the Allen key ( x 4 ).

NOTE: 1) Make sure that the four screws are tightened in the proper order, as
shown above. Otherwise, when the optional duplex unit (B414) is
installed, it will not properly lock in place.
2) After securing the unit, store the Allen key in the inner cover [B] for
future use.
4. If the optional duplex unit (B414) will be installed: Remove the indicated
parts [C] of the by-pass tray unit [D].
5. Install the by-pass tray unit ( x 2, x 1).
6. Turn the main power switch on and check the by-pass tray function.
7. Make a copy from the by-pass tray. Then check the registration.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-40 SM
1.10 DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLATION
Installation
Description Q’ty
1. Duplex Unit ......................................................................... 1
2. Connector Cover................................................................. 1
3. Bracket ............................................................................... 1
4. Clip ..................................................................................... 1
5. Unit Holder.......................................................................... 1
6. Unit Holder Cover ............................................................... 1
7. Allen Key............................................................................. 1
8. Tapping Screw - M3 x 8 ..................................................... 4
5
1
2
8
3
7
4
SM 1-41 B205/B209/D007/D008
DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
[E]
[A]
[C]
[D] [F]
[D]
[G]
CAUTION
NOTE: Before installing the duplex unit, the optional interchange unit (B416)
must be installed.
2. Remove three covers [A].
3. Remove the connector cover [B] ( x 1), the entrance cover [C] (2 screws if the
by-pass tray has not been installed), and two screws [D].
4. Install the bracket [E] ( x 1).
5. If the by-pass tray has already been installed, skip this step: Install the unit
holder [F] using the Allen key ( x 4).
NOTE: 1) Make sure that the four screws are tightened in the proper order, as
shown above. Otherwise, the duplex unit will not properly lock in place.
2) After securing the unit, store the Allen key in the inner cover [G] for
future use.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-42 SM
[C]
Installation
[D]
[A]
[F]
[B] [E]
[G]
6. Set the duplex unit [A] on the unit holder [B] or on the by-pass tray unit if it has
already been installed.
7. Attach the link [C] to the shaft [D] and secure it with the clip.
8. Connect the cable [E] and install the connector cover [F] ( x 1).
9. If the by-pass tray has already been installed, skip this step: Install the unit
holder cover [G] ( x 2).
10. Turn on the main power switch and check the duplex unit function.
SM 1-43 B205/B209/D007/D008
BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION
1.11 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION

Description Q’ty
1. Bridge Unit .......................................................................... 1
2. Securing Plate .................................................................... 1
3. Shoulder Screw .................................................................. 1
4. Knob Screw ........................................................................ 1
2
4
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-44 SM
Installation
[A]
[C]
[B]
CAUTION

2. Loosen the screw [A] and remove the front right cover [B].
3. If the sensor feeler [C] is out, fold it away into the machine.
SM 1-45 B205/B209/D007/D008
BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
4. Remove the cover [A].

5. Install the bridge unit [B] ( x 1 shoulder, x 1 knob).
6. Reinstall the front right cover [C].
7. Connect the cable [D] to the main machine.
8. Attach the securing plate [E], as shown.
NOTE: Do not attach it with a screw; this is done when securing the front stand
for the optional finisher.
9. Install the optional finisher (refer to the finisher installation procedure).
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-46 SM
1.12 1000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
Installation
2
6
1 7 8
5
10
3 9
For
B022/B027/B031/ For For
No. Description Q’ty B089/B093/B097/ B051/B052/ B079/B082/
B205/B209 B156/B220 B135/B138
D007/D008
1 Front Joint Bracket 1 ---
2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 --- ---
3 Rear Joint Bracket 1 --- ---
4 Grounding Plate 1 ---
5 Copy Tray 1
6 Staple Position Decal 1
7 Screw - M4 x 14 4 (Use 3) --- (Use 4)
8 Knob Screw - M4 x 10 1
9 Screw - M3 x 8 1 ---
10 Knob Screw - M3 x 8 1
= Necessary, --- = Not necessary
SM 1-47 B205/B209/D007/D008
1000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
[A]
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
The following options must be installed before you install this finisher:
• Bridge Unit (B417)
• Paper Tray Unit (B390) or LCT (B391)
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
NOTE: Be sure to keep screw [A]. It will be needed to secure the grounding
plate in step 4.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-48 SM
Installation
[B]
[A] [H]
[C]
[F]
[G]
[E]
[D]
2. Install the front joint bracket [A] ( x 2 M4 x 17) and rear joint bracket [B]
( x 1 M4 x 17).
3. Remove the left stand [C] ( x 3)
4. Install the lower grounding plate [D] on the finisher ( x 2 M3 x 8).
NOTE: Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory
box.
5. Open the front door [E]. Then pull the locking lever [F].
6. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the
locking lever.
7. Secure the locking lever ( x 1 knob M3 x 8) and close the front door.
8. Install the copy tray [G] ( x 1 knob M4 x 10).
9. Connect the finisher cable [H] to the main machine.
SM 1-49 B205/B209/D007/D008
1000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
[A]
10. Attach the staple position decal [A] to the ARDF as shown.
11. Turn on the ac switch and check the finisher operation.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-50 SM
1.13 500-SHEET FINISHER (B442) INSTALLATION
Installation
Description Q’ty
1. Unit Holder.......................................................................... 1
2. Entrance Guide................................................................... 1
3. Output Tray......................................................................... 1
4. Snap Ring ........................................................................... 2
5. Knob Screw ........................................................................ 2
1
4 5
SM 1-51 B205/B209/D007/D008
500-SHEET FINISHER (B442) INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
[C]
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
NOTE: Before installing the 500-sheet finisher, the optional bridge unit (B417)
must be installed.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
2. Install the entrance guide [A].
3. Install the unit holder [B] ( x 2).
4. Install the 500-sheet finisher [C].
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-52 SM
Installation
[B]
[A]
5. Install the output tray [A] as shown (2 snap rings).

6. Connect the finisher cable [B].
7. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
SM 1-53 B205/B209/D007/D008
PLATEN COVER (B406)
1.14 PLATEN COVER (B406)
[A]
1. Install the platen cover [A] ( x 2).
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-54 SM
1.15 KEY COUNTER
Installation
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[G]
CAUTION
1. Remove two caps [A].
2. Connect the key counter cable [B].
3. Install the stepped screw [C].
4. Hold the key counter plate nuts [D] on the inside of the key counter bracket [E]
and insert the key counter holder [F].
5. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2).
6. Install the key counter cover [G] ( x 2).
SM 1-55 B205/B209/D007/D008
KEY COUNTER
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
7. Connect the cable [A].

8. Hook the key counter holder assembly [B] onto the stepped screw [C].
9. Secure the key counter holder assembly with a screw [D].
10. Use the User Tools to enable the counter function for the following modes:
• Copy mode
• Document server mode
• Fax mode
• Scanner mode
• Printer mode
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-56 SM
1.16 OPTICS ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
Installation
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[H]
[F]
[G]
CAUTION
1. Remove the rear scale [A] ( x 3), left scale [B] ( x 2), and exposure glass
[C].
NOTE: When reinstalling the exposure glass, make sure that the mark [D] is
positioned at the rear left corner, as shown.
2. Move the 1st and 2nd scanners to the right.
3. Install the cable clamp [E].
4. Install the anti-condensation heater [F] ( x 2).
5. Join the connectors [G].
6. Attach the cable cover [H], as shown.
SM 1-57 B205/B209/D007/D008
TRAY HEATER
1.17 TRAY HEATER
[B] [D]
[C]
[A]
[E]
CAUTION
1. Remove the connector cover [A] and rear cover [B] ( x 4).
2. Slide out the 1st and 2nd paper trays.
3. Pass the connector [C] through the opening [D].
4. Install the tray heater assembly [E] ( x 1).
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-58 SM
Installation
[E]
[A]
[B]
[B]
[D]
[C]
5. Remove the 2nd paper lift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).

6. Route the heater cable [B] to the side of rivet [C] and under bracket [D].
7. Clamp the heater cable [B] as shown.
8. Joint the heater cable and the ac cable [E].
9. Reinstall the paper lift motor [A] and reassemble the machine.
SM 1-59 B205/B209/D007/D008
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
1.18 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
[A]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[D]
CAUTION
1. Remove the joint brackets [A] ( x 1 each).

2. Remove the rear cover [B] for the optional paper tray unit ( x 2).
3. Remove the cable guide [C] ( x 1).
4. Install the clamps [D].
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-60 SM
[B]
Installation
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[D]
5. Slide out the two paper trays from the optional paper tray unit.
6. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B].
7. Install the tray heater assembly [C] ( x 1).
8. Clamp the cables [D], as shown.
9. Join the connectors [E].
10. Reinstall the cable guide.
SM 1-61 B205/B209/D007/D008
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
[A]
[C]
[B]
[C]
11. Remove two screws [A] from the rear side of the paper feed unit.
12. Reinstall the rear cover for the optional paper tray unit.
13. Reinstall the two paper trays into the optional paper tray unit.
14. Remove the 2nd paper tray of the copier.
15. Remove two screws [B] and install the screws [C] which were removed in step
12.
16. Reinstall the 2nd paper tray of the copier.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-62 SM
1.19 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
Installation
[A]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[F] [E]
[C]
[D]
[G]
CAUTION
1. Remove two joint brackets [A] ( x 1 each).

2. Remove the rear cover for the LCT [B] ( x 2).
3. Slide out the paper tray [C].
4. Push the stopper [D] on both slide rails and remove the paper tray.
5. Pass the connector [E] through the opening [F].
6. Install the tray heater [G] ( x 1).
SM 1-63 B205/B209/D007/D008
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL LCT)
[A]
[C] [A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
7. Install five clamps [A].

8. Connect the cable [B] to the tray heater cable [C].
9. Route the cable and clamp it.
10. Remove the connector cover of the copier [D].
11. Join the connectors [E].
12. Reinstall the connector cover of the copier.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-64 SM
Installation
[A]
[B]
[B]
[C]
13. Remove two screws [A] from the rear side of the LCT.
14. Reinstall the rear cover of the LCT.
15. Reinstall the paper tray.
16. Remove the 2nd paper tray of the copier.
17. Remove two screws [B] and install the screws [C] which were removed in step
13.
18. Reinstall the 2nd paper tray of the copier.
SM 1-65 B205/B209/D007/D008
COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B770)
1.20 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT (B770)

Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list:
Description Qty
1. Bracket (Not used for the B205 series copiers) .................. 1
2. Screws ................................................................................ 4
3. FFC (Short) (Not used) ....................................................... 1
4. Harness (Not used)............................................................. 1
5. FFC (Long) ......................................................................... 1
6. Connection Cable ............................................................... 1
7. Harness Clamp ................................................................... 1
8. ICIB..................................................................................... 1
1 2 3 4
8
7
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-66 SM
Installation
CAUTION
TURN OFF THE MAIN POWER SWITCH AND DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD.
1. Remove: ( 3.11.1)
• Controller board cover [A]
( x1).
• Controller board plate screws [A] [A]
( x2).
2. Remove: ( 3.10.4)
• Paper tray unit connector cover [A]
( x1)
• Disconnect the paper tray unit (if it
is installed) ( x1)
• Rear cover [B] ( x1).
3. Pull the controller board partially out
of the left slot to disconnect it from the
[A]
IPU.
4. Remove the IPU [A] from the main
machine.
NOTE:
• The board for this option is installed on the back of the IPU board.
• For more about removal, please refer to 3.11.7.
[C] [D]
5. Attach harness clamp [B] (= x1).
6. Attach the ICIB [C] ( x4)
7. Connect the cable [D] to the ICIB
and the IPU Board .
8. Connect the flat film connector [E] to
the ICIB and IPU boards .

9. Reinstall the IPU board.
10. Turn on the machine. [E]
[B]
11. Enable the Copy Data Security
function:
[User Tools]> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Copy Data Security Option
SM 1-67 B205/B209/D007/D008
HDD (B773)
1.21 HDD (B773)

Accessories
Description Qty
1. HDD Unit ............................................................................ 1
[A]
1. Remove cover [A] ( x1).
2. Remove controller board [B] ( x 2).
[B]
[C]
3. Attach:
• Harness clamp [C]
• Double standoff [D] [F]
• Single standoff [E]
4. Attach the HDD [F] to the controller
board ( x2).
[D]
[E]
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-68 SM
Installation
5. Connect the HDD harness [A] ( x2). [A]
6. Connect the AC harness [B] ( x2, = [B]
x1)
NOTE: Close the harness clamp
around both cables.
7. Reinstall the controller board.
After Installing the HDD
1. Do SP5853 to copy the preset stamp
data from the firmware to the hard disk.
Then turn the main power switch off/on.
2. It is not necessary to format the new
hard disk after installation.
SM 1-69 B205/B209/D007/D008
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
1.22 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

Before You Begin…
1. Confirm that the Data Overwrite Security unit SD card is the correct type for the
machine. The correct type for this machine is Type "D".
Important: DO THIS NOW. IF YOU INSTALL ANY VERSION OTHER THAN TYPE "D", YOU
WILL HAVE TO REPLACE THE NVRAM AND DO THIS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE AGAIN.
2. Make sure that the following settings are not at the factory default settings:
• Supervisor login password
• Administrator login name
• Administrator login password
Important: These settings must be set up by the customer before the Data
Overwrite Security unit can be installed.
3. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator
Authentication Management"> "Admin. Authentication"> "On"
If this setting is "Off" tell the customer that this setting must be "On" before you
can do the installation procedure.
4. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator
Authentication Management"> "Available Settings
NOTE: "Available Settings" is not displayed until Step 2 is done.
If this setting is not selected tell the customer that this setting must be selected
before you can do the installation procedure.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-70 SM
Seal Check and Removal
Installation
[A]
[B]
CAUTION
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.

• Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
• The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see “VOID” on the tapes, do
not install the components in the box.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show “VOID”, remove them from the corners
of the box.
3. When you remove each seal, the “VOID” marks [B] can be seen. In this
condition, they cannot be reattached to the box.
SM 1-71 B205/B209/D007/D008
Installation
Important
• The DOS SD card is inserted in SD card slot C2.
• The PostScript3 SD card must always reside in slot C2. If the PostScript3 option
is also required, move the DOS application to another SD card with SP5873.
• For more information about merging applications, refer to the Printer/Scanner
Manual for the B205/B209/D007/D008, or to the Printer/Scanner Manual for the
D007/D008.
1. If the machine is on, turn off the main

power switch.
2. Disconnect the network cable.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Wait until the machine is in the ready
state then, turn the operation switch
and main power switch off.
5. Remove the application cover [A] [A]
(x1).
6. With the printed side of the SD card [B]
facing the rear of the machine, install
the SD card in SD card slot C2.
7. Reconnect the network cable, if the [B]
network is connected to the copier.
8. Turn the main power switch on.
9. Do SP5-878 and push [EXECUTE].
10. Go out of the SP mode, turn the operation switch off, then turn the main power
switch off.
11. Turn the machine power on.
12. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-72 SM
Installation
[A]
[B]
13. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version [A] in the diagnostic report
are the same as the ROM and version number of [B].
14. Push [User Tools] and select System Settings> Administrator Tools> Auto
Erase Memory Setting> On.
15. Exit from User Tools mode.
SM 1-73 B205/B209/D007/D008
[A]
[B] [C]
09/09/2003 14:13
Origi. Total Copies
0 1 0
16. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed.
17. Make a Sample Copy.
18. Check the overwrite erase icon.
• The icon [B] changes to [C] when job data is stored in the hard disk.
• The icon goes back to its usual shape [B] after this function has completed
a data overwrite operation to the hard disk.
B205/B209/D007/D008 1-74 SM
PM TABLE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 PM TABLE
NOTE: 1) The amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of
prints.
2) After carrying out PM, clear the maintenance counter (SP7-804).
Maintenance
Preventive
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
EM 120K 240K 360K NOTE

SCANNER/LASER OPTICS
Reflector C C C Optics cloth
1st Mirror C C C C Optics cloth
2nd Mirror C C C C Optics cloth
3rd Mirror C C C C Optics cloth
Scanner Guide Rails C C C Do not use alcohol.
Platen Sheet Cover C I I I Replace the platen sheet, if
necessary.
Dry cloth or alcohol
Exposure Glass C C C Dry cloth or alcohol
Toner Shield Glass C C C Optics cloth
APS Sensor C C C Dry cloth or blower brush

AROUND THE DRUM
Transfer/Separation R R R
Unit
ID Sensor C C C Perform the ID sensor initial
setting (SP2-935) after
cleaning (blower brush)

PCU
Drum R R R Do SP2801. This initializes the
Charge Roller R R R developer and resets the TD
and ID sensor outputs to their
Cleaning Roller R R R defaults. It also resets the PCU
Cleaning Blade R R R counter.
Pick-off Pawls R R R
Developer R R R
SM 2-1 B205/B209/D007/D008
PM TABLE

PAPER FEED
Registration Rollers C C C C Clean with water
Paper Feed Roller C R R R Clean with water
Friction Pad C R R R Dry cloth
Paper Feed Guides C C C C Clean with alcohol.
Relay Rollers C C C C Clean with water.
Bottom Plate Pad C C C C Clean with water.
Registration Roller C C C C Clean with water.
Mylar
Dust collection box C C C C Remove, empty, clean

FUSING UNIT AND PAPER EXIT
Fusing Entrance and C C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Exit Guide Plates
Hot Roller R R R Clean with water or alcohol.
Pressure Roller R R R
Fusing Thermistors R R R
Cleaning Roller C C C
Cleaning Roller C C C
Bushings
Hot Roller Strippers R R R
Hot Roller and L L L L Grease Barrierta JFE5 5/2
Pressure Roller (A0289300)
Bushings
Paper Exit Guide C C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Ribs
OTHERS
Main Motor Drive L I I I Silicone Grease G501 ( 2.2)
Gear

ADF (for originals)
Pick-up Roller C R R R Clean with water
Feed Belt C R R R Clean with water
Separation Roller C R R R Clean with water
Stamp I I I Replace if necessary
ADF Exposure Glass C C C C Clean with alcohol
White Plate C C C C Clean with alcohol
Platen Sheet C C C C Clean with alcohol
B205/B209/D007/D008 2-2 SM
PM TABLE

PAPER TRAY UNIT
Paper Feed Roller C R R R Clean with water
Friction Pad C R R R Dry cloth
Paper Feed Guides C C C C Clean with alcohol.
Relay Rollers C C C C Clean with water.
Maintenance
Preventive
Bottom Plate Pad C C C C Clean with water.
Relay Clutch I I I Replace if necessary
Paper Feed Clutch I I I Replace if necessary

LCT
Paper Feed Roller R R R
Pick-up Roller R R R
Separation Roller R R R
Transport Rollers C C C Clean with water
Bottom Plate Pad C C C Clean with water
Relay Clutch I I I Replace if necessary
Paper Feed Clutch I I I Replace if necessary

1,000-SHEET FINISHER
Rollers C Clean with water or alcohol.
Brush Roller I I I I Replace if necessary.
Discharge Brush C C C C Clean with a dry cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Jogger Fences I I I I Replace if necessary.

1-BIN TRAY UNIT
Rollers C Dry or damp cloth
Copy Tray C Dry or damp cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
SM 2-3 B205/B209/D007/D008
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE GEAR
2.2 MAIN MOTOR DRIVE GEAR
[A]
At every EM lubricate the main motor drive gear [A] with silicone grease G501.
B205/B209/D007/D008 2-4 SM
SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting
any of the procedures in this section.
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS
No. Part No. Description Q’ty Availability
1 A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pins (4 pins/set) 1 Common – B089
Replacement
Adjustment
2 A2929500 Test Chart S5S (10 pcs/set) 1 Common - General
3 VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter FLUKE 87 1 Common - General
4 A2309003 Adjustment Cam – Laser Unit 1 Common – B089
5 A2309002 Positioning Pin – Laser Unit 1 Common – B089
6 B6455010 SD-Card 1 Common - General
7 B6456800 USB Reader/Writer 1 Common - General
8 G0219350 Loop-back Connector 1 Common - General
3.3 LUBRICANTS
No. Part No. Description Q’ty Availability
1 A2579300 Grease Barrierta S552R 1 Common - General
2 52039502 Silicone Grease G-501 1 Common - General
SM 3-1 B205/B209/D007/D008
GENERAL CAUTIONS
3.4 GENERAL CAUTIONS

3.4.1 PCU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT)
The PCU consists of the OPC drum, development unit, charge roller, and cleaning
unit. Follow the cautions below when handling a PCU.
1. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. When the drum surface is
touched or becomes dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with wet cotton.
Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with the cotton.
2. Never used alcohol to clean the drum; alcohol dissolves the drum surface.
3. Store the PCU in a cool, dry place away from heat.
4. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
5. Never shake the used PCU. Doing so may cause toner and/or developer to spill
out.
6. Dispose of used PCUs in accordance with local regulations.
3.4.2 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT

1. Never touch the transfer roller surface with bare hands.
2. Take care not to scratch the transfer roller as the surface is easily damaged.
3.4.3 SCANNER UNIT

1. Clean the exposure glass with alcohol or with glass cleaner to reduce the
amount of static electricity on the surface of the glass.
2. Use a blower brush or a cotton pad with water to clean the mirrors and lens.
3. Do not bend or crease the exposure lamp flat cable.
4. Do not disassemble the lens unit. Doing so will throw the lens and the copy
image out of focus.
5. Do not turn any of the CCD positioning screws. Doing so will throw the CCD out
of position.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-2 SM
GENERAL CAUTIONS
3.4.4 LASER UNIT

1. Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode
casing. Doing so will throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the
factory.
3. The polygon mirror and F-theta mirror are very sensitive to dust.
4. Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare
hands.
3.4.5 FUSING UNIT
Replacement
Adjustment
1. After installing the fusing thermistor, make sure that it is in contact with the hot
roller and that the hot roller can rotate freely.
2. Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers or their tension
springs.
3. Do not touch the fusing lamp and rollers with bare hands.
4. Make sure that the fusing lamp is positioned correctly and that it does not touch
the inner surface of the hot roller.
3.4.6 PAPER FEED

1. Do not touch the surface of the paper feed roller.
2. To avoid paper misfeeds, the side fences and end fences of the paper tray
must be positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size.
3.4.7 OTHERS
1. The toner bottle should be replaced while the main switch is on.
2. If the optional tray, drum, and optics anti-condensation heaters have been
installed, keep the copier power cord plugged in, even when the copier main
switch is turned off. This keeps the heaters energized.
SM 3-3 B205/B209/D007/D008
SCANNER UNIT
3.5 SCANNER UNIT

3.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
1. Open the ADF or platen cover.

2. Remove the left scale [A] ( x2).
3. Remove the rear scale [B] ( x3).
4. Remove the exposure glass [C].
NOTE: When reinstalling the exposure glass, make sure that the mark [D] is
positioned at the rear left corner, as shown.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-4 SM
SCANNER UNIT
3.5.2 SCANNER EXTERIOR/OPERATION PANEL
[E] [D]
[B]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
1. Remove the ADF or platen cover.

2. Remove the exposure glass. ( 3.5.1)
3. Remove the upper front cover [A] ( x1, Hook x1).
4. Remove the operation panel [B] ( x5, x1).
5. Remove the right cover [C] ( x1, Hook x2).
6. Remove the rear cover [D] ( x2).
7. Remove the left cover [E] ( x2, Hook x2).
SM 3-5 B205/B209/D007/D008
SCANNER UNIT
3.5.3 LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY

[A]
[B]

2. Remove the lens cover [A] ( x4).
3. Replace the lens block assembly [B] ( x4, x1, = x 2).
NOTE: Do not remove the screws which are locked with white paint.
4. Reassemble the machine and do the scanner and printer copy adjustments.
( 3.12)
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-6 SM
SCANNER UNIT
3.5.4 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS

[B]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Remove the lens cover. ( 3.5.3)
3. Remove the original width sensor [A] ( x1, x1).
4. Remove the lens block. ( 3.5.3)
5. Remove the original length sensors [B] ( x1, x1 ea.).
SM 3-7 B205/B209/D007/D008
SCANNER UNIT
3.5.5 EXPOSURE LAMP
[C] [E]
[F]
[B]
[A] [D]
[H]
[G]

2. Remove the operation panel, rear cover, and left cover. ( 3.5.2)
3. Remove the connector cover [A], disconnect the cable, and remove the rear
cover [B] ( x4).
4. Remove the left upper stay [C] ( x1).
5. Remove the front frame [D] ( x5).
6. Remove the rear bracket [E] ( x5, x2).
7. Remove the rear frame [F] ( x2, x1).
8. Push down the part [G] then slide out the exposure lamp [H] ( x1).
NOTE: 1) Do not touch the glass surface of the exposure lamp with bare hands.
2) After installing the lamp, the part [G] must be returned to the original
position.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-8 SM
SCANNER UNIT
3.5.6 SCANNER MOTOR/LAMP STABILIZER
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[C]
[D]
1. Remove the connector cover [A], disconnect the cable, and remove the rear
cover [B].
2. Replace the scanner motor [C] ( x3, 1 spring, x1).
3. Replace the lamp stabilizer [D] ( x2).
4. Reassemble the machine and do the scanner and printer copy adjustments.
( 3.12)
SM 3-9 B205/B209/D007/D008
SCANNER UNIT
3.5.7 SCANNER WIRES
[A]
1. Remove the exposure glass, operation panel, and all scanner exterior covers.
( 3.5.1, 3.5.2)
2. Remove these parts: ( 3.5.5)
• Left upper stay
• Front frame
• Rear bracket
• Rear frame
3. Remove these parts: ( 3.5.3)
• Lens cover
• Lens block assembly
4. Remove the front and rear scanner wire pins [A]. Then, remove the 1st
scanner.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-10 SM
SCANNER UNIT
[F]
Replacement
Adjustment
[E]
[C]
[B]
[D]
5. Remove the tension spring [B].

6. Loosen the screw [C] securing the wire tension bracket [D].
7. Remove the scanner drive pulley [E] ( x1).
8. Remove the scanner wire [F].
9. Wrap the new scanner wire around the pulley as shown , then temporarily
secure the pulley with tape.
10. Re-install the 1st scanner. Then secure the 1st and 2nd scanner with the
scanner positioning tools (P/N A0069104), as shown in the illustration on the
next page.
11. Wind the new scanner wire around the scanner drive pulley in the correct way,
as shown.
12. Wind the end of the new wire with the ball as shown ().
13. Wind the end of the new wire with the ring as shown (,, and ).
14. Install the tension spring on the wire tension bracket ().
15. Wind the new scanner wire for the other side as well.
SM 3-11 B205/B209/D007/D008
SCANNER UNIT
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
20. Secure the 1st scanner with the scanner wire pins.
21. Install the tension spring [A] to the tension bracket.
22. Tighten the tension bracket [B].
23. Secure the scanner wire pulley [C] (Allen x1).
24. Remove the positioning tools [D]. After sliding the scanner to the right and left
several times, re-install the positioning tools to check the scanner wire bracket
and tension bracket again.
25. Reassemble the scanner and do the scanner and printer copy adjustments
( 3.12).
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-12 SM
LASER UNIT
3.6 LASER UNIT

WARNING
any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage
your eyes.
3.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below.
Replacement
Adjustment
SM 3-13 B205/B209/D007/D008
LASER UNIT
3.6.2 LASER UNIT

[A]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[B]
[F]
[G]
WARNING
this procedure. Laser beam can seriously damage your eyes.
1. Remove the optional finisher/bridge unit, and either the tray for the optional 1-
bin tray unit or optional shift tray, if these units have been installed.
2. Remove the upper front cover [A] ( x1, 1 hook).
3. Remove the front cover [B] (2 pins).
4. Remove the inner cover [C] ( x5).
5. Remove the copy tray [D] (1 hook [E]).
6. Remove the toner bottle holder [F].
7. Remove the laser unit [G] ( x2, x2).
8. After reassembling the machine, do the scanner and printer copy adjustments.
( 3.12)
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-14 SM
LASER UNIT
3.6.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR

[B] [A]
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove the laser unit ( 3.6.2).
2. Remove the heat sink [A] ( x4).
3. Replace the polygon mirror motor [B] ( x4, x1).
NOTE: When installing the new polygon mirror motor, do not touch the surface of
the mirror with bare hands.
SM 3-15 B205/B209/D007/D008
LASER UNIT
3.6.4 LD UNIT
[B]
[A]

2. Replace the LD unit [A] ( x3, x1).
NOTE: 1) Do not remove the screws [B].
2) Do not touch any variable resistors on the LD unit.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-16 SM
LASER UNIT
3.6.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR

[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
[C]

2. Remove the heat sink [A] ( x4).
3. Remove the laser unit cover [B] ( x3).
4. Remove the bracket [C] ( x1).
5. Replace the laser synchronization detector [D] ( x1).
SM 3-17 B205/B209/D007/D008
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)
3.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)

3.7.1 PCU REMOVAL
[B]
[D] [A]
[C]
1. Open the right cover [A] and front cover [B].

2. Pull the PCU [C] out a small distance while you push the release lever [D], then
remove the PCU.
NOTE: Do not touch the drum surface with bare hands.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-18 SM
3.7.2 PICK-OFF PAWLS
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
1. Remove the PCU. ( 3.7.1)

2. Hold the pawl [A] by its sides, pull it down and slowly twist it away from the
PCU.
SM 3-19 B205/B209/D007/D008
3.7.3 OPC DRUM

[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
• Remove the PCU. ( 3.7.1)

[A]: Front cover ( x2)
[B]: Rear cover ( x3, Coupling x1)
[C]: Top part
[D]: Bottom part [F]
[E]: Drum (White clip x1 [F])
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-20 SM
3.7.4 CHARGE ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLER

[D] [C] [G]
[B]
[E]
[F]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
[A]

• Remove the OPC drum ( 3.7.3)
[A]: Front stud (x1)
[B]: Rear shoulder screw (x1)
[C]: Release the front and rear springs.
[D]: Remove the roller assembly (Springs x2, Arms x2, Rollers x2)
[E]: Charge roller
[F]: Cleaning roller
Re-installation: Charge Roller
• Put the end of the charge roller with the wide bevel [G] at the front of the PCU.
• The ends of the cleaning roller [F] are the same (put either end at the front).
• Make sure that the front stud of the roller assembly is put in the correct position.
• Install the front stud before you tighten the rear shoulder screw. Make sure that
the head of the stud is put in the correct position.
SM 3-21 B205/B209/D007/D008
3.7.5 CLEANING BLADE
[A]
[B]

• Remove the OPC drum ( 3.7.3)
• Remove the charge roller, cleaning roller ( 3.7.4)
[A]: Cleaning blade ( x2)
Reinstallation: Cleaning Blade

• To prevent damage to the new cleaning blade and OPC drum, apply some toner
to the edge of the new blade [B].
• Install the new blade. Remove some toner from the edge of the old blade with
your finger, and apply it evenly along the full length of the new blade.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-22 SM
3.7.6 DEVELOPER
[C]
[E]
[A]
[D]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[F] [G]
1. Spread the vinyl sheet provided with

the developer kit on a flat surface.
2. Separate the top and bottom parts of
the PCU. ( 3.7.4)
3. Set the bottom on the vinyl sheet.
4. Remove the front screw [A] ( x1)
5. Remove the rear screws [C] ( x2).
6. Release the front tab [B].
7. Release the rear tab [D].
8. Separate the top [E] and bottom [F] of the development unit.
9. Turn the gears [G] to remove the developer from the bottom half.
SM 3-23 B205/B209/D007/D008
10. Remove the development roller [A]

[A]
from the development unit.
Important: At reinstallation, make sure
that the mylar is positioned as shown.
11. Turn the development roller gear [B] to

remove toner from around the
development roller.
12. Assemble the development unit.
Important
• Dispose of the used developer according [B]
to the local laws and regulations
regarding the disposal of such items.
[D]
13. Open the developer pack [C]
14. While turning the black gear [D], slowly
move the pack left and right and pour [C]
half of the developer over the augur [E].
15. Continue to rotate the black gear until
the developer is level. [E]
16. While continuing to turn the black gear,
slowly move the pack left and right and [F]
pour the remaining half of the
developer over the augur until the
developer is level.
Important
• Be careful. Do not spill developer on the
gears or sponges.
• If you accidentally spill developer on the
gears or sponges, remove it with a
magnet or the tip of a magnetized
screwdriver.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-24 SM
PCU Reassembly

Replacement
Adjustment

Reassemble the PCU in this order:

Connect pawl
Frame pawls, front and rear
Set rear cover, front cover
• Never touch the lever [A] until after
the top screw has been fastened.
Screws ( x3), coupling x1
• Never press down on the top of the
PCU when you reattach the rear or
front cover.
Lower screw ( x1)
[A]
• Always install the lower screw first to
maintain the correct gap between
the rollers.
Top screw ( x1)
• Lift and lower the lever [A] to make sure that the shutter opens fully and operates
smoothly.
SM 3-25 B205/B209/D007/D008
1. Make sure that all of the holes and tabs on are engaged at , , , and .
Then push down to lock the tabs on the front and rear end of the PCU.
2. Make sure that the holes for the screws on the front and rear end of the PCU
are aligned correctly. If the holes are not aligned correctly, make sure that the
tabs at the front, rear, and left side of the PCU are engaged correctly.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-26 SM
3.7.7 AFTER REPLACEMENT OF PCU COMPONENTS

Do this procedure after replacement of the PCU components and developer.
1. Assemble the PCU and install it in the machine.
2. Turn the machine on.
3. Go into the SP mode and do SP2801 (Developer Initialization).
4. Make 5 sample copies.
5. Check the copies.
If the copies are clean (no black dots), the replacement is completed.
Replacement
Adjustment
-or-
If you see black dots of toner that fell on the copies, go to the next step.
6. Remove the PCU from the machine.
[A]
7. Lightly tap the top of the PCU [A] with
a screwdriver at 8 locations. These
locations must be at equal intervals.
Tap 2 or 3 times at each location, to
make the toner fall into the
development section.
8. Install the PCU in the machine.
9. Turn the machine on, and close the
front door. After the machine turns
the development roller for 10 seconds, go to the next step.
10. Open and close the door two more times. The total rotation time is 30 seconds.
11. If you replaced PCU components:
• If A4/8½" x11" paper is installed, make 4 copies/prints.
• If A3/11" x 17" paper is installed, make 2 copies/prints.
• To make solid black prints, use SP2902 003 Pattern #8.
NOTE: This step is not necessary if only the developer was replaced.
SM 3-27 B205/B209/D007/D008
TRANSFER UNIT
3.8 TRANSFER UNIT

3.8.1 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT
[B]
[A]
1. Open the right cover [A].

2. Remove the transfer roller unit [B] (Hook x1).
NOTE: Do not touch the transfer roller surface.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-28 SM
TRANSFER UNIT
3.8.2 IMAGE DENSITY SENSOR

[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
[D]
[C]
1. Open the right cover [A].

2. Remove the unit band [B].
3. Remove the right cover [A] ( x1),
4. Remove the sub right cover [C] (2 hooks).
5. Replace the image density sensor [D] ( x1).
6. Initialize the new sensor with SP 2935.
SM 3-29 B205/B209/D007/D008
FUSING/EXIT
3.9 FUSING/EXIT
3.9.1 FUSING UNIT
CAUTION
Allow time for the unit to cool before doing the following procedure.
[A]
1. Release the duplex unit, if it has been installed, and open the right cover.
2. Remove the fusing unit [A] ( x2).
3.9.2 THERMISTORS
[A]
[A]
[B]
[B]
1. Remove the fusing unit. ( 3.9.1).

2. Remove the plates [A] ( x1 ea.).
3. Replace the thermistors [B] ( x1).
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-30 SM
FUSING/EXIT
3.9.3 THERMOSTATS
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[B]
[B]
1. Remove the fusing unit. ( 3.9.1)

2. Remove the fusing upper cover [A] ( x4).
3. Remove the pressure springs [B].
4. Remove the hot roller stripper bracket [C] ( x3).
SM 3-31 B205/B209/D007/D008
FUSING/EXIT
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[D]
[C]
5. Remove the thermostat cover [A] (Tapping x2).

6. Remove the plate [B] ( x2, Spring washers).
7. Remove the thermostat holder [C] ( x3 ea.).
8. Replace the thermostats [D].
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-32 SM
FUSING/EXIT
3.9.4 HOT ROLLER AND FUSING LAMP
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[C]
[B]
1. Remove the fusing unit. ( 3.9.1)

2. Remove: ( 3.9.3)
• Fusing upper cover.
• Pressure springs.
• Hot roller stripper bracket.
3. Remove the fusing lamps ( x4) and hot roller assembly [A].
NOTE: Do not touch the surface of the fusing lamp with bare hands.
4. Replace the hot roller [B] (C-rings x2, Gear x1, Bushings x2).
Reinstallation
• When you reattach the C-rings, the flat sides must face the bearing/roller. (The
little hooks [C] must face away from the bearing/roller).
SM 3-33 B205/B209/D007/D008
FUSING/EXIT
Reinstallation
1. At the rear (gear-side) attach the C-ring so that
the opening [A] is 90 degrees from the D-cut
sections [B] of the fusing roller.
[B] [A]
2. Apply enough grease at [C] so the metal

[C]
surface is not visible.
3. The grease should be visible after
reattaching the bushing [D].
Important
• Before installing the new hot roller, peel off 3
cm (1 inch) from both ends of the protective
sheet on the new roller.
• Do not touch the surface of the rollers.
• When reinstalling the fusing lamp, secure the
front screws first.
• Be careful not to damage the surface of the [D]
hot roller.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-34 SM
FUSING/EXIT
3.9.5 PRESSURE ROLLER/CLEANING ROLLER
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove the fusing lamp and hot roller assembly. ( 3.9.4)
2. Replace the pressure roller [A] ( x1, Bushings x2, Spring x1).
3. Replace the cleaning roller [B].
NOTE: 1) Apply grease (Barrierta) to the inner surface of the bushing for the
pressure roller.
2) Do not touch the surface of the rollers.
SM 3-35 B205/B209/D007/D008
FUSING/EXIT
3.9.6 PAPER EXIT SENSOR/PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
1. Remove the front upper cover [A] ( x1, Peg x1).

2. Remove the exit cover [B].
NOTE: If the optional 1 bin tray unit and/or interchange unit have been
installed, remove them.
3. Replace the exit sensor [C] ( x1).
4. Replace the overflow sensor [D] ( x1).
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-36 SM
PAPER FEED
3.10 PAPER FEED

3.10.1 FEED ROLLER: TRAY 1
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[A]
1. Remove the paper tray [A].

2. Pull the lever [B].
3. Replace the feed roller [C].
NOTE: Do not touch the roller surface with bare hands. After reinstalling the
feed roller, return the lever [B].
SM 3-37 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
3.10.2 FEED ROLLER: TRAY 2
[B]
[C]
[A]
1. Remove the first paper tray.

2. Remove the second paper tray [A].
3. Raise the white Teflon lever [B] to release the roller.
4. Replace the feed roller [C].
NOTE: Do not touch the roller surface with bare hands. After reinstalling the
feed roller, reset the lever [B].
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-38 SM
PAPER FEED
3.10.3 PAPER END SENSOR
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]

2. Remove the paper end sensor assembly ( x1, x1).
3. Replace the paper end sensor [B].
SM 3-39 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
3.10.4 PAPER TRAY LIFT MOTORS
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
[E]
1. Remove the paper tray.

2. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x1) and disconnect the cable.
3. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x4).
4. Remove the duplex connector cover [C] ( x1).
5. Remove the lower rear cover [D] ( x2).
6. Replace the paper lift motors [E] ( x2 ea., x1 ea.).
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-40 SM
PAPER FEED
3.10.5 REGISTRATION CLUTCH
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
1. Remove the connector cover and the rear cover. ( 3.10.4

2. Remove the duplex connector cover and lower rear cover. ( 3.10.4)
3. Remove the fly wheels [A] ( x1).
4. Remove the registration clutch [B] ( x1, x1).
SM 3-41 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
3.10.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES

[B]
[F] [D]
[E]
[C] [C]
[A]
Lower Paper Feed Clutch

1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the lower rear cover.
3. Replace the lower paper feed clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1).
Upper Paper Feed Clutch.
4. Disconnect the connectors [B] for the SBCU board as shown ( x15).
5. Remove 4 screws [C] securing the SBCU board bracket then swing down the
SBCU board bracket [D].
6. Remove the bracket [E] ( x1).
7. Replace the upper paper feed clutch [F] ( x 1, x 1).
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-42 SM
PAPER FEED
3.10.7 RELAY CLUTCHES
[C]
[B]
Replacement
[A]
Adjustment
[D]
[F]
[E]
1. Remove the optional duplex unit and/or by-pass tray unit if they have been
installed.
2. Remove the rear cover and lower rear cover.
3. Remove the lower right cover [A] ( x2).
4. Remove the scanner right cover.
5. Remove the right cover [B] ( x4).
6. Swing down the SBCU board bracket.
7. Remove the connector bracket [C] ( x 2).
8. Replace the upper relay clutch [D] ( x 1, x 1).
9. Remove the right rear cover [E] ( x1).
10. Replace the lower relay clutch [F] ( x 1, x 1).
SM 3-43 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
3.10.8 PAPER SIZE DETECTOR
[A]
[B]
[B]
1. Remove the right lower cover [A]. ( 3.10.7)

2. Remove the paper trays.
3. Remove the paper size detector assembly ( x1 ea.).
4. Replace the paper size detectors [B] ( x1 ea.).
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-44 SM
PAPER FEED
3.10.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR
[A]
Replacement
[D]
Adjustment
[C]
[B]
1. Remove the right cover. ( 3.8.2)

2. Remove the registration guide plate [A] ( x2).
3. Remove the paper support roller [B] (2 snap rings, 2 bushings).
4. Remove the sensor bracket [C] ( x1).
5. Replace the registration sensor [D] ( x1).
SM 3-45 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
3.10.10 RELAY SENSORS

[D]
[A]
[E] [C]
[B] [I]
[H]
[J]
[G]
[F]
Upper Relay Sensor

1. Remove the right cover. ( 3.8.2)
2. Remove the lower right cover. ( 3.10.7)
3. Remove the guide plate [A].
4. Remove the bracket [B] ( x1).
5. Remove the guide plate [C] ( x2).
6. Remove the sensor bracket [D] ( x1).
7. Replace the upper relay sensor [E] ( x1).
Lower Relay Sensor

1. Remove the right lower door [F] (1 clip).
2. Remove the guide plate [G].
3. Remove the guide plate [H] ( x2).
4. Remove the sensor bracket [I] ( x1).
5. Replace the lower relay sensor [J] ( x1).
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-46 SM
PAPER FEED
3.10.11 DUST COLLECTION BOX
[D]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C]
[B]
1. Remove:
• PCU ( 3.7.1)
• Right cover ( 3.8.2)
2. Disconnect the sponge roller assembly [A] ( x2) and lift it.
3. While you hold the roller assembly up, push in both ends of the dust collection
bin [B] and remove the bin.
4. Tap the dust collection bin above a sheet of paper, to remove the paper dust.
5. Use a dry cloth to clean the inside of the dust collection bin.
Reinstallation
• Make sure that the two tabs with ridges [C] are towards you when you install the
dust collection bin.
• Insert the "A"-shaped tabs [D] on the rear of the dust collection box into the
square grooves (not shown in the diagram). Turn the unit upwards to lock the
unit in position. You will hear a click after the unit is installed correctly.
• If the dust collection bin is not installed correctly, the dust collection bin will not
lock in its position and the sponge roller assembly will not lower fully.
SM 3-47 B205/B209/D007/D008
PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS
3.11 PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS

3.11.1 CONTROLLER BOARD
[A]
[B]
[E] [F]
[G]
[C] [D]
Remove:
[A]: Controller board cover ( x1)
[B]: Controller board ( x2)
[C]: NVRAM x2
[D]: Controller board face plate ( x1)
[H]
[E]: Controller board ( x2)
[F]: Brace1. Lift hook 1 and pull out.
[G]: Brace 2. Lift hook 2 and pull out.
[H]: Standard Memory DIMM
Important:
• Take the NVRAMs from the old board and install them on the new board.
• Do not remove the NVRAM until after you upload its contents ( 3.11.2).
• Always touch a metal surface to discharge static on your hands before you touch
the controller board.
• Work carefully when you remove the NVRAMs, to prevent damage to other
components on the controller board. Do not short-circuit the pins of other chips.
• NVRAM chips must always be removed and replaced as a pair.
• Set the DIP switches on the new controller board to the same settings as the old
board.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-48 SM
3.11.2 NVRAM
The following data cannot be downloaded from the SD card.
• Duplex, A3/DLT/Over 420 mm, Staple and Scanner application scanning
counters (system settings).
1. Do SP5990 001 to print the SMC report.
2. Turn off the main switch.
3. Remove the controller board cover ( x1).
4. Put the SD card in SD card slot C3.
5. Turn on the main switch.
Replacement
Adjustment
6. Do SP5824.
7. Touch “Execute” to start to upload the NVRAM data.
8. Turn off the main switch and remove the SD card.
9. Remove the controller board ( x1). ( 3.11.1)
10. Remove the NVRAM (x2) and replace them with the new chips. ( 3.11.1)
NOTE: Both NVRAM chips must be replaced.
11. Install the controller board.
12. Put the SD card with the NVRAM data in SD card slot C3.
13. Turn on the machine.
14. Do SP5801 to initialize the new NVRAM.
15. To download the NVRAM data from the SD card in C3, do SP5825.
16. Touch “Execute” to start to download the NVRAM data.
17. Turn off the main switch and remove the SD card.
19. Do SP5990 001 to print another SMC report.
20. Compare this new SMC report with the report you printed in Step 1. If any of
the SP settings are different, input the SP settings of the first report.
21. Do SP5907 and input the brand and model name of the machine for Windows
Plug & Play capability.
SM 3-49 B205/B209/D007/D008
3.11.3 SBCU BOARD
[A]
1. Remove the rear cover. ( 3.10.4)

2. Remove the SBCU board [A] ( x All, x6).
3. Set the DIP switches on the new SBCU board to the same settings as the old
board.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-50 SM
3.11.4 POWER PACK
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Swing down the SBCU board bracket. ( 3.10.6)
3. Remove the power pack [A] ( x 5, x3).
SM 3-51 B205/B209/D007/D008
3.11.5 MAIN MOTOR
[B]
[C]
[A]

2. Swing down the SBCU board bracket [A]. ( 3.10.6)
3. Remove the fly wheels [B] ( x1).
4. Replace the main motor [C] ( x2, x3).
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-52 SM
3.11.6 PSU
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]
[D]
[C]
1. Remove the optional finisher if it has been installed.

2. Remove the application cover [A] ( x1).
3. Remove the left cover [B] ( x6).
NOTE: For the 220 V machine only, remove the transformer [C] ( x1).
4. Remove the PSU [D] ( x all, x6, Clip x1).
SM 3-53 B205/B209/D007/D008
3.11.7 IPU
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
[D]
1. Remove: ( 3.11.1)
• Controller board cover ( x1).
• Controller front plate screws ( x2).
2. Remove: ( 3.10.4)
• Paper tray unit connector cover ( x1)
• Disconnect the paper tray unit (if it is installed) ( x1)
• Rear cover ( x1).
3. Pull the controller board partially out of the left slot to disconnect it from the IPU.
4. If the FCU is installed, pull it partially out of the right slot ( x2).
NOTE: Do not remove the controller or FCU fully. Only pull them out a
sufficient distance to disconnect them from the IPU board.
5. Disconnect the IPU board [A] (= x2, Metal clamps x2, x6)
6. Remove the IPU bracket [B] with the IPU board attached ( x4, FFC x1).
7. Remove the flat film connector protection plate [C] from the bracket.
8. Remove the flat film connector [D] from the IPU.
9. Remove the IPU board [E] from the bracket ( x7).
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-54 SM
3.11.8 HDD
[B]
[A]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
Before you replace the HDD:
• Put an SD card in SD card slot C3.
• Go into the SP mode.
• Do SP5846 51 to upload the address book data to the SD card.
Important: If the HDD is damaged, you may not be able to retrieve this data
from the HDD.
1. Remove the controller board. ( 3.11.1)
2. Disconnect the HDD harness [A].
3. Disconnect the AC harness [B]
4. Remove the HDD unit ( x2, Standoffs x2)
NOTE: It is not necessary to format the new hard disk after installation.
5. Remove the HDD [C] from the bracket (x4)
6. After you install the new HDD, do SP5853 to copy the preset stamp data from
the firmware to the hard disk. Then turn the main power switch off/on.
7. If you successfully retrieved the address book data from the HDD with SP5846
51, do SP5846 52 to restore the address book data to the HDD.
SM 3-55 B205/B209/D007/D008
Important Notes About HDD Replacement

• Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client.
• If the customer has concerns about the security of information on the HDD, the
HDD must remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping.
• The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information.
Specifically, the HDD contains document server documents and data stored in
temporary files created automatically during copy job sorting and jam recovery.
Such data is stored on the HDD in a special format, so it cannot normally be read
but can be recovered with illegal methods.
• If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security feature, the DOS function
must be set up again.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-56 SM
COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
3.12 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING

NOTE: 1) You need to perform these adjustment(s) after replacing any of the
following parts:
• Scanner Wire
• Lens Block/SBU Assembly
• Scanner Drive Motor
• Polygon Mirror Motor
• Paper Side Fence
• Memory All Clear
2) For more details about accessing SP modes, refer to section 4.
Replacement
Adjustment
3.12.1 PRINTING
NOTE: 1) Make sure the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you
start these adjustments.
2) Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-902-3, No.10) to print the test
pattern for the following procedures.
3) Set SP 2-902-3 to 0 again after completing these printing adjustments.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side

1. Check the leading edge registration for each paper feed station, and adjust
them using SP1-001.
2. Check the side-to-side registration for each paper feed
station, and adjust them using SP1-002. B
Tray SP mode Specification A

Any paper tray SP1-001-1
By-pass feed SP1-001-2 3 ± 2 mm
Duplex SP1-001-3
1st paper feed – Tray 1 SP1-002-1
2nd paper feed - Tray 2 SP1-002-2
3rd paper feed (Optional
SP1-002-3 2 ± 1.5 mm
PFU tray 1), or LCT
4th paper feed (Optional
SP1-002-4
PFU tray 2)
By-pass feed SP1-002-5
Duplex, side 2 SP1-002-6
A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
SM 3-57 B205/B209/D007/D008
Blank Margin
NOTE: If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within the
specifications, adjust the leading/left side edge blank margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and right side edge blank margins, and adjust them
using the following SP modes.
SP mode Specification D
Trailing edge SP2-101-
3 ± 2 mm
2/3/4
C
Right edge SP2-101-6 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm
Leading edge SP2-101-1 3 ± 2 mm
Left edge SP2-101-5 2 ± 1.5 mm
Trailing edge (duplex SP2-101-7 2 ± 2 mm
copy, 2nd side) A
Left edge (duplex SP2-101-8 2 ± 1.5 mm
copy, 2nd side) B
Right edge (duplex SP2-101-9 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm
copy, 2nd side)
A: Trailing Edge Blank Margin

B: Right Edge Blank Margin
C: Leading Edge Blank Margin
D: Left Edge Blank Margin
Main Scan Magnification

1. Print the single-dot grid pattern (SP2-902, no.5).
2. Check the magnification, and adjust the magnification using SP2-909 if
necessary. The specification is ± 1%.
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-58 SM
Parallelogram Image Adjustment

Do the following procedure if a parallelogram is printed while adjusting the printing
registration or the printing margin using a trimming area pattern.
NOTE: The following procedure should be done after adjusting the side-to-side
registration for each paper tray station.
[B]
Turn
clockwise
Replacement
Adjustment
[C] [D]
Turn
counterclockwise
[A]
1. Check whether the trimming area pattern (SP2-902, No.10) is printed as a

parallelogram, as shown. If it is, do the following.
2. Remove the laser unit [A] ( 3.6.2).
3. Remove the bracket [B] ( x2).
4. Install the adjusting cam [C] (P/N: A2309003).
5. Secure the adjustment bracket [D] (P/N A2679002) using the screw which was
used for bracket [B]. However, do not tighten the screws at this time.
6. Adjusts the laser unit position by turning the adjusting cam. (Refer to the above
illustration for the relationship between the image and the cam rotation
direction).
7. Tighten the adjustment bracket.
8. Print the trimming area pattern to check the image. If it is still unsatisfactory,
repeat steps 4 to 8.
SM 3-59 B205/B209/D007/D008
3.12.2 SCANNING
NOTE: 1) Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the
printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin
adjustment.
2) Use an S5S test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration,
and adjust them using the following SP modes if A
necessary.
SP mode
Leading Edge SP4-010
B
Side-to-side SP4-011

Magnification
NOTE: Use an S5S test chart to perform the following
adjustment.
B
A: Sub scan magnification
B: Main scan magnification
A
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a

copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio, and adjust it using the following SP mode if
necessary. The specification is ±1%.
SP mode
Main Scan Magnification SP4-009
Sub Scan Magnification SP4-008
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-60 SM
Standard White Density Adjustment

This adjusts the standard white density level.
Perform this adjustment in any of the following conditions:
• After replacing the standard white plate.
• After replacing the NVRAM on the controller board. (If only controller board is
replaced, this adjustment is not necessary, as the NVRAM from the old controller
board is put on the new controller board.)
• After performing a memory all clear (SP5-801).
1. Place 10 sheets of new A4 sideways (do not use any recycled paper) or A3
paper on the exposure glass and close the platen cover or the ADF.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Enter SP 4-428 and select “1: Yes”. The standard white density is automatically
adjusted.
SM 3-61 B205/B209/D007/D008
3.12.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Registration
A

NOTE: Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP mode
Side-to-side Registration SP6-006-1
Leading Edge Registration (Simplex) SP6-006-2
Trailing Edge Blank Margin SP6-006-3
Side-to-side Registration (Duplex: rear) SP6-006-4
Sub Scan Magnification

NOTE: Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the magnification, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
The specification is ±1%.
SP mode
Sub scan magnification SP6-006-5
B205/B209/D007/D008 3-62 SM
3.12.4 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

After clearing the memory, or if the touch panel detection function is not working
correctly, follow this procedure to calibrate the touch screen.
NOTE: Do not attempt to use items [2] to [7] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These
items are for design use only.
1. Press S, press , and then press D 5 times to open the Self-
Diagnostics menu.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press ).
3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker (+) appears
exactly where the screen is touched.
If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and
repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press ).
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the
calibration settings.
SM 3-63 B205/B209/D007/D008
TROUBLESHOOTING
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
To prevent damage to the machine, the main Enter SP mode, and then turn
machine cannot be operated until the SC has the main power switch off and
A
been reset by a service representative (see the on.
note below).
SCs that disable only the features that use the Turn the operation switch or
defective item. Although these SCs are not main switch off and on.
B shown to the user under normal conditions,
they are displayed on the operation panel only
when the defective feature is selected.
The SC history is updated. The machine can be The SC will not be displayed.
C
operated as usual. Only the SC history is updated.
Turning the main switch off then on resets SCs Turn the operation switch off
D displayed on the operation panel. These are re- and on.
displayed if the error occurs again.
When a Level “D” SC code occurs
When a Level D SC occurs, a screen opens on the operation panel to tell the
shooting
Trouble-
operator:
• An error occurred
• The job in progress will be erased
• The machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
The operator can wait until the machine reboots automatically or touch “Reset” on
the screen to reset the machine immediately and go back to the copy screen.
If the operator does not touch “Reset”
The next message tells the operator that the machine will reset automatically and
that the previous job was lost and must be started again. After reading the
message, the operator touches “Confirm” on the screen. The next screen shows
the number and title of the SC code, and stops until the operator turns the machine
off and on.
If the operator touches “Reset”
If the operator touches "Reset" to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to
reboot, the machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy
screen.
Important
• Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.
• If the Remote Service System is in use, the SC code is sent immediately to the
Service Center
SM 4-1 B205/B209/D007/D008
4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

Important
• If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors
and then test the machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause of
the problem. Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB.
• If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to
replace the motor or sensors.
• When a Level “A” or “B” SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot
display the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP
mode.
• The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level “D” SC
code. This is done for Level “D” SC codes only.
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to
switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the
main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-2 SM
Code No. Symptom Possible Cause

101 B Exposure lamp error 1 • Exposure lamp defective
The standard white level was not • Lamp stabilizer defective
detected properly when scanning the • Exposure lamp connector defective
white plate. • Standard white plate dirty
• Scanner mirror or scanner lens out
of position or dirty
• SBU defective
102 B Exposure lamp error 2 • SBCU defective
The exposure lamp was on longer than • IPU defective
the allowed time (3 min.) after scanning • Controller board defective
of the originals was completed.
120 D Scanner home position error 1 • Scanner motor defective
The scanner home position sensor does • Scanner motor drive board defective
not detect the on condition during • Scanner HP sensor defective
initialization or copying. • Harness between SBCU and HP
121 D Scanner home position error 2 sensor loose, disconnected,
The scanner home position sensor does damaged
not detect the off condition during • Harness between SBCU and
initialization. scanner motor loose, disconnected,
122 B Scanner HP Sensor – Error 1 damaged
The HP sensor remains on while the • SBCU defective
carriage is returning to the home • Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or
position. carriage defective
123 B Scanner HP sensor – Error 2
The HP sensor does not switch on after
shooting
Trouble-
the carriage has returned to the home
position.
141 C Black offset correction error • Lens block defective
Black offset could not be corrected after • SBCU defective
SP4800 was done.
143 C SBU auto adjust error • Exposure lamp disconnected
The machine could not acquire the white • There is no blank sheet of A3 size
or black peak level setting at power on, paper on the platen
or after SP4428 (SBU Auto Adjust) was • White plate dirty or missing
done.
144 B SBU connection error Harness between SBU and IPU board
The IPU does not detect the SBU loose, disconnected, or damaged.
connection signal.
165 B Copy Data Security Unit error • The Copy Data Security Unit board
An error occurred when the machine is not installed
attempted to recognize the Copy Data • The Copy Data Security Unit board
Security Unit board. is installed, but it is not the correct
type for the machine.
193 B Image transfer error • IPU board defective
The IPU board does not finish within 1 • Controller board defective
minute after the image data has been • Video controller defective
transferred to the controller board.
SM 4-3 B205/B209/D007/D008

195 B DFGATE assert error • ADF interface cable loose,
The DFGATE signal does not assert disconnected, or damaged
within 30 seconds after the original has • SBCU defective
been scanned. • Mismatched firmware between the
SBCU board and ADF
196 B DFGATE negate error • ADF interface cable defective
The DFGATE signal does not negate • SBCU defective
within 1 minute after the DFGATE has • Mismatched firmware between the
been asserted. SBCU board and ADF
197 B DFGATE error • ADF interface cable defective
The DFGEATE signal has already been • SBCU board defective
asserted at the original scan. • Mismatched firmware between the
SBCU board and ADF
198 B Memory address error • Mismatched firmware between the
The IPU board does not receive the SBCU board and controller board
memory address from the controller • Controller defective
board. • SBCU defective
• IPU board defective
Note: Before you replace a board,
update the firmware. This can repair
the error.
199 B DF scanning finish error • ADF interface cable defective
The original does not finish scanning • SBCU board defective
within 1 minute • Mismatched firmware between the
SBCU board and ADF
302 B Charge roller error • Charge high voltage supply board
A charge roller current leak signal is defective
detected. • Connection at PCU loose,
disconnected, or damaged
320 B Polygon motor error • Polygon motor I/F harness loose,
• The XSCRDY signal did not activate disconnected, or defective
(go LOW) within 10 sec. after the • Polygon motor defective
polygon motor turned on. • Polygon motor driver defective
• The XSCRDY signal did not • SBCU board defective
deactivate (go HIGH) within 3 sec.
after the polygon motor turned off.
• The polygon motor continued to rotate
for the prescribed number of rotations
for 200 ms after the XSCRDY signal
went HIGH (deactivated).
• After the polygon motor turned on, or
after the machine detected that the
prescribed number of rotations had
changed, the XSCRDY signal did not
go LOW (active).
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-4 SM

322 B Laser synchronization error • Poor connection between the laser
The main scan synchronization detector synchronization detector board and
board cannot detect the laser the SBCU board
synchronization signal for more than 10 • Laser synchronization detector
consecutive 50 ms intervals. board out of position
• Laser synchronization detector
board defective
• SBCU board defective
• LD unit defective
323 B LD drive current over • LD unit defective (not enough
• The LD drive current exceeded 100 power, due to aging)
mA. • Poor connection between the LD
• The XLDERR of the LD board was unit and the SBCU board
detected LOW twice within 100 ms. • SBCU board defective
• Initialization of the PMACA failed.
350 B ID sensor calibration – Error 1 • ID sensor defective or dirty
One of the following conditions occurred • ID sensor harness disconnected or
when the ID sensor pattern was connector is damaged
calibrated during printing: • SBCU defective
• Vsp > 2.5V • Scanning system or image creation
• Vsg < 2.5V system malfunction
• Vsp = 0V • High voltage power supply board
• Vsg = 0V (power pack) defective
351 B ID sensor calibration – Error 2 • ID sensor dirty or defective
The following conditions occurred • ID sensor harness disconnected, or
shooting
Trouble-
simultaneously when the ID sensor connector damaged
pattern was calibrated during printing: • SBCU board defective
• Vsg = 5V • High voltage power supply board
• PWM = 0 (LED current drop) (power pack) defective
352 B ID sensor calibration – Error 3 • ID sensor dirty or defective
During printing the 2.5V value for edge • ID sensor harness disconnected, or
detection of the ID sensor pattern could connector damaged
not be detected after 800 ms. • SBCU defective
• High voltage power supply board
(power pack) defective
353 B ID sensor adjustment Error 1 • ID sensor dirty or defective
Error occurred during automatic • ID sensor harness disconnected, or
adjustment of Vsg: connector damaged
• Vsg output did not attain 4V, even • SBCU defective
with PWM = 255 (maximum current • High voltage power supply board
for LED) (power pack) defective
• Vsg output was greater than 4V, even • Scanning system or image creation
with PWM=0 (no current for the LED) system malfunction
354 B ID Sensor Adjustment Error 2 • ID sensor dirty or defective
Error occurred during automatic • ID sensor harness disconnected, or
adjustment of Vsg. Vsg could not be connector damaged
adjusted to 4.0V±0.2V within 50 ms even • SBCU defective
after 20 attempts. • High voltage power supply board
• Scanning system or image creation
system malfunction
SM 4-5 B205/B209/D007/D008

355 C ID sensor error • ID sensor dirty or defective
For details about the cause of the • ID sensor harness disconnected, or
problem, please refer to SC350~354 connector damaged
above. • SBCU board defective
• High voltage power supply board
• Scanning system or image creation
system malfunction
389 B TD sensor error • TD sensor defective
TD sensor output was less than 0.5V, or • TD sensor connector damaged.
more than 0.5V 10 times in succession.
If the fax unit is installed, this SC is
issued immediately. If the fax unit is not
installed, this SC is issued after the
prescribed number of copies has printed.
390 D TD sensor error • TD sensor abnormal
The TD sensor outputs less than 0.5V or • Poor connection of the PCU
more than 4.0V 10 times consecutively
during copying.
Note:
• If the fax option is installed, this SC is
issued immediately.
• If the fax option is not installed, this
SC is issued after the prescribed
number of pages is copied.
391 B Development bias leak • Poor connection at the PCU bias
A development bias leak signal is terminal
detected. • High voltage supply board defective
392 B TD sensor initial setting error • The PCU toner seal was not
Initialization of the new PCU unit failed. removed
TD sensor output voltage fell out of the • ID sensor defective
adjustment range (2.0 ±<> 0.2 V. • TD sensor defective
• Drum does not turn
• Development roller does not turn
398 B PCU error South Korea only • Install the correct type of PCU.
Illegal PCU unit.
399 B Illegal toner bottle South Korea only • Install the correct type of toner
The toner bottle installed is not intended bottle.
for use with this machine.
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-6 SM

401 B Transfer roller leak error 1 • High voltage supply board set
A transfer roller current leak signal is incorrectly or defective
detected. The current feedback signal • Transfer roller set incorrectly or
for the transfer roller is not detected damaged
within the correct time. • Transfer unit set incorrectly
402 B Transfer roller leak error 2 • Transfer roller set incorrectly or
A transfer roller current leak signal is damaged
detected. The current feedback signal • High voltage supply board set
for the transfer roller is not detected incorrectly or defective
within the correct time.
411 B Separation bias leak error • High voltage supply board defective
A separation bias leak signal is detected. • Discharge plate defective
490 B Toner supply motor leak error • Toner supply motor defective
More than 1 ampere supplied to the
toner supply motor for longer than 200
ms.
500 B Main motor lock • Too much load on the drive
A main motor lock signal is not detected mechanism
for more than 500 ms after the main • Main motor defective
motor starts to rotate, or the lock signal
is not detected for more than 500 ms
during rotation after the last signal.
501 B 1st paper tray lift motor malfunction • Paper lift sensor connection loose,
502 B 2nd paper tray lift motor malfunction disconnected, or damaged
503 B 3rd paper tray lift motor malfunction • Paper lift sensor defective
shooting
Trouble-
(optional paper tray unit) • Tray lift motor connection loose,
504 B 4th paper tray lift motor malfunction disconnected, or damaged
(optional paper tray unit) • Tray lift motor defective
The paper lift sensor is not activated • Obstruction that causes overload on
after the tray lift motor has been on for the drive mechanism
18 seconds.
506 B Paper tray motor lock (optional paper • Paper tray motor connection loose,
tray unit) disconnected, or damaged
A motor lock signal is not detected for • Paper tray motor defective
more than 1.5 s or the lock signal is not • Obstruction that causes overload on
detected for more than 1.0 s during the drive mechanism
rotation.
508 B LCT rear fence drive error • Rear fence motor connection loose,
The return position sensor is not disconnected, or damaged
activated after the rear fence drive motor • Rear fence motor defective
has been on to lower the tandem tray for • Return position sensor connector
8 seconds. loose, disconnected, or damaged
• Return position sensor defective
• Obstruction that causes overload on
the drive mechanism
509 B LCT side fence drive error • Obstruction that causes overload on
The side fence positioning sensor is not the drive mechanism
activated for more 3 seconds when the • Side fence motor disconnected or
paper stack in the left tray is moved to defective
the right tray. The side fence close • Side fence position sensor
sensor is not activated for more 3 disconnected or defective
seconds after moving the paper stack to • Side fence close sensor
the right tray. disconnected or defective
SM 4-7 B205/B209/D007/D008

510 B LCT lower limit error • Tray lift motor defective
The lower limit sensor does not activate • Poor connection of the tray lift motor
within 8 seconds after the tray has been • Lower limit sensor disconnected or
lowered. defective
• Obstruction that causes overload on
the drive mechanism.
520 B Paper tray error • A defective motor
An error occurs (i.e motor error, or • A defective sensor
sensor error, etc) for any paper tray. • Obstruction that causes overload on
the drive mechanism
541 A Fusing thermistor open • Fusing thermistor out of its position
The fusing temperature did not increase because of incorrect installation
12 °C at the center or ends of the hot • Fusing thermistor disconnected or
roller within 2 seconds after two checks defective
from the time the fusing lamps turned • Power supply not within rated range
on. (15% or more below rating)
542 A Fusing temperature warm-up error • Fusing thermistor defective or out of
The fusing temperature does not reach position
the standby temperature within 20 • Fusing lamp disconnected
seconds after the main switch is turned • Fusing thermostat open
on.
543 A Fusing overheat error 1 • TRIAC short on PSU (PSU
A fusing temperature over 230°C is defective)
detected for 5 second by the fusing • SBCU board defective
thermistor. • Fusing thermistor defective
544 A Fusing overheat error 2 • TRIAC short on PSU (PSU
• A fusing temperature over 250°C is defective)
detected by the fusing temperature • SBCU board defective
monitor circuit in the SBCU board. • Fusing thermistor defective
• The power was interrupted for more • Voltage of power supply unstable
than 0.3 sec.
545 A Fusing overheat error 3 • Hot roller thermistor is out of its
After warmup, the hot roller attained full position because of incorrect
operating temperature and maintained installation
this temperature for 10 sec. without the
hot roller rotating.
546 A Unstable fusing temperature • Thermistor disconnected or
The fusing temperature varies 50°C or defective
more twice in succession within 1 sec. • Fusing unit drawer installed
incorrectly
547 B Zero cross signal detection error • PSU defective
Zero cross signals are not detected • SBCU board defective
within a certain period.
548 A Fusing unit set error • Poor connection of the fusing unit
The machine does not detect the fusing • The fusing unit is not installed
unit.
557 B Zero cross waveform signal error • Electrical noise on the power supply
The waveform of the zero cross signal line
was detected out of range.
590 B Exhaust fan motor error • Poor connection of the exhaust fan
The CPU detects an exhaust fan lock motor
signal for more than 3.5 seconds. • Too much load on the motor drive
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-8 SM

611 B Communication break error between • Serial line connecting SBCU and
SBCU and ADF ADF unstable
The SBCU received a break (LOW) • Connectors between SBCU and
signal from the ADF main board. ADF loose, disconnected, or
damaged
612 B Communication command error • Update the firmware
between SBCU and ADF • SBCU board defective
The SBCU sends a command to the
ADF main board that it cannot execute.
620 B Communication timeout between SBCU • Serial line connecting SBCU and
and finisher: Error 1 finisher unstable
The SBCU cannot receive a response • External noise
within 100 ms after 3 attempts after
sending data to the finisher.
621 B Communication timeout between SBCU • Serial line connecting SBCU and
and finisher: Error 2 finisher unstable
A break (LOW) signal was received from • External noise
the finisher.
650 B Communication timeout error between • Serial line connecting SBCU and
SBCU and duplex unit duplex unit unstable
The SBCU cannot receive a response • External noise
within 1 sec. from the duplex unit. • SBCU board and duplex main board
connection defective or loose
• Duplex main board defective
• SBCU board defective
669 B EEPROM Communication Error • EEPROM installed incorrectly
• EEPROM defective
shooting
The machine failed to detect a match
Trouble-
between the read/write data for the After you check the installation, turn
EEPROM on the SBCU after 3 attempts. the machine off and on. If this does not
repair the problem, replace the SBCU.
670 D Engine response error • SBCU installed incorrectly
After powering on the machine, a • SBCU defective
response is not received from the • Controller board defective
engine within 30 seconds.
672 D Controller-to-operation panel • Controller stall
communication error at startup • Controller board installed incorrectly
After powering on the machine, the • Controller board defective
communication circuit between the • Operation panel connector loose or
controller and the operation panel is not defective
opened, or communication with
controller is interrupted after a normal
startup.
720 B Finisher motor error • The motor connectors are loose,

The meaning of this SC error depends disconnected or damaged.
on which finisher is installed. • The motor is defective
500-sheet Finisher B442
There is a problem with the upper
transport motor.
1000-sheet Finisher B408
There is a problem with the registration
motor.
SM 4-9 B205/B209/D007/D008

721 B Lower transport motor error – 1000- • The motor connectors are loose,
sheet Finisher B408 disconnected or damaged.
There is a problem with the lower • The motor is defective
transport motor.
722 B Finisher jogger motor error – 1000-sheet • Jogger H.P sensor disconnected or
Finisher B408 defective
The finisher jogger H.P sensor remains • Jogger motor connectors loose,
de-activated for a certain time when disconnected, or damaged
returning to home position. • Jogger motor defective
The finisher jogger H.P sensor remains
activated for a certain time when moving
away from home position.
724 B Finisher staple hammer motor error – • Staple jam
1000-sheet Finisher B408 • Stapler overload caused by trying to
Stapling does not finish within 600 ms staple too many sheets
after the staple hammer motor turned • Staple hammer motor defective
on.
725 B Finisher stack feed-out motor error – • Stack feed-out H.P sensor defective
1000-sheet Finisher B408 • Stack feed-out motor defective
The stack feed-out belt H.P sensor does
not activate within a certain time after
the stack feed-out motor turned on.
726 B Finisher lift motor error • Shift tray lift motor defective
The stack height sensor does not • Stack height sensor defective
activate within a certain time after the
shift tray lift motor turned on.
Note: This error applies to the 500-sheet
and the 1000-sheet finisher.
727 B Finisher staple hammer motor error – • Staple jam
500-sheet Finisher B442 • Stapler overload caused by trying to
Stapling does not finish within a certain staple too many sheets
time after staple hammer motor turned • Staple hammer motor defective
on.
728 B Finisher exit motor/paper stack height Exit motor error (B408)
error • Exit motor connector loose,
The meaning of this SC error depends disconnected, or damaged
on which finisher is installed. • Exit motor defective
1000-sheet Finisher B408 Stack height sensor error (B442)
Exit motor error. • Stack height lever solenoid
500-sheet Finisher B442 defective
Stack height sensor error. The stack • Stack height sensor defective
height detection lever does not return to • Lever sensor defective
its home position before going to detect • Main control board defective
the stack height.
730 B Finisher stapler motor error –1000-sheet • Stapler motor defective
Finisher B408 • Stapler H.P sensor defective
The stapler does not return to its home • Poor stapler motor connection
position within a certain time after the
stapler motor turned on.
-or-
The stapler H.P sensor does not
activate within a certain time after the
stapler motor turned on.
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-10 SM

731 B Finisher motor error 1000-sheet Finisher
The meaning of this SC error depends on • Exit guide plate motor defective
which finisher is installed. • Exit guide plate HP sensor
Exit guide plate motor error. The exit guide • Exit guide plate open sensor
plate open sensor or exit guide plate HP defective
sensor does not activate within a certain time 500-sheet Finisher
after the exit guide plate motor turned on. • Output tray motor defective
(1000-sheet finisher) • Tray upper limit sensor
Output tray motor error. The tray upper limit
sensor does not activate within a certain time
after the shift motor turned on. (500-sheet
finisher)
732 B Finisher shift motor error – 1000-sheet • Shift motor defective
Finisher B408 • Shift tray HP sensor defective
Roller shift does not finish within a certain
time after the shift motor turned on.
770 B Shift tray shift motor error • Shift sensor defective
During a shift operation the sensor state did • Shift motor defective
not change (off to on, or on to off) within 2.4
sec.
791 B Bridge communication error • Poor connection between the
The machine cannot communicate with the finisher and mainframe
finisher with the bridge unit installed. • Harness damaged or defective
shooting
Trouble-
792 B Finisher connection error • Finisher connection defective
The machine cannot communicate with the
finisher with the bridge unit installed.
793 B Interchange communication error • Interchange unit installed
The machine cannot communicate with the incorrectly
interchange unit properly when the duplex • Interchange unit connection
unit is installed. loose, disconnected, or
damaged
• Interchange unit harness
damaged
800 D Startup without video output end error (K) • Controller board defective
Video transfer to the engine is started, but
the engine did not issue a video transmission
end command within the specified time.
804 D Startup without video input end (K) • Controller board defective
A video transmission was requested from the
scanner, but the scanner did not issue a
video transmission end command within the
specified time.
818 B Watchdog error • Defective controller board
While the system program is running, no
other programs can run (due to a bus hold or
endless loop).
SM 4-11 B205/B209/D007/D008

819 B Kernel abnormal end error • HDD error
A HDD error or a software error has • Software application error
occurred, terminating the SCS process, • RAM shortage
gwinit process, and finally the kernel • MBU jumper set incorrectly. For
program. more, see "Fax Option Type B766"
A system process has exhausted the manual "1. Installation".
RAM.
820 B Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU • Defective controller board
An unexpected exception or interruption • Software defective
has occurred. • MBUjumper set incorrectly. For
more, see "Fax Option Type B766"
manual "1. Installation".
821 D Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC • Controller board defective
The ASIC returned an error during the
self-diagnostic test because the ASIC
and CPU timer interrupts were
compared and determined to be out of
range.
822 D Self-Diagnostic Error: HDD • HDD defective
The hard disk drive returned an error • HDD connector defective
during the self-diagnostic test. • Controller board defective
823 D Self-diagnostic Error: NIC • Controller board defective
The network interface board returned an
error during the self-diagnostic test.
824 D Self-diagnostic Error: Resident NVRAM • Replace the resident NVRAM on the
The resident non-volatile RAM returned controller board
an error during the self-diagnostic test. • Replace the controller board
826 D Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM/Optional • Replace the NVRAM on the

NVRAM controller board
The NVRAM or optional NVRAM
returned an error during the self-
diagnostic test.
827 D Self-diagnostic Error: RAM • Update the controller firmware again
The resident RAM returned a verify error • Replace the 256 MB memory
during the self-diagnostic test.
828 D Self-diagnostic Error: ROM • Controller board defective
The resident read-only memory returned • Update the controller firmware
an error during the self-diagnostic test.
829 D Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM • Replace the optional memory.

The optional RAM returned an error • Controller board defective
during the self-diagnostic test.
838 D Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator • Replace the controller board
A verify error occurred when setting data
was read from the clock generator via
the I2C bus.
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-12 SM

840 D EEPROM error 1 • EEPROM defective; replace the
During input/output with the EEPROM on controller board
the controller board, one of the following • EEPROM has reached the end of its
errors occurred: service life
• A read error occurred and continued
after 3 retries.
• A write error occurred.
841 D EEPROM error 2 • EEPROM on the control board
The values read from the three areas defective, or has reached the end of
during the mirroring check phase did not its service life. Replace the
match. The data is being written into the controller board.
three areas differently.
850 D Network I/F Abnormal • Controller board defective (NIB
NIB interface error. function built into the controller
board. Replace the controller board.
851 D IEEE 1394 I/F Abnormal • IEEE1394 interface board defective
IEEE1394 interface error. • Controller board defective
Note: This SC code applies to the
B205/B209. The D007/D008 does not
support IEEE 1394.
853 D Wireless LAN board error 1 • Wireless LAN board not installed
At startup the wireless LAN board could when the machine was turned on
be accessed, but the wireless LAN board
(IEEE 802.11b or Bluetooth) could not
access the controller board.
shooting
Trouble-
854 D Wireless LAN board error 2 • Wireless LAN board has been
The board that holds the wireless LAN removed during machine operation.
board can be accessed, but the wireless
LAN board (802.11b/Bluetooth) itself
cannot be accessed while the machine is
operating
855 D Wireless LAN board error 3 • Wireless LAN board defective
An error was detected for the wireless • Wireless board connection not tight
LAN board (802.11b or Bluetooth).
856 D Wireless LAN board error • Wireless LAN board defective
An error is detected for the wireless LAN • PCI connector loose
board (802.11b or Bluetooth).
857 D USB I/F Error • USB 2.0 disconnected
The USB driver is unstable and generated • Controller board defective
an error. The USB I/F cannot be used.
The USB driver can generate three types
of errors: RX, CRC, and STALL errors.
Only the STALL error can generate this
SC code.
860 B Startup without HD connection at main • Cable between HDC and HDD loose
power on or defective
The hard disk connection is not detected. • HDD power connector loose or
defective
• HDD defective
• Replace the controller board
SM 4-13 B205/B209/D007/D008

861 B HDD error 1 • Cable between HDC and HDD loose
The HDD was not detected when the or defective
machine was turned on. The hard disk • HDD power connector loose or
connection is not detected. defective
• HDD defective
• Replace the controller board

862 A HDD error 2 • Format the HDD with SP5832.
Maximum number of bad sectors Note: If you continue to use an HDD with
detected on HD. Up to 101 bad bad sectors, this can have an effect on
sectors have appeared in the area performance. Replace the HDD as soon as
on the hard disk where image data possible.
is archived, and the hard disk may
require replacement.
863 B HDD error 3 • A bad sector occurred during operation
of the HDD
Startup without HD data lead. Data
stored on the hard disk is not read
correctly.
864 D HDD error 4 • Data transfer was abnormal in the data
HD data CRC error. During read from the HDD.
operation of the HD, the HD
responded with a CRC error.
865 D HDD access error
HDD responded to an error during • HDD defective.
operation for a condition other than
those for SC863 or 864.
866 D SD card error 1: Recognition error
The SD card in the slot contains • Use only SD cards that contain the
illegal program data. correct data.
867 D SD card error 2: SD card removed
The SD card in the boot slot when • Insert the SD card, then turn the
the machine was turned on was machine off and on.
removed while the machine power
was on.
868 D SD card error 3: SD card access
An error occurred while an SD card • SD card not inserted correctly
was used. • SD card defective
• Controller board defective
Note: If you want to try to reformat the SD
card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.
870 B Address Book Data Error • Software defective
Address book data stored on the • HDD defective
hard disk was detected as
abnormal when it was accessed
from either the operation panel or
the network.
872 B HDD mail RX data abnormal • HDD sector corrupted. Reformat with
An error was detected at power on. SP5832 007.
The data received during mail • If this does not repair the problem,
receive could be neither read nor replace the HDD.
written.
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-14 SM

873 B HDD mail TX data error
An error was detected on the HDD • Do SP5832-008 (Format HDD – Mail
immediately after the machine was TX Data) to initialize the HDD.
turned on, or power was turned off • Replace the HDD
while the machine used the HDD.

874 D Delete All error 1: HDD
A data error was detected for the HDD/NVRAM after • Turn the main switch
the Delete All option was used. off/on, and try the
Note: The source of this error is the Data Overwrite operation again.
Security Unit B660 running from an SD card. • Install the Data
Overwrite Security Unit
again. For more, see
section “1. Installation”.
• HDD defective
875 D Delete All error 2: Data area
An error occurred while the machine deleted data • Turn the main switch
from the HDD. off/on, and try the
Note: The source of this error is the Data Overwrite operation again.
Security Unit B660 running from an SD card.
876 D Log data abnormal • Software error. Update
An error was detected in the handling of the log data the firmware
at power on or during machine operation. This can be • NVRAM defective
caused if you turn the machine off while it is • HDD defective
operating.
shooting
Trouble-
880 D File format converter error • File format converter
A request for access to the File Format Converter disconnected
(MLB) was not answered within the specified time. • File format converter
board defective
900 D Electrical total counter error • NVRAM incorrect type
The total count contains something that is not a • NVRAM defective
number. • NVRAM data
scrambled
• Unexpected error from
external source
901 D Electronic total counter error • Replace the NVRAM
The value of the total counter has already exceeded on the controller board
9999999
920 D Printer Error 1 • Software defective
An internal application error was detected and • Insufficient memory
operation cannot continue.
921 B Printer error 2
When the application started, the necessary font was • Font not on the SD
not on the SD card. card
925 D Network File Error • Software defective
The file that manages NetFile is corrupted and • Files on the HDD
operation cannot continue. corrupted
951 B F-GATE error at write request • Update the controller
After the IPU receives an F-gate signal, it receives firmware
another F-gate signal. • SBCU board defective
SM 4-15 B205/B209/D007/D008

953 B Scanner setting error • Update the controller
The IPU does not respond with the scanner setting firmware
signal required to start scanning processing.
954 B Printer setting error • Replace the IPU
The IPU does not respond with the settings that are board
required to start image processing by the printer. • Replace the controller
board
• Update the controller
firmware

955 B Memory setting error • Replace the IPU board
The IPU does not respond with the settings that are • Replace the controller
required to start image processing using the board
memory. • Update the controller
firmware
964 B Printer ready error • Replace the IPU board

The printer ready signal is not generated within 17 • Replace the controller
seconds after the IPU received the print start signal. board
• Download the controller
firmware
984 D Print image data transfer error • Controller board

The image transfer from the controller to the engine defective
via the PCI bus does not end within 15 s after • SBCU board defective
starting. • Connectors between
SBCU and controller
loose or defective
986 D Software write parameter setting error • Update the controller
An unstable area at the storage destination in the firmware
settings table is set at NULL for the parameter
received by the write module.
990 D Software performance error
The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation.
• Software defective
• Internal parameter incorrect
• Insufficient working memory
• When this SC occurs, the file name, address, and data will be stored in
NVRAM. This information can be checked by using SP7-403. Note the above
data and the situation in which this SC occurs. Then report the data and
conditions to your technical control center.
991 C Software continuity error • No operation required.
The software attempted to perform an unexpected This SC code does not
operation. However, unlike SC990, the object of the appear on the panel, and
error is continuity of the software. is only logged.
992 D Unexpected Software Error • Software defective
Software encountered an unexpected operation not • An error undetectable by
defined under any SC code. any other SC code
occurred
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-16 SM

995 D Machine Type Information Error • Replace the controller
After the machine power is turned on, a mismatch is board with the correct
detected between the CPM information sent from board.
the controller to the engine.

997 B Application function selection error • Update the firmware for
The application selected by a key press on the application that failed
operation panel does not start or ends abnormally. • An option required by
the application (RAM,
DIMM, board) is not
installed
998 D Application start error • Download controller
After power on, the application does not start within firmware
60 s. (All applications neither start nor end • Replace the controller
normally.) board
• An option required by
the application (RAM,
DIMM, board) is not
installed
shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-17 B205/B209/D007/D008
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

4.2.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON
As soon as the main machine is powered on, the controller waits for the initial
settings of the copy engine to take effect and then starts an independent self-
diagnostic test program. The self-diagnostic test follows the path of the flow chart
shown below and checks the CPU, memory, HDD, and so on. An SC code is
displayed in the touch panel if the self-diagnostic program detects any malfunction
or abnormal condition.
Self-Diagnostic Test Flow
Power On
Initialization
Memory Check for

Self-Diagnostic Test
Self-Diagnostic
Mode Selection
CPU Check
ASIC Check Font ROM Check
Memory Check RTC Check
Program ROM, IC Card

DIMM CRC Check I/FCheck
SSCG Check Network Check
OPC Check Engine I/F Check
Illegal Interrupt
NVRAM Check Check
System OS,
HDD Check Application Check
IEEE1284
I/F Check
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-18 SM
4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine is
powered on, you can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually
in order to test other components or conditions that are not tested during self-
diagnosis after power on.
The following device is required in order to put the machine in the detailed self-
diagnosis mode.
Also, the printer/scanner unit and the optional Centronics (IEEE1284) interface
must be installed.
No. Name
G0219350 Parallel Loopback Connector
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis

Follow this procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis.
1. Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the
Centronics I/F port.
2. Hold down , press and hold down , and then while pressing both keys at
the same time, switch on the machine.
You will see “Now Loading” on the touch-panel, and then you will see the
shooting
Trouble-
results of the test.
SM 4-19 B205/B209/D007/D008
A report like the one below is printed every time a detailed self-diagnostic test
is executed, whether errors were detected or not.
MODEL NAME XXXX

Serial No. : ACLD000034 Firmware P/# : ACP82XXXX [1/1]
Self-Diagnosis Report Firmware Version : 2.49.01 Wed Nov 22 13:15:30 2000
[System Construction]
Kernel Version : NetBSD 1.3.3 (SHINYOKOHAMA_ROM) #0: Sat Nov 11 16:15:35 JST 2000
CPU System Bus Clock : 100.0 MHz CPU Pipeline Clock : 200.0 MHz
Board Type :7 ASIC Version : 1397306160
RTC Existence : existence RAM Capacity : 100.663296 MB
HDD Existence : existence HDD Model :
[Total Counter ]
0001000
[Program No. @]
MAIN : ACP82XXXX ENGINE : Ver1.96
LCDC : V1.39 PI :
ADF : B3515620B SIB : B0045383
FIN : FIN_SDL :
BANK : A6825150 LCT :
MBX : FCU :
DPX :
[Error List @@@]

SCCODE (ERROR CODE ) SC CODE (ERROR CODE) SC CODE (ERROR CODE) SC CODE (ERROR CODE)
SC835 (110C) SC820 (0001) SC820 (0002) SC820 (0003)

SC820 (0004) SC820 (0005)
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-20 SM
PAPER FEED TROUBLESHOOTING
4.3 PAPER FEED TROUBLESHOOTING

When a paper double feed or paper non feed problem occurs, fix the problem in
accordance with the following flow chart.
Paper Feed Problem
Non Feed Double Feed
Yes
Small Paper Size?
(A5/HLT)
No
Reduce the bottom plate Reduce the bottom plate

pressure for normal paper size. pressure for small paper size.
*Note:
Change the value of the Change the value of the
following SP mode to a larger following SP mode to a larger If the feed problem
number. number. always occurs at a
certain point before
SP No. Tray SP No. Tray near-end, change the
1-908-1 1st Tray 1-908-2 1st Tray remaining paper
shooting
Trouble-
1-909-1 2nd Tray 1-909-2 2nd Tray threshold with
1-910-1 3rd Tray 1-910-2 3rd Tray SP 1-908-6, 1-909-6,
1-910-6, and/or
1-911-1 4th Tray 1-911-2 4th Tray 1-911-6
Yes Feed problem Yes

Small Paper Size? occurs at paper
(A5/HLT) near-end? *Note
No No
Apply the bottom plate pressure Apply the bottom plate pressure Apply the bottom plate pressure
for normal paper size. for small paper size. at near-end condition for small
paper size.
Change the value of the Change the value of the Change the value of the
following SP mode to a smaller following SP mode to a smaller following SP mode to a larger
number. number. number.
SP No. Tray SP No. Tray SP No. Tray
1-908-1 1st Tray 1-908-2 1st Tray 1-908-4 1st Tray
1-909-1 2nd Tray 1-909-2 2nd Tray 1-909-4 2nd Tray
1-910-1 3rd Tray 1-910-2 3rd Tray 1-910-4 3rd Tray
1-911-1 4th Tray 1-911-2 4th Tray 1-911-4 4th Tray
SM 4-21 B205/B209/D007/D008
SKEWED IMAGE
4.4 SKEWED IMAGE

Do the following to fix a skewed image problem.
Print out the Trimming Pattern (SP2-

902, no.10) from every paper tray.
No Make a copy using the

Is the copy skewed?
ADF
Yes
Do the following. No
Is the copy skewed? OK
- Check the side fence position of the
paper tray.
- Clean or replace the paper feed Yes
roller.
- Clean the registration roller.
- Change the value of SP1-903 to a Do the following.
larger number.
- Check the side fence position of the
original table.
- Clean or replace the original feed
belt, pick-up roller, and separation
roller.
- Clean the transport roller and exit
roller.
- Secure the ADF using the long hole,
then adjust the ADF position.
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-22 SM
IMAGE PROBLEMS
4.5 IMAGE PROBLEMS

4.5.1 SKEWED, TRAPEZOID AND PARALLELOGRAM IMAGES
Skewed Images
• The image’s leading and trailing edges are parallel.
• The image’s left and right edges are also parallel.
• But, all four sides are not parallel with the paper edge.
Feed Direction
Parallel
Parallel Skewed image may
also appear in the
opposite orientation.
shooting
Trouble-
Paper Image Area
Trapezoid Images
• Only the image’s trailing edge is not parallel with the paper edge. The other 3
sides are parallel to the paper’s edges.
Feed Direction
Parallel
Trapezoid image may
also appear in the
opposite orientation.
Image Area
Paper
SM 4-23 B205/B209/D007/D008
IMAGE PROBLEMS
Parallelogram Images
• Like skewed images, the leading/trailing edges and left/right edges are parallel to
each other. But, the leading and trailing edges are not parallel to the paper’s
edges.
Feed Direction
Parallel
Parallelogram may also

appear in the opposite
orientation.
Image Area
Paper
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-24 SM
IMAGE PROBLEMS
4.5.2 CHECKING IMAGES WITH THE TRIMMING PATTERN
Do SP2-902-3 (Pattern 10) to print a trimming pattern.
Skewed Parallelogram
For more see "Adjusting

For more, see Parallelogram
Skewed Images" below
Image Adjustment ( 3.12.1)
Trapezoid
shooting
Trouble-
Combination skewed and
trapezoid image
For more, see "Adjusting

Trapezoid Images" below.
Perform "Adjusting Skewed

Images" first, then "Adjusting
Trapezoid Images".
SM 4-25 B205/B209/D007/D008
IMAGE PROBLEMS
4.5.3 CORRECTING THE IMAGES

Correcting Skewed Images
1. Test pattern (Trimming Pattern) mode check
Is the image skewed?
No Yes
1. Adjust the side fences. There must be no gap between the
fences and the paper stack.
2. Adjust the paper buckle: SP1-003-1 and 2.
2. Platen mode check
Set an original flush against the left and rear scales and make a copy.
Does the image come out as a parallelogram?
No Yes
Attach the Scanner Holder (a supporter that is normally attached
during shipping)
OR
Do Procedure A below.
3. ADF mode check
Feed an original through the ADF.
Is the image skewed?
No Yes
Do the front and rear transport rollers feed the original straight?
No Yes
Change the position of the right hinge screw to the longer
hole, and make small position adjustments that are
necessary.
Do Procedure B below.
Procedure complete.
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-26 SM
IMAGE PROBLEMS
Procedure A (from Step 2 above):
[B]
Rear, left upper side of machine
1. Remove the rear and left covers, then

the left scanner cover.
2. Check to see if there is a gap
between the scanner unit holder and
frame at [A]
3. If there is no gap, the left front section
of the scanner unit is lower than the
shooting
Trouble-
standard position.
4. Loosen all screws (x7) [B].

5. Lift up the left front of unit until there is a 1 to 2 mm gap.
6. Tighten the 7 screws.
7. Insert a washer (#07080050, 1 mm thick) into gap [A]. Attach the washer in its
position with an adhesive that sets quickly.
NOTE: This washer will also absorb small amounts of shock.
8. Check if the parallelogram image still appears.
SM 4-27 B205/B209/D007/D008
IMAGE PROBLEMS
Procedure B (from Step 3 above):
[A]
[B]
[C] [D]
1. Remove ADF [A], machine rear cover, scanner left cover, and scanner rear
cover.
2. Measure the height difference [B] between the hinge bracket [C] and scanner
housing [D].
3. If the difference is 0.5 mm or more:
Add a spacer (t = 0.5 to 0.8) between the hinge bracket (mainframe) and ADF
left hinge, to lift the left side of the ADF
-or-
Adjust the stepped height difference between the hinge bracket and scanner
housing until it is within 0±0.3 mm.
NOTE: This is necessary because skew occurs when the hinge bracket more
than 0.3 mm lower than the scanner housing.
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-28 SM
IMAGE PROBLEMS
Correcting Trapezoid Images

Procedure 1: Minor Adjustment of the Fusing Unit Height (front-to-rear)
shooting
Trouble-
1. Print out the SP2-902-003 Trimming Pattern (value: 10).
2. If the image is a pattern A trapezoid:
1) Remove and reinstall the Fusing Unit.
2) Tighten the left fixing screw while you push up the unit’s left side (until it
stops).
3. If the image is a pattern B trapezoid, do the same for the unit’s right side.
4. If the image is still printed out as a trapezoid, do Procedure 2 below.
SM 4-29 B205/B209/D007/D008
IMAGE PROBLEMS
Procedure 2: Minor Adjustment of the Fusing Unit Position (front-to-rear)
1. Remove the Fusing Unit, then add a washer (t = 0.5 to 1.6) to the front fixing
screw. Note: This will increase the distance from the mainframe stay.
2. Check the image.
Still NG OK
Adjustment Complete.
3. Add more washers (t = 0.5 to 1.6, as above).
Note: Too many washers can cause wrinkling in the paper.
Still NG OK
Adjustment Complete.
4. Remove the Fusing Unit and all the washers added in Steps 1 and 2 above.
Then, add washer(s) in the same way for the rear side.
Recommended Washers:
t = 0.5 07080040Z or 07080040G
t = 0.8 07080050Z or 07080050G
Correcting Parallelogram Images

Do the procedure described in Section 3.12.1 "Parallelogram Image Problems".
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-30 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.6.1 SENSORS
Component (Symbol) CN Condition Symptom
Open SC120 is displayed.
337-2 The CPU does not detect the
Scanner H.P
(SBCU) Shorted scanner home position and the
scanner motor does not stop.
APS and ARE do not function
337-5 Open
Platen Cover correctly.
(SBCU)
Shorted No symptom
Open The CPU cannot detect the original
335-3, -4
Original Width size properly. APS and ARE do not
(SBCU) Shorted function correctly.
335-8, -9
Original Length-1 size properly. APS and ARE do not
336-3
Original Length-2 size properly. APS and ARE do not
321-3, -4 Open SC390 is displayed
Toner Density
(SBCU) Shorted
The Paper End indicator lights even
shooting
Trouble-
Open if paper is placed in the 1st paper
306-2 tray.
1st Paper End
(SBCU) The Paper End indicator does not
Shorted light even if there is no paper in the
1st paper tray.
The Paper End indicator lights even
Open if paper is placed in the 2nd paper
307-A2 tray.
2nd Paper End
(SBCU) The Paper End indicator does not
Shorted light even if there is no paper in the
2nd paper tray.
321-3 Open SC392 is displayed (see note)
Image Density
(SBCU) Shorted
The paper overflow message is not
Open displayed when the paper overfull
324-5
Paper Over Flow condition exist.
(SBCU)
The paper overflow message is
Shorted
displayed.
The Paper Jam indicator will light
Open
324-2 whenever a copy is made.
Paper Exit
(SBCU) The Paper Jam indicator lights even
Shorted
if there is no paper.
Open
Upper Relay
Shorted
SM 4-31 B205/B209/D007/D008
Component (Symbol) CN Condition Symptom

Open
307-A5 whenever a copy is made.
Lower Relay
Shorted
Open
Registration
Shorted
305-7 Open SC501 will be displayed.
1st Paper Lift
(SBCU) Shorted Paper jam will occur during copying.
305-10 Open SC502 will be displayed.
2nd Paper Lift
(SBCU) Shorted Paper jam will occur during copying.
307-B2 Open The CPU cannot determine the
1st Paper Height – 1
(SBCU) Shorted paper near-end condition properly.
1st Paper Height – 2
2nd Paper Height – 1
2nd Paper Height – 2
NOTE: An SC condition occurs only when a new PCU is being installed in the
machine. During copying, if the ID sensor fails, the image density will be
changed.
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-32 SM
4.6.2 SWITCHES
Component
CN Condition Symptom
(Symbol)
281-1,2 Open The machine does not turn on.
Main
(PSU) Shorted The machine does not turn off.
The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if
Open
Right Upper 324-8 the right upper cover is opened.
Cover (SBCU) The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the
Shorted
right upper cover is closed.
Open
321-9 the right cover is opened.
Right Cover
(SBCU) The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the
Shorted
right cover is closed.
Open
Right Lower 307-A8 the right lower cover is opened.
Cover (SBCU) The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the
Shorted
right lower cover is closed.
Open The CPU cannot detect the proper paper
Upper Paper 308-1,2,4,5
size, and misfeeds may occur when a
Size (SBCU) Shorted copy is made.
Open The CPU cannot detect the proper paper
Lower Paper 308-6,7,9,10
size, and misfeeds may occur when a
Size (SBCU) Shorted copy is made.
shooting
Trouble-
The TD sensor initial setting procedure is
Open not performed when a new PCU is
New PCU 327-7 installed.
Detect (SBCU) The TD sensor initial setting procedure is
Shorted performed whenever the front cover is
closed.
Open
Front Cover 311-2, 4 the front cover is opened.
Safety (SBCU) The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the
Shorted
front cover is closed.
The LCD does not off even if the
Open
110-1 operation switch is turned off.
Operation
(IPU The LCD does not on even if the
Shorted
operation switch is turned on.
SM 4-33 B205/B209/D007/D008
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
4.7 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
Rating Symptom when turning on the

Fuse
115 V 220 ~ 240 V main switch
PSU
FU1 15 A/250 V 8 A/250V No response.
FU2 8 A/125 V 5 A/250 V No response
Anti-condensation/Tray Heater does
FU3 2 A/125 V 1 A/250V
not turn on.
Optional finisher, bridge unit, and
FU4 6.3 A/125 V 6.3 A/250V shift tray does not work then SC792
is displayed.
All motors do not rotate. The "Cover
FU5 6.3 A/125 V 6.3 /250 V
Open" and SC indicators light.
The touch panel does not turn on,
FU6 6.3 A/125 V 6.3 A/250V and all motors (except scanner
motor) do not rotate.
B205/B209/D007/D008 4-34 SM
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to
switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the
main power switch off.
5.1.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set “Service Mode Lock” to OFF. After he or she logs in:
[User Tools] > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine
off and on. It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each
Service
time the machine is turned on.
Tables
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to
“1”.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5169 from “1” to “0”.
• Turn the machine off and on.
• Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.
• The administrator will then set the “Service Mode Lock” to ON.
SM 5-1 B205/B209/D007/D008
5.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION

The service program mode is used to check electrical data, change modes, and
adjust values. Two service program modes are provided:
• SP Mode (Service). Includes all the options in the SP displays for normal
maintenance and adjustments.
• SSP Mode (Special Service). Includes the normal SP modes and some
additional options in the SP displays not required for normal settings and
adjustments. (Most are marked “DFU” in the following tables.) Do not change
these important settings needlessly. For details, contact your supervisor.
Entering and Exiting SP mode

S Press the Clear Mode key.
Use the keypad to enter “107”.
D Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
Enter the Service Mode.
To enter the Normal Service Mode:
Copy SP On the touch-panel, press Copy SP.
To enter the Special Service Mode:
Copy SP Hold down and then press Copy SP.
Exit Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
NOTE: Use SP2902 to perform test pattern printing. ( 5.1.4)
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-2 SM
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
c Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
d Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
e Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. To return to the SP
mode screen, press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window.
f Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then
press . (SP Mode must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP
Mode if it is not highlighted.)
g Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
Service
Tables
h Press any Group number to open a list of SP codes and titles for that group. For
example, to open the SP code list for SP1nnn, press Group1. If an SP has sublevels,
touch the appropriate button to expand the list.
i Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
j Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
k Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
l Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
SM 5-3 B205/B209/D007/D008
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window.
2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings
(paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3) Press Start C to execute the test print.
4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number
Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to
adjust. ( 5.1.3)
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand the
list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated and
displays the default or the current setting below.
NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. ( 5.1.3)
1. To enter a setting
• Press to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to
enter the appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous
setting.
• Press to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key press is ignored.)
• When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
2. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy
window and select the settings for the test print. Press Start C twice, and then
press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode
display.
3. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-4 SM
5.1.3 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

Service Table Key
Notation What it means
[range / default / Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be
step] adjusted in the range ±9, the setting is reset to +3.0 after an
NVRAM reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with
each key press.
italics Comments added for reference.
* Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value
(factory setting) is restored.
1111 An SP number set in bold-italic denotes a “Special Service
Program” mode setting that appears only after entering the SP
mode by pressing and Copy SP together. ( 5.1.2)
DFU Denotes “Design or Factory Use”. Do not change this value.
Japan only The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
(S) Sideways feed direction
(L) Lengthwise feed direction
Service
Tables
SM 5-5 B205/B209/D007/D008
SP1XXX: Feed
1001* Leading Edge Registration
1001 1 Paper Tray Feed Adjusts the printing leading edge registration from
1001 2 By-pass Feed each paper feed station using the Trimming Area
1001 3 Duplex, Side2 Pattern (SP2902-003 No. 10).
[+9.0 ~ –9.0 / +0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Use the key to toggle between + and – before
entering the value.
The specification is 3 ± 2 mm.
See “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy
Adjustment” for details.
1002* Side-to-Side Registration

1002 1 Tray 1 Adjusts the printing side-to-side registration from
1002 2 Tray 2 each paper feed station using the Trimming Area
1002 3 Tray 3 (Optional PFU Tray Pattern (SP2902-003 No. 10).
1, or LCT) [+9.0 ~ –9.0 / +0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1002 4 Tray 4 (Optional PFU Tray Use the key to toggle between + and – before
2) entering the value. The specification is 2 ± 1.5 mm.
1002 5 By-pass See “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy
1002 6 Duplex Side 2 Adjustment” for details.
1003* Paper Feed Timing

1003 1 Tray 1 Adjusts the paper feed clutch timing at registration.
1003 2 Tray 2/3/4 By-pass The paper feed clutch timing determines the amount
of paper buckle at registration. (A larger setting leads
to more buckling.)
[0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step]
1003 3 Duplex Side 2 [0 ~ 20 / 6 / 1 mm/step]
1007 By-pass Paper Size Display Displays the by-pass paper width sensor output.
1103 Fusing Idling

Switches fusing idling on/off.
[0 = Off / 1 = On / 2 = Off plus machine temperature check]
Switch on if fusing on the 1st and 2nd copies is incomplete (this may occur if the
room is cold.)
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-6 SM
1105* Fusing Temperature Adjustment

1105 1 Roller Center Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center and
1105 2 Roller Ends both ends of the hot roller for normal printing.
[120 ~ 200 / 180 / 1°C/step]
1105 3 Energy Saver Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center and
both ends of the hot roller for energy saver mode.
[0 ~ 160 / 150 / 1°C/step]
1105 4 Thick Paper - Center Adjusts the additional fusing temperature for thick
1105 5 Thick Paper - Ends paper for the 2nd paper tray and for the bypass tray.
[0 ~ 30 / 15 / 1°C/step]
1105 6 After Warming-up - Center Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the
hot roller after the machine has warmed up.
[120 ~ 200 / 180 / 1°C/step]
1105 7 After Warming-up - Ends Adjusts the fusing temperature at both ends of the
hot roller after the machine has warmed up.
[120 ~ 200 / 185 / 1°C/step]
1105 8 After Warming-up - No. of In this machine, fusing temperature is kept 10°C
Pages higher than the normal temperature for a number of
pages after the machine has warmed up. This SP
selects the number of pages made at this
temperature. See Detailed Section Descriptions –
Fusing for more details.
[0 ~ 10 / 3 / 1 page/step]
1105 9 After Warming-up - Times In this machine, fusing temperature is kept 10°C
higher than the normal temperature for a short while
after the machine been warmed up. This SP selects
the length of time that this temperature is used. See
Detailed Section Descriptions – Fusing for more
details.
Service
Tables
[0 ~ 180 / 60 / 1s/step]
1106 Fusing Temp. Display

1106 1 Roller Center Displays the fusing temperature for the center or
1106 2 Roller Ends both ends of the hot roller.
1106 3 In the Machine at Power On Displays the temperature in the machine at power
on.
This temperature is monitored by the thermistor on
the SBCU board.
1108* Fusing Soft Start Setting

Selects whether the fusing temperature control cycle is 1 or 3 seconds.
If this is “1 (3 s)”, the power supply fluctuation caused by the fusing lamp turning
on is less often.
[0 = 1 s / 1 = 2 s]
Default: 0 = N. America, Taiwan, 1 = Europe/Asia
1109 Fusing Nip Band Check

Checks the fusing nip band ( 5.1.11)
[1 = Start / 0 = Stop]
SM 5-7 B205/B209/D007/D008
1902* Feed Clutch Re-energize

Adjusts the paper feed amount allowed by the clutch after correcting the skew at
registration. When paper jams occur after restarting paper feed after registration,
increase the value to help the registration roller feed the paper.
1903* AC Frequency Display

Displays the AC frequency for fusing temperature control.
1903 1 By-pass Feed [0 ~ 10 / 6 / 1 mm/step]
1903 2 Tray 1 Feed [0 ~ 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
1903 3 Other Trays
1905* Tray Paper Full Detection

Determines whether or not to detect if the built-in copy tray is full.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
1906* Tray Paper Full Timer

Adjusts the time that the paper overflow sensor must remain on before a message
appears on the LCD. The sensor may be switched on and off again if the paper is
curled, giving a false tray full detection. This SP prevents this problem.
[100 ~ 5000 / 5.00 / 10 ms/step]
This SP mode is used when SP1905 is set to 1.
1908* 1st Bottom Plate Pressure Adjustment

1908 1 Normal Size
If a middle size threshold is not stored with SP1908-9, this SP adjusts the upper
paper lift motor reverse time for paper sizes larger than the small size threshold
set with SP1908-8.
If a middle size threshold is stored with SP1908-9, then this SP adjusts the motor
reverse time for sizes larger than the middle size.
Do not input a value greater than 1200.
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs from the 1st paper tray.
See “Paper Lift Mechanism” for details on SP1908.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
1908 2 Small Size
Adjusts the upper paper lift motor reverse time for paper of the same size as or
smaller than the small size threshold set with SP1908-8.
[0 ~ 2000 / 600 / 1 ms/step]
1908 3 Middle Size
Adjusts the upper paper lift motor reverse time for paper sizes larger than the
small size threshold set with SP1908-8, up to and including the middle size
threshold set with SP1908-9. If a middle size threshold is not stored with SP1908-
9, this SP is not used.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-8 SM
1908 1st Bottom Plate Pressure Re-adjustment

1908 4 Small Size
Adjusts the upper paper lift motor forward rotation time for paper of the same size
as or smaller than the small size threshold set with SP1908-8. The motor rotates
forward when the remaining paper amount is lower than the value of SP1908-6.
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs when paper in the 1st paper tray is
running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 400 / 1 ms/step]
1908 5 Middle Size
Adjusts the upper paper lift motor forward rotation time for paper sizes larger than
the small size threshold set with SP1908-8, up to and including the middle size
threshold set with SP1908-9.
The motor rotates forward when the amount of remaining paper is lower than the
value of SP1908-7.
If a middle size threshold is not stored with SP1908-9, this SP is not used.
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs when paper in the 1st paper tray is
running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 300 / 1 ms/step]
1st Paper Amount
1908 6 Small Size
Selects the remaining paper amount limit for use with SP1908-4.
Set this SP to 2 or 3 when a paper feed problem occurs before near-end.
[0 = None (Empty) / 1 = Near End / 2 = 25% / 3 = 75%]
1908 7 Middle Size
Service
Tables
1st Paper Size
1908 8 1st Small Paper Size Setting
Selects the small size threshold for the 1st paper tray.
“0” means that this setting is not used.
The size used by SP1908 is determined by paper width. See “Paper Lift
Mechanism” for details on SP1908.
[0 = None (Not used) / 1 = HLT/A5 / 2 = A4 / 3 = LT / 4 = DLT / 5 = A3]
1908 9 1st Middle Paper Size Setting
Selects the middle size threshold for the upper tray.
The value must be larger than the small size threshold (SP1908-8). The size used
by SP1908 is determined by paper width. See “Paper Lift Mechanism” for details
on SP1908.
SM 5-9 B205/B209/D007/D008
1909* 2nd Bottom Plate Pressure Adjustment

1909 1 Normal Size
set with SP1909-8.
Do not input a value greater than 1,200.
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs from the 2nd paper tray.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
1909 2 Small Size
Do not input a value greater than 1,200.
[0 ~ 2000 / 600 / 1 ms/step]
1909 3 Middle Size
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
2nd Bottom Plate Pressure Re-adjustment
1909 4 Small Size
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs when paper in the 2nd paper tray
is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 400 / 1 ms/step]
1909 5 Middle Size
The motor rotates forward when the remaining paper amount is lower than the
value of SP1909-7.
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs when paper in the 2nd paper tray
is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 300 / 1 ms/step]
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-10 SM
2nd Paper Amount

1909 6 Small Size
1909 7 Middle Size
See “Optional Paper Tray Unit - Paper Lift Mechanism” for details on SP1909.
2nd Paper Size
1909 8 2nd Small Paper Size Setting
Selects the small size threshold for the 2nd paper tray.
The size used by SP1909 is determined by paper width. See “Paper Lift
Mechanism” for details on SP1909.
1909 9 2nd Middle Paper Size Setting
by SP1909 is determined by paper width. See “Paper Lift Mechanism” for details
on SP1909.
1910* 3rd Bottom Plate Pressure Adjustment

1910 1 Normal Size (Optional PFU)
Service
Tables
set with SP1910-8.
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs from the 3rd paper tray.
See “Optional Paper Tray Unit – Paper Lift Mechanism” for details on SP1910.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
1910 2 Small Size (Optional PFU)
[0 ~ 2000 / 600 / 1 ms/step]
1910 3 Middle Size (Optional PFU)
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
SM 5-11 B205/B209/D007/D008
3rd Bottom Plate Pressure Re-adjustment

1910 4 Small Size
(Optional PFU)
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs when paper in the 3rd paper tray
is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 400 / 1 ms/step]
The motor rotates forward when the remaining paper is lower than the value of
SP1910-7.
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs when paper in the 3rd paper tray
is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 300 / 1 ms/step]
3rd Paper Amount
3rd Paper Size
1910 8 3rd Small Paper Size Setting (Optional PFU)
Selects the small size threshold for the 3rd paper tray.
The size used by SP1910 is determined by paper width. See “Optional Paper Tray
Unit - Paper Lift Mechanism” for details on SP1910.
1910 9 3rd Middle Paper Size Setting (Optional PFU)
by SP1910 is determined by paper width. See “Optional Paper Tray Unit - Paper
Lift Mechanism” for details on SP1910.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-12 SM
1911* 4th Bottom Plate Pressure Adjustment

1911 1 Normal Size (Optional PFU)
If a middle size threshold is not stored with SP19119, this SP adjusts the upper
set with SP19118.
If a middle size threshold is stored with SP19119, then this SP adjusts the motor
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs from the 4th paper tray.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
smaller than the small size threshold set with SP19118.
[0 ~ 2000 / 600 / 1 ms/step]
small size threshold set with SP19118, up to and including the middle size
threshold set with SP19119. If a middle size threshold is not stored with SP19119,
this SP is not used.
[0 ~ 2000 / 200 / 1 ms/step]
4th Bottom Plate Pressure Re-adjustment
1911 4 Small Size
(Optional PFU)
Service
Tables
as or smaller than the small size threshold set with SP19118. The motor rotates
forward when the remaining paper amount is lower than the value of SP19116.
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs when paper in the 4th paper tray
is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 400 / 1 ms/step]
the small size threshold set with SP19118, up to and including the middle size
threshold set with SP19119.
The motor rotates forward when the remaining paper amount is lower than the
value of SP19117.
If a middle size threshold is not stored with SP19119, this SP is not used.
Use this SP when a paper feed problem occurs when paper in the 4th paper tray
is running low.
[0 ~ 2000 / 300 / 1 ms/step]
SM 5-13 B205/B209/D007/D008
4th Paper Amount

Selects the remaining paper amount limit for use with SP19114.
Selects the remaining paper amount limit for use with SP19115.
4th Paper Size
1911 8 4th Small Paper Size Setting (Optional PFU)
Selects the small size threshold for the 4th paper tray.
The size used by SP1911 is determined by paper width. See “Optional Paper Tray
Unit - Paper Lift Mechanism” for details on SP1911.
1911 9 4th Middle Paper Size Setting (Optional PFU)
The value must be larger than the small size threshold (SP19118). The size used
by SP1911 is determined by paper width. See “Optional Paper Tray Unit - Paper
Lift Mechanism” for details on SP1911.
n
1912* Tray Motor Reverse Time

Adjusts the tray motor reverse time.
The tray motor reverses when the tray is pulled out. The tray can be put back in
the machine without damage while the motor reverses.
[0 ~ 9000 / 1700 / 1 ms/step]
1995 Paper Height Sensor Check DFU

These sensors display the status of the paper height sensors for the 1st and 2nd
Paper Trays.
1995 1 1st Paper Tray 1:OK 0:NG
1995 2 2nd Tray 1:OK 0:NG
1997 Jam Detect for Manual Tray

Sets the jam detection method for the bypass tray.
[0 ~ 1/ 0 / 1]
0:Normal Detection. Detects a jam if the size of the paper fed is shorter or longer
than the size selected for the bypass tray.
1:Simple Detection. Detects a jam if the size of the paper fed is longer than the
size set for the bypass tray.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-14 SM
SP2XXX: Drum
2001* Charge Roller Bias Adjustment
2001 1* Printing
Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller during printing.
This value will be changed automatically when the charge roller bias correction is
performed.
Note that if this value is changed, the charge roller voltage will be corrected based
on the new voltage.
[2100 ~ 1500 / –1700 / 1 V/step]
2001 2* ID Sensor Pattern
Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller when making the Vsdp ID sensor
pattern (for charge roller bias correction).
The actual charge roller voltage is this value plus the value of SP20011.
[0 ~ 400 / 200 / 1 V/step]
2001 3 Temporary Input
Inputs the charge roller voltage temporarily for test purposes.
Do not change the value.
[0 ~ –2500 / 0 / 1 V/step]
2005* Charge Roller Bias Correction

2005 1 Vsdp Min
Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller correction.
When the value of Vsdp/Vsg is less than this value, the charge roller voltage
increases by 50V (e.g. from –500 to –550). The size of the increase depends on
SP2005 3.
[0 ~ 100 / 90 / 1%/step]
2005 2 Vsdp Max
Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge roller correction.
When the value of Vsdp/Vsg is greater than this value, the charge roller voltage
Service
Tables
decreases by 50V (e.g. from –550 to –500). The size of the decrease depends on
SP2005 3.
[0 ~ 100 / 95 / 1 %/step]
2005 3 Charge Roller Bias Correction
Adjusts the size of the charge roller voltage correction.
[0 ~ 200 / 50 / 1 V/step]
SM 5-15 B205/B209/D007/D008
2101* Erase Margin Adjustment

2101 1 Leading Edge
Adjusts the leading edge erase margin.
The specification is 3 ± 2 mm. See “Replacement and
Adjustment - Copy Adjustment” for details.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2101 2 Trailing Edge – Small Paper
Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for paper of length 216 mm or less.
The specification is 3 ± 2 mm. See “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2101 3 Trailing Edge – Middle Paper
Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for paper of length 216.1 ~ 297 mm.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2101 4 Trailing Edge – Large Paper
Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for paper longer than 297 mm.
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 4.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2101 5 Left Side
Adjusts the left edge erase margin.
The specification is 2 ± 1.5 mm. See “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2101 6 Right Side
Adjusts the right edge erase margin.
The specification is 2 + 2.5/-1.5 mm. See “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2101 7 Rear – Trailing Edge (Duplex 2nd Side)
Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin on the reverse side of duplex copies.
The actual trailing edge erase margin on the reverse side is this value plus the
value of SP21012 or 3 or 4.
Adjustment” for details
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 1.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
2101 8 Rear – Left Side (Duplex 2nd Side)
Adjusts the left side erase margin on the reverse side of duplex copies.
The actual left side erase margin on the reverse side is this value plus the value of
SP21015.
The specification is 2 ± 1.5 mm. See “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
2101 9 Rear – Right Side (Duplex 2nd Side)
Adjusts the right side erase margin on the reverse side of duplex copies.
The actual right side erase margin on the reverse side is this value plus the value
of SP21016.
The specification is 2 +2.5/–1.5 mm. See “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-16 SM
2101 10 Printer - Rear Trailing Edge

In printer mode, adjusts the trailing edge erase margin on the reverse side of
duplex copies.
The actual trailing edge erase margin on the reverse side is this value plus the
value of SP21017.
Adjustment” for details
[0.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2103* LD Power Adjustment [50 ~ 170 / 129 / 1/step]

Adjusts the LD power. DFU
Do not change the value.
2110* Test Mode dpi

Sets the scanning resolution (dpi). DFU
[See below / 8 / 0~18]
0: 400x400 dpi
4: 300x300 dpi
8: 600x600 dpi
2201* Development Bias Adjustment

2201 1 Printing
Adjusts the development bias during printing.
This can be adjusted as a temporary measure if faint copies appear due to an
aging drum.
[–1500 ~ –200 / –650 / 1 V/step]
2201 2 ID Sensor Pattern
Adjusts the development bias for making the ID sensor pattern.
Service
The actual development voltage for the ID sensor pattern is this value plus the
Tables
value of SP22011.
This should not be used in the field, because it affects ID sensor pattern density,
which affects toner supply.
[0 = N (200V) / 1 = H (240V) / 2 = L (160V) / 3 = HH (280V) / 4 = LL (120V)]
2210* Bias Off Time

2210 1 Charge Bias
Adjusts the charge voltage (-1200V) application time.
DFU
When the charge voltage and development bias are turned off at the same time,
toner or carrier will be attracted to the drum. To reduce the toner or carrier
attraction, the machine applies –1200V to the charge roller before the
development bias is turned off. This SP adjusts the time for applying the charge.
[0 ~ 150 / 80 / 1 ms /step]
2210 2 Development Bias
Adjusts the development bias off time.
DFU
[-120 ~ 120 / 0 / 1ms/step]
SM 5-17 B205/B209/D007/D008
2211* PCU Reverse Interval

Adjusts the PCU reverse interval for cleaning during a job.
When the machine has made this number of copies in the middle of a job, the
machine reverses to clean the edge of the cleaning blade. After cleaning, the
machine resumes the job. Set to a shorter interval if thin white lines appear on
printouts.
[0 ~ 999 / 100 / 1 sheet/step]
0: Never cleans during job
2213* Copies after Near End

Selects the number of copies that can be made after toner near-end has been
detected.
[0 = 50 pages / 1 = 20 pages]
If the user normally makes copies with a high proportion of black, reduce the
interval.
2220* Vt/Vsg/Vsp/Vsdp/Vts Display

2220 1 Vsp Displays the individual Vt, Vsg, Vsp, Vsdp, and Vts
2220 2 Vsg values.
2220 3 Vsdp
2220 4 Vt
2220 5 Vts
2220 6 Vsp/Vsg/Vsdp/Vt/Vts Displays all the data used in process control, separated
by slashes (/).
2301* Transfer Current Adjust

2301 1* Normal Paper
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller during copying from a paper tray
when the user uses the “Normal” paper setting.
If the user normally feeds thicker paper from a paper tray, use a higher setting.
[0 = –2 μA / 1 = 0 μA / 2 = +2 μA / 3 = +4 μA]
2301 2* Thick/Thin Paper
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller during copying from the by-pass
tray. These settings are also used if the 2nd tray is used and special paper is
selected.
If the user normally feeds thicker paper from the by-pass tray/2nd tray (special
paper), use a higher setting. If waste toner is re-attracted from the drum (this can
occur when using an OHP sheet), use a higher setting.
[0 = –2 μA / 1 = 0 μA / 2 = +2 μA / 3 = +4 μA]
2301 3* Duplex, Side2
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller during copying from the duplex
unit when the user uses the “Normal” paper setting.
Use this SP when the image on the rear side of the paper has a problem caused
by poor image transfer.
[0 = –2 μA / 1 = 0 μA / 2 = +2 μA / 3 = +4 μA]
2301 4* Cleaning
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller during roller cleaning.
If toner remains on the roller after cleaning (dirty background appears on the rear
side of the paper), increase the current.
[–10 ~ 0 / –4 / 1 μA/step]
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-18 SM
2301 5 Input – Front DFU

2301 6 Input – Rear DFU
2301 7 Temp Inside the Machine
Displays the temperature measured inside the machine just after power-on (by the
thermistor on the SBCU board) the last time that the fusing unit was less than
40°C just after the machine was switched on.
The transfer current is corrected in accordance with this value.
2801 Developer Initialization

Initializes the developer and resets the TD and ID sensor outputs to their defaults.
Do this SP after you fill the PCU with developer at machine installation and every
time developer is replaced.
2802 Developer Mixing

Mixes the developer and checks Vt. The machine mixes the developer for 2
minutes and while doing this, it reads the TD sensor output (Vt). It does not
initialize the TD sensor output.
If the machine has not been used for a long time, prints may have a dirty
background. In this case, use this SP mode to mix the developer.
2803* Developer Initialization Data

2803 1 Vts
When the machine detects a new PCU (photoconductor unit) in the machine, it
checks the heat seals at the creation of the first ID sensor pattern. After the
agitator is rotated for 30 sec., the machine creates the second ID sensor pattern
and corrects the reference value of the TD sensor. The corrected reference value
for the TD sensor is recorded here.
2803 2 ID Sensor PWM Value
Service
Tables
Displays the PWM value of the ID sensor after performing the developer
initialization. This value is added to the value of SP2934 4 (PWM Start Value for
Vsg Auto Adjust).
2804 New PCU Check DFU

This SP determines whether the machine is set to recognize a new PCU.
[0~1/0/1]
0: New PCU recognition on.
1: New PCU recognition off.
SM 5-19 B205/B209/D007/D008
2901* Separation Voltage Adj

2901 1 Front – Leading Edge
Adjusts the voltage that is applied to the separation plate during printing at the
leading edge of the paper on the front side.
If the copies have pawl marks at the leading edge, increase this voltage.
[–4000 ~ –1000 / –1800 / 1 V/step]
2901 2 Front – Image Area
Adjusts the voltage that is applied to the separation plate during printing on the
image area of the paper on the front side.
If the copies have pawl marks in the image area, increase this voltage.
[–4000 ~ –1000 / –1800 / 1 V/step]
2901 3 Rear – Leading Edge
Adjusts the voltage applied to the separation plate, during printing at the leading
edge of the paper on the rear side.
See SP29011.
[–4000 ~ –1000 / –2100 / 1 V/step]
2901 4 Rear – Image Area
Adjusts the voltage applied to the separation plate, during printing at the image area
of the paper on the rear side.
See SP29012.
[–4000 ~ –1000 / –2100 / 1 V/step]
2902* Test Pattern

2902 3 Test Pattern Printing Prints the test patterns. Select the number of the test
pattern that you want to print
2902-2: Not used.
To print the IPU Test Pattern – SP 4417
2902-3: When adjusting the printing registration, select
no.10 (Trimming Area Pattern). [0 ~ 24 / 0 / 1 step]
2906* Tailing Correction

2906 1 Shift Value
Shifts the image across the page at the interval specified by SP2906 2.
When making many copies of an original that contains vertical lines (such as a
table), separation may not work correctly, then a tailing image will occur (ghosts of
the vertical lines will continue past the bottom of the table). This SP prevents this
problem.
[0.0 ~ 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2906 2 Interval
Changes the interval for the image shift specified by SP2906 1.
[0 ~ 10 / 0 / 1 page/step]
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-20 SM
2907* Line Width Correction

Adjusts the line width for the copy mode. The default setting disables this function.
A number smaller than the default makes lines thinner, a number larger than the
default makes lines thicker.
2907 1 Text Mode [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
2907 2 Photo Mode [0 ~ 10 / 6 / 1 step]
2907 3 Text/Photo Mode [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
2907 4 Pale Mode
2907 5 Generation Mode
2908 Forced Toner Supply

Forces the toner bottle to supply toner to the toner supply unit.
Press Execute on the touch panel to start.
During this process, the machine supplies toner until the toner concentration in the
development unit reaches a standard level. However, if the toner concentration
does not reach a standard level, the machine supplies toner for 2 minutes
maximum.
2909* Main Scan Magnification

[-0.5 ~ 0.5 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]
2909 1 Copy (Short Edge Feed)
Adjusts the main scan magnification in copy mode when the machine feeds the
paper in the short edge feed orientation.
2909 2 Printer (Short Edge Feed)
Adjusts the main scan magnification in printer mode when the machine feeds the
paper in the short edge feed orientation.
2909 3 Copy –(Long Edge Feed)
Service
Tables
Adjusts the main scan magnification in copy mode when the machine feeds the
paper in the long edge feed orientation.
2909 4 Printer (Long Edge Feed)
Adjusts the main scan magnification in printer mode when the machine feeds the
paper in the long edge feed orientation.
2910* Margin Adjustment for By-pass

Adjusts the blank margin at the trailing edge of paper fed from the by-pass table.
[-9.0 ~ +9.0 / 0 mm / 0.1 mm/step]
2913* ID Adjustment for Test Pattern

Adjusts the image density level for black pixels on test pattern printouts (patterns
are made with SP2902)
[0 ~ 15 / 15 / 1/step]
This SP affects all test patterns except for the grayscale test patterns.
SM 5-21 B205/B209/D007/D008
2915* Polygon Motor Idling Time

Selects the polygon motor idling time.
[0 = None / 1 = 15 s / 2 = 25 s]
If the user sets an original, touches a key, or opens the platen cover/DF, the
polygon motor starts idling to make a faster first copy. However, with the default
(15 s), the motor stops if the user does nothing for 15 s, and stops 15 s after the
end of a job.
If set at “0”, the polygon motor never turns off during stand-by. However, when the
machine goes into energy saver mode, the polygon motor turns off regardless of
this timer.
2921* Toner Supply Mode

Selects the toner supply mode.
[0 = Normal 1 / 1 = Normal 2 / 2 = Fixed 1 / 3 = Fixed 2, 4 = Sensor 3]
Normally, only use setting 0. Change to 3 temporarily if the TD sensor is defective.
Do not use settings 1, 2 and 4; these are for designer’s use only.
2922* Toner Supply Time

Adjusts the toner supply motor on time for sensor supply mode.
This SP is effective only when SP2921 is “0” or “1”.
[0.1 ~ 5.0 / 0.6 / 0.1 s/step]
Increasing this value increases the toner supply motor on time. So, use a high
value if the user tends to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of black.
2923* Toner Recovery Time

Adjusts the toner supply motor on time during recovery from toner near-end/end.
This SP is effective only when SP2921 is “0”, “1”, or “2”.
[1 ~ 60 / 30 / 1 s/step]
Note that toner recovery is done in a 3-second cycle. So, the input value should be
a multiple of 3 (e.g. 3, 6 ,9). See “Toner Density Control” for more details.
2925* Toner Supply Ratio

Adjusts the toner supply rate for fixed toner supply mode.
This SP is effective only when SP2921 is “2” or “3”.
Increasing this value increases the toner supply motor on time. So, use a high
value if the user tends to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of black.
See “Toner Density Control” for more details.
[0 ~ 7 / 0 / 1/step]
0: t 4: 12t
1: 2t 5: 16t
2: 4t 6: On continuously
3: 8t 7: 0 s
t: 200 ms
2926* Standard Vt DFU

Adjusts Vts (Vt for a new PCU). The TD sensor output is adjusted to this value
during the TD sensor initial setting process. This SP is effective only when SP2921
is “0”, “1”, or “2”.
[0.00 ~ 5.00 / 2.50 / 0.05 V/step]
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-22 SM
2927* ID Sensor Control

Selects whether the ID sensor is used or not for toner density control.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
If this value is “0”, dirty background may occur after the machine has not been
used for a long time.
2928* Toner End Clear

Clears the toner end condition. Press Execute on the touch panel to clear the
toner end condition without adding new toner.
When you press Execute, the following are cleared:
• Toner end indicator (goes out)
• Toner near-end counter
• Toner near-end level
When making a lot of copies after changing this setting to “1”, the carrier may be
attracted to the drum when the toner runs out, which may damage the drum.
2929* Vref Adjustment

2929 1 Upper Limit
Adjusts the upper limit for Vref. [0.5 ~ 3.5 / 3.10 / 0.05 V/step]
2921 2 Lower Limit
Adjusts the lower limit for Vref. [0.5 ~ 3.5 / 1.40 / 0.05 V/step]
2930* TD Sensor Manual Setting

Adjusts the TD sensor output. DFU
[0 ~ 5 / 0.0V / 0.05V/step]
2931* TD (V/wt%) Setting

Adjusts the TD sensor sensitivity (coefficient: S) for toner density control. DFU
Service
Tables
[0.01 ~ 1.50 / 0.4 / 0.01/step]
2932* Toner Density Control Level

Adjusts the toner density control threshold level.
[0 = Normal / 1 = Dark / 2 = Light / 3 = Darker / 4 = Lighter]
Use this SP when you want to adjust the image density.
2933* ID Sensor Control Correction

Adjusts the ID sensor control coefficient. DFU
[0.5 ~ 3 / 1 / 0.1/step]
2934* ID Sensor PWM Setting

2934 1 Display Displays the PWM of the ID Sensor LED.
2934 2 Upper Limit
Adjusts the upper limit of the PWM for the ID sensor LED. DFU
[0 ~ 1279 / 0 / 1/step]
2934 3 Upper Limit Correction
Corrects the upper limit of the PWM for the ID sensor LED. DFU
[0 ~ 255 / 50 / 1/step]
SM 5-23 B205/B209/D007/D008
2935 ID Sensor Initialization

Performs the ID sensor initial setting.
Press Execute on the touch panel to start. Perform this setting after replacing or
cleaning the ID sensor.
2936* ID Sensor Pattern Size

Selects the ID sensor pattern size in the main scan direction.
Set to 1 if white spots or black spots appear on prints. The ID sensor pattern is
290 mm wide, and when this is cleaned off, dirt is removed also.
[0 = 20 mm / 1 = 290 mm]
2989 Original PCU ID South Korea only

Displays the ISSUER CODE of the loaded PCU. The history of the PCU ID codes
is stored in NVRAM for display.
2989 1 Latest Most current code (in use).
2989 2 Last 1 Up to four issuer codes of toner lots in the same series can be stored.
2989 3 Last 2 If a PCU with a new series code is set, then the new code replaces the
2989 4 Last 3 history of the previous PCU.
2989 5 Last 4
2990 Original Toner ID South Korea only

Displays the ISSUER CODE of the loaded toner. The history of the toner ID codes
are stored in NVRAM for display.
2990 1 Latest Most current code (in use).
2990 2 Last 1 Up to four issuer codes of toner lots in the same series can be stored.
2990 3 Last 2 If toner with a new series code is set, then the new code replaces the
2990 4 Last 3 history of the previous toner.
2990 5 Last 4
2991 Original Toner Counter South Korea only

Displays the page counts for the ISSUER CODE history.
[0~65535 / 0 / 1]
2991 1 Latest This SP displays the page counts for each successive issuer code. See
2991 2 Last 1 SP2990 above.
2991 3 Last 2
2991 4 Last 3
2991 5 Last 4
2992* Copies After TD Sensor Error

Selects the number of copies that can be made after a TD sensor error has been
detected. When the machine copies this amount, an SC condition will occur. If the
optional fax unit is installed, the SC condition occurs immediately regardless of the
number of prints (this is because the sender of the fax cannot check the image
quality of the printout).
[0 = 100 copies / 1 = 200 copies]
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-24 SM
2993* ISSUER CODE Ref

Sets the standard issuer code, once it has been determined. South Korea Only.
[0~9999 / 0 / 1]
2994* Vts Limitation - Factory

2994 1 Upper Limit - Factory Only DFU
2994 2 Lower Limit - Factory Only DFU
2995* ID Sensor Detection Interval

2995 1 Warming-up
This SP controls the temperature at which the ID sensor pattern is created after
the machine is turned on, or after the machine returns to full operation from the
energy saver or auto off mode.
[0 ~ 255 / 30 / 1 degree]
2995 2 Number of Pages
The machine makes an ID sensor pattern after the specified number of prints has
been made.
[0 ~ 999 / 300 / 1 page/step]
2996 Transfer Roller Cleaning

These SP codes determine how the transfer roller is cleaned.
2996 1 0:OFF 1:ON
Selects whether the transfer roller is cleaned. Transfer roller cleaning is necessary
only when black spots occur in the image areas of copies. This can occur when
bad environmental conditions increase the toner density.
Set this to ‘1’ when dirty background appears on the reverse side of the first page
of a copy job. However, the first copy time will be longer regardless of the SP2996
Service
Tables
001 setting.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
2996 2 Interval
This SP sets the page interval for transfer roller cleaning when SP2996 001 is set
to "1" (Yes). Increase this setting only when absolutely necessary. A higher setting
increases wear on the PCU.
[0~100/50/1 sheets]
Note
• This SP does not execute for the first copy after power on or when the machine
returns from the energy save or auto off mode.
• This SP setting does cannot correct poor copies if there is a problem with the
TD sensor.
2997* Standard Vt (Factory Only) DFU
SM 5-25 B205/B209/D007/D008
2998* PCU Reverse Rotation Time DFU

2998 1 Wait Time
Adjusts the waiting time for starting to rotate the drum in reverse after the end of
each job. The wait time calculation formula is as follows.
[0 ~ 999 / 600/ 1]
This SP is adjusted in units of 30 ms (1 step = 30 ms, 2 steps = 60 ms, etc.)
If "0" is selected, the drum reverses immediately at the end of the job.
2998 2 Reverse Time
Adjusts the drum reverse rotation time.
[0 ~ 99 / 60/ 1]
If "0" is selected, the drum does not reverse at the end of the job.
2998 3 Brake Time
Adjusts the length of time of braking to stop reverse rotation of the drum.
[0~99/60/1]
If "0" is selected, the drum stops reverse rotation immediately.
Note: Adjust the SP only if the PCU makes noise during braking when the drum
rotation slows. To reduce or eliminate the noise, select a lower setting to reduce
the braking time.
2999* Toner Control Data Display DFU

Displays the toner density control data on the debug monitor.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-26 SM
SP4-XXX: Scanner
4008* Scanner Sub Scan Mag
Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction.
[–0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1% step]
Use the key to toggle between + and – before entering the value. The
specification is ± 1%. See “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy Adjustment” for
details.
4009* Scanner Main Scan Mag

Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction for scanning.
[–0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1% step]
specification is ± 1%. See “Replacement and Adjustment – Copy Adjustment” for
details.
4010* Scanner Leading Edge Registration

Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning in platen mode.
[–0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step]
(–): The image moves in the direction of the leading edge.
specification is 2 ± 1.5 mm. See “Replacement and Adjustment – Copy
4011* Scanner Side-to-side Registration

Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in platen mode.
[–4.6 ~ +4.6 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm step]
(–): The image disappears at the left side.
(+): The image appears.
Service
Tables
specification is 2 ± 1.5 mm. See “Replacement and Adjustment – Copy
4012* Scanner Erase Margin

4012 1 Leading Edge Adjusts the erase margin at each side for scanning.
4012 2 Trailing Edge Do not adjust this unless the user wishes to have a scanner
4012 3 Right Side margin that is greater than the printer margin.
4012 4 Left Side [0 ~ 9.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4013 Scanner Free Run

Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on.
Press ON on the touch panel to start this feature. Press the D (Clear/Stop) key to
stop.
SM 5-27 B205/B209/D007/D008
4015* White Plate Scanning

4015 1 Start Position
Adjusts the scanning start position on the white plate for auto shading.
The default is 10.5 mm from the leading edge. The setting specifies how far
scanning starts from the default position.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4015 2 Scanning Area
Adjusts the width of the area on the white plate (in the sub scan direction) that is
scanned for auto shading.
The default is 4.76 mm. The current setting specifies the difference from this
default.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4301 APS Data Display

Displays the status of the APS sensors and platen/DF cover sensor ( 4.2.9).
4303* APS Small Size Original

Selects if the copier defaults to A5 SEF/LEF if the APS sensor cannot detect the
size of a small original.
[0~2/0/1]
0: Not detected as A5
1: Detected as A5 SEF
2: Detected as A5 LEF
4305* Original Size Detection

Selects whether the machine determines that the original is A4/LT, or 8K/16K.
8K/16K is not available for USA models.
[0 = Normal (LT for USA models, A4 for Europe/Asia models)
1 = Reversed [A4 for USA models, LT for Europe/Asia models]
2 = 8K/16K]
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-28 SM
4417 IPU Test Pattern

Prints test patterns from the IPU video data outputs.
0.No Print
1.Vertical Line – 1 dot
2.Vertical Line – 2 dot
3.Horizontal Line – 1 dot
4.Horizontal Line – 2 dot
5.Alternating Dot Pattern
6.Grid Pattern – 1 dot
7.Vertical Bands
8.Grayscale – Horizontal (8 level)
9. Grayscale – Vertical (8 level)
10.Grayscale – 16 level
11.Cross Pattern
12.Slant Pattern
13.Patch Pattern (256 level)
14Patch Pattern (64 level)
15.Trimming Area
16.Frequency characteristics – Vertical
15.Frequency characteristics – Horizontal
Change to the copy mode display by pressing the L (Interrupt) key, then print
the test pattern.
4428 SBU Auto Adjustment

Performs the auto scanner adjustment.
Using this SP mode after replacing the white plate or erasing the memory on the
controller board. See “Replacement and Adjustment – Copy Image Adjustments -
Standard White Density Adjustment” for details on how to do this.
Service
Tables
Press Execute on the touch panel to start.
4430 A456B34 DFU
SM 5-29 B205/B209/D007/D008
4550* Scanner Appli: Text: Print

4550 1 MTF Filter Level: Main Scan Set the MTF coefficient for main/sub scan
4550 2 MTF Filter Level: Sub Scan directions.
[0~15/8/1]
0: Weakest Å 8: Default Æ 15: Strongest
4550 3 MTF Filter Strength: Main Scan Set the MTF strength for main/sub scan
4550 4 MTF Filter Strength: Sub Scan directions.
[0~7/4/1]
4550 5 Smoothing Selects the level of smoothing for originals
that contain dithered images.
[0~7/0/1]
0: Default (Off) Æ 7: Strongest
4550 6 Brightness (Not Used) Sets the overall brightness of the image.
[1~255/128/1]
1: Weakest Å 128: Default Æ 255:
Strongest
4550 7 Contrast (Not Used) Sets the overall contrast of the image.
[1~255/128/1]
Strongest
4550 8 Independent Dot Erase Sets the level of independent dot erasure to
improve the appearance of background.
[0~7/0/1]
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-30 SM
4551* Scanner Appli: Text: OCR

[0~15/8/1]
[0~7/4/1]
4551 5 Smoothing Selects the level of smoothing.
[0~7/0/1]
[1~255/128/1]
Strongest
[1~255/128/1]
Strongest
[0~7/0/1]
4552* Scanner Appli: Text/Photo
Service
Tables
[0~15/8/1]
4552 3 MTF Filter Strength: Main Set the MTF strength for main/sub scan
Scan directions.
4552 4 MTF Filter Strength: Sub [0~7/4/1]
Scan 0: Weakest Å 4: Default Æ 7: Strongest
[0~7/0/1]
[1~255/128/1]
[1~255/128/1]
[0~7/0/1]
SM 5-31 B205/B209/D007/D008
4553* Scanner Appli: Photo

[0~15/8/1]
[0~7/4/1]
[0~7/0/1]
[1~255/128/1]
Strongest
[1~255/128/1]
Strongest
[0~7/0/1]
4556* Scanner Appli Grey Scale

[0~15/0/1]
[0~7/0/1]
[0~7/0/1]
[1~255/128/1]
Strongest
[1~255/128/1]
Strongest
[0~7/0/1]
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-32 SM
4623* Black Level Adj. 1 DFU

Displays the DAC value of black offset correction.
4623 1 Rough: Even [0~255/1]
4623 2 Rough: Odd
4623 3 Fine: Even
4623 4 Fine: Odd
4624* Black Level Adj. 2 DFU

Displays the DAC value of black offset correction.
4624 1 Rough: Even [0~255/1]
4624 2 Rough: Odd
4624 3 Fine: Even
4624 4 Fine: Odd
4646* SBU Adjustment Error

Use this SP to determine whether the automatic scanner adjustment loop has
exceeded the prescribed number of loops and flagged a timeout. The position
of the bits that display "1" tell you where the error has occurred.
Bit No. Where the Error Occurred
Bit 0 White Level
Bit 1 Black Level Adj 1
Bit 2 Black Level Adj 2
Bit 3 Black Level
Bit 4 SBU
Bit 7 Reference Adjustment
Service
Tables
4800 Black Level Adjustment Mode DFU
This SP switches the black offset compensation mode on and off. Black offset
correction is done during automatic image density correction (ADS).
Note: This SP operates only if the black offset correction circuit is built into the
SBU.
0: Off
1: On
SM 5-33 B205/B209/D007/D008
4901 SBU Adjustment

4901 1 Gain – Even DFU
Checks the difference value of the black level for the EVEN channel after adjusting
the black level at power-up. However, after doing a memory all clear (SP5801),
use it to re-input the previous value.
[0 ~ 255 / 40 / 1/step]
4901 2 Gain – Odd DFU
Checks the difference value of the black level for the ODD channel after adjusting
the black level at power-up.. However, after doing a memory all clear (SP5801),
[0 ~ 255 / 40 / 1/step]
4901 3 Black Level – Even DFU
Displays the coefficient of the D/A converter for the DC cont AGC gain curve for
the EVEN channel.
4901 4 Black Level - Odd DFU
Displays the coefficient of the D/A converter for the DC cont AGC gain curve for
the ODD channel.
4901 5 White Level: EVEN DFU
Displays the result of white level adjustment for the EVEN channel after automatic
density level adjustment is done after the machine is switched on.
4901 6 White Level: ODD DFU
Displays the result of white level adjustment for the ODD channel after automatic
density level adjustment is done after the machine is switched on.
4901 7 Ref. Cont DFU
Displays and allows adjustment of the coefficient of the D/A converter for the AGC
gain curve for scanning the white plate. After doing a memory all clear (SP5801),
[0 ~255 / 147 / 1/step]
4902 Exposure Lamp ON

Turns on the exposure lamp.
Press ON on the touch panel to turn on the lamp. Press OFF to turn off the lamp.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-34 SM
4903* Image Quality Adjustment Note: These adjustments are effective only for the
- All “Custom Setting” Original type.
4903 1 Text: 25% ~ 34% Adjusts the image quality in Text mode.
4903 2 Text: 35% ~ 66% A larger number increases contrast and sharpens
4903 3 Text: 67% ~ 141% the image but moiré may appear.
A smaller number reduces contrast and moiré but
4903 4 Text: 142% ~ 400%
the line may become narrower.
[0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
4903 5 Photo: 25% ~ 34% Adjusts the image quality in Photo mode.
4903 6 Photo: 35% ~ 66% 0 ~ 6 are for a glossy photo image (error diffusion)
4903 7 Photo: 67% ~ 141% 7 ~ 20 are for a printed photo image (dithering)
If copy quality is not satisfactory, try another setting
4903 8 Photo: 142% ~ 400%
(trial and error)
[0 ~ 20 / 12/ 1/step]
4903 9 Text/Photo: 25% ~ 34% Adjusts the image quality in Text/Photo mode.
A larger number increases contrast and sharpens
the image but moiré may appear.
[0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
4903 10 Text/Photo: 35% ~ 66% [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
4903 11 Text/Photo: 67% ~ 141%
4903 12 Text/Photo: 142% ~ 400%
4903 13 Pale: 25% ~ 34% Adjusts the image quality in Pale mode.
4903 14 Pale: 35% ~ 66% A larger number increase the number of gradations
4903 15 Pale: 67% ~ 141% in low contrast areas.
4903 16 Pale: 142% ~ 400% [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
4903 17 Generation: 25% ~ 34% Adjusts the image quality in Generation mode.
A larger number increases contrast and sharpens
Service
Tables
the image but moiré may appear.
[0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
4903 18 Generation: 35% ~ 66% [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 step]
4903 19 Generation: 67% ~ 141%
4903 20 Generation: 142% ~ 400%
SM 5-35 B205/B209/D007/D008
4904* Image Quality Adj. - Other

Independent Dot Erase
4904 1 Text This adjustment is only effective for the “Custom Setting”
4904 2 Photo original type.
4904 3 Text/Photo With a larger SP setting, more dots are detected as
4904 4 Pale independent dots and erased. However, dots in mesh-like
images may be detected as independent dots mistakenly. If
“0” is selected, independent dot erase is disabled.
[0 ~ 10 / 0 / 1 step]
4904 5 Generation [0 ~ 10 / 3 / 1 step]
Background Erase
4904 8 Text/Photo A larger number reduces dirty background. If “0” is selected,
4904 9 Pale background erase is disabled.
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 step]
4904 10 Generation [0 ~ 255 / 9 / 1 step]
Gamma
4904 13 Text/Photo Selects the gamma table for each original type.
4904 14 Pale [0 ~ 2 / 5 / 1/step]
4904 15 Generation 0: Standard gamma table
1: This gamma table reduces the background of the original
and gives sharp characters.
2: The gamma table increases the number of gradations in
high-density areas.
4905* Image Data Path

Selects one of the following video data outputs which will be used for printing. DFU
[0 ~ 3 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Normal
1: After black level correction
2: After shading correction without black level correction
3: Shading data
4907* Gash Adj: Others

4907 1* Fax 25%, 50% Reduction
Determines whether 25% and 50% reduction is available in fax mode.
[0 = No, 1 = Yes]
4907 2 Outline Level DFU
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-36 SM
4909* IPU Image Data Path

Selects one of the following image data outputs, which will be used for printing.
DFU
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 step]
Bit 7: Shading
Bit 6: Scanner gamma
Bit 5: Pre-filtering
Bit 4: Magnification
Bit 3: Scanner/Printer Mask
Bit 2: Gradation
Bit 1: Filtering
Bit 0: Printer gamma
4920 Scanning (Factory Only) DFU
4930* Sensor Condition

4930 1 Platen Cover sensor Checks the following sensors in the scanner unit.
[0 = Opened, 1 = Closed]
4930 2 Scanner HP Sensor [0 = Opened, 1 = Closed]
4999 ADF Scan Glass Dust Check

This function checks the narrow scanning glass of the ADF for dust that can cause
black lines in copies. If dust is detected a system banner message is displayed,
but processing does not stop.
4999 1 Detection Mode
Issues a warning if there is dust on the narrow scanning glass of the ADF when the
original size is detected before a job starts. This function can detect dust on the
Service
Tables
white plate above the scanning glass, as well as dust on the glass. Sensitivity of
the level of detection is adjusted with SP4999 2.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1]
0:Off. No dust warning.
1:On. Dust warning. This warning does not stop the job.
Note: Before switching this setting on, clean the ADF scanning glass and the white
plate above the scanning glass.
4999 2 Detect Level
Adjusts the sensitivity for dust detection on the ADF scanning glass. This SP is
available only after SP49991 is switched on.
[0~8 / 4/ 1]
If you see black streaks in copies when no warning has been issued, raise the
setting to increase the level of sensitivity. If warnings are issued when you see not
black streaks in copies, lower the setting.
Note: Dust that triggers a warning could be removed from the glass by the
originals in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is not
detected and the warning remains on.
SM 5-37 B205/B209/D007/D008
SP5XXX: Mode
5024* mm/inch Selection

Selects whether mm or inches are used in the display.
Note: After selecting the number, you must turn the main power switch off and on.
Europe/Asia model: [0 = mm / 1 = inch]
American model: [0 = mm / 1 = inch]
5044 Operation Panel Bit SW

5044 1 SW1 DFU
5044 2 SW2 DFU
5045 Accounting Counter

Selects whether the printer counter is displayed on the LCD.
[0~1/0/1]
0: Displays total counter only.
1: Displays both total counter and printer counter.
5051 Toner Refill Detection Display

Switches the toner refill prompt display off on. Default: On
5055 Display IP Address

Switch the banner display of the IP address off and on. (Default: *Off)
[OFF] ON
If this SP is switched on, the IP address will be displayed below “Ready” while the
machine is in stand by mode.
5104* A3/DLT Double Count

Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. “Yes” counts except from the
bypass tray. When “Yes” is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is
A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-38 SM
5106* Density Level Setting

Selects the image density level used in ADS mode.
[1~7 / 4 / 1 notch per step]
Example: If you set SP5106 6 to “2”: Pressing the Auto Image Density key toggles
the display off and manual notch 2 is selected.
Adjust this SP if the customer cannot attain clean copies after performing
automatic density adjustment
5113 Optional Counter Type

51131 Default Optional Counter Type
Selects the type of counter:
0: None
1: Key Card (RK3, 4) Japan only
2: Key Card Down
3: Pre-paid Card
4: Coin Rack
5: MF Key Card
11: Exp Key Card (Add)
12: Exp Key Card (Deduct)
5113 2 External Optional Counter Type
Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external
device for user access control.
Note: “SDK” refers to software on an SD card.
[0~3/1]
0: None
1: Expansion Device 1
Service
Tables
5118 Disable Copying

Temporarily denies access to the machine. Japan Only
[0~ 1/0/1]
0: Release for normal operation
1: Prohibit access to machine
SM 5-39 B205/B209/D007/D008
5120 Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal

Do not change. Japan Only
[0~2/ 0 /1]
0: Yes. Normal reset
1: Standby. Resets before job start/after completion
2: No. Normally no reset
5121 Counter Up Timing

Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed-in or at
paper exit. Japan Only
[0~ 1/ 0 /1]
0: Feed count
1: No feed count
5127 APS Mode

This SP can be used to switch APS (Auto Paper Select) off when a coin lock or
pre-paid key card device is connected to the machine.
[0~ 1/ 0 /1]
0: On
1: Off
5129* F Paper Size Selection

Selects the “F” paper size.
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1 step]
0: 8" x 13"
1: 8.5" x 13"
2: 8.25" x 13"
5131* Paper Size Type Selection

Selects the paper size (type) for both originals and copy paper.
[0~2 / 1 / 1 step]
0:Japan
1:North America
2:Europe
After changing the setting, turn the copier off and on. If the paper size of the archive
files stored on the HDD is different, abnormal copies could result. Ask the customer to
restore the archive files.
5150 Bypass Length Setting

Sets up the by-pass tray for long paper.
[0~1/0 /1]
0: Off
1: On. Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long.
With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-40 SM
5162 App. Switch Method

Controls if the application screen is changed with a hardware switch or a software
switch.
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: Soft Key Set
1: Hard Key Set
5167 Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off

Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP
is used when the receiving fax is accounted for by an external accounting device.
0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
5169 CE Login
If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this
SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
5179* Bypass Size Error

This SP determines whether a paper size error prompt appears when the machine
detects the wrong paper size for the job and jams during feed from the bypass tray.
[0~1/0/1]
0: Off
Service
1: On
Tables
5212 Page Numbering
5212 3 Duplex Printout Left/Right Position Horizontally positions the page numbers
printed on both sides during duplexing.
[–10~+10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is left, + is right.
5212 4 Duplex Printout High/Low Position Vertically positions the page numbers
printed on both sides during duplexing.
[–10~+10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is down, + is up.
SM 5-41 B205/B209/D007/D008
5302 Set Time DFU

Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory before
delivery. The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[–1440~1440/1 min.]
JA: +540 (Tokyo)
NA: -300 (NY)
EU: +6- (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
5307 Summer Time

Lets you set the machine to adjust its date and time automatically with the change to
Daylight Savings time in the spring and back to normal time in the fall. This SP lets you
set these items:
• Day and time to go forward automatically in April.
• Day and time to go back automatically in October.
• Set the length of time to go forward and back automatically.
The settings for 002 and 003 are done with 8-digit numbers:
Digits Meaning
1st, 2nd Month. 4: April, 10: October (for months 1 to 9, the first digit of 0 cannot be
input, so the eight-digit setting for 002 or 003 becomes a seven-digit
setting)
3rd Day of the week. 0: Sunday, 1: Monday
4th The number of the week for the day selected at the 3rd digit. If “0” is
selected for “Sunday”, for example, and the selected Sunday is the start of
the 2nd week, then input a “2” for this digit.
5th, 6th The time when the change occurs (24-hour as hex code).
Example: 00:00 (Midnight) = 00, 01:00 (1 a.m.) = 01, and so on.
7th The number of hours to change the time. 1 hour: 1
8th If the time change is not a whole number (1.5 hours for example), digit 8
should be 3 (30 minutes).
5307 1 Setting Enables/disables the settings for 002 and 003.
[0~1/ 1 / 1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5307 2 Rule Set The start of summer time.
(Start)
5307 4 Rule Set The end of summer time.
(End)
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-42 SM
5401 Access Control DFU

This SP stores the settings that limit uses access to SDK application data.
5401 6 User Recognition – Copier This SP codes are provided for
5401 16 Use Recognition – Document Server future customization of the access
5401 26 User Recognition – Fax control feature. This is to be done
5401 36 User Recognition – Scanner at the factory, not in the field.
DFU
5401 46 User Recognition – Printer
5401 76 User Recogntion – Expanded Function 1
5401 200 SDK1 Unique ID "SDK" is the "Software
5401 201 SDK1 Certification Method Development Kit". This data can
5401 210 SDK2 Unique ID be converted from SAS (VAS)
5401 211 SDK2 Certification Method when installed or uninstalled.
DFU
5401 220 SDK3 Unique ID
5401 221 SDK3 Certification Method
5404 User Code Count Clear

Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the
use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
5501* PM Alarm
5501 1 PM Alarm Interval
Sets the PM interval.
Service
The value stored in this SP is used when the value of SP55012 is “1”.
Tables
[0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 k copies/step]
5501 2 Original Count Alarm DFU
Selects whether the PM alarm for the number of scans is enabled or not.
If this is “1”, the PM alarm function is enabled.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
5504* Jam Alarm Japan Only

Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not
included). RSS use only
[0~3 / 3 / 1 step]
0:Zero (Off)
1:Low (2.5K jams)
2:Medium (3K jams)
3:High (6K jams)
5505* Error Alarm

Sets the error alarm level. Japan only DFU
[0~255 / 45 / 100 copies per step]
SM 5-43 B205/B209/D007/D008
5507 Supply Alarm

5507 1 Paper Supply Alarm Switches the control call on/off for the paper supply.
(0:Off 1:On) DFU
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm.
1: Sets the alarm to sound for the specified number
transfer sheets for each paper size (A3, A4, B4, B5,
DLT, LG, LT, HLT)
5507 2 Staple Supply Alarm Switches the control call on/off for the stapler installed
(0:Off 1:On) in the finisher. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm
1: Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used.
5507 3 Toner Supply Alarm Switches the control call on/off for the toner end. DFU
(0:Off 1:On) 0: Off, 1: On
If you select “1” the alarm will sound when the copier
detects toner end.
5507 128* interval: Others The “Paper Supply Call Level: nn” SPs specify the
5507 132* Interval: A3 paper control call interval for the referenced paper
5507 133* Interval: A4 sizes. DFU
5507 134* Interval: A5 [00250 ~ 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step]
5507 141* Interval: B4
5507 142* Interval: B5
5507 160* Interval: DLT
5507 164* Interval: LG
5507 166* Interval: LT
5507 172* Interval: HLT
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-44 SM
5508 CC Call Japan Only

001 Jam Remains Enables/disables initiating a call.
002 Continuous Jams [0~1/ 1 /1]
003 Continuous Door Open 0: Disable
1: Enable
004 Low Call Mode Enables/disables the new call specifications designed
to reduce the number of calls.
[0~1/ 1 /1]
0: Normal mode
1: Reduced mode
011 Jam Detection: Time Sets the length of time to determine the length of an
Length unattended paper jam.
[03~30/ 10 /1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is
enabled (set to 1).
012 Jam Detection Sets the number of continuous paper jams required to
Continuous Count initiate a call.
[02~10/ 5 /1]
enabled (set to 1).
013 Door Open: Time Length Sets the length of time the remains opens to determine
when to initiate a call.
[03~30/ 10 /1]
enabled (set to 1).
021 Jam Operation: Time Determines what happens when a paper jam is left
Length unattended.
[0~1/ 1 /1]
Service
Tables
0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
022 Jam Operation: Determines what happens when continuous paper
Continuous Count jams occur.
[0~1/ 1 /1]
0: Automatic Call
023 Door Operation: Time Determines what happens when the front door remains
Length open.
[0~1/ 1 /1]
0: Automatic Call
SM 5-45 B205/B209/D007/D008
5801 Memory Clear

Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP
codes, print an SMC Report.
5801 1 All Clear Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
5801 2 Engine Clear Initializes all registration settings for the engine
and copy process settings.
5801 3 SCS Initializes default system settings, SCS
(System Control Service) settings, operation
display coordinates, and ROM update
information.
5801 4 IMH Memory Clear Initializes the image file system.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
5801 5 MCS Initializes the automatic delete time setting for
stored documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
5801 6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
5801 7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all
TX/RX settings, local storage file numbers,
and off-hook timer.
5801 8 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults, programs
registered, the printer SP bit switches, and the
printer CSS counter.
5801 9 Scanner application Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all
the scanner SP modes.
5801 10 Web Service/Network application Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files
and thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document
server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder
software
5801 11 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface
settings (IP addresses also), the
SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET
settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
5801 12 R-FAX Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor
for Admin, job history, and local storage file
numbers.
5801 14 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service)
settings.
5801 15 Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS (User Information Control
Service) settings.
5801 16 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information
Report Service) settings.
5801 17 CCS Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-
control Service) settings.
5801 18 SRM Clear Initializes the SRM (System Resource
Manager) settings.
5801 19 LCS Clear Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service)
settings.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-46 SM
5802 Printer Free Run

Performs a free run for both the scanner and the printer.
After selecting “1”, press “OK” or the key twice to start this feature. Press the
D (Clear/Stop) key to stop.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
5803 Input Check

Displays signals received from sensors and switches.
Press the S (Clear Modes) key to exit the program. ( 5.1.5)
5804 Output Check

Turns on electrical components individually for test purposes. ( 5.1.6)
5807* Option Connection Check

5807 1 ARDF Checks the connectors to the optional
5807 2 Paper Tray Unit peripheral devices. Execution will return
5807 3 LCT either a “1” or “0” on the display.
5807 4 Finisher 1:Device connected correctly.
0:Device not connected correctly.
5810 SC Code Reset DFU

Resets all level A service call conditions, such as fusing errors. To clear the
service call, touch “Execute” on the LCD, then turn the main power switch off/on.
5811 Machine No. Setting

This SP presents the screen used to enter the 11-digit number of the machine. The
Service
Tables
allowed entries are "A" to "Z" and "0" to "9". The setting is done at the factory, and
should not be changed in the field. DFU
5812 Service Tel. No. Setting

001 Service Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a service
call condition occurs.)
002 Facsimile Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the Counter
Report (UP mode). Not Used
003 Supply Displayed on the initial SP screen.
004 Operation Allows the service center contact telephone number to be displayed
on the initial screen.
SM 5-47 B205/B209/D007/D008
5816 Remote Service

5816 1 I/F Setting
Turns the remote diagnostics off and on.
[0~2/ 2 /1]
0: Remote diagnostics off.
1: Serial (CSS or NRS) remote diagnostics on.
2: Network remote diagnostics.
5816 2 CE Call
Lets the customer engineer start or end the remote machine check with CSS or
NRS; to do this, push the center report key
5816 3 Function Flag
Enables and disables remote diagnosis over the NRS network.
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: Disables remote diagnosis over the network.
1: Enables remote diagnosis over the network.
5816 6 Device Information Call Display
Controls if the item for initial setting of the screen for the NRS device-
information notification-call is shown.
[0~1/1]
0: Enabled. Item initial setting not shown.
1: Disable. Item for initial setting shown.
5816 7 SSL Disable
Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation is done by SSL
during an RCG send for the NRS over a network interface.
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: Yes. SSL not used.
1: No. SSL used.
5816 8 RCG Connect Timeout
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) connects during a call via the NRS network.
[1~90/ 10 /1 sec.]
5816 9 RCG Write to Timeout
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent data is written to
the RCG during a call over the NRS network.
[0~100/ 60 /1 sec.]
5816 10 RCG Read Timeout
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent data is written from
the RCG during a call over the NRS network.
[0~100/ 60 /1 sec.]
5816 11 Port 80 Enable
Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP method over Port 80
on the NRS network.
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: No. Access denied
1: Yes. Access granted.
5816 16 Connection Method
Selects how the remote service is connected.
0: Internet
1: Dial-up
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-48 SM
5816 21 RCG – C Registed

This SP displays the Cumin installation end flag.
1: Installation completed
2: Installation not completed
5816 22 RCG – C Registed Detail
This SP displays the Cumin installation status.
0: Basil not registered
1: Basil registered
2: Device registered
5816 23 Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Cumin connection method.
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
5816 27 Connect Timeout DFU
Timeout for connection to the GW URL. Operates only for Cumin.
Default: 30
5816 28 Send Timeout DFU
HTTP send timeout
[o~100/30/1]
5816 29 Receive Timeout DFU
HTTP receive timeout
[0~100/30/1]
5816 30 Retry Timeout DFU
HTTP connection retry interval. This is the interval between retry attempts when
connection with the GW URL fails.
Default: 3
5816 31 Retry Count DFU
The number of HTTP connection retries. This is the number of retry attempts to
make connection with the GW URL. After the last attempt, the attempt to
Service
Tables
connect stops.
Default: 3
5816 32 Connect Send Delay DFU
HTTP connection request transmission delay. This is the standby time between
the send request and the actual sending.
Default: 5
5816 33 Max Multipart DFU
The number of TX/RX transmission for a multi-part message to the GW URL.
Default 10
5816 34 Firm DL Interval DFU
Firmware update retry interval. This is the time interval between attempts to
complete a firmware update.
[0~Oxffff/30/1]
5816 35 Firm DL Retry Count DFU
Firmware update retry attempts. This is the number of times the system
attempts to complete a firmware update.
[0~255/3/1]
5816 61 Cert. Expire Timing DFU
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
5816 62 Use Proxy
This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
SM 5-49 B205/B209/D007/D008
5816 67 CERT: Up State

Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by Cumin is set correctly.
1 The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from
the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
2 The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of
the successful update.
3 The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
failed update.
4 The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update
is being sent to the GW URL.
11 A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
12 The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being
notified of the certification update request.
13 The notification of the request for certification update has completed
successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update request
from the rescue GW URL.
14 The notification of the certification request has been received from the
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
15 The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the
successful completion of this event.
16 The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
notified of the failure of this event.
17 The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the
GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed,
but an certification error has been received, and the rescue certification is
being recorded.
18 The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is
being notified of the failure of the certification update.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-50 SM
5816 68 CERT: Error

Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of
the certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
1 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has
expired.
2 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has
expired.
3 Notification of shift from a common authtentication to an individual
certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
5816 69 CERT: Up ID
The ID of the request for certification.
5816 83 Firmware Up Status
Displays the status of the firmware update.
5816 84 Non-HDD Firm Up
This setting determines if the firmware can be updated, even without the HDD
installed.
5816 85 Firm Up User Check
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of
the firmware before the firmware update execution. If the option to confirm the
previous version is selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and
the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL.
5816 86 Firmware Size
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files during
the firmware update execution.
Service
5816 87 CERT: Macro Version
Tables
Displays the macro version of the NRS certification
5816 88 CERT: PAC Version
Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification.
5816 89 CERT: ID2 Code
Displays ID2 for the NRS certification. Spaces are displayed as underscores
(_). Asteriskes (****) indicate that no NRS certification exists.
5816 90 CERT: Subject
Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject. CN = the following
17 bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (****) indicate
that no DESS exists.
5816 91 CERT: Serial Number
Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asteriskes (****) indicate that
no DESS exists.
5816 92 CERT: Issuer
Displays the common name of the issuer of the NRS certification. CN = the
following 30 bytes. Asteriskes (****) indicate that no DESS exists.
5816 93 CERT: Valid Start
Displays the start time of the period for which the current NRS certification is
enabled.
SM 5-51 B205/B209/D007/D008
5816 94 CERT: Valid End

Displays the end time of the period for which the current NRS certification is
enabled.
5816 200 Manual Polling
No information is available at this time.
5816 201 Regist: Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device.
0 Neither the NRS device nor Cumin device are set.
1 The Cumin device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this
status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request.
2 The Cumin device is set. In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a
polling request.
3 The NRS device is being set. In this status the Cumin device cannot be set.
4 The NRS module has not started.
5816 202 Letter Number
Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the Cumin device.
5816 203 Confirm Execute
Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL.
5816 204 Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816
203.
0 Succeeded
1 Inquiry number error
2 Registration in progress
3 Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4 Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5 Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6 Communication error
7 Certification update error
8 Other error
9 Inquiry executing
5816 205 Confirm Place
Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in
answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at
the GW URL.
5816 206 Register Execute
Executes Cumin Registration.
5816 207 Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0 Succeeded
2 Registration in progress
3 Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4 Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5 Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6 Communication error
7 Certification update error
8 Other error
9 Registration executing
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-52 SM
5816 208 Error Code

Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
Illegal Modem -11001 Chat parameter error
Parameter -11002 Chat execution error
-11003 Unexpected error
Operation Error, -12002 Inquiry, registration attempted without
Incorrect Setting acquiring device status.
-12003 Attempted registration without execution
of an inquiry and no previous registration.
-12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for
certification and ID2.
Error Caused by -2385 Attempted dial up overseas without the
Response from GW URL correct international prefix for the
telephone number.
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for same device
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 Basil not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for Basil is illegal
-2396 Device ID for Basil is illegal
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
-2398 Incorrect request number format
5816 250 CommLog Print
Service
Tables
Prints the communication log.
5821 Remote Service Address Japan Only

5821 1 CSS PI Device Code Sets the PI device code. After you change this
setting, you must turn the machine off and on.
5821 2 RCG IP Address Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) destination for call processing
at the remote service center.
[00000000h~FFFFFFFFh/1]
5824 NVRAM Data Upload

Uploads the NVRAM data to an SD card (B140). Push Execute.
Note: When uploading in this SP mode data, the front door must be open.
5825 NVRAM Data Download

Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After
downloading is completed, remove the card and turn the machine power off and
on.
SM 5-53 B205/B209/D007/D008
5828 Network Setting

5828 50 1284 Compatibility Enables and disables bi-directional communication on
(Centro) the parallel connection between the machine and a
computer.
[0~1/ 1 /1]
0:Off
1: On
5828 52 ECP (Centro) Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode) for
data transfer.
[0~1/ 1 /1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5828 65 Job Spooling Switches job spooling spooling on and off.
0: No spooling 1: Spooling enabled
5828 66 Job Spool Clear: Start This SP determines whether the job interrupted at
Time power off is resumed at the next power on. This SP
operates only when SP5828 065 is set to 1.
1: Resumes printing spooled jog.
0: Clears spooled job.
5828 69 Job Spool Protocol This SP ٛ etermines whether job spooling is enabled or
dispabled for each protocol. This is a 8-bit setting.
0 LPR 4 BMLinks (Japan Only)
1 FTP (Not Used) 5 DIPRINT
2 IPP 6 Reserved (Not Used)
3 SMB 7 Reserved (Not Used)
5828 77 IPv4 DNS Server 2 Sets the IPv4 address for a DNS server. This address
5828 78 IPv4 DNS Server 3 can be used among devices that have IPv4 devices
(Ethernet, IPv4 Over 1394, IEEE 802.11b, etc.)
Note: IPv4 Over 1394 applies to the B205/B209 only.
The D007/D008 does not support IEEE 1394.
5828 79 Domain Name
(Ethernet)
5828 84 Setting List PrintPrint Prints a list of the NCS parameter settings.
Settings List
5828 90 TELNET Operation Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is
SettingsTELNET disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
(0:OFF 1:ON) [0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5828 91 Web Operation Disables or enables the Web operation.
(0:OFF 1:ON) [0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-54 SM
5832 HDD Formatting

Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the
execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
5832 1 HDD Formatting (All)
5832 2 HDD Formatting (IMH)
5832 3 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
5832 4 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
5832 5 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
5832 6 HDD Formatting (User Info)
5832 7 Mail RX Data
5832 8 Mail TX Data
5832 9 HDD Formatting (Data for Design)
5832 10 HDD Formatting (Log)
5832 11 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) (for Ridoc Desk Top Binder)
5833 e-Cabinet Enable

Enables the e-Cabinet function. Then, the user names in the cabinet are enabled
for use with the POP server.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5834 Operation Panel Image Exposure

Enables and disables the operation panel read (dump) feature. After powering on the
machine, set this option to 1 to enable this feature.
0: Off (disable), 1: On (enable) DFU
Service
Tables
To reset the machine to 0, the machine must be turned off and on again. Selecting 0
for this option without cycling the power off and on does not restore the default setting
(0).
SM 5-55 B205/B209/D007/D008
5836 Capture Setting

5836 1 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be
initialized, displayed, or selected.
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5836 2 Panel Setting
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated
from the initial system screen.
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
5836 71 Reduction for Copy [0~3/ 2 /1]
Color 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
5836 72 Reduction for Copy B&W [0~6/ 0 /1]
Text 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
5836 73 Reduction for Copy B&W [0~6/ 0 /1]
Other 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
5836 74 Reduction for Printer [0~3/ 2 /1]
Color 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
5836 75 Reduction for Printer [0~6/ 0 /1]
B&W 0 1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
5836 76 Reduction for Printer [1~5/1]
B&W HQ 1:1/2 3:1/4 4:1/6 5:1/8
5836 77 Reduction for Printer Col
1200 dpi
5836 78 Reduction for Printer
B&W 1200 dpi
5836 81 Format for Copy Color [0~3/ 0 /1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
DFU
5836 82 Format for Copy B&W [0~3/ 1 /1]
Text 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
5836 83 Format Copy B&W Other [0~3/ 1 1]
5836 84 Format for Printer Color [0~3/ 0 /1]
DFU
5836 85 Format for Printer B&W [0~3/ 1 /1]
5836 86 Format for Printer B&W [0~3/ 2 /1]
HQ 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
5836 91 Default for JPEG [5~95/ 50 /1]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management
server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format. Enabled only when
optional File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) is installed.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-56 SM
5839 IEEE 1394

This SP is displayed only when an IEEE 1394 (firewire) card is installed.
Note: This SP applies to the B205/B209 only. The D0070/D008 does not support
IEEE 1394.
5839 4 Host Name
Enter the name of the device used on the network. Example: RNP0000000000
5839 7 Cycle Master
Enables or disables the cycle master function for the 1394 bus standard.
[0~1/ 1 /1]
0: Disable (Off)
1: Enable (On)
5839 8 BCR Mode
Determines how BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) operates on the 1394
standard bus when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM.
(NVRAM: 2-bits)
[Always Effective]
5839 9 IRM 1394a Check
Conducts a 1394a check of IRM when the independent node is in any mode
other than IRM.
[0~1/1]
0: Checks whether IRM conforms to 1394a
1: After IRM is checked, if IRM does not conform then independent node
switches to IRM.
5839 10 Unique ID
Lists the ID (Node_Unique_ID) assigned to the device by the system
administrator.
Bit0: Off
Service
Tables
Bit1: On
OFF: Does not list the Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator.
Instead, the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is used.
ON: The Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator is used, and
the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is ignored. Also, when the
serial bus is reset, extra bus transactions are opened for the enumeration.
5839 11 Logout
Handles the login request of the login initiator for SBP-2. (1-bit)
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Disable (refuse login). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of
login request (standard operation)
ON: Enable (force logout). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of
login request, and the initiator forces the login.
5839 12 Login
Enables or disables the exclusive login feature (SBP-2 related).
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Disables. The exclusive login (LOGIN ORB exclusive it) is ignored.
ON: Enables. Exclusive login is in effect.
SM 5-57 B205/B209/D007/D008
5839 13 Login MAX

Sets the maximum number of logins from the initiator (6-bits)
[0~63/1]
0: Reserved
63: Reserved
5840 IEEE 802.11b

5840 6 Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth
setting varies for different countries.
[1~14/1]
5840 7 Channel MIN
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN. This
bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1~14/1]
5840 11 WEP Key Select
Determines how the initiator (SBP-2) handles subsequent login requests.
[0~1/1]
0: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is
refused.
1: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is
refused and the initiator logs out.
Note: Displayed only when the wireless LAN card is installed.
5841 Supply Name Setting

Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the
Inquiry button on the User Tools screen.
5841 1 Toner Name Setting: Black
5841 7 Original Stamp
5841 11 StapleStd1 Standard Staples for B408 (SR790)
5841 12 StapleStd2 Standard Staples for B442 (SR820)
5841 13 StapleStd3 Not Used
5841 14 Staple Std4 Not Used
5842 Net File Analysis Mode Setting DFU

This is a debugging tool. It sets Bit Groups
the debugging output mode of 0 System & other groups (LSB)
each Net File process. 1 Capture related
Bit SW 0011 1111 2 Certification related
3 Address book related
4 Machine management related
5 Output related (printing, delivery)
6 Repository related
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-58 SM
5844 USB
5844 1 Transfer Rate
Sets the speed for USB data transmission.
[Full Speed]
[Auto Change]
5844 2 Vendor ID
Sets the vendor ID:
Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU
5844 3 Product ID
Sets the product ID.
[0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU
5844 4 Device Release No.
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
[0000~9999/ 100 /1] DFU
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number
recognized as the BCD.
5845 Delivery Server Setting

These are delivery server settings.
5845 1 FTP Port No.
[0~65535/ 3670 /1]
5845 2 IP Address (Primary)
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be used with the initial system setting.
[0~FFFFFFFF/1]
Service
5845 3 Retry Time
Tables
Sets the length of time to elapse before attempting to resend image files to the
Scan Router Server after an error occurs.
Note: This SP setting is ignored if SP5845-4 is set to “0”.
[60~900/300/1 sec]
5845 4 Retry Attempts
Sets the number of attempts to resend image files to the Scan Router Server
after an error occurs.
Note: SP5845-3 sets the time to elapse between retry attempts.
[0~99/3/1]
5845 6 Delivery Error Display Time
Use this setting to set the length of time that the message is shown when a test
error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an
external device.
[0~999/ 300 /1]
5845 8 IP Address (Secondary)
Sets the IP address that is given to the computer that is the secondary delivery
server for Scan Router. This SP lets you set only the IP address, and does not
refer to the DNS setting.
SM 5-59 B205/B209/D007/D008
5845 9 Delivery Server Model

Lets you change the model of the delivery server that is registered by the I/O
device.
[0~4/ 0 /1]
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
5845 10 Delivery Svr. Capability
Changes the functions that the registered I/O device can do.
[0~255/1]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to “0”)
5845 11 Delivery Svr.Capability (Ext)
These settings are for future use. They will let you increase the number of
registered devices (in addition to those registered for SP5845 010).
There are eight bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7). All are unused at this time.
5846* UCS Setting

5846 1 Machine ID (for Delivery Server)
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is
only displayed and cannot be changed.
This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI.
The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
5846 2 Machine ID Clear (Delivery Server)
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.
Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable.
After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the
machine off and on.
5846 3 Maximum Entries
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
[2000~50000/ 2000 /1]
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is
cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-60 SM
5846 6 Delivery Server Retry Timer

Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
[0~255/1 s]
0: No retries
5846 7 Delivery Server Retry Times
Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
[0~255/ 0 /1]
5846 8 Delivery Server Maximum Entries
Lets you set the maximum number of account entries and information about the
users of the delivery server controlled by UCS.
[20000~50000/ 20000 /1]
5846 10 LDAP Search Timeout
Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1~255/ 60 /1]
5846 40 Addr Book Migration (SD -> HDD)
This SP moves the address book data from an SD card to the HDD. You must
cycle the machine off and on after executing this SP.
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install the HDD.
3. Insert the SD card with the address book data in SD card slot C3.
5. Do SP5846 040.
7. Remove the SD card from SD card slot C3.
Notes:
Service
Tables
• Executing this SP overwrites any address book data already on the HDD
with the data from the SD card.
• We recommend that you back up all directory information to an SD card
with SP5846 051 before you execute this SP.
• After the address book data is copied to HDD, all the address book data
is deleted from the source SD card. If the operation fails, the data is not
erased from the SD card.
5846 41 Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic
machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on
with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book
from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the new address
book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system administrator at this stage.
Executing this SP by the service technician immediately after power on grants full
address book access to all users.
Procedure
2. Install the new HDD.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system
administrator or key operator.
5. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041. After this SP executes successfully,
any user can access the address book.
SM 5-61 B205/B209/D007/D008
5846 47 Initialize Local Address Book

Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine
managed with UCS.
5846 48 Initialize Delivery Addr Book
Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the
delivery address book that is controlled by UCS.
5846 49 Initialize LDAP Addr Book
Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the LDAP
address book that is controlled by UCS.
5846 50 Initialize All Addr Book
Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information managed
by UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are
not deleted.
5846 51 Backup All Addr Book
Uploads all directory information to the SD card. Do this SP before replacing the
HDD. The operation may not succeed if the HDD is damaged.
5846 52 Restore All Addr Book
Downloads all directory information from the SD card. Upload the address book
from the old HDD with SP5846 51 before removing it. Do SP5846 52 after
installing the new HDD.
5846 53 Clear Backup Info.
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot. Deletes only the
files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the card is write-
protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not
remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
5846 60 Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local
address book.
Bit Meaning
0 Checks both upper/lower case characters
1 Japan Only
2
3
4 --- Not Used ---
5 --- Not Used ---
6 --- Not Used ---
7 --- Not Used ---
5846 62 Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address
book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the
length of the password.
[0~32/ 0 /1]
Note:
• This SP does not normally require adjustment.
• This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group
password policy to control access to the address book.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-62 SM

book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and defines the
[0~32/ 0 /1]
Note:
book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and defines the
[0~32/ 0 /1]
Note:
book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and defines the
[0~32/ 0 /1]
Note:
Service
Tables
5846 91 FTP Auth. Port Settings
Sets the FTP port to get the delivery server address book that is used in the
individual authorization mode.
[0~65535/ 3671 /1]
5846 94 Encryption Start
Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the LDAP
server.
[0~255/ 0 /1] No default
SM 5-63 B205/B209/D007/D008
5846 98 Bit SW2

These are the output items of debug mode for UCS (address book).
0: Off
1: On
Bit 0 Cash
Bit 1 New Database
Bit 2 Access Control
Bit 3 Back-up Restore
Bit 4 API Encryption/Encoding
Bit 5 Text Encoding
Bit 6 Address Book Encryption
Bit 7 Not Used
5846 99 Bit SW
These are the output items of debug mode for UCS (address book).
0: Off
1: On
Bit 0 UCS API (Always On)
Bit 1 GWIPC (Always On)
Bit 2 Message (Always On)
Bit 3 Lock Condition (Always On)
Bit 4 Database
Bit 5 FTP
Bit 6 LDAP
Bit 7 I/O Process
5847 Net File Resolution Reduction

5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data sent externally
by the Net File page reference function. [0~2/1]
5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by
NetFile.
“NetFile” refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
5847 2 Rate for Copy B&W Text [0~6/1] 0: 1x
5847 3 Rate for Copy B&W Other [0~6/1] 1: 1/2x
5847 5 Rate for Printer B&W [0~6/1] 2: 1/3x
5847 6 Rate for Printer B&W HQ [0~6/1] 3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
6: 2/3x1
1
: “6: 2/3x” applies to 003, 005, 006
only.
5847 21 Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This
function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5~95/1]
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-64 SM
5848 Web Service

5847 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of
0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5847 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
5848 1 Access Control. : NetFile (Lower 4 Bits Only)
Bit switch settings.
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to Desk Top Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan
Router have no effect on capture.
5848 2 Acc. Ctrl.: Repository (only Lower 4 0000: No access control
Bits) 0001: Denies access to DeskTop
Binder.
5848 3 Acc. Ctrl.: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4 Switches access control on and off.
Bits) 0000: OFF, 0001: ON
5848 4 Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4
Bits)
5848 5 Acc. Ctrl.: Delivery Input (Lower 4 Bits)
5848 7 Acc. Ctrl Comm. Log Fax (Lower 4
Bits)
5848 9 Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits)
5848 11 Acc. Ctrl: Device Management (Lower
4 Bits)
5848 13 Acc. Ctrl: Fax (Lower 4 Bits)
5848 21 Acc. Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 Bits)
5848 22 Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower
4 Bits)
5848 41 Acc. Ctrl: Security Setting (Lower 4
Bits only)
5848 99 Repository: Download Image Setting
Service
Tables
This is a bit-switch setting. Only the low 4 bits are enabled/disabled.
Set to “0” (disabled) or “1” (enabled) as needed for image download.
Bit 0: Mac OS
Bit 1: Windows OS
Bit 2: OS other than Mac or Windows
Note: This SP is used primarily by designers.
5848 100 Repository: Download Image Max. [1~1024/ 1024 /1 K]
Size
5848 201 Access Ctrl: Regular Trans
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
5848 210 Setting: Log Type: Job 1
5848 211 Setting: Log Type: Job 2
5848 212 Setting: Log Type: Access
5848 213 Setting: Primary Srv
5848 214 Setting: Secondary Srv
5848 215 Setting: Start Time
SM 5-65 B205/B209/D007/D008
5848 216 Setting: Interval Time

5848 217 Setting: Timing
5849 Installation Date

Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
5849 1 Display The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to “Installation
Date” or “Inst. Date”.
5849 2 Switch to Print Determines whether the installation date is printed on the
printout for the total counter.
[0~1/ 1 /1]
0: No Print
1: Print
5850* Address Book Function

5850 3 Replacement of Circuit Classification
The machine is shipped ready to use with a G3 line. Use this SP to switch all at
once to G4 after adding a G4 line. If the G4 line becomes unusable for some
reason, you can use this SP to switch easily back to G3
Bit Bit
1 G3 8 G3-3 Internal
2 Internal 9 G3 Open Line
3 G3-1 10 Internal Open Line
4 G3-1 Internal 11 I-G3
5 G3-2 12 I-G3 Internal
6 G3-2 Internal 13 G4
7 G3-3
5851 Bluetooth Mode

Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]
5853 Stamp Data Download

Push [Execute] to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the
hard disk. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not done, the
user will not have access to the fixed stamps (“Confidential”, “Secret”, etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting the
HDD. Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP.
5856 Remote ROM Update

When set to “1” allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE 1284)
during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the machine is
cycled off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel
cable
[0~1/1]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-66 SM
5857 Save Debug Log

5857 1 On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until this
feature is switched on.
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: OFF
1: ON
5857 2 Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event
selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2~3 / 2 /1]
2: HDD
3: SD Card
5857 5 Save to HDD
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
5857 6 Save to SD Card
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card.
5857 9 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them
to the SD Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the
SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be
copied one by one to each SD Card.
5857 10 Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to
the SD Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the
Service
Tables
SD Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be
copied one by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log
on the HDD with no key specified.
5857 11 Erase HDD Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
5857 12 Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging files
generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when SP5857
010 or 011 is executed.
To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
5857 13 Free Space on SD Card
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
5857 14 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)
Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared memory)
onto an SD card.
5857 15 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key)
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information
written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number.
5857 16 Make HDD Debug
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD.
5857 17 Make SD Debug
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card.
SM 5-67 B205/B209/D007/D008
5858* Debug Save When

These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857 002.
SP58583 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of
SC error codes.
58581* Engine SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON) Stores SC codes generated by copier
engine errors.
58582* Controller SC Error (0:OFF Stores SC codes generated by GW
1:ON) controller errors.
58583* Any SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON) [0~65535 / 0 / 1]
58584* Jam (0:OFF 1:ON) Stores jam errors.
5859 Debug Log Save Function

5859 1 Key 1 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
5859 2 Key 2 functions that use common memory on the controller board.
5859 3 Key 3 [-9999999~9999999/1]
5859 4 Key 4
5859 5 Key 5
5859 6 Key 6
5859 7 Key 7
5859 8 Key 8
5859 9 Key 9
5859 10 Key 10
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-68 SM
5860 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
5860 20 Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1~168/72/1]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not
received during this prescribed time.
5860 21 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
[0~1/ 1 /1]
0: No
1: Yes
5860 22 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
[0~1/ 0 /1]
0: No. “From” item not switched.
1: Yes. “From” item switched.
5860 25 SMTP Auth Direct Sending
Occasionally, all SMTP certifications may fail with SP5860 006 set to "2" to
enable encryption during SMTP certification for the SMTP server. This can occur
if the SMTP server does not meet RFC standards. In such cases you can use this
SP to set the SMTP certification method directly. However, this SP can be used
only after SP5860 003 has been set to "1" (On).
Bit0: LOGIN
Bit1: PLAIN
Bit2: CRAM_MD5
Bit3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit4 to Bit 7: Not Used
Service
Tables
5866 E-Mail (Date Field)
Not used.
5870 Common Key Info Writing

Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS
specifications.
5870 1 Writing Note: These SPs are for future use and currently are not used.
5870 3 Initialize
5873 SD Card Apli.

Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, see the
Printer/Scanner Manual for the B205/B209 or D007/D008.
5873 1 Move Exec Executes the move from one SD card to another.
5873 2 Undo Exec This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.
SM 5-69 B205/B209/D007/D008
5875 SC Auto Reboot

This SP determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC
error occurs.
Note: The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes.
5875 1 Reboot The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues
Setting an SC error and logs the SC error code. If the same SC occurs
again, the machine does not reboot.
5875 2 Reboot Type The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
5878 Option Setup Data Overwrite Security (DOS) Setup

Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite Security option for the copier.
For more, see "1.16 MFP Controller Options" in Section "1. Installation".
5879 Editing Option Setup DFU

This SP is used to install the edit option card.
5886 ROM Update

The setting of this SP allows or prohibits updating the ROM
0: Yes, 1: No
5907 Plug & Play Maker/Model Name

Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This
information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names
should be registered again.
After selecting, press the “Original Type” key and “#” key at the same time. When
the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5908* LCT Paper Size

Selects the paper size for the LCT. Use this SP after changing the paper size in the
optional LCT (i.e., after changing the side plate position for the LCT).
[0~1 / 1 / 1] North America
0: A4
1: LT
[0~1 / 0 / 1] Other Areas (Europe/Asia)
0: A4
1: LT
5912* PCU Alarm Setting

5912 1 Display
Display or does not display for the PCU alarm.
[0~1/1/1]
0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
5912 2 Interval Display Sets the PCU alarm interval. When the machine reaches this
value, the PCU alarm will be displayed on the LCD to inform the
user.
[0 ~ 255 / 60 / 1 k copies/step]
Note: The zero setting switches the alarm off.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-70 SM
5913 Switchover Permission Time

5913 2 Print Application Timer
Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take
control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is not
operating because a key has not been pressed.
[3~30/ 3 /1 s]
5913 102 Print Application Set
This SP prescribes the time interval to expire before the machine shifts to
another application when another application currently holds access control for
the standby mode while there is no key input.
[0~1/1/1]
5915* Mechanical Counter Detection

Checks whether the mechanical counter inside the inner cover is connected or not.
Display:
0:Not detected
1:Detected
2:Unknown
5921* Exhaust Fan Control

Sets the timing for slowing the exhaust fan motor speed or shutting the motor off for
normal operation, depending on the following conditions:
1. After the machine has entered energy saver mode or stand-by mode, the
machine slows the fan speed after this time runs out.
2. After the machine has entered the auto off mode or an error occurs, the machine
stops the fan after this time runs out.
[30 ~ 120 / 30 s / 1 s]
Service
Tables
5923* Border Remove Area Switching
Toggles between two settings that affect the appearance of the pages for border
removal and printed facing pages: (1) Using the original area as the allotted area,
or (2) Using only the copy paper as the allotted area.
[0 = Original base, 1 = Copy base]
0: Original area used as base
1: Copy used as the base
5967 Copy Server: Set Function

Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the
new setting.[0~1/1]
0: ON
1: OFF
5970 Debug Serial Output DFU

Determines whether the debug information is output by the serial port when the
machine is power on.
[0~1/0/1]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
SM 5-71 B205/B209/D007/D008
5974 Cherry Server

Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, “Light” or “Full
(Professional)”, is installed.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Light version (supplied with this machine)
1: Full version (optional)
5985 Device Setting

The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP
to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions
built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
5985 1 On Board NIC 0: Disable 1: Enable
5985 2 On Board USB
5990 SP Print Mode SMC Print

In the SP mode, press Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the
paper size, then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to ensure that
all the information prints. Press SP Window to return to the SP mode, select
the desired print, and press Execute.
5990 1 All (Data List)
5990 2 SP (Mode Data List)
5990 3 User Program
5990 4 Logging Data
5990 5 Diagnostic Report
5990 6 Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
5990 7 NIB Summary
5990 8 Capture Log
5990 21 Copier User Program
5990 22 Scanner SP
5990 23 Scanner User Program
5995 Factory Mode DFU
5996 Machine State DFU

5996 1 Destination Shows intended destination of the engine board.
0: Japan
1: North America
2: Europe
3: Mainland China
4: Taiwan
5996 2 SBCU ID Displays the CPM information for the engine
board. For example, 25 (25 cpm), 30 (30 cpm),
and so on.
5996 3 IPU ID Displays the IPU ID (presently fixed at “30”).
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-72 SM
SP6XXX: Peripherals
6006* DF Adjustment
These settings adjust the registration and other settings for the ADF mode. Use
the key to toggle between + and - before entering a value. For more details,
see “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy Adjustment” for details.
6006 1 Side-to-Side [–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
(For Simplex)
6006 2 Leading Edge
6006 3 Trailing Edge Erase Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
6006 4 Side-to-Side/Rear Adjusts the side-to-side registration on the rear side of
(For Duplex) the original.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
6006 5 Sub Scan Adjusts the sub scan magnification.
Magnification [–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 % step]
6006 6 Skew Correction Selects whether skew correction is done.
0 = Off, 1 = On
6006 7 Original Buckle Adj Adjusts the amount of original buckle at the ARDF
registration roller when the ARDF feeds the back side of
the original.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
6007 ADF Input Check

Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the ARDF.( 5.1.5)
6008 ADF Output Check

Switches on each electrical component (ARDF motor, solenoid, etc.) of the ARDF
for testing. ( 5.1.6)
Service
Tables
Press to switch on or to switch off.
6009 ADF Free Run

Performs an ARDF free run in duplex mode. Press to start.
1: To Start, 0: To cancel
This is a general free run controlled from the copier. For more detailed free run
modes, see the ARDF manual.
6010* Stamp Position Adjustment

Adjusts the stamp position in the sub-scan direction in fax mode.
[–5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
6016* ADF Original Size Detection

Selects whether the machine determines that the original is A4/LT, or 8K/16K
when the APS sensor in the ADF does not detect the original size.
8K/16K is not available for 115V machines.
[0 = Normal (LT for USA models, A4 for Europe/Asia models)
1 = Reversed [A4 for USA models, LT for Europe/Asia models]
2 = 8K/16K]
SM 5-73 B205/B209/D007/D008
6105* Staple Position Adjustment

Adjusts the staple position in the main scan direction when using the two-tray
finisher.
[–3.5~+3.5 / 0.0 / 0.5 mm step]
Press to toggle ±. A larger value shifts the staple toward the edge of the
paper.
6117 Finisher Input Check

Displays the signals received from finisher sensors and switches. ( 5.1.5)
6118 Finisher Output Check

Switches on each electrical component of the finisher for testing. ( 5.1.6)
Press to switch on or to switch off.
6802 ADF Mounted

Displays the model number of the ADF (ALPS-C-0x03) installed on the machine.
6901 ADF APS Data Display

Displays the status of the original size sensors in the ADF. ( 5.1.9)
6910* ADF Shading Interval Time

Adjusts the interval for shading processing in DF mode.
Light and heat may affect the scanner response. If copy quality indicates that
white level is drifting during a DF copy job, reduce this setting.
[0 ~ 120 / 20s / 1s/step]
6920 DF Check
6920 1 DF GATE IN DFU
0 = Gate, 1 = Asart
6920 2 DF TXD Break DFU
0 = Off, 1 = On
6920 3 Serial Communication DFU
0 = NG, 1 = OK
6920 4 Original Set DFU
0 = Off, 1 = On
6920 5 Serial Check DFU
6925 Bridge/Duplex/By-Pass/Loop Back DFU

6925 1 Practice DFU
6925 2 Result DFU
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-74 SM
SP7XXX: Data Log

7001* Main Motor Operation Time
The number of prints and drive time for drum revolutions can be obtained by
counting the main motor revolution time. If the amount of the time required for the
drum to revolve to print 1 copy increases, this data combined with the number of
copies can be used to analyze problems and could be useful for future product
development.
Display: 0000000~9999999 min.
7401* Total SC Counter

Displays the total number of service calls that have occurred.
7403* SC History
7403 1 Latest Displays the most recent 10 service calls.
7403 2 Latest 1
7403 3 Latest 2
7403 4 Latest 3
7403 5 Latest 4
7403 6 Latest 5
7403 7 Latest 6
7403 8 Latest 7
7403 9 Latest 8
7403 10 Latest 9
7502* Total Paper Jam Counter

Displays the total number of paper jams.
Service
Tables
7503* Total Original Jam Counter
Displays the total number of original jams.
SM 5-75 B205/B209/D007/D008
7504* Total Jams by Location

These SPs display the total number of paper jams by location. A “Check-in”
(paper late) error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the
precise time. A “Check-out” (“paper lag”) paper jam occurs when the paper
remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
7504 1 At power on
7504 3 Upper relay sensor (Late)
7504 4 Lower relay sensor (Late)
7504 5 Vertical transport sensor (Late) (optional bank)
7504 6 Relay sensor (Late) (optional LCT)
7504 7 By-pass Non-Feed
7504 10 Duplex Non-Feed
7504 11 Registration sensor (Late)
7504 12 Paper exit sensor (Late)
7504 13 Bridge relay sensor (Late)
7504 14 Bridge exit sensor (Late)
7504 15 Duplex entrance sensor (Late)
7504 16 Duplex exit sensor (Late)
7504 17 1 bin tray exit sensor (Late)
7504 20 Finisher entrance sensor
7504 21 Finisher shift tray exit sensor
7504 23 Finisher staple tray paper sensor
7504 24 Finisher stack feed-out belt HP sensor
7504 26 Finisher paper taking out
7504 27 Finisher drive error
7504 28 Finisher tray lift error
7504 29 Finisher jogger drive error
7504 30 Finisher tray shift drive error
7504 31 Finisher stapler error
7504 32 Finisher stack-feed out error
7504 33 Finisher feed out error
7504 34 Finisher no response
7504 53 Transport Sensor 1 (Off Check)
7504 56 LCT Relay Sensor (Off Check)
7504 57 U Relay Sn (Lag) from Bypass
7504 61 Registration sensor (Lag)
7504 62 Paper exit sensor (Lag)
7504 63 Bridge relay sensor (Lag)
7504 64 Bridge exit sensor (Lag)
7504 65 Duplex entrance sensor (Lag)
7504 66 Duplex exit sensor (Lag)
7504 67 1 bin tray exit sensor (Lag)
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-76 SM
7505 Total Original Jam by Location

Displays the total number of original jams by location. These jams occur when
the original does not activate the sensors. A Check-in (“paper late”) error occurs
when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the precise time. a Check-out
(“paper lag”) paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer
than the prescribed time.
7505 1 At Power On
7505 5 Registration Sensor (On Check)
7505 6 Exit Sensor (On Check)
7505 7 Inverter Sensor (On Check)
7505 55 Registration Sensor (Off Check)
7505 56 Exit Sensor (Off Check)
7505 57 Inverter Sensor (Off Check)
7506* Jam Count by Copy Size

7506 5 A4 LEF Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size.
7506 6 A5 LEF
7506 14 B5 LEF
7506 038 LT LEF
7506 044 HLT LEF
7506 132 A3 SEF
7506 133 A4 SEF
7506 134 A5 SEF
7506 141 B4 SEF
7506 142 B5 SEF
7506 160 DLT SEF
7506 164 LG SEF
Service
Tables
7506 166 LT SEF
7506 172 HLT SEF
7506 255 Others
7507* Plotter (Copy) Jam History

7507 1 Last Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)
7507 2 Latest 1 Sample Display:
7507 3 Latest 2 CODE:007
7507 4 Latest 3 SIZE:05h
7507 5 Latest 4 TOTAL:0000334
7507 6 Latest 5 DATE:Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
7507 7 Latest 6 where:
CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.
7507 8 Latest 7
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
7507 9 Latest 8
TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7003)
7507 10 Latest 9
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
Size Code Size Code Size Code
A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0
A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4
B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6
LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC
HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF
SM 5-77 B205/B209/D007/D008
7508* Original Jam History

7508 1 Last Displays the original jam history (the most recent 10 jams).
7508 2 Last 1 Sample Display:
7508 3 Last 2 CODE:007
7508 4 Last 3 SIZE:05h
7508 5 Last 4 TOTAL:0000334
7508 6 Last 5 DATE:Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
7508 7 Last 6 where:
CODE is the SP7505*** number (see above.
7508 8 Last 7
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
7508 9 Last 8
TOTAL is the total error count (SP7002001)
7508 10 Last 9
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
7801 ROM Version/Firmware Version

This SP codes display the firmware versions of all ROMs in the system, including
the mainframe, the ARDF, and peripheral devices.
7803* PM Counter Display

Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
7804 PM Counter Resets

Resets the PM counter. To reset, press Execute on the touch panel.
7807 SC/Jam Counter Reset

Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press Execute on the touch panel.
This SP does not reset the jam history counters: SP7507, SP7508.
7826 MF Error Counter Japan Only

Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter.
7826 1 Error Total A request for the count total failed at power on. This error will
occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
7826 2 Error Staple The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error
will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
7827 MF Error Counter Clear

Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only
7832 Self-Diagnosis Result Display

Execute to open the “Self-Diagnostics Result Display” to view details about
errors. Use the keys in the display on the touch-panel to scroll through all the
information. If no errors have occurred, you will see the “No Error” message on
the screen.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-78 SM
7834 Clear Pixel Coverage Data

These SPs clear the counters for the following items.
7834 1 Last & Average
7834 2 Toner Bottles
7834 3 Page Count: Bottle
7834 4 Dot Coverage Clear
7834 255 All Coverage Counts
7836 Total Memory Size

Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
7852* ADF Exposure Glass

Counts the number of occurrences (0 ~ 65,535) when dust was detected on
the scanning glass of the ADF.
7852 1* Detect Count Counts the occurrences. Counting is done only if
SP4999 1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is
switched on.
7852 2* Counter Clear Clears the count. Memory All Clear (SP5801)
resets this counter to zero.
7901* Assert Info. DFU

These SP numbers display the results of the occurrence of the most recent
SC code generated by the machine.
7991 1* File Name Module name
7991 2* Line Number Number of lines
7991 3* Location Value
Service
Tables
7909 PCU Counter Display
Displays the value of the PCU counter (number of copies since the last PCU
change).
7999 Engine Debug Log Switch

This SP switches the contents of the debug log.
0 RHM log (all) 4 Scanner log 2
1 Plotter log 5 Scanner log 3
2 Print log 6 Scanner log 4
3 Scanner log 1 7-255 RHM log (all)
SM 5-79 B205/B209/D007/D008
SP8-xxx: Data Log2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,
such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes
that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do

SP8211~SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401~SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691~SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

• How is the document server actually being used?
• What application is using the document server most frequently?
• What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of
operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an ‘application’). Before reading
the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes
mean.
PREFIXES WHAT IT MEANS

Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all applications
T:
(C, F, P, etc.)..
C: Copy application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
F: Fax application. application when the job was not stored on the
P: Print application. document server.
S: Scan application.
Local storage Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.
(document server) The L: counters work differently case by case.
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the
document server; this can be in document server
mode (from the document server window), or from
L:
another mode, such as from a printer driver or by
pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when the
user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by case.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image
(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this group
example) in the future.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-80 SM
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of

displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs.
Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name
of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
ABBREVIATION WHAT IT MEANS
/ “By”, e.g. “T:Jobs/Apl” = Total Jobs “by” Application
> More (2> “2 or more”, 4> “4 or more”
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used
to store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not
Service
Tables
count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the
number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter
counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor
machines remotely. “NRS” is used overseas, “CSS” is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print
jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and
allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different
formats. Currently not available.
PC Personal Computer
PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages
count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT
counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
SM 5-81 B205/B209/D007/D008
ABBREVIATION WHAT IT MEANS

Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This
machine is under development and currently not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are
recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, BlacK
NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear, or the
Counter Reset SP7 808.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-82 SM
8001 T:Total Jobs These SPs count the number of times each
8002 C:Total Jobs application is used to do a job.
8003 F:Total Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8004 P:Total Jobs Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the
8005 S:Total Jobs other applications are used to send a job to the
document server, plus the number of times a file
8006 L:Total Jobs
already on the document server is used.
• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either “Delete Data” or “Specify Output” is
specified.
• A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
• When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L:
counter does not (the document server is not used).
• A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the
broadcast are not counted separately).
• A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their
destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not
be counted until the transmission has been completed.
• A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
Service
Tables
• The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
• When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
• When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
• When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
• When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
• When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax
application, the F: counter increments.
SM 5-83 B205/B209/D007/D008
8011 T:Jobs/LS These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the
8012 C:Jobs/LS document server by each application, to reveal how
8013 F:Jobs/LS local storage is being used for input.
8014 P:Jobs/LS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8015 S:Jobs/LS The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
8016 L:Jobs/LS
operation panel.
8017 O:Jobs/LS
• When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
• When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
• When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
• When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
• When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8021 T:Pjob/LS These SPs reveal how files printed from the
8022 C:Pjob/LS document server were stored on the document server
8023 F:Pjob/LS originally.
8024 P:Pjob/LS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8025 S:Pjob/LS The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
8026 L:Pjob/LS
operation panel.
8027 O:Pjob/LS
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
• When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
• When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
• When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
• When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-84 SM
8031 T:Pjob/DesApl These SPs reveal what applications were used to

8032 C:Pjob/DesApl output documents from the document server.
8033 F:Pjob/DesApl [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8034 P:Pjob/DesApl The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from
8035 S:Pjob/DesApl within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
8036 L:Pjob/DesApl
8037 O:Pjob/DesApl
• When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
• When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
8041 T:TX Jobs/LS These SPs count the applications that stored files
8042 C:TX Jobs/LS on the document server that were later accessed
8043 F:TX Jobs/LS for transmission over the telephone line or over a
8044 P:TX Jobs/LS network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image
by I-Fax).
8045 S:TX Jobs/LS
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8046 L:TX Jobs/LS
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
8047 O:TX Jobs/LS separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
scanned from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.
• When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
Service
Tables
increments.
• When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl These SPs count the applications used to send
8052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl files from the document server over the
8053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl telephone line or over a network (attached to an
8054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs merged
for sending are counted separately.
8055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
8057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl from within the document server mode screen at
the operation panel.
• If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.
SM 5-85 B205/B209/D007/D008
8061 T:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
8062 C:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing
method is specified by the application.
8063 F:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method
is specified by the application.
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
8064 P:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing
8065 S:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
8066 L:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing
method is specified from the print window within document server mode.
8067 O:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
806x 1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job
is set for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L:
counter increments. (See SP8066 1)
806x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
806x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
806x 4 Booklet Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in
staple mode, the Staple counter also increments.
806x 5 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet
mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
806x 6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for
a print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8064 6.)
806x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-86 SM
8071 T:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of
pages in the job, regardless of which application was used.
8072 C:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
8073 F:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on
8074 P:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
8075 S:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
8076 L:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
8077 O:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of “Other” application jobs
(Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages
in the job.
807x 1 1 Page 807x 8 21~50 Pages
807x 2 2 Pages 807x 9 51~100 Pages
807x 3 3 Pages 807x 10 101~300 Pages
807x 4 4 Pages 807x 11 301~500 Pages
Service
807x 5 5 Pages 807x 12 501~700 Pages
Tables
807x 6 6~10 Pages 807x 13 701~1000 Pages
807x 7 11~20 Pages 807x 14 1001~ Pages
• For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
• Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
• For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
• The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.
SM 5-87 B205/B209/D007/D008
8111 T:FAX TX Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent
by fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a
telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8113 F:FAX TX Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent
by fax directly on a telephone line.
• These counters count jobs, not pages.

• This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application,
including documents stored on the document server.
• If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the
job started.
• If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination
where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (812x)
also increments.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
8121 T:IFAX TX Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax
images using I-Fax.
8123 F:IFAX TX Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.

• The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not
available at this time.
• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is
sent.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-88 SM
8131 T:S-to-Email Jobs [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-
mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not.
8135 S:S-to-Email Jobs
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail,
without storing the original on the document server.

• If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined
to be color or black-and-white then counted.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
• If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is
counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email
as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once
for Scan-to-PC).
8141 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan
Router server.
8145 S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned in scanner mode and sent
Service
Tables
to a Scan Router server.

• The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the
Scan Router server cannot be confirmed.
• If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is
counted as a “Color” job.
• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
SM 5-89 B205/B209/D007/D008
8151 T:Deliv Jobs/PC [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on
a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8151 and 8155 perform identical counts.
8155 S:Deliv Jobs/PC
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with Scan-to-
PC.

• If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
• If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
8161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs These SPs count the number of PC Fax

8163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs transmission jobs. A job is counted from when it
is registered for sending, not when it is sent.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
• This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending
the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-90 SM
8191 T:Total Scan PGS These SPs count the pages scanned by each
8192 C:Total Scan PGS application that uses the scanner to scan images.
8193 F:Total Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8195 S:Total Scan PGS
8196 L:Total Scan PGS
• SP 8191 to 8196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of
physical pages.
• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
• Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples:
• If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8201 T:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner
for scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax
transmission are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display.
8205 S:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner
for scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax
transmission are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display..
SM 5-91 B205/B209/D007/D008
8211 T:Scan PGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages scanned
8212 C:Scan PGS/LS into the document server .
8213 F:Scan PGS/LS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8215 S:Scan PGS/LS The L: counter counts the number of pages
8216 L:Scan PGS/LS stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen
• Reading user stamp data is not counted.

• If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
• If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:
count is 4.
• If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:
count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8221 ADF Org Feeds [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
8221 1 Front Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the
Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for
either simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the
Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for
duplex front side scanning. (The front side is determined by
which side the user loads face up.)
8221 2 Back Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the
Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the
Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
rear-side scanning.
• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-92 SM
8231 Scan PGS/Mode [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
8231 1 Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in
the ADF at one time.
8231 2 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
8231 3 Mixed Size Selectable. Select “Mixed Sizes” on the operation
panel.
8231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
8231 5 Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
• The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application
so if the original’s page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
• If the user selects “Mixed Sizes” for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
• In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
Service
Tables
SM 5-93 B205/B209/D007/D008
8241 T:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for
all jobs, regardless of which application was used.
8242 C:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
8243 F:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax
jobs.
8245 S:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
8246 L:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within
the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen
8241 8242 8243 8245 8246
824x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes
824x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes
824x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No
824x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No
824x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No
824x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No
824x 10: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-94 SM
8251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt These SPs show how many times Image Edit
8252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt features have been selected at the operation
8254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt panel for each application. Some examples of
8256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt these editing features are:
8257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt • Erase> Border
• Erase> Center
• Image Repeat
• Centering
• Positive/Negative
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the
edit features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have been
used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN These SPs count the number of pages scanned
8285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal
how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery
functions.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
8291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp These SPs count the number of pages stamped
Service
Tables
8293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp with the stamp in the ADF unit.
8295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8296 L:Scan PGS/Stamp The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen
SM 5-95 B205/B209/D007/D008
8301 T:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning)
and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
8302 C:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning)
and output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
8303 F:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
and output page size [SP 8-443].
8305 S:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
and output page size [SP 8-445].
8306 L:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored
from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these
totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP
8-446].
830x 1 A3
830x 2 A4
830x 3 A5
830x 4 B4
830x 5 B5
830x 6 DLT
830x 7 LG
830x 8 LT
830x 9 HLT
830x 10 Full Bleed
830x 254 Other (Standard)
830x 255 Other (Custom)
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-96 SM
8311 T:Scan PGS/Rez [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned
by applications that can specify resolution settings.
8315 S:Scan PGS/Rez [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned
by applications that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, 8311 and 8315 perform identical counts.
831x 1 1200dpi ~
831x 2 600dpi~1199dpi
831x 3 400dpi~599dpi
831x 4 200dpi~399dpi
831x 5 ~199dpi
• Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

• The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count
is done for the Fax application.
Service
Tables
SM 5-97 B205/B209/D007/D008
8381 T:Total PrtPGS These SPs count the number of pages printed by
8382 C:Total PrtPGS the customer. The counter for the application
8383 F:Total PrtPGS used for storing the pages increments.
8384 P:Total PrtPGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8385 S:Total PrtPGS The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
8386 L:Total PrtPGS
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored with
8387 O:Total PrtPGS the Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen go to the C: counter.
• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT
page is counted as 2.
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
are counted for the application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
• Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
• Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip
sheets.
• Reports printed to confirm counts.
• All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
• Test prints for machine image adjustment.
• Error notification reports.
• Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
8391 LSize PrtPGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters
are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8401 T:PrtPGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages printed

8402 C:PrtPGS/LS from the document server. The counter for the
8403 F:PrtPGS/LS application used to print the pages is
8404 P:PrtPGS/LS incremented.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored
8405 S:PrtPGS/LS
from within the document server mode screen at
8406 L:PrtPGS/LS the operation panel.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.
• Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:
count.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-98 SM
8411 Prints/Duplex This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last
pages printed only on one side are not counted.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8421 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
8422 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the copier application.
8423 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the fax application.
8424 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the printer application.
8425 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
8426 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing from within the document server mode
window at the operation panel.
8427 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by Other applications
Service
Tables
842x 1 Simplex> Duplex
842x 2 Duplex> Duplex
842x 3 Book> Duplex
842x 4 Simplex Combine
842x 5 Duplex Combine
842x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
842x 11 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
842x 12 Booklet
842x 13 Magazine
• These counts (SP8421 to SP8427) are especially useful for customers who need
to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
SM 5-99 B205/B209/D007/D008
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original Count Original Count
Pages Pages
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
8431 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
8432 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
8434 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
8436 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel with the three
features below.
8437 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
843x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
843x 2 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
843x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were
applied, including page numbering and date
stamping.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-100 SM
8441 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
8442 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
copy application.
8443 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
fax application.
8444 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
printer application.
8445 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanner application.
8446 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
8447 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by
Other applications.
844x 1 A3
844x 2 A4
844x 3 A5
844x 4 B4
844x 5 B5
844x 6 DLT
Service
Tables
844x 7 LG
844x 8 LT
844x 9 HLT
844x 10 Full Bleed
844x 254 Other (Standard)
844x 255 Other (Custom)
• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
SM 5-101 B205/B209/D007/D008
8451 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
8451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray
8451 2 Tray 1 Copier
8451 3 Tray 2 Copier
8451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
8451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used.
8461 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter
is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the
feed rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
8462 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
8463 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
8464 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
8466 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
846x 1 Normal
846x 2 Recycled
846x 3 Special
846x 4 Thick
846x 5 Normal (Back)
846x 6 Thick (Back)
846x 7 OHP
846x 8 Other
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-102 SM
8471 PrtPGS/Mag [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
8471 1 ~49%
8471 2 50%~99%
8471 3 100%
8471 4 101%~200%
8471 5 201% ~
• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
• Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save
feature switched on.
Service
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
Tables
application.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
SM 5-103 B205/B209/D007/D008
8511 T:PrtPGS/Emul [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8514 P:PrtPGS/Emul [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8514 1 RPCS
8514 2 RPDL
8514 3 PS3
8514 4 R98
8514 5 R16
8514 6 GL/GL2
8514 7 R55
8514 8 RTIFF
8514 9 PDF
8514 10 PCL5e/5c
8514 11 PCL XL
8514 12 IPDL-C
8514 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8514 14 Other
• SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print
application.
• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-104 SM
8521 T:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by
all applications.
8522 C:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
the Copy application.
8523 F:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
the Fax application.
Note:
• Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
8524 P:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
the Print application.
8525 S:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
the Scanner application.
8526 L:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed
from within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
852x 1 Sort
852x 2 Stack
852x 3 Staple
852x 4 Booklet
852x 5 Z-Fold
852x 6 Punch
852x 7 Other
Service
Tables
NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,
the unstapled pages are still counted.
2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so
jam recoveries are counted.
8531 Staples This SP counts the amount of staples used by

the machine.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
SM 5-105 B205/B209/D007/D008
8581 T:Counter [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless
of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report,
these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy
machine.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
8591 O:Counter [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex
pages printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other
(O:) applications only.
8591 1 A3/DLT
8591 2 Duplex
8591 3 Staple
8631 T:FAX TX PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
8633 F:FAX TX PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8631 and SP8633 are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-106 SM
8641 T:FAX TX PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as
fax images using I-Fax.
8643 F:FAX TX PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8641 and SP8643 are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
8651 T:S-to-Email PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
Service
Tables
8655 S:S-to-Email PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for the Scan application only.
SM 5-107 B205/B209/D007/D008
NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored
on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not
counted.
2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,
the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the
count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP
server).
4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a
10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be
divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is
sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and
the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
8661 T:Deliv PGS/Svr [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
8665 S:Deliv PGS/Svr [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by the Scan application.
NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the
HDD of the Scan Router server.
2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,
the counts are not done.
3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at
the Scan Router server.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-108 SM
8671 T:Deliv PGS/PC [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8675 S:Deliv PGS/PC [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.
8681 T:PCFAX These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax.
TXPGS These SPs are provided for the Fax application only, so the
8683 F:PCFAX counts for SP8681 and SP8683 are the same.
TXPGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
• This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC
through the copier to the destination.
• When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting,
the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location
A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
8691 T:TX PGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages sent from the
8692 C:TX PGS/LS document server. The counter for the application that
Service
Tables
8693 F:TX PGS/LS was used to store the pages is incremented.
8694 P:TX PGS/LS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8695 S:TX PGS/LS The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
from within the document server mode screen at the
8696 L:TX PGS/LS
operation panel. Pages stored with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C:
counter.
NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are
added to the count.
2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages
stored are counted for the application that stored them.
3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is
done for the number of pages sent to each destination.
SM 5-109 B205/B209/D007/D008
8701 TX PGS/Port [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8701 1 PSTN-1
8701 2 PSTN-2
8701 3 PSTN-3
8701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8701 5 Network
8711 T:Scan PGS/Comp [0~9999999/ 1]

These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned into the
document server, counted by the formats listed below.
8711 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8711 2 TIFF (Multi/Single)
8711 3 PDF
8711 4 Other
8 715 S:Scan PGS/Comp [0~9999999/ 1]

These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan
application, counted by the formats listed below.
8715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8715 2 TIFF (Multi/Single)
8715 3 PDF
8715 4 Other
8741 RX PGS/Port [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used
to receive them.
8741 1 PSTN-1
8741 2 PSTN-2
8741 3 PSTN-3
8741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8741 5 Network
8771 Dev Counter [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
Note: For machines that do not support color, the Black toner count is the
same as the Total count.
8781 Pixel Coverage Ratio

This SP displays the number of toner bottles used. The count is done
based on the equivalent of 1,000 pages per bottle.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-110 SM
8791 LS Memory Remain This SP displays the percent of space available

on the document server for storing documents.
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
8801 Toner Remain [0~100/ 0 / 1]

This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note:
• This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is
better than other machines in the market that can only measure in
increments of 10 (10% steps).
• This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
8831 Pixel Cover Ave. Average Pixel Coverage

8831 1 Accum. Ave. K
8831 2 Accum. Ave. M Do not display for this machine.
8831 3 Accum. Ave. C
8831 4 Accum. Ave. Y
8841 Pixel Cover Last Average Pixel Coverage

001 Last Page K
002 Last Page M Do not display for this machine.
003 Last Page C
004 Last Page Y
Service
Tables
8851 Toner Coverage 0-10% [0~9999999]
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color
toners.
8851 1 K Black toner
8851 2 M Magenta toner Do not display for this machine.
8851 3 C Cyan toner
8851 4 Y Yellow toner
8861 Toner Coverage 11-20% [0~9999999]

toners.
8861 3 C Cyan toner
SM 5-111 B205/B209/D007/D008
8871 Toner Coverage 21-30% [0~9999999]

toners.
8871 3 C Cyan toner
8881 Toner Coverage 31 -% [0~9999999]

toners.
8881 3 C Cyan toner
8901 Coverage Display (Toner Bottle: Previous) DFU

8911 Coverage Display (Toner Bottle: Before Previous) DFU
8941 Machine Status [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
8941 1 Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include time while
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
8941 2 Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
8941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.
8941 4 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
8941 5 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing
background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
8941 6 SC Total down time due to SC errors.
8941 7 PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
8941 8 OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
8941 9 Supply PM Wait End Total down time due to toner end.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-112 SM
8951 AddBook Register

These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
8951 1 User Code User code registrations. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
8951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
8951 4 Group Group destination
registrations.
8951 5 Transfer Fax relay destination
Request registrations for relay TX.
8951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
8951 7 Copy Program Copy application registrations [0~255 / 0 / 255]
with the Program (job
settings) feature.
8951 8 Fax Program Fax application registrations
with the Program (job
settings) feature.
8951 9 Printer Program Printer application
registrations with the
Program (job settings)
feature.
8951 10 Scanner Scanner application
Program registrations with the
Program (job settings)
feature.
9801 DCS Debug Setting DFU
Service
Tables
9802 MCS Debug SW DFU
SM 5-113 B205/B209/D007/D008
5.1.4 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP2902-3)

NOTE: Always print a test pattern to confirm correct operation of the machine.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2902 003.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press . (See
the tables below.)
3. Press Copy Window to open the copy window and then select the settings for
the test print (paper size, etc.)
4. Press Start C twice. (Ignore the “Place Original” messages) to start the test
print.
5. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
No. Test Pattern
0 None
1 Vertical Line (1dot)
2 Horizontal Line (1dot)
3 Vertical Line (2-dot)
4 Horizontal Line (2-dot)
5 Grid Pattern (1dot)
6 Independent (1-dot)
8 100% Black Coverage
9 Belt Pattern
10 Trimming Area
11 Argyle
12 Argyle (2-dot)
13 Checkered Flag
14 Horizontal Belt
16 Grayscale Horizontal
17 Grayscale Vertical
18 Grayscale Horizontal/Vertical
19 Grayscale Grid
20 Grayscale Horizontal White Stripe
21 Grayscale Vertical White Stripe
22 Grayscale Horizontal/Vertical White Stripe
23 100% White Coverage
24 Trimming Area (OR Outside Data)
NOTE: See SP 4417 in the SP table for a different set of test patterns.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-114 SM
5.1.5 INPUT CHECK

Main Machine Input Check (SP5803)
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5803.
2. Enter the number (1 – 11) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0’s and 1’s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.
00000000
Bit 76543210
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
Reading
Number Bit Description
0 1
7 Paper Height Sensor 2 (2nd Activated Deactivated
Tray)
6 Paper Height Sensor 1 (2nd Activated Deactivated
Tray)
5 Paper Height Sensor 2 (1st Activated Deactivated
Tray)
1
4 Paper Height Sensor 1 (1st Activated Deactivated
Tray)
3 Paper End Sensor (2nd Tray) Paper End Paper is present
2 Upper Relay Sensor Activated Deactivated
Service
Tables
1 Lower Right Cover Open Closed Open
0 Not used
7 Paper Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
6 Fusing Unit Unit Set Unit not set
5 PCU Set Activated Deactivated
4 New PCU Sensor Activated Deactivated
2
3 Interchange Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
2 1 bin Tray Unit Set Unit Set Unit not set
1 1 bin Tray Paper Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Interchange Unit Set Unit Set Unit not set
7 Bridge Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
6 Bridge Relay Sensor Activated Deactivated
5 Bridge Paper Sensor Activated Deactivated
4 Bridge Right Guide Switch Activated Deactivated
3
3 Bridge Left Guide Switch Activated Deactivated
2 Bridge Unit Set Unit Set Unit not set
1 Bridge Fan Motor Lock Locked Unlocked
0 Shift Tray Unit Set Unit Set Unit not set
SM 5-115 B205/B209/D007/D008
Reading
0 1
7 Wake up Signal Not detected Detected
6 Lower Relay Sensor Activated Deactivated
5 Vertical Transport Sensor Activated Deactivated
(Optional paper tray unit)
4 3rd Tray Paper Size Activated Deactivated
4 3 4th Tray Paper Size Activated Deactivated
2 Motor Lock (Optional paper tray Not locked Locked
unit)
1 Height Sensor (Optional paper Activated Deactivated
tray unit)
0 Unit Set (Optional paper tray Unit set Unit not set
unit)
7 Fusing Drive Release Solenoid Activated Deactivated
6 Main Motor Brake Signal Not active Active
5 Main Motor On Signal Activated Deactivated
4 Main Motor Rotation Direction Not active Active
5 Signal
3 3rd Paper End Sensor Paper End Paper is present
2 4th Paper End Sensor Paper End Paper is present
1 3rd Paper Height Sensor Deactivated Activated
0 4th Paper Height Sensor Deactivated Activated
7 Duplex Unit Set Unit set Unit not set
6 Total Counter Not detected Detected
5 By-pass Tray Unit Set Detected Not detected
4 By-pass Paper End Sensor Paper End Paper is present
6
3 By-pass Paper Size 2 Activated Deactivated
7 Not Used
6 Not Used
5 Not Used
4 Not Used
7
3 Key Counter Set Detected Not detected
2 Key Card Set Detected Not detected
1 Polygon Motor Ready Signal Ready Not ready
0 Not Used
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-116 SM
Reading
0 1
7 Dip Switch - 4 On Off
6 Dip Switch - 3 Off On
8
3 Not Used
2 Front Safety Sw – 5V On Off
1 Front Safety Sw – 24V Off On
0 Main Motor Ready Signal Ready Not ready
7 Not used
6 Relay Off Signal Not detected Detected
5 Toner Bottle Motor Lock Locked Not locked
4 Right Cover Open Closed Open
9
3 Registration Sensor Activated Deactivated
2 Exhaust Fan Lock Not locked Locked
1 Interchange Cover Open Closed Open
0 Paper Overflow Sensor Activated Deactivated
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
5 Not Used
4 Upper Relay Sensor Activated Deactivated
10
3 1st Paper End Paper End Paper is present
2 2nd Paper Lift Sensor Activated Deactivated
1 1st Paper Lift Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Not Used
7 2nd Paper Size 1 Activated Deactivated
Service
Tables
11
3 1st Paper Size 1 Activated Deactivated
NOTE: Numbers 12 to 14 are not used for this machine.
SM 5-117 B205/B209/D007/D008
ARDF Input Check (SP6007)

2. Enter the number (1 – 11) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0’s and 1’s, as shown
below. However, only bit 0 at the right side of the screen is valid.
00000000
Bit 76543210
3. Check the status of bit 0 for the required item listed in the table below.
W2
W1
B205S903.WMFF
Reading
No.. Description
0 1
1 Original set sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Original width sensor 1 (W1) Paper not detected Paper detected
3 Original width sensor 2 (W2) Paper not detected Paper detected
4 Original length sensor 1 (L1) Paper not detected Paper detected
5 Original length sensor 2 (L2) Paper not detected Paper detected
6 Original trailing edge sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
7 ADF cover sensor Cover closed Cover opened
8 DF position sensor ADF closed ADF opened
9 Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
10 Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
11 Inverter sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-118 SM
Finisher Input Check (SP6117)

2. Enter the number (1 – 4) for the item that you want to check. A small box will be
displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0’s and 1’s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.
00000000
Bit 76543210
3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.
For 1000-sheet Finisher

Reading
0 1
7 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
6 Not Used
5 Jogger Fence HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
4 Stapler HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
Group 1
3 Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated
2 Not Used
1 Lower Tray Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated
7 Not Used
6 Not Used
Service
Tables
5 Stapler Ready Signal Activated Deactivated
4 Not Used
Group 2
3 Not Used
2 Staple Sensor Activated Deactivated
1 Staple Hammer HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Stapler Tray Paper Sensor Activated Deactivated
7 Not Used
6 Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated
5 Not used
Group 3 (Only 4 Stack Height Sensor Activated Deactivated
1000 Fin.) 3 Not Used
2 Not Used
1 Shift HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Exit Guide HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
SM 5-119 B205/B209/D007/D008
Reading
0 1
7 Not Used
6 Not Used
5 Not Used
Group 4 (Only 4 Not Used
1000 Fin.) 3 Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated
2 Not Used
1 Not Used
0 Not Used
For 500-sheet Finisher

Reading
0 1
7 Stack Near-limit Sensor Activated Deactivated
6 Tray Upper Limit Sensor Activated Deactivated
5 Lever Sensor Activated Deactivated
4 Stack Height Sensor Activated Deactivated
1
3 Top Cover Sensor Closed Opened
2 Jogger HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
1 Exit Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Entrance Sensor Activated Deactivated
7 Not Used
6 Not Used
5 Not Used
4 Staple Unit Lock Locked Not Locked
2
3 Staple Cartridge Sensor Activated Deactivated
2 Staple End Sensor Activated Deactivated
1 Staple Hammer HP Sensor Activated Deactivated
0 Staple Unit Cover Switch Closed Opened
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-120 SM
5.1.6 OUTPUT CHECK

NOTE: Motors keep turning in this mode regardless of upper or lower limit sensor
signals. To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an
electrical component on for a long time.
Main Machine Output Check (SP5804)
1. Open SP mode 5804.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table on the next page.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item.
NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off
the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical
component switched on for a long time.
Service
Tables
Output Check Table
NOTE: Pull out the tray before performing the output checks 25, 26, 29, and 30.
Number On Screen Service Manual Part Name

1 Main Motor (Fwd) Main motor (forward)
2 Main Motor (Rev) Main motor (Reverse) Do not use
3 Registration CL Registration clutch
4 Development CL Not used
5 Toner Bottle Motor Toner supply motor
6 Exhaust Fan Motor (High Speed) Exhaust fan (High Speed)
7 Exhaust Fan Motor (Low Speed) Exhaust fan (Low Speed)
8 By-pass Feed CL By-pass feed clutch
9 1st Paper Feed CL Upper paper feed clutch
10 2nd Paper Feed CL Lower paper feed clutch
11 1st Paper Tray Up Upper paper lift motor (Up)
12 1st Paper Tray Down Upper paper lift motor (Down)
13 2nd Paper Tray Up Lower paper lift motor (Up)
14 2nd Paper Tray Down Lower paper lift motor (Down)
15 Paper Transport CL Upper relay clutch
16 Paper Transport CL2 Lower relay clutch
17 Fuser Drive Cancel SOL Fusing drive release solenoid
SM 5-121 B205/B209/D007/D008
Number On Screen Service Manual Part Name

21 Paper Transport CL3 Relay clutch (Optional paper tray unit)
22 3rd Paper Feed CL Upper paper feed clutch (Optional paper
tray unit)
23 4th Paper Feed CL Lower paper feed clutch (Optional paper
tray unit)
24 Paper Bank Motor Tray motor (Optional paper tray unit)
25 3rd/LCT Tray Up Upper Paper lift motor (Up) (Optional
paper tray unit or LCT)
26 3rd/LCT Tray Down Upper paper lift motor (Down) (Optional
paper tray unit or LCT)
27 4th Tray Up Lower paper lift motor (Up) (Optional
paper tray unit)
28 4th Tray Down Lower paper lift motor (Down) (Optional
paper tray unit)
29 Tandem Rear Fence Drive Motor – Fwd Rear fence motor (forward) (Optional
LCT)
30 Tandem Rear Fence Drive Motor – Rev Rear fence motor (reverse (Optional
LCT)
31 Tandem Fence SOL Side fence solenoid (Optional LCT)
32 Exit Tray Shift Motor Shift tray motor (Optional shift tray)
33 Exit Junction Gate SOL (Upper Unit) Exit junction gate (Optional interchange
unit)
34 Exit Junction Gate SOL (Lower Unit) Duplex junction gate (Optional
interchange unit)
41 Duplex Inverter Motor (Rev) Duplex inverter motor (Reverse)
(Optional duplex unit)
42 Duplex Inverter Motor (Fwd) Duplex inverter motor (Forward)
(Optional duplex unit)
Duplex Transport Motor Duplex transport motor (Optional duplex
43
unit)
Duplex SOL Inverter gate solenoid (Optional duplex
44
unit)
Relay Fan Motor Bridge cooling fan motor (Optional
51
bridge unit)
Relay Transport Motor Bridge unit drive motor (Optional bridge
52
unit)
Relay SOL Junction gate solenoid (Optional bridge
53
unit)
54 Total Counter Total counter
60 Polygon Motor Polygonal mirror motor
61 Polygon Motor/LD Polygonal mirror motor and laser diode
62 LD ON Laser diode - Do not use
81 Duplex Unit Free Run 1 Duplex unit free run (without paper)
82 Duplex Unit Free Run 2 Duplex unit free run (with paper)
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-122 SM
ARDF Output Check (SP6008)

1. Open SP mode SP6008.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close
this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
No. Description
1 Feed Motor (Fwd)
2 Feed-in Motor (Rev)
3 Transport Motor (Fwd)
4 Feed Clutch
5 Pick-up Solenoid
6 Junction Gate Solenoid
7 Stamp Solenoid
Finisher Output Check (SP6118)

1. Open SP mode SP6118.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close
this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.
Service
Tables
No. Description
1000-sheet finisher 500-sheet finisher
1 Upper Transport Motor Main Motor
2 Shift Tray Lift Motor Output Tray Motor
3 Staple Hammer Motor Stapler Motor
4 Shift Motor Jogger Motor
5 Lower Transport Motor Not Used
6 Shift Tray Exit Motor Not Used
7 Tray Junction Gate Solenoid Not Used
8 Jogger Motor Not Used
9 Stapler Motor Not Used
10 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid Not Used
11 Positioning Roller Solenoid Not Used
12 Stack Feed-out Motor Not Used
13 Exit Guide Plate Motor Not Used
14 Not Used Paddle Roller Solenoid
15 Not Used Exit Unit Gear Solenoid
16 Not Used Stack Height Lever Solenoid
17 Transport Motor
SM 5-123 B205/B209/D007/D008
5.1.7 SMC DATA LISTS (SP5990)
1. Open SP mode 5990 and select the number corresponding to the list that you
wish to print.
SMC (System Parameter and Data Lists)
1 All Data List
2 SP Mode Data List
3 UP Mode Data List
4 Logging Data List
5 Self-Diagnostics Results List
7 NIB Summary
8 Capture Log
21 Copy UP Mode List
22 Scanner SP Mode List
23 Scanner UP Mode List
2. Touch “Execute” on the touch panel

3. Select. “Single Face” or “Both Face” then touch “Execute” to start printing.
4. After printing the list, press Exit twice to close the SP Mode screen and return
to copy mode.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-124 SM
5.1.8 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5801)

Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their
default settings except the following:
SP2989 1-5 PCU ID (South Korea Only)
SP2990 1-5 Original Toner ID (South Korea Only)
SP2991 1-5 Original Toner Counter (South Korea Only)
SP5811 1: Machine serial number
SP590 7: Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
SP7002 1: Electrical total counter value
Normally, this SP mode should not be used. This procedure is necessary only after
replacing the NVRAM, or when the copier malfunctions because the NVRAM is
damaged.
1. Enter the SP mode, do SP5801, and press the number for the item that you
want to initialize.
No. What It Initializes Comments
1 All Clear Initializes items 2 ~ 12 below.
2 Engine Clear Initializes all registration settings for the engine and process
settings.
3 SCS (System Control Service)/SRAM. Initializes default system
settings, CSS settings, operation display coordinates, and
ROM update information.
4 IMH Memory Clear Initializes the image file system.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
5 MCS (Memory Control Service). Initializes the automatic delete time
setting for stored documents.
Service
6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
Tables
7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX settings,
local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
8 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer
SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all the
scanner SP modes.
10 Network application Deletes the network file application management files and
thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
11 NCS (Network Control Service) Initializes the system defaults and
interface settings (IP addresses also), SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
12 R-FAX Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, job
history, and local storage file numbers.
14 Clear DCS Settings Initializes: SP5845 (All), SP5860 (All), SP5861 (All), SP5863,
registered scanner documents and subjects.
15 Clear UCS Settings Initializes: SP5846 (All), SP5801 15
18 SRM Memory Clear Initializes information in non-volatile RAM.
19 LCS Memory Clear Initializes information in non-volatile RAM.
2. Press Execute and turn the main switch off and back on.
SM 5-125 B205/B209/D007/D008
5.1.9 APS OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP4301)

When open this SP, a small box will be displayed on the SP mode screen with a
series of 0’s and 1’s. The meaning of the display is as follows.
00000000
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 = Paper detected
L1
L3 L2
W2
W1
Bit Description
7 L2
6 L3
5 W1
4 W2
3 Not Used
2 L1
1 Not Used
0 Not Used
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-126 SM
5.1.10 DF APS SENSOR OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP6901)

When open this SP, a small box will be displayed on the SP mode screen with a
series of 0’s and 1’s. The meaning of the display is as follows.
00000000
Bit 76543210
1 = Paper detected
W2
W1
Large Small
Service
Tables
W1 0 0 1 1
W2 0 1 0 1
Bit Description
7 Not Used
6 Not Used
5 W1
4 W2
3 L1
2 L2
1 L3
0 Not Used
SM 5-127 B205/B209/D007/D008
5.1.11 NIP BAND WIDTH MEASUREMENT (SP1109)
OHP
Paper feed direction
When paper wrinkling or image off-set occurs, the pressure from the pressure roller
can be adjusted by changing the position of the pressure springs. At this time, the
nip band width can also be checked with SP1109, as follows.
1. Do a free run (SP5802) for about 50 sheets.
2. Access SP1109 and press the “1” key.
3. Press Copy Window to return to the copy window.
4. Place an OHP sheet (A4/8.5”x11” sideways) on the by-pass tray or in the 2nd
paper tray.
5. Press the “Start” key.
The OHP sheet is stopped in the fusing unit for about 20 seconds, then it will be
fed automatically.
6. Check the nip band width [A]. The relationship between the position of the
pressure spring and the band width is as follows.
NOTE: Check the nip band width around the center of the OHP.
1. Pressure spring position Nip band width

Upper (default position) 5.2 ± 0.5 mm
Lower 5.3 ± 0.5 mm
2. Envelope feed mode (green lever down) at the 4.7 ± 0.5 mm
default pressure spring position
If the width is out of the above specification, the pressure spring should be
replaced.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-128 SM
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE

The procedure is the same for all firmware modules.
NOTE: If you will change scanner firmware, print 5-990-22 and -23 (SMC reports
for scanner settings) before you start this procedure.
1. Turn off the main power switch.

2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x 2).
3. Insert the SD card [B] containing the software you wish to download into SD
card slot C3.
4. Open the front cover.
5. Turn on the main power.
6. Follow the instructions on the operation panel
7. Monitor the downloading status on the operation panel.
• While downloading is in progress, the panel displays “Writing”. When
downloading has been completed, the panel displays “Completed”.
• The Start key lights red during downloading, then lights green after
downloading is completed. (only for "Operation Panel" downloading)
CAUTION
Never switch off the power while downloading. Switching off the power while the
new software is being downloading will damage the boot files in the controller.
Service
Tables
8. After confirming that downloading is completed, turn off the main power and
remove the SD card.
9. If more software needs to be downloaded, repeat steps 1 to 7.
10. Turn the main power on and confirm that the new software loads and that the
machine starts normally.
11. After installing new scanner firmware, do SP5-801-9 (Memory All Clear –
Scanner Application). Then input scanner settings that are different from the
defaults (see the SMC prints of 5-990-22 and -23 that you made earlier).
Important
If the download failed, an error message appears on the panel. Do the download
procedure again. If the second download fails:
• For the controller module, set bit 1 of DIP switch 1 on the controller board to OFF,
then switch on the machine. The machine boots from the SD card.
• Other modules. Replace the appropriate PCB.
SM 5-129 B205/B209/D007/D008
SOFTWARE RESET
5.3 SOFTWARE RESET

The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. Use the following
procedure.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
-or-
Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine
beeps once release both buttons. After “Now loading. Please wait” is displayed for
a few seconds the copy window will open. The machine is ready for normal
operation.
5.4 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET

5.4.1 SYSTEM SETTING RESET
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the
following procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter.
2. Hold down and then press System Settings.
NOTE: You must press first.
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system
settings, press Yes.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-130 SM
SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET
5.4.2 COPIER SETTING RESET

The copy settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following
procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter.
2. Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.
NOTE: You must press first.
3. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier
Document Server settings, press Yes.
4. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit.
Service
Tables
SM 5-131 B205/B209/D007/D008
USER TOOLS
5.5 USER TOOLS

The user program (UP) mode can be accessed by users and operators, and by
sales and service staff. UP mode is used to input the copier’s default settings. The
user can reset the default settings at any time. ( 5.4)
5.5.1 HOW TO USE UP MODE

UP Mode Initial Screen: User Tools/Counter Display
To enter the UP mode, press User Tools/Counter.
System Settings
In the User Tools/Counter display, press System Settings.
Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
press it to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the
User Tools/Counter display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
Copier/Document Server Features

In the User/Tools Counter display, press Copy/Document Server Settings.
Click a tab to display the settings. If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner,
press it to display more options. Perform the settings, press Exit to return to the
User Tools/Counter display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-132 SM
USER TOOLS
Printer, Facsimile, Scanner Settings

In the User/Tools Counter display, press Printer Settings, Facsimile, or Scanner
Settings to open the appropriate screen and then click the tab to display more
settings. The screen below shows the Printer Features screen.
Inquiry
In the User/Tools Counter display, press Inquiry.
The following SP mode settings will be displayed.
• Service Telephone Number (SP58121)
• Sales Telephone Number (SP8124)
• Consumable Telephone Number (SP8123)
• Toner Name (SP-841)
Service
Tables
SM 5-133 B205/B209/D007/D008
USER TOOLS
Counter
In the User/Tools Counter display, press Counter.
The following SP mode counters will be displayed.

• Copy Counter (SP5045)
• Printer Counter (SP5045)
View the settings, press Print Counter Exit to return to the User Tools/Counter
display, and then press Exit to return to the copy window.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-134 SM
LEDS
5.6 LEDS
Controller
Number Normal Controller Software Error
Download
LED 1 Off Blinking Off
LED 2 Blinking Blinking Lit or Off
SBCU
Number Normal SBCU Software Download Error
LED 1 Lit Lit Off or Blinking
Blinking Lit Lit (except downloading)
LED 2
or Off
5.7 DIP SWITCHES

Controller
SW1
Number OFF ON
1 Boot from SD card Default: Boot from Flash ROM
2 to 7 Default: OFF DFU ---
8 --- Default DFU
Service
Tables
SBCU
SW102
Destination Bit
1 2 3 4
Japan OFF OFF OFF OFF
NA ON OFF OFF OFF
EU/ASIA OFF ON OFF OFF
SW103
DFU. Do not change these settings.
SM 5-135 B205/B209/D007/D008
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.8 USING THE DEBUG LOG

This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer
Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but
this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main
features:
• Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD
for later retrieval.
• Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure
below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the
HDD. Then ask the user to reproduce the problem.
5.8.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved the until the “Save Debug Log” function
has been switched on and a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode.
• Press S (Clear Modes) then use the 10-key pad to enter .
• Press and hold down # (Clear/Stop) for more than 3 seconds.
• Press “Copy SP” on the touch-panel.
• Enter then press .
2. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, press .
COPY : SP-5857-001
Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
_1_
Initial 0
3. On the control panel keypad, press “1” then press . This switches the Save
Debug Log feature on.
NOTE: The default setting is “0” (OFF). This feature must be switched on in
order for the debug information to be saved.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-136 SM
USING THE DEBUG LOG
4. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved.
Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation
panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination, then press .
COPY : SP-5-857-002
Save Debug Log
Target (2:HDD 3:SD Card)
_2_
Initial 2
NOTE: Select “3 SD Card” to save the debug information directly to the SD

card if it is inserted in the service slot.
5. Now touch “5858” and specify the events that you want to record in the debug
log. SP5858(Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
Saves data when an engine-related
1 Engine SC Error
SC code is generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-
2 Controller SC Error
related SC Code is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that
3 Any SC Error
you specify by entering code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
NOTE: More than one event can be selected.
Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4

Touch the appropriate items(s). Press “ON” for each selection. This example
Service
Tables
shows “Engine SC Error” selected.
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Debug Save When
Engine SC Error
__OFF__ __ON__
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch “3 Any SC Error”, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control
panel number keys, then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Debug Save When
Any SC Error
__670
NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in
Section “4. Troubleshooting”.
SM 5-137 B205/B209/D007/D008
USING THE DEBUG LOG
6. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Touch “5859”.
Under “5859” press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to
record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press .
NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each
key.
The example below shows “Key 1” with “2222” entered.
COPY : SP-5-859-001
Debug Save Key No.
Key 1
___2222
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10

KEY NO. COPY PRINTER SCANNER WEB
1 2222 (SCS)
2 2223 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4848(COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)
7 2224 (BCU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)
8 4600 (GPS- 3000 (NCS) 3300 (PTS)
PM)
9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
10 2224 (BCU) 2000 (NCS)
NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (“0”).
Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GSP-PM GW Print Service – Print Module PTS Print Server
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
MCS Memory Control Service SRM System Resource
Management
NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box
(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on

the HDD (the target selected with SP5-857-002) for the events that you
selected SP5-858and the memory modules selected with SP5-859.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-138 SM
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
• Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
• The initial settings are all zero.
• These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the
settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,
enter a zero for that key.
• You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the
corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.
• You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the
settings from the 9 available selections for the “PRINTER” column only.
• One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is
limited to 4 MB.
Service
Tables
SM 5-139 B205/B209/D007/D008
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.8.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD
1. Insert the SD card into service slot C3 of the copier.

2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857 009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4
MB) to write the debugging data to the SD card.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh
representative by email, or just send the SD card by mail.
5.8.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY

Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any
other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site, please instruct
customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug
data. Such problems would include a controller or panel freeze.
NOTE: In order to use this feature, the customer engineer must have previously
switched on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and selected the hard
disk as the save destination (SP5857-002).
1. When the error occurs, on the operation panel, pressJ (Clear Modes).
2. On the control panel, enter “01” then hold down \ for at least 3 sec. until
the machine beeps then release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for
later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.

The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service
representatives can retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to
an SD card.
B205/B209/D007/D008 5-140 SM
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.8.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES

SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation
is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This
function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4
MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy
operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data
from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This
command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log

This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD, but this operation
takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and
on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the
log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire
the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already created on the
HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not
require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to delete the debug
Service
Tables
log data from the HDD and then execute this SP (SP5857-016).
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log

This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card, but this
operation takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched
off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to
create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required
to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file already
created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new
log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to
delete the debug log data from the SD card and then execute this SP (SP5857-
017).
SM 5-141 B205/B209/D007/D008
OVERVIEW
6. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
28
9
27
10
11
26
12
13
14
25 15
16
24
17
23 18
19
20
Descriptions
Detailed
22 21
SM 6-1 B205/B209/D007/D008
OVERVIEW
1. 2nd scanner 15. Development roller

2. Original width sensor 16. ID sensor
3. Exposure lamp 17. Registration roller
4. 1st scanner 18. Friction pad
5. Original length sensor 19. Paper feed roller
6. Lens 20. Paper size sensor
7. Scanner motor 21. Bottom plate
8. SBU board 22. Tray heater
9. Exit roller 23. Polygon mirror motor
10. Fusing hot roller 24. Laser unit
11. Fusing pressure roller 25. Toner supply bottle holder
12. Cleaning unit 26. Drum charge roller
13. OPC drum 27. Anti-condensation heater
14. Transfer roller 28. Scanner home position sensor
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-2 SM
OVERVIEW
6.1.2 PAPER PATH 1

2
8
1. Optional ADF
2. Optional 1-bin Tray
Descriptions
3. Optional Interchange Unit Detailed
4. Optional Duplex Unit
5. Optional By-pass Feed Tray
6. Optional Paper Tray Unit
7. Optional 1000-sheet Finisher
8. Optional Bridge Unit
SM 6-3 B205/B209/D007/D008
OVERVIEW
6.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the point-to-point
diagram for the location of the components.
Symbol Name Function

Motors
M1 Scanner Drives the 1st and 2nd scanners.
M2 Polygonal Mirror Turns the polygonal mirror.
M3 Main Drives the main unit components.
M4 Exhaust Fan Removes heat from around the fusing unit.
M5 Upper Paper Lift Raises the bottom plate in the 1st paper tray.
M6 Lower Paper Lift Raises the bottom plate in the 2nd paper tray.
Toner Supply Rotates the toner bottle to supply toner to the
M7
development unit.
Magnetic Clutches
MC1 Upper Paper Feed Starts paper feed from the 1st paper tray.
MC2 Lower Paper Feed Starts paper feed from the 2nd paper tray.
MC3 Upper Relay Drives the upper relay rollers.
MC4 Lower Relay Drives the lower relay rollers.
MC4 Registration Drives the registration rollers.
Switches
Provides power to the machine. If this is off, there
SW1 Main
is no power supplied to the machine.
Detects whether the right upper cover is open or
SW2 Right Upper Cover
not.
Cuts the +5VLD and +24V dc power line and
SW3 Right Cover
detects whether the right cover is open or not.
Detects whether the right lower cover is open or
SW4 Right Lower Cover
not.
Determines what size of paper is in the upper
SW5 Upper Paper Size
paper tray.
Determines what size of paper is in the lower
SW6 Lower Paper Size
paper tray.
SW7 New PCU Detect Detects when a new PCU is installed. Japan Only
Cuts the +5VLD and +24V dc power line and
SW8 Front Cover Safety
detects whether the front cover is open or not.
Provides power for machine operation. The
SW9 Operation
machine still has power if this switch is off.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-4 SM
OVERVIEW

Sensors
Informs the CPU when the 1st and 2nd scanners
S1 Scanner HP
are at home position.
Informs the CPU that the platen cover is in the up
S2 Platen Cover or down position (related to the APS/ARE
functions).
Detects original width. This is one of the APS
S3 Original Width
(Auto Paper Select) sensors.
Detects original length. This is one of the APS
S4 Original Length 1
Detects original length. This is one of the APS
S5 Original Length 2
Detects the amount of toner inside the
S6 Toner Density (TD)
development unit.
Informs the CPU when the 1st paper tray runs out
S7 1st Paper End
of paper.
Informs the CPU when the 2nd paper tray runs out
S8 2nd Paper End
of paper.
Detects the density of various patterns and the
S9 Image Density (ID)
reflectivity of the drum for process control.
S10 Paper Overflow Detects paper overflow in the built-in copy tray.
S11 Paper Exit Detects misfeeds.
S12 Upper Relay Detects misfeeds.
S13 Lower Relay Detects misfeeds.
Detects misfeeds and controls registration clutch
S14 Registration
off-on timing.
Detects when the paper in the 1st paper tray is at
S15 1st Paper Lift
the feed height.
Detects when the paper in the 2nd paper tray is at
S16 2nd Paper Lift
the feed height.
S17 1st Paper Height – 1 Detects the amount of paper in the 1st paper tray.
Descriptions
S18 1st Paper Height – 2 Detects the amount of paper in the 1st paper tray. Detailed
S19 2nd Paper Height – 1 Detects the amount of paper in the 2nd paper tray.
S20 2nd Paper Height – 2 Detects the amount of paper in the 2nd paper tray.
SM 6-5 B205/B209/D007/D008
OVERVIEW

PCBs
Controls all applications both directly and through
PCB1 Controller
other control boards.
Provides dc power to the system and ac power to
PCB2 PSU (Power Supply Unit)
the fusing lamp and heaters.
SBCU (Scanner & Base Controls the fusing lamp and the mechanical parts
PCB3
Engine Control Unit) of the machine.
Contains the CCD, and outputs a video signal to
PCB4 SBU (Sensor Board Unit)
the IPU board.
PCB5 Lamp Stabilizer Stabilizes the power to the exposure lamp.
PCB6 LDD (Laser Diode Driver) Controls the laser diode.
PCB7 Operation Panel Controls the operation panel.
Supplies high voltage to the drum charge roller,
PCB8 High Voltage Supply
development roller, and transfer roller.
Expands the memory capacity for the copier,
PCB9 Memory (Option)
printer, and scanner features.
IPU (Image Processing
PCB10 Performs the image processing functions.
Unit)
Solenoids
SOL1 Fusing Drive Release Releases the drive for the fusing unit.
Lamps
Applies high intensity light to the original for
L1 Exposure Lamp
exposure.
L2 Main Fusing Lamp Heats the center of the hot roller.
L3 Secondary Fusing Lamp Heats both ends of the hot roller.
Quenching Lamp Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum
L4
surface after cleaning.
Heaters
Anti-condensation Turns on when the main power switch is off to
H1
(Option) prevent moisture from forming on the optics.
Turns on when the main power switch is off to
H2 Tray (Option) prevent moisture from forming around the paper
trays.
Others
Opens the fusing lamp circuit if the fusing unit
TS1 Fusing Thermostats
overheats.
TH1 Fusing Thermistors Detects the temperature of the hot roller.
Laser Synchronization Detects the laser beam at the start of the main
LSD 1
Detector scan.
CO1 Mechanical Counter Keeps track of the total number of prints made.
Used for control of authorized use. If this feature is
CO2 Key Counter (Option) enabled for copying, copying will be impossible
until it is installed.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-6 SM
OVERVIEW
6.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT Scanner 1
Fusing
6
PCU/Transfer Drive
7
Descriptions
Detailed
1. Scanner Drive Motor

2. Main Motor
3. Registration Clutch
4. Upper Paper Feed Clutch
5. Upper Transport Clutch
6. Lower Paper Feed Clutch
7. Lower Transport Clutch
SM 6-7 B205/B209/D007/D008
BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE

6.2.1 OVERVIEW
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-8 SM
BOARD STRUCTURE
Here is a summary of the new features of the boards in this machine:

• GW Controller. Controls the memory and the fax/scanner/printer options
Important: The NIB (Network Interface Board) and USB 2.0 interfaces are built
into the controller board and do not require installation.
• SBCU (Scanner Base engine Control Unit). This is the scanner and engine
control board. It controls the following functions:
• Engine sequence
• Timing control for peripherals
• Image processing control and video control
• Operation control
• Drive control for the sensors, motors, and solenoids of the printer and
scanner
• High voltage supply board control
• Fusing control
• SBU (Sensor Board Unit). Converts the analog signals to 8-bit digital signals,
and then sends them to the IPU for processing.
• IPU (Image Processing Unit). The IPU board does the image processing (for
example, auto shading, filtering, magnification, gradation processing), and finally
sends the data to the LD drive board. The IPU also functions as a motherboard
because it has connection points for the GW controller and FCU. The CDSB
(Copy Data Security Board) also connects directly to the IPU
• LDB (Laser Diode Board). The laser diode board is controlled directly by the
GAVD mounted on the IPU.
• Operation Panel. The operation panel LCD is controlled by the VLCDC mounted
on the LCDC (LCD Controller).
• PSU (Power Supply Unit). The ac drive circuit is the same as the previous
model. The newly-designed PSU consumes only 1W when the machine is not
operating, a decrease of 12W.
• Fax Unit B766. The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) is new (it is also used on other
Descriptions
new models). The fax unit is an option for this machine. The NCU (Network Detailed
Control Circuit) that interfaces the fax unit and telephone network is built into the
FCU.
SM 6-9 B205/B209/D007/D008
BOARD STRUCTURE
6.2.2 CONTROLLER BOARD
P O N C TL C trl N orm ally ＯＮ

1.3VEP 1.8VE Engine Energy
Saver O FF
CPU
1.5VEP
3.3VE
(RM7035C-466) SSCG
2.5VEP ICS960009
3.3VEP 5VE 5V
C P U I/F
Extension Connector
LV C 244
HDD1
C T L H D D (1) C TL H D D (1)
D A TA H D D (1) LV C 245 D A TA H D D (1)
ATA100
D A T A H D D (2)
SSTL_2 I/F DDR SDRAM
SO-DIMM (PC2100)
ASIC
SD
SD
S D I/F
Trumpet
Bootable SD
LV 07
D EB U G (0) I/F D EB U G (0) I/F

D EB U G
D EB U G (1) I/F D EB U G (1) I/F
I2C (G IO )
P C I B U S (R api64)
Option Board Slot# 1

SDC L
VHCT VHCT
244 244
Option Board Slot#2

PEACE CSS
C SS I/F C SS I/F (RIO3)
(R i03)
P EA C E I/F P EA C E I/F
ENGINE I/F
Selectable
SD
SD
P C I66 B U S (32bit) / LO C A L B U S
SD (A ) I/F
SD
A LV C 244
A LV C 245
SD
External S D I/F (P ortB ) RCS0

RCS1
LV C 244
P C I I/F (P C IA D 16:1) LA L(8:1)

LV 07
E nergy S ave C trl E nergy S ave C trl
LA L(16:9) FLASH
LV C 244
W U P /R D Y
ASIC
ASIC P C I I/F (P C IA D 16:1) 16MB
LV C 374
LA H (24:7)
Bassoon
Shaker
V H C T244
P A N EL I/F P A N EL I/F AHLE

LV C 245 LV C 244
LV C 125
P C I I/F (P C IC M D 3:0) O E/W E

BUFDIR
USB
P C I I/F (P C IA D 15:0) LD (15:0)

U SB 2.0 I/F
LD(8:0)
TC LK
PHY
NVRAM
NIC
100B ase M II I/F

(Std)
OSC
25MHz
RTC I2C
SECURE ROM×2
IC
Card
EEP R O M
I/F
NVRAM SPI1
32kB× 2 SPI2
SDCLK
U SB C LK
TIO I/F XTL

30MHz
SSCG
ICS960008
The controller controls all applications, including copier, printer, scanner, and fax
applications. To add the optional printer, or scanner function, an SD card must be
inserted in an SD card slot of the controller. The fax option, however, requires
installation of an FCU.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-10 SM
BOARD STRUCTURE
ASCI Trumpet. Contains the dedicated GW controller chips of the shared

resources (the CPU, memory, and HDD hardware) for the copying and printing
functions.
• CPU (RM7035C-466) The central processing unit that controls the operation of
the controller board.
• HDD. A 2.5-in HDD unit (capacity more than 20 GB) can be connected using the
IDE I/F. The disks are portioned as shown in the table below.
• SD (Bootable C3). Service slot for firmware version updates, moving
applications to other SD cards, and downloading/uploading NVRAM contents.
• DDR SDRAM. The image memory for the printer function where image
compression, image rotation and other operations are done. (Standard: 128 MB,
Option: 256 MB)
ASIC Shaker. Controls the following functions: USB, Ethernet, PCI (optional
boards for Bluetooth, FireWire, Wireless LAN, and Centronics), debug serial, I2C,
applications on SD cards mounted in SD card slots C1 and C2, and the energy
save features.
• SD. This is the interface for SD card slots C1, and C2.
B205/B209 C1 is for the Printer/Scanner B767. C2 is for PostScript3 B757 or Data
Overwrite Security B735.
D007/D008 C1 is for the Printer/Scanner Unit D310, Printer Unit D313, or RPCS Unit D314.
C2 is for PostScript3 D318. Data Overwrite Security B735 is merged with the
printer option SD card in C1, or it can reside in C1 alone if no printer unit is
installed.
• Board Option Slots 1, 2. Only one of the following options can be installed in
either Slot 1 or Slot 2: IEEE1284 Interface Board B679 (Centronics),
IEEE802.11b G813 (Wireless LAN), IEEE1394 Interface Board B581 (FireWire),
Bluetooth Interface Unit B736. The File Format Converter B609 (MLB) can be
installed in either slot.
NOTE: IEEE1394 is used with the B205/B209 Series machines only. The
D007/D008 Series machines do not use IEEE1394.
Descriptions
Detailed
• Flash ROM. Stores the program. Maximum capacity: 16 MB.
• USB. The interface for USB 2.0 devices. Supports both low-speed and high-
speed modes. USB support is built-into the controller. No installation is required
for the USB function. But, SP5985 001 must be set to "1" to enable the network
functions.
• NIB. The Ethernet interface connection. Network support is built-into the
controller. No installation is required for the network function. But, SP5985 002
must be set to "1" to enable the network functions.
• NVRAM. The 64 MB memory (32 MBx2) that stores many settings: SP mode
settings, UP mode settings, system log information, user accounts, etc. Also, the
number of user accounts can be increases by installing an optional NVRAM
(EEPROM).
SM 6-11 B205/B209/D007/D008
BOARD STRUCTURE
The hard disk is partitioned as shown below.
Partition Size (MB) Function Power Off

File System 1 500 Downloaded fonts, forms Remains
File System 2 500 Job spooling area Remains
File System 3 2,000 Work data area Remains*1
Image LS*2 3,955 Document server, local storage archive Remains*3
Image Temp 3,870 Collation, sample prints, locked prints Erased*3
SAF Thumbnails 300 Stores SAF thumbnails Remains
Job Log 200 Job log Remains
Address Book 300 Stores address book data Remains
Image Transfer 1,002 Stores images for transfer Remains
Capture 500 Stores captured images Remains
Debug 500 Object and swap area for debugging Remains
SDK 1,200 Used for SDK application Remains
Debug Log 150 Debug log Remains
Mail Box 200 Stores images for mail box Remains
Others 542 Miscellaneous Remains
Total 15,629 --- ---
*1 Used for document server.

*2 When an application uses an image page, it uses the Image LS area first. If this area is not
available, it uses the Image TMP area.
*3 Commonly used for applications to store copy, printer, fax, and scanner data. Storage
capacity: About 9,000 pages (3,000 files).
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-12 SM
COPY PROCESS
6.3 COPY PROCESS
8
9
2
6
3
5
4
Descriptions
Detailed
1. EXPOSURE
A xenon lamp exposes the original. Light reflected from the original passes to
the CCD, where it is converted into an analog data signal. This data is
converted to a digital signal, processed and stored in the memory. At the time
of printing, the data is retrieved and sent to the laser diode. For multi-copy runs,
the original is scanned once only and stored to the memory.
2. DRUM CHARGE
In the dark, the charge roller gives a negative charge to the organic photo-
conductive (OPC) drum. The charge remains on the surface of the drum
because the OPC layer has a high electrical resistance in the dark.
SM 6-13 B205/B209/D007/D008
COPY PROCESS
3. LASER EXPOSURE
The processed data scanned from the original is retrieved from the memory
and transferred to the drum by a laser beam, which forms an electrical latent
image on the drum surface. The amount of charge remaining as a latent image
on the drum depends on the laser beam intensity, which is controlled by the
IPU board.
4. DEVELOPMENT
The magnetic developer brush on the development rollers comes in contact
with the latent image on the drum surface. Toner particles are electrostatically
attached to the areas of the drum surface, where the laser reduced the
negative charge on the drum.
5. ID SENSOR
The laser forms a sensor pattern on the drum surface. The ID sensor measures
the reflectivity of the pattern. The output signal is one of the factors used for
toner supply control. Also, the ID sensor measures the reflectivity of the drum
surface. The output signal is used for charge roller voltage control.
6. IMAGE TRANSFER
Paper is fed to the area between the drum surface and the transfer roller at the
proper time for aligning the copy paper and the developed image on the drum
surface. Then, the transfer roller applies a high positive charge to the reverse
side of the paper. This positive charge pulls the toner particles from the drum
surface onto the paper. At the same time, the paper is electrostatically attracted
to the transfer roller.
7. PAPER SEPARATION
Paper separates from the drum as a result of the electrostatic attraction
between the paper and the transfer roller. The discharge plate helps separate
the paper from the drum.
8. CLEANING
The cleaning blade removes any toner remaining on the drum surface after the
image transfers to the paper.
9. QUENCHING
The light from the quenching lamp electrically neutralizes the charge on the
drum surface.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-14 SM
SCANNING
6.4 SCANNING
6.4.1 OVERVIEW
[E] [A] [C] [B]
[F] [D]
The original is illuminated by the exposure lamp (a xenon lamp in this model) [A].
The image is reflected onto a CCD (charge coupled device) [B] via the 1st, 2nd, 3rd
mirrors, and lens [C].
The 1st scanner [D] consists of the exposure lamp, a reflector [E], and the 1st
mirror [F].
A lamp stabilizer energizes the exposure lamp. The light reflected by the reflector is
of almost equal intensity, to reduce shadows on pasted originals.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-15 B205/B209/D007/D008
SCANNING
6.4.2 SCANNER DRIVE

[H]
[G]
[B] [A]
[C]
[D]
[G] [E]
[F]
[E]
A stepper motor drives the scanner. The 1st and 2nd scanners [A,B] are driven by
the scanner drive motor [C] through the timing belt [D], scanner drive pulley [E],
scanner drive shaft [F], and two scanner wires [G].
- Book mode -
The scanner drive board controls and operates the scanner drive motor. In full size
mode, the 1st scanner speed is 150 mm/s during scanning. The 2nd scanner
speed is half that of the 1st scanner.
In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the
magnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or
magnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by
changing the scanner drive motor speed, and in the main scan direction it is done
by image processing on the IPU board.
Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scanner
drive motor speed using SP4008. Magnification in the main scan direction can be
adjusted using SP4009.
- ADF mode -
The scanners are always kept at their home position (the scanner H.P sensor [H]
detects the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ADF motor feeds the original
through the ADF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in the
sub-scan direction is done by changing the ADF motor speed. Magnification in the
main scan direction is done in the IPU board, like for book mode.
Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the ADF motor
speed using SP6006. In the main scan direction, it can be adjusted with SP4009,
like for book mode.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-16 SM
SCANNING
6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION: PLATEN MODE
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
In the optics cavity for original size detection, there are five reflective sensors in
three APS units [A], [B], and [C]. The original width sensors [A] detect the original
width, and the original length sensors [B] and [C] detect the original length. These
are the APS (Auto Paper Select) sensors. Each APS sensor is a reflective
photosensor.
While the main switch is on, these sensors are active and the original size data is
always sent to the CPU. However, the CPU checks the data only when the platen
cover sensor [D] is activated. This is when the platen is positioned about 15 cm
above the exposure glass, for example while it is being closed. The CPU can
recognize the original size from the combination of on/off signals from the APS
Descriptions
sensors. Detailed
If the copy is made with the platen fully open, the CPU decides the original size
from the sensor outputs when the Start key is pressed.
SM 6-17 B205/B209/D007/D008
SCANNING
L1
L3 L2
W2
W1
Original Size Length Sensor Width Sensor

A4/A3 LT/DLT
L3 L2 L1 W2 W1
version version
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O
B4 10" x 14" O O O O X
Foolscap 8.5" x 13" O O X X X
A4-L 8.5" x 11" O O X X X
B5-L O X X X X
A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X O O
B5-S X X X O X
A5-L, A5-S X X X X X
NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: High (paper present), X: Low
For other combinations, "CANNOT DETECT ORIG. SIZE" will be indicated on the
operation panel display (if SP 4-303 is kept at the default setting).
The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This
original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and
increases the machine productivity.
However, if the by-pass feeder is used, note that the machine assumes that the
copy paper is lengthwise. For example, if A4 sideways paper is placed on the by-
pass tray, the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans the full A3 area for the
first copy of each page of the original, disregarding the original size sensors.
However, for each page, the data signal to the laser diode is stopped to match the
copy paper length detected by the registration sensor.
Original size detection using the ADF is described in the manual for the ADF.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-18 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING

6.5.1 OVERVIEW
Copy Data Security

Board
CCD
SBU IPU-A
PCI BUS
Fax (FCU Board)
Controller
IPU-B
Printer/Scanner
LD
LD Controller
ASIC
Drum
Driver Video
FCI Controller
LDD IPU
HDD
The CCD generates an analog video signal. The SBU (Sensor Board Unit)
converts the analog signal to an 8-bit digital signal, then it sends the digital signal
to the IPU (Image Processing Unit) board.
The IPU board performs the image processing, such as auto shading, filtering,
Descriptions
magnification, gradation processing. Detailed
The ASIC on the controller board performs the image editing, such as image
repeat, double copy.
Finally, the IPU board sends the video data to the LD drive board.
SM 6-19 B205/B209/D007/D008
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT)
SBU IPU
O Analog
A/D 1 8 bit data
Processing IC1
CCD
IPU-A
E Analog
A/D 2 8 bit data
Processing IC2
The CCD converts the light reflected from the original into an analog signal. The
CCD line has 7,400 pixels and the resolution is 600 dpi (23.6 lines/mm).
The CCD has two output lines, for odd and even pixels, to the analog processing
IC. The analog processing IC performs the following operations on the signals from
the CCD:
1. Z/C (Zero Clamp):
Adjusts the black level reference for even pixels to match the odd pixels.
2. Signal Amplification:
The analog signal is amplified by operational amplifiers in the AGC circuit.
3. Auto Gain Control
Adjusts the gain curve for the scanned image density.
After the above processing, the analog signals are converted to 8-bit signals by the
A/D converter. This will give a value for each pixel on a scale of 256 grades. Then,
the digitized image data goes to the IPU board.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-20 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.3 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY
0.5mm [A]
20mm
80mm
Sub scan direction
ADS prevents the background of an original from appearing on copies.

The copier scans the auto image density detection area [A] as shown in the
diagram. This corresponds to a few mm at one end of the main scan line. As the
scanner scans down the page, the SBU detects the peak white level for each scan
line. The IPU performs the ADS function in accordance with the peak white level.
When an original with a gray background is scanned, the density of the gray area is
the peak white level density. Therefore, the original background will not appear on
copies. Because peak level data is taken for each scan line, ADS corrects for any
changes in background density down the page.
As with previous digital copiers, the user can select manual image density when
Descriptions
selecting auto image density mode, and the machine will use both settings when Detailed
processing the original.
SM 6-21 B205/B209/D007/D008
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.4 ORIGINAL TYPE SETTINGS

The user can select one of the following modes with the User Tools screen: Text,
Text/Photo, Photo, Pale, Generation. Each of these modes has a range of different
settings (e.g. Soft, Normal, Sharp, etc). For each mode, a Custom Setting option is
also available. This Custom Setting holds the values selected with the SP modes,
which can be adjusted to meet special requirements that cannot be covered by the
standard settings.
To display this screen, press User Tools/Counter , press Copier/Document
Server Settings, press the General Features tab, and then press Copy Quality.
Mode Function
Best reproduction of text and sharp lines. Ignores background
Text
texture. ( p.6-25 Text Mode)
Good reproduction of mixed text and photographs with accurate
Text/Photo grayscaling, better than that achieved in the Text mode. ( p.6-27
Text/Photo Mode)
Photo Best possible reproduction of photographs. ( p.6-26 Photo Mode)
Reproduction similar to text mode, but of lower contrast. Ideal for
Pale
copying thin originals. ( p.6-28 Pale Mode)
Attempts to achieve the best reproduction of copied originals that
Generation
are faded because they are copies of copies. ( p.6-29 Generation
Copy
Copy)
In addition, there are two main image processing modes: grayscale processing and
binary picture processing. When no optional hard disk has been installed, the
machine uses binary picture processing. However, when the optional hard disk has
been installed, the machine uses grayscale processing. The user or technician
cannot select the mode.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-22 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.5 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT)

Overview
Copy Data Security Board
Fax (FCU Board)

IPU-A
PCI BUS
SBU
Controller
Printer/Scanner
IPU-B
ASIC
LDD GAVD Video
FCI Controller
IPU HDD
The image data from the SBU goes to the IPU (Image Processing Unit) ICs on the
IPU board, which carry out the following processes on the image data.
IPU-A
• Auto shading
• Pre-filtering
• Magnification
• Test pattern generation
IPU-B
• Filtering (MTF and smoothing)
Descriptions
Detailed
• ID gamma correction
• Grayscale processing
• Binary picture processing
• Error diffusion
• Dithering
Video Controller
• Video path control
GAVD
• FCI (Fine Character and Image)
The image data then goes to the LD driver (LDD).
SM 6-23 B205/B209/D007/D008
IMAGE PROCESSING
Image Processing Path

This diagram shows the various stages of the image process and where they are
done.
SBU
ADS
・
Copy Data Security Board

IPU
・Auto Shading
Detection ・Copy Data Security Detection
IPU-A Signal
・Auto Shading
・Pre-Filtering
・Magnification
・Characteristic Detection
・Copy Data Security Function
IPU-B
・Filtering
・ID Gamma Correction HDD
・Error Diffusion
・Dithering Printer/
・Binary Picture Processing Scanner
・Grayscale Processing
・Memory Control
Video Path Control ・Compression
Controller
GAVD
・FCI
Fax Unit
LD Unit
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-24 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
SP Modes for Each Image Processing Step

The following tables show which settings and SP modes are used for each image
processing step.
Text Mode
Text Mode
Custom
Soft Normal Sharp
Setting
ADS (SBU) As selected at the operation panel
Shading ~34%
Enabled
Correction 35%~
Small ~34% Three-line filter
Smoothing Filter 35%~ One-line filter
Main Scan ~34%
Enabled
Magnification 35%~
~34%
Mirroring Enabled only in the ADF mode
35%~
Characteristic ~34% None
Detection 35%~ Weak Middle Strong 4-903-2 ~ 4
MTF
~34% MTF (Weak) MTF (Strong) 4-903-1
MTF/Smoothing (Medium)
Filter Character Character Character
35%~ 4-903-2 ~ 4
(Weak) (Medium) (Strong)
Independent Dot ~34% None
4-904-1
Erase 35%~ None
Background ~34% None
4-904-6
Erase 35%~ None
~34% Text
γ Correction 4-904-11
35%~ Character (Text)
Binary
~34% Normal error diffusion picture 4-903-1
Descriptions
processing Detailed
Gradation
Binary
35%~ Character error diffusion picture 4-903-2 ~ 4
processing
Line Width ~34%
2-907-1
Correction 35%~
SM 6-25 B205/B209/D007/D008
IMAGE PROCESSING
Photo Mode
Photo Mode
Glossy Custom
Coarse Print Print Photo
Photo Setting
Shading ~34%
Enabled
Correction 35%~
Main Scan ~34%
Enabled
Magnification 35%~
~34%
35%~
Characteristic ~34% None
Detection 35%~ None 4-903-6 ~ 8
MTF/Smoothing ~34% Character Smoothing 4-903-5
Filter 35%~ Smoothing Character 4-903-6 ~ 8
4-904-2
Erase 35%~ None
4-904-7
Erase 35%~ None
~34% Dither Dither
γ Correction (16x16)
Dither (8x8) 4-904-12
35%~ (Character)
Normal error
~34% 4-903-5
diffusion
Dither
Gradation Dither (8x8) Character
(16x16)
35%~ error 4-903-6 ~ 8
diffusion
Line Width ~34%
2-907-2
Correction 35%~
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-26 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Text/Photo Mode
Text/Photo Mode
Photo Custom
Normal Text Priority
priority Setting
Shading ~34%
Enabled
Correction 35%~
Main Scan ~34%
Enabled
Magnification 35%~
~34%
35%~
~34% None
Characteristic
Detection Strong Middle Weak 4-903-10 ~
35%~
12
MTF
Filter Character Character Character 4-903-10 ~
35%~
(Weak) (Medium) (Strong) 12
4-904-3
Erase 35%~ None
4-904-8
Erase 35%~ None
~34% Text/Photo
35%~ Character (Text/Photo)
~34% Normal error diffusion
Gradation
35%~ Character error diffusion
Line Width ~34%
2-907-3
Correction 35%~
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-27 B205/B209/D007/D008
IMAGE PROCESSING
Pale Mode
Pale Mode
Photo Custom
priority Setting
Shading ~34%
Enabled
Correction 35%~
Main Scan ~34%
Enabled
Magnification 35%~
~34%
35%~
~34% None
Characteristic
Detection Weak Middle Strong 4-903-14 ~
35%~
16
MTF
35%~
4-904-4
Erase 35%~ None
4-904-9
Erase 35%~ None
~34% Pale
35%~ Character (Pale)
Gradation
Line Width ~34%
2-907-4
Correction 35%~
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-28 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Generation Copy
Generation Copy Mode

Photo Custom
priority Setting
Shading ~34%
Enabled
Correction 35%~
Main Scan ~34%
Enabled
Magnification 35%~
~34%
35%~
~34% None
Characteristic
Detection Weak Middle Strong 4-903-18 ~
35%~
20
MTF
35%~
Independent Dot ~34% Weak
4-904-5
Erase 35%~ Weak
Background ~34% Weak
4-904-10
Erase 35%~ Weak
~34% Generation copy
35%~ Character (Generation copy)
Gradation
Line Width ~34%
2-907-5
Correction 35%~
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-29 B205/B209/D007/D008
IMAGE PROCESSING
Auto Shading
Auto shading does two things.
• Zeroes the black level for each scan line of data.
• Corrects for variations in white level across the main scan.
Pre-Filtering
Pre-filter smoothes mainly parallel lines in the main scan direction and extended
lines in the sub-scan direction. This reduces moiré and spurious noise in images.
Main Scan Magnification/Reduction

Changing the scanner speed enables reduction and enlargement in the sub-scan
direction. However, the IPU-A chip handles reduction and enlargement in the main
scan direction. The processing for main scan magnification/reduction is the same
as in the previous digital machines.
Mirroring for ADF Mode
[A]
When making a copy using the ADF, the magnification circuit creates a mirror
image. This is because the scanning starting position in the main scan direction is
at the other end of the scan line in ADF mode (compared with platen mode). In
platen mode, the original is placed face down on the exposure glass, and the
corner at [A] is at the start of the main scan. The scanner moves down the page. In
ADF mode, the ADF feeds the leading edge of the original to the DF exposure
glass, and the opposite top corner of the original is at the main scan start position.
To create the mirror image, the IPU-A stores each line in a LIFO (Last In First Out)
memory.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-30 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Characteristic Detection
This function uses software filters to detect edge areas, non-edge areas, and areas
of shaded dot patterns.
The result determines the image processing that will be applied to each pixel.
Filtering
Overview
There are some software filters for enhancing the desired image qualities of the
selected original mode. These filters are the MTF filter, the smoothing filter,
characteristic filter, and independent dot erase.
Depending on the original mode and the reproduction ratio, the machine will use
either MTF/smoothing, or the filter determined by characteristic detection.
If MTF/smoothing is used, it is applied to all areas of the original, regardless of
whether they are edge areas, non-edge areas, or independent dots.
• The MTF filter emphasizes sharpness and is used in all original types
except Photo mode.
• The smoothing filter is used in Photo mode.
If the characteristic filter is used, the filter for each pixel depends on the image data
type that was detected by characteristic detection.
MTF Filter
An MTF filter is used for all original types except Photo mode.
When the reproduction ratio is less than 35%, this filter is applied to all image data
pixels, regardless of whether they are in an edge area or non-edge area.
When the reproduction ratio is 35% or more, the type of MTF filter used for each
pixel depends on the results of characteristic detection.
Smoothing Filter
Descriptions
A smoothing filter is used in Photo mode instead of MTF. It is applied to all image Detailed
data pixels, regardless of whether they are in an edge area or non-edge area.
With some combinations of reproduction ratio and image mode, the type of
smoothing used for each pixel depends on the results of characteristic detection
(see the Photo mode table in SP Modes for Each Processing Step).
Characteristic Filter
A characteristic filter is applied instead of MTF, smoothing, and ID gamma
correction with some combinations of original type and reproduction ratio. See the
‘SP Modes for Each Processing Step’ section.
For example, In text mode, for the ‘Normal’ original type, if the reproduction ratio is
less than 35%, MTF (medium) is used for all pixels in the image. However, if the
reproduction ratio is 35% or more, the ‘medium’ characteristic filter is used, and the
processing depends on whether the pixel was in an edge area, a non-edge area, or
in an area shaded using a dot pattern.
SM 6-31 B205/B209/D007/D008
IMAGE PROCESSING
Each characteristic filter consists of a combination of the following features: MTF,

smoothing, error diffusion, dithering, ID gamma correction. For each of these
features, the machine chooses from two types when making up a characteristic
filter.
Independent Dot Erase
Independent dot erase removes unwanted dots from the image.
Independent dot erase is enabled only for Generation Copy mode (according to the
default settings). However, for the “Custom Setting” original modes, independent
dot detection can be enabled and adjusted with SP4-904-2~4. With a larger SP
setting, more dots are detected as independent dots and erased, even if the dot
density is high. However, dots in mesh-like images may be mistakenly detected as
independent dots.
Background Erase
By default, this process is disabled in all original modes. However, it can be
enabled with SP mode.
Usually, dirty background is erased using the Auto Image Density (ADS) function.
However, sometimes, dirty background areas will still appear. These can be erased
with this function.
The threshold level for erasing can be changed with SP4-904-6~10.
ID Gamma (γ) Correction

The machine automatically selects the most appropriate ID gamma correction
based on the selected original type.
Also, for certain combinations of reproduction ratio and original type, characteristic
detection is used. In this case, the machine can use one of two gamma correction
tables. The one that is used is decided separately for each pixel, and depends on
the results of characteristic detection.
Gradation Processing
Overview
There are four types of gradation processing:
• Grayscale processing: This has 4 output levels for each pixel.
• Binary picture processing: This has only two output levels (black and white).
• Error diffusion: There are two error diffusion processing types (normal and
characteristic detection)
• Dithering: There are two dithering processing types (normal and characteristic
detection).
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-32 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Grayscale Processing
In this machine, the 8-bit image data is converted into 2-bit data. This produces up
to 4 image density levels for each pixel.
To realize this, this machine uses a form of pulse width modulation. In this
machine, pulse width modulation consists of the following processes:
• Laser diode pulse positioning
• Laser diode power/pulse width modulation
Laser diode power and pulse width modulation is done by the laser diode drive
board (LDD). Briefly, the width of the laser pulse for a pixel depends on the output
level (image density level: from 0 to 255) required for the pixel.
Note that although the LDD can create 256 levels per pixel, the machine only uses
8 of these, and only four are used for any one job. A gamma table determines
which four output levels are used. The gamma table is different for each original
type setting.
Binary Picture Processing
The 8-bit image data is converted into 1-bit data (black and white image data).
Error Diffusion
The error diffusion process reduces the difference in contrast between light and
dark areas of a halftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference
between it and the surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are compared with an
error diffusion matrix.
There are two types of error diffusion processing: One is ‘normal’. The other is part
of the characteristic detection process, in which the error diffusion method is
determined separately for each pixel. The error diffusion type (normal or
characteristic) depends on the reproduction ratio and the original type (refer to the
SP Modes for Each Image Processing Step tables).
Dithering
Descriptions
Each pixel is compared with the pixel in the same position in a dither matrix. Detailed
Several matrixes are available, to increase or decrease the detail on the copy.
Line width correction

This function is effective in all original modes.
Usually, lines will bulge in the main scan direction as a result of the
negative/positive development system that is used in this model. So, pixels on
edges between black and white areas are compared with adjacent pixels, and if the
pixel is on a line, the line thickness will be reduced.
Line width correction is done in the GAVD chip on the LDD board.
The line width correction type can be selected with SP2-907.
SM 6-33 B205/B209/D007/D008
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.5.6 VIDEO CONTROL UNIT (GAVD)

Fine Character and Image (FCI)
The FCI circuit performs image smoothing.
Main Scan Direction

4/4 3/4 2/4 1/4 0
Sub Scan
Direction
Fig. A
Fig. B
Fig. C
Usually, binary picture processing generates jagged edges on characters, as

shown in the above illustration. These are reduced using edge smoothing. The FCI
changes the laser pulse duration and position for certain pixels.
Fig. A shows the four possible pulse durations, and Fig. B shows how the laser
pulse can be in one of three positions within the pixel. Fig. C shows an example of
how edge smoothing is used.
This function only affects the received image for fax mode and for printer mode,
even if copy mode is also using binary picture processing.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-34 SM
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE

6.6.1 OVERVIEW
[H]
[A]
[I]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[F]
[E]
[G]
The optical path from the laser diode to the drum is shown above.
The LD unit [A] outputs a laser beam to the polygon mirror [B] through the
cylindrical lens [C]. The shield glass [D] prevents dust from reaching the polygon
mirror.
Descriptions
Each surface of the polygon mirror reflects one full main scan line. The laser beam Detailed
goes to the F-theta mirror [E], mirror [F], and BTL (barrel toroidal lens) [G]. Then
the laser beam goes to the drum through the toner shield glass [H].
The laser synchronizing detector [I] determines the main scan starting position.
The speed of the polygon mirror motor is 35,433 rpm for 600 dpi.
SM 6-35 B205/B209/D007/D008
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.2 AUTO POWER CONTROL (APC)
IPU LD Drive Board

+5V
PD LD
LD LEVEL LD Driver
LD ON
LD LD OFF
Controller
VIDEO
VREF
Reference
Circuit
The LD driver IC drives the laser diode. To prevent the intensity of the laser beam
from changing because of the temperature, the machine monitors the current
passing through the laser diode (LD). The machine adjusts the current to the laser
diode by comparing it with the reference level from the reference circuit.
This auto power control is done just after the machine is turned on and during
printing while the laser diode is active.
The laser diode power is adjusted on the production line.
NOTE: Do not touch the variable resistors on the LD unit in the field.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-36 SM
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.3 LD SAFETY SWITCH
Front Cover Safety and

Right Cover Switches
LDD:
+5VS +5VS LD Drive Board
LD
SBCU
VCC PD
Laser
+5V
IPU Beam
Optical Path
PSU
OPC
LD Driver IC
Drum
To ensure technician and user safety and to prevent the laser beam from
inadvertently switching on during servicing, safety switches are located at the front
and right covers. The switches are installed on the +5VLD line coming from the
power supply unit through the SBCU and IPU boards.
When the front cover or the right cover is opened, the power supply to the laser
diode is interrupted.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-37 B205/B209/D007/D008
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT (PCU)

6.7.1 OVERVIEW
1 2
3
10
4
7
6
The PCU consists of the components shown in the above illustration. An organic
photoconductor (OPC) drum (diameter: 30 mm) is used in this machine.
1. Cleaning Blade 6. Development Roller

2. Toner Collection Coil 7. Development Unit
3. Pick-off Pawl 8. Charge Roller
4. OPC Drum 9. Charge Roller Cleaning Roller
5. ID Sensor (see note) 10. Quenching Lamp (see note)
NOTE: These parts are not included in the PCU.

The machine informs the user when the PCU life has finished. However, the user
can continue to make copies.
SP5-912 can be used to enable or disable this warning message, and to change
the default replacement interval (the default is 60k).
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-38 SM
[A]
6.7.2 DRIVE
[E]
[B]
[C]
[D]
The main motor [A] drives the drum [B] through a series of gears, a timing belt [C],
and the drum drive shaft [D]. The main motor assembly includes a drive controller,
which outputs a motor lock signal when the rotation speed is out of the specified
range.
The fly-wheel [E] on the end of the drum drive shaft stabilizes the rotation speed
(this prevents banding and jitter from appearing on copies).
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-39 B205/B209/D007/D008
DRUM CHARGE
6.8 DRUM CHARGE

6.8.1 OVERVIEW [D] [C]
[A]
[B]
This copier uses a drum charge roller to charge the drum. The drum charge roller
[A] always contacts the surface of the drum [B] to give it a negative charge of –
950V.
The high voltage supply board gives a negative dc voltage to the drum charge
roller through the spring [C] and terminal plate [D].
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-40 SM
DRUM CHARGE
6.8.1 CHARGE ROLLER VOLTAGE CORRECTION

Correction for Environmental Conditions
[A] 28.9 cm
+
2 cm
[B]
ID Sensor Pattern 2 cm
Sub Scan Direction
-1700 V
Charge Voltage
-1500 V
On
Laser Diode
Off
Drum Potential -950 V
-750 V
Development Bias -650 V
-400 V
-150 V
ID Sensor Output V sg (4.00 V)
V sdp (3.70 V)
V sp (0.40 V)
With a drum charge roller system, the voltage transferred from roller to drum varies
Descriptions
with the temperature and humidity around the drum charge roller. The lower the Detailed
temperature or humidity is, the higher the applied voltage required.
To compensate, the machine uses the ID sensor to measure the effects of current
environmental conditions. For this measurement, the process control parameters
are balanced so that any small change in drum potential caused by environmental
effects is reflected in a change in the amount of toner transferred to the drum.
This measurement is made immediately after the ID sensor pattern for toner
density control. Immediately after making ID sensor pattern [A], the charge roller
voltage stays on, but the development bias goes up to -650V; as a result the drum
potential is reduced to -750V. The laser diode is not switched on, and the drum
potential is now slightly higher than the development bias, so only a very small
amount of toner transfers to the drum.
SM 6-41 B205/B209/D007/D008
DRUM CHARGE
The ID sensor measures the density of this pattern [B], and the output voltage is
known as Vsdp. This voltage is compared with Vsg (read from the bare drum at the
same time).
If the humidity drops, the drum potential goes up (to a higher –ve voltage) even if
the charge roller voltage supply stays the same (efficiency of voltage transfer is
higher with lower humidity). As a result, less toner is transferred to ID sensor
pattern [B]. If the sensor output reaches a certain point, the drum charge voltage
will be reduced.
To determine whether to change the drum charge roller voltage, the machine
compares Vsdp with Vsg.
• Vsdp / Vsg > 0.95 = Reduce the magnitude of the drum charge voltage by 50 V
• Vsdp / Vsg < 0.90 = Increase the magnitude of the drum charge voltage by 50 V
6.8.2 ID SENSOR PATTERN PRODUCTION TIMING

The ID sensor pattern is made in the following conditions:
• When the machine is turned on or returns from the energy save mode and the
hot roller temperature is less than 30oC. The temperature threshold can be
adjusted with SP2995 001
• After the total number of prints exceeds 300 pages. If this total is exceeded
during a job, the pattern is created at the completion of the job. This total can be
changed with SP2995 002.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-42 SM
DRUM CHARGE
6.8.3 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING
[B]
[A]
Because the drum charge roller [A] always contacts the drum, it gets dirty easily.
So, the charge roller cleaning roller [B] also contacts the drum charge roller all the
time to clean the surface of the drum charge roller.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-43 B205/B209/D007/D008
DEVELOPMENT
6.9 DEVELOPMENT
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
3 2
The development unit consists of the following parts.

1. Development roller 4. Mixing auger 1
2. Mixing auger 2 5. Doctor blade
3. TD sensor
This machine uses a single-roller development system. Two mixing augers mix the
developer. The toner density (TD) sensor and image density (ID) sensor (see the
illustration in the PCU section) are used to control toner density.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-44 SM
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.2 DRIVE
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
The main motor [A] drives the development roller [B] and mixing augers [C] through
a train of gears and the development drive shaft [D]. When the PCU is pushed in,
the development drive shaft engages the development roller gear.
The development drive gears (except for the gears in the development unit) are
helical gears. These gears are quieter than normal gears.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-45 B205/B209/D007/D008
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.3 DEVELOPER MIXING
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[A]
[B]
This copier uses 2 mixing augers, [A] and [B], to keep the developer evenly mixed.
Mixing auger 2 [A] transports excess developer, scraped off the development roller
[C] by the doctor blade [D], towards the front of the machine. Mixing auger 1 [B]
returns the excess developer, along with new toner, to the rear of the mixing
assembly. Here the developer is reapplied to the development roller.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-46 SM
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS
[B]
[A]
This machine uses a negative-positive development system, in which black areas

of the latent image are at a low negative charge (about –150 ± 50 V) and white
areas are at a high negative charge (about -950 V).
To attract negatively charged toner to the black areas of the latent image on the
drum, the high voltage supply board applies a bias of -650 volts to the development
rollers throughout the image development process. The bias is applied to the
development roller shaft [A] through the drive shaft [B].
The development bias voltage (-650 V) can be adjusted with SP2-201-1.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-47 B205/B209/D007/D008
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.5 TONER SUPPLY

Toner bottle replenishment mechanism
[G] [F]
[H]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[A]
[B]
When a toner bottle is placed in the bottle holder unit [A] and the unit is pushed in
completely, pin [B] moves against the side [C] of the PCU, and the toner shutter [D]
is pulled out to open the bottle. When the toner bottle holder lever [E] is put back in
the original position, the cap [F] on the toner bottle is pulled away and kept in place
by the chuck [G].
The toner supply mechanism transports toner from the bottle to the development
unit. The toner bottle has a spiral groove [H] that helps move toner to the
development unit.
When the bottle holder unit is pulled out to add a new toner bottle, the following
happens automatically to prevent toner from scattering.
• The chuck releases the toner bottle cap into its proper position.
• The toner shutter shuts to block the opening as a result of pressure from a
spring.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-48 SM
DEVELOPMENT
Toner supply mechanism
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
The toner supply motor [A] drives the toner bottle [B] and the mylar blades [C].
First, the toner falls down into the toner bottle holder. The toner supply mylar
blades transfer the toner to the slit [D]. When the PCU is installed in the machine,
the shutter [E] above the PCU is opened by the machine frame. Then the toner
falls down into the development unit through the slit and the shutter.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-49 B205/B209/D007/D008
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.6 TONER DENSITY CONTROL

Overview
There are four modes for controlling toner supply as shown in the following tables.
The mode can be changed with by SP2-921. The factory setting is sensor control 1
mode.
Basically, toner density is controlled using the standard TD sensor voltage (Vts),
toner supply reference voltage (Vref), actual TD sensor output voltage (Vt), and ID
sensor output data (Vsp/Vsg).
Toner Supply Clutch On Time

Calculation
TD Sensor Output
(Vt)
Vt Reference
Voltage (Vref)
New Vref
Vt Reference
Voltage Update
Vref Update
ID Sensor Output
(Vsp/Vsg)
TD Sensor Initial
Setting (Vts)
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-50 SM
DEVELOPMENT
There are five toner density control modes as follows.

Mode Sensor control 1 (SP2-921, “0”): Normally use this setting only
Toner supply decision Compare Vt with a reference voltage (Vts or Vref)
Toner control process Toner is supplied to the development unit when Vt is higher
than the reference voltage (Vts or Vref). This mode keeps the
Vref value for use the next toner density control.
Vts is used for the first toner density control after a new PCU
has been installed, until it has been corrected with the ID
sensor output.
Vref is used after Vts has been corrected with the ID sensor
output voltage (corrected during the first toner density control
for a new PCU).
Toner supply amount Varies
Toner end detection Performed
Sensor control 2 (SP2-921, “1”): For designer’s use only; do

Mode
not use in the field
Toner control process This toner control process is the same as sensor control 1
mode. However, the reference voltage is always the same as
Vref.
Fixed control 1 (SP2-921, “2”): For designer’s use only; do not

Mode
use in the field
mode.
Toner supply amount Fixed (SP2-925)
Descriptions
Fixed control 2 (SP2-921, “3”): Use temporarily if the TD
Mode Detailed
sensor needs to be replaced
Toner supply decision None
Toner control process Toner is supplied every printed page regardless of Vt.
Toner supply amount Fixed (SP2-925)
Toner end detection Not performed
Mode Sensor control 3 (SP921, "4". DFU

Toner supply decision Compare Vt with a reference voltage (Vts)
mode. However, the reference voltage used is always Vts.
Toner end detection Performed.
SM 6-51 B205/B209/D007/D008
DEVELOPMENT
Toner density sensor initial setting

The TD sensor initial setting procedure is done by SP2801. During TD sensor initial
setting, the TD sensor is set so that the TD sensor output to the value of SP2-926
(default: 2.5V). This value will be used as the standard reference voltage (Vts) of
the TD sensor.
Toner density measurement
Toner density in the developer is detected once every copy cycle. The sensor
output voltage (Vt) during the detection cycle is compared with the standard
reference voltage (Vts) or the toner supply reference voltage (Vref).
Vsp/Vsg detection
The ID sensor detects the following voltages.
• Vsg: The ID sensor output when checking the drum surface
• Vsp: The ID sensor output when checking the ID sensor pattern
• At the end of a job, if an ID sensor pattern has not been made for a certain
number of sheets (default: 0 sheets = disabled)
The number of sheets can be changed using SP2-995-2.
In this way, the reflectivity of both the drum surface and the pattern on the drum are
checked. This compensates for any variations in the reflectivity of the pattern on
the drum or the reflectivity of the drum surface.
The ID sensor pattern is made on the drum by charge roller and laser diode.
Vsp/Vsg is not detected every page or job; it is detected at the following times to
decide Vref:
• When the machine is turned on or returns from the energy save mode and the
hot roller temperature is less than 30oC. The temperature threshold can be
adjusted with SP2995 001
• After the total number of prints exceeds 300 pages. If this total is exceeded
during a job, the pattern is created at the completion of the job. This total can be
changed with SP2995 002.
The 30-minute interval can be changed using SP2-923.
Toner supply reference voltage (Vref) determination
The toner supply reference voltage (Vref) is the threshold voltage for the toner
supply determination. Vref is determined using the following data:
• ID sensor output (Vsp/Vsg)
• (Vts or the current Vref) - Vt
Toner supply determination
The reference voltage (Vts or Vref) is the threshold voltage for determining whether
or not to supply toner. If Vt becomes greater than the reference voltage, the
machine supplies additional toner.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-52 SM
DEVELOPMENT
Toner Supply Motor On Time Determinations

For fixed control mode, the toner supply motor on time is specified by the setting of
SP2-925, and does not vary. The default setting is 200 ms for each copy. The toner
supply motor on time for each value of SP2-925 is as follows.
Value of SP2-925 Motor On Time (t = 200 ms)

0 t
1 2t
2 4t
3 8t
4 12t
5 16t
6 Continuously
7 Not supplied
For sensor control modes 1 and 2, the toner supply motor on time is decided by the
following factors.
• ΔVt (= Vt – (Vref or Vts))
• TD sensor sensitivity (coefficient: S, value is 0.3)
There are seven levels for toner supply motor on time as shown below.
Level Decision Motor On Time (seconds)

1 0 < ΔVt ≤ S/16 t (0.6)
2 S/16 < ΔVt ≤ S/8 t x 2 (1.2)
3 S/8 < ΔVt ≤ S/4 t x 4 (2.4)
4 S/4 < ΔVt ≤ S/2 t x 8 (4.8)
5 S/2 < ΔVt ≤ 4S/5 t x 16 (9.6)
6 4S/5 < ΔVt ≤ S (near-end) T (30); see note 3
7 S < ΔVt (toner end) T (30); see note 3
Descriptions
Detailed
NOTE: 1) The value of “t” can be changed using SP2-922 (default: 0.6 second)
2) The value of “T” can be changed using SP2-923 (default: 30 seconds)
3) T (30) means that toner is supplied intermittently in a half duty cycle
(1.5 s on, 1.5 s off) for 30 seconds
SM 6-53 B205/B209/D007/D008
DEVELOPMENT
6.9.7 TONER SUPPLY IN ABNORMAL SENSOR CONDITIONS

ID sensor
Readings are abnormal if any of the following conditions occur:
• Vsg ≤ 2.5V
• Vsg < 3.5V when maximum power (254) is applied
• Vsp ≥ 2.5V
• (Vsg – Vsp) < 1.0V
• ID sensor power required to make the standard output reaches the
maximum value (254)
The above ID sensor values can be checked using SP2-220.
When this is detected, the machine changes the value of Vref to the previous value
then does the toner density control process (in a similar way to sensor control
mode 2).
No SC code is generated if the ID sensor is defective.
TD Sensor
The TD sensor is checked every copy. If the readings from TD sensor become
abnormal, the machine changes the toner density control mode to fixed supply
mode 2, and the toner supply amount per page is always 200 ms, regardless of the
value of SP2-925. Then at the end of a job (if the optional fax unit is installed), or
100 copies after the TD sensor error was detected (if no fax unit is installed), an SC
code is generated (SC390) and the machine must be repaired. The 100-copy
threshold can be adjusted with SP 2-992.
6.9.8 TONER NEAR END/END DETECTION AND RECOVERY

The toner near end and end conditions are detected using the Vt and Vref values,
in a similar way to toner density control.
This is done in all toner supply modes except for fixed mode 2, when toner end is
not detected.
Toner Near End Detection

If Vt is at level 6 (see the table on the previous page) five times consecutively, the
machine enters the toner near end condition and the toner end indicator starts
blinking. Then the machine supplies toner for a certain time, which depends on the
setting of SP 2-923 (see the previous page).
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-54 SM
DEVELOPMENT
Toner Near End Recovery

If the machine detects “S/2 < ΔVt ≤ 4S/5” twice consecutively when in one of the
following situations, the machine leaves the toner near end condition.
• While in the toner recovery cycle (supplying toner on and off for 30 s – see
the previous page) after the machine has detected a toner near end
condition.
• During copying in the toner near end condition.
• If the front cover is opened and closed for more than 10 seconds while a
toner near end condition exists.
Toner End Detection

There are two situations for entering the toner end condition.
• When Vt is level 7 three times consecutively, the machine enters the toner
end condition.
• When “4S/5 < ΔVt ≤ S” is detected in the toner near end condition, then 50
copies can be made after this condition (the number of copies between this
condition and toner end can be changed using SP2-213).
Toner End Recovery

If the front cover is opened and closed for 10 seconds while a toner end condition
exists and the toner bottle is replaced, the machine attempts to recover using the
same procedure as for toner near end/end detection.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-55 B205/B209/D007/D008
DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING
6.10 DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING

6.10.1 DRUM CLEANING
[A] [B]
The cleaning blade [A] removes any toner remaining on the drum after the image is
transferred to the paper. This model uses a counter blade system.
The cleaning blade scrapes off toner remaining on the drum. When toner builds up
in the cleaning unit, toner at the top of the pile is removed by the toner collection
coil [B].
To remove the toner and other particles that are accumulated at the edge of the
cleaning blade, the drum turns in reverse for about 5 mm at the end of every copy
job. This feature is controlled with SP 2-998.
In addition, cleaning is done in the middle of a job if 100 sheets have been made
since the previous cleaning. This feature is controlled with SP 2-211.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-56 SM
DRUM CLEANING AND TONER RECYCLING
6.10.2 TONER RECYCLING
[A]
[A]
[B]
[B]
[C]
Descriptions
Toner picked up by the toner collection coil [A], is transported to the opening [B] in Detailed
the side of the PCU. Then, this toner falls into the development unit with new toner
coming from the toner bottle and it is all mixed together by mixing auger 1 [C] and
used again.
SM 6-57 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
6.11 PAPER FEED

6.11.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3 4 5
12 11 10
There are two paper trays, each of which can hold 500 sheets.
The paper tray feed stations use a friction pad system.
The two relay sensors are used for paper jam detection.
The components of the paper feed station are as follows.
1. Paper Lift Sensor 7. Upper Relay Sensor

2. Paper Height –1 Sensor 8. Upper Relay Roller
3. Paper Height –2 Sensor 9. Lower Relay Roller
4. Paper End Sensor 10. Lower Relay Sensor
5. Paper Feed Roller 11. Friction Pad
6. Paper Size Sensor 12. Tray Heater (Option)
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-58 SM
PAPER FEED
6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
The main motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanism of both the first and
second paper trays. The paper feed clutches [B] transfer drive from this motor to
the paper feed rollers [C].
When the paper feed clutch turns on, the feed rollers start to feed the paper. The
paper feed clutch stays on until shortly after the registration sensor [D] has been
activated.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-59 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
6.11.3 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM
[A] [B]
[C]
The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray to the
copier. The friction pad [B] allows only one sheet to feed at a time. The friction pad
applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring [C].
The friction pad pressure cannot be adjusted.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-60 SM
PAPER FEED
6.11.4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[K] [G] [F]

[H]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[I]
[J]
[C]
[D]
[E]
The paper size switch detects when the tray is pushed in.
Descriptions
Detailed
When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, the pin [A] for the lift motor
pressure shaft engages the lift motor coupling [B] and the pin [C] for the bottom
plate lift shaft in the tray engages the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D]. The
pin [E] on the rear of the tray pushes the lock lever so that the lift motor can lift the
bottom plate pressure lever.
The lift motor turns on, and turns clockwise as shown in the diagram. The main
pressure spring [K] pulls the bottom plate pressure lever, and this lifts the tray
bottom plate.
When the top of the stack touches the feed roller, the motor cannot pull up the
plate any more, so it pulls the actuator [G] into the lift sensor [F]. Then the lift motor
stops.
SM 6-61 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
The pressure of the feed roller on the paper is now too high, so the lift motor
reverses a certain time (200 ms or 600 ms), depending on the paper size, to
reduce this pressure. For smaller paper, it reverses the larger amount (600 ms) to
reduce the pressure more.
NOTE: The relationship between the bottom plate pressure adjustment, paper size
thresholds, and the related SP modes is explained in “Bottom Plate
Pressure Adjustment for Paper Size”.
For A4-width paper or wider, a projection [H] on the side fence engages the
secondary pressure spring [J] through a lever [I]. Then, the secondary pressure
spring [J] applies paper feed pressure in addition to the main pressure spring [K], to
ensure that extra pressure is applied to wider paper.
When the paper tray is pulled out, the pins [A, C] disengage from the couplings [B,
D], and the bottom plate drops. To make it easier to push the tray in, the lift motor
rotates backwards 1.7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling
[D] to the original position. The amount of reverse can be adjusted with SP 1-912.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-62 SM
PAPER FEED
6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION
[A]
[B]
[C]
If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler
[A] and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout
[C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.
Descriptions
When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper Detailed
end feeler causes it to lift up.
SM 6-63 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
6.11.6 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
[B]
[A]
[C]
[C]
The amount of paper in the tray is detected by the combination of on/off signals
from two paper height sensors [A] and [B]. The paper amount is displayed on the
LCD.
When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves
the actuator up.
The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier.
Amount of Paper Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2

Near End OFF ON
30% ON ON
70% ON OFF
100% OFF OFF
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-64 SM
PAPER FEED
When the tray contains paper of a small width, the paper feed pressure may
become too low when the thickness of the remaining stack of paper has
decreased. The lift motor rotates forward 400 ms after the sensor detects a certain
amount of paper remaining in the tray to increase paper feed pressure, simulating
the pressure generated by a full tray.
NOTE: The relationship between the bottom plate re-adjustment timing, paper size
threshold, and the related SP modes is explained in “Bottom Plate
Pressure Adjustment for Paper Size”.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-65 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
6.11.7 FEED PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT FOR PAPER SIZE

Overview
For the friction pad system, the pressure from the top of the stack against the feed
roller is very important for paper feed quality from the paper tray. If the pressure is
high, double feed may occur. On the other hand, if the pressure is low, non-feed
may occur. Because of this, the pressure must be varied depending on the paper
size, paper weight, and amount of paper remaining in the tray. To achieve this, the
pressure for each paper tray can be adjusted using SP mode.
Paper Size Thresholds
The upward pressure from the bottom plate spring is always the same. However,
downward pressure from the stack on the bottom plate depends on the paper size.
Because of this, for a smaller paper size, the pressure of the top of the stack
against the feed roller is more than normal (because of the smaller downward
pressure from the stack), so adjustment may be necessary.
Using the following SP modes, either two or three paper size ranges can be
specified. Using other SP modes (explained later), the pressure can be adjusted
separately for each of these ranges to deal with any feed problems that have been
occurring.
Normal Small Size Middle Size

Paper Size Greater than HLT/A5 HLT/A5 or smaller None
(default setting) (default setting) (default setting)
1st paper tray --- SP1908-8 SP1908-9
2nd paper tray --- SP1909-8 SP1909-9
3rd paper tray --- SP1910-8 SP1910-9
4th paper tray --- SP1911-8 SP1911-9
Paper Size Ranges: For Three Size Ranges

Small paper size range: Paper sizes equal to the ‘Small’ SP mode value, or
smaller.
Middle paper size range: Paper sizes greater than the small paper size, up to and
including the middle paper size specified by the ‘Middle’ SP mode.
Normal paper size range: Paper sizes greater than the ‘Middle’ SP mode.
Paper Size Ranges: For Two Size Ranges
Small paper size range: Paper sizes equal to the ‘Small’ SP mode value, or
smaller.
Normal paper size range: Paper sizes greater than the ‘Small’ SP mode.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-66 SM
PAPER FEED
Feed Pressure Adjustment

The pressure can be adjusted to solve a paper feed problem. This adjusts the
amount of lift motor reverse just after the lift sensor is activated when lifting the
stack to the paper feed position. To apply less pressure to the top of the stack, the
amount of reverse should be increased.
Effect of the Amount of Remaining Paper
Feed Pressure A5 size

A4 size
A3 size
Paper
0 50 sheets Amount
25 % 75 % 500 sheets
(Near-end)
From tray full to paper near-end

The pressure between the top of the stack and the feed roller also depends on the
amount of remaining paper, especially for small paper sizes, as shown in the above
graph. The pressure for A5 changes significantly between stack heights of 500
Descriptions
sheets and 50 sheets, but not much for A4 or A3 paper. Detailed
For 500 sheets of A5, the pressure is too high. To counter this, the lift motor
reverses 600 ms (c in the graph), as explained in the previous section. The SP
modes in the following table are for solving feed problems that occur when the tray
is between full and near-end.
Normal Small Size Middle Size
Paper Size Greater than HLT/A5 HLT/A5 or smaller None
(default setting) (default setting) (default setting)
1st paper tray SP1908-1 SP1908-2 SP1908-3
2nd paper tray SP1909-1 SP1909-2 SP1909-3
3rd paper tray SP1910-1 SP1910-2 SP1910-3
4th paper tray SP1911-1 SP1911-2 SP1911-3
Default (all trays) 200 ms 600 ms 200 ms
(default: not used)
SM 6-67 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
From paper near end to paper end

When paper is used up, the pressure on the bottom plate reduces, so the upward
pressure increases, causing the pressure of the feed roller against the top of the
stack to increase.
However, for small paper sizes, because of the previous correction (600 ms
reverse rotation of the lift motor), the pressure between the feed roller and the top
of the stack becomes too small at some point as paper is used up, and this could
cause paper feed problems. This condition is more significant for smaller paper
sizes, such as A5, as shown in the diagram.
If a paper feed problem occurs when the stack is partly used up, the pressure can
be re-adjusted (d in the graph) using the following SP modes. The default is set for
50 sheets (at the near-end point)
The lift motor rotates forward for the time specified by the SP mode to increase the
pressure.
Small Size Middle Size

Paper Size HLT/A5 or smaller None
(default setting) (default setting)
1st paper tray SP1908-4 SP1908-5
2nd paper tray SP1909-4 SP1909-5
3rd paper tray SP1910-4 SP1910-5
4th paper tray SP1911-4 SP1911-5
Default (all trays) 400 ms 300 ms
(default: not used)
Also, the point at which this adjustment is applied (near-end [50 sheets], 25% full,
75% full) can be selected (e in the graph) using the following SP modes.
Small Size Middle Size

Paper Size HLT/A5 or smaller None
(default setting) (default setting)
1st paper tray SP1908-6 SP1908-7
2nd paper tray SP1909-6 SP1909-7
3rd paper tray SP1910-6 SP1910-7
4th paper tray SP1911-6 SP1911-7
Default (all trays) Near-end Near-end
(default: not used)
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-68 SM
PAPER FEED
6.11.8 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
SW
[B]
1 2 3 4
Size
A3 P P P P
A4 Sideways O O P O
A4 Lengthwise O O P P
A5 Lengthwise,
P P O O
81/2" x 14"
B4, 11" x 17" O P O P [A]
B5 Sideways,
O P P P
11" x 81/2"
B5 Lengthwise,
P O O O
81/2" x 11"
* (Asterisk) P O P O
O: ON (Not pushed)
P: OFF (Pushed)
There are four paper size microswitches [A] on the front right plate of the paper tray
unit. The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator [B] behind the paper size
indicator plate, which is on the front right of the tray.
Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To
determine which size has been installed, the CPU reads which microswitches the
actuator has switched off.
Descriptions
The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If Detailed
the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper
indicator will light.
When the paper size actuator is at the “*” mark, the paper tray can be set up to
accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using user tools. If the paper
size for this position is changed without changing the user tool setting, a paper jam
will result.
SM 6-69 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
6.11.9 SPECIAL PAPER SETTING

Only the 2nd tray can feed special paper such as thick paper or envelopes. The
special paper type can be selected either by using the UP mode or with the
following operation.
• Select the 2nd tray then press the key.
After selecting the special paper type, the fusing temperature and transfer roller
current will be changed as follows.
1. Fusing temperature (when thick paper is selected):
Current operation temperature + 15 °C
2. Transfer roller current:
A3 width (11”): 14 μA
B4 width (10”): 15 μA
A4 width (8.5”): 17 μA
A5 width (5.5”): 20 μA
Note that for the by-pass tray, the fusing and transfer conditions for special paper
are also applied if the user uses thick (non-standard) mode.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-70 SM
PAPER FEED
6.11.10 SIDE AND END FENCES
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
Descriptions
Detailed
Side Fences
If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or
bend. This may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be
incorrect. To correct this, each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each
side fence can be secured with a screw [B], for customers who do not want to
change the paper size.
End Fence
As the amount of paper in the tray decreases, the bottom plate [C] lifts up
gradually. The end fence [D] is connected to the bottom plate. When the tray
bottom plate rises, the end fence moves forward and pushes the back of the paper
stack to keep it squared up.
SM 6-71 B205/B209/D007/D008
PAPER FEED
6.11.11 PAPER REGISTRATION

[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
The drive from the main motor [A] is transmitted to the registration roller through
the registration clutch gear [B].
The registration sensor [C] is used for correcting paper skew and for detecting
paper misfeeds.
The cleaning mylar [D] contacts the registration roller. It removes paper dust from
the registration roller so that this dust will not transfer into the development unit
through the drum cleaning unit.
The amount of paper buckle at the registration roller to correct skew can be
adjusted with SP 1003.
If jams frequently occur after registration, the paper feed clutch can be re-
energized so that the feed roller can assist the registration roller to re-start paper
feed. This may be needed when feeding thicker paper. This adjustment is made
with SP 1903; it can be adjusted separately for tray 1 and the by-pass feeder, so
place the problem paper type in one of these and adjust SP 1-903 for that tray only.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-72 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
6.12 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.12.1 OVERVIEW
[C]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[A]
[D]
Descriptions
Detailed
The machine uses a transfer roller [A], which touches the surface of the drum [B].
The high voltage supply board supplies a positive current to the transfer roller,
which attracts the toner from the drum onto the paper. The current depends on the
paper width, paper type, and paper feed tray.
The curvature of the drum and the discharge plate [C] help the paper to separate
from the drum. The high voltage supply board also supplies a negative dc voltage
to the discharge plate.
Drive from the drum through a gear [D] turns the transfer roller
SM 6-73 B205/B209/D007/D008
6.12.2 IMAGE TRANSFER CURRENT TIMING

There are two transfer current levels: low transfer current level and high transfer
current level. The image transfer procedure is as follows:
1. When the CPU receives the image writing start signal, the CPU instructs the
high voltage supply board to supply +10μA (low transfer current level) to the
roller. This prevents any positively charged toner on the drum surface from
transferring to the transfer roller.
2. At a certain time after the low transfer current has been supplied to the roller,
an appropriate current is applied to the roller to transfer the toner to the paper.
3. After the trailing edge of the paper has passed through the roller, transfer
current turns off. In multiple copy mode, the transfer current shifts again to the
low transfer current.
The transfer current (high transfer current level) depends on the paper feed station,
paper width, and the temperature in the machine.
Example: Temperature = 15°C ~ 24°C
By-pass Tray
Paper Tray /
(Thick) / 2nd
Paper Width By-pass Tray Duplex (2nd Side)
Paper Tray
(Normal)
(Special Paper)
A3/11” x 17”,
14 μA 10 μA 14 μA
A4/81/2 x 11”sideways
B4 13 μA 12 μA 15 μA
A4/11” x 81/2 lengthwise,
13 μA 16 μA 17 μA
A5/51/2 x 81/2 sidewise
A5/81/2 x 51/2 lengthwise
16 μA 16 μA 20 μA
and less
The transfer current can be adjusted using SP2301, except for the low transfer
current.
Be careful when increasing the transfer current. This might cause a ghosting effect,
in which part of the image at the top of the page is repeated lower down the page
at a lower density. It may also damage the OPC drum in the worst case.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-74 SM
6.12.3 TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING

If the paper size is smaller than the image, or if a paper jam occurs during printing,
toner may be transferred to the roller surface. To prevent the toner from
transferring to the back side of the printouts, the transfer roller requires cleaning
before the next printing run.
During transfer roller cleaning, the high voltage supply unit supplies a negative
cleaning current (-4 μA) to the transfer roller. Any negatively charged toner on the
transfer roller is then transferred back to the drum. Then a positive cleaning current
(+10 μA) is applied to the transfer roller to push back to the drum any positively
charged toner on the transfer roller.
The machine goes through the cleaning mode in the following conditions:
• Before starting the printing job (only if enabled with SP2-996; note that the
default setting is off)
• Just after the power is switched on.
• After a copy jam has been cleared
• After 50 sheets have printed. If a job is in progress when the number of prints
exceeds 50, the machine enters cleaning mode at the completion of the current
job (the print job is not interrupted for cleaning).
The transfer roller cleaning function is done.
Also, the transfer roller cleaning current can be adjusted using SP2-301-4.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-75 B205/B209/D007/D008
6.12.4 PAPER SEPARATION MECHANISM
[A]
The discharge plate [A] and the drum curvature of the drum help the paper to
separate away from the drum. The high voltage supply board applies a constant dc
voltage, -1.8 kV (when feeding from a paper tray) or –2.1 kV (from the duplex unit)
to the discharge plate.
The discharge plate voltage can be adjusted using SP2-901.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-76 SM
IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
6.13 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

6.13.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3
11
4
10
9 5
8
7
The fusing unit and paper exit area consist of the following parts.
1. Paper exit roller 7. Two fusing lamps
2. Fusing exit sensor 8. Two thermistors
3. Hot roller strippers 9. Four thermostats
Descriptions
4. Pressure spring 10. Hot roller Detailed
5. Pressure roller 11. Paper overflow sensor
6. Cleaning roller
SM 6-77 B205/B209/D007/D008
6.13.2 FUSING DRIVE AND RELEASE MECHANISM
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[F] [E]
The main motor [A] drives the fusing unit through a gear train and drives the paper
exit rollers [B] through a timing belt [C].
The fusing unit release mechanism automatically disengages the fusing unit drive
gear [D] when the right cover [E] is opened. This allows the fusing unit drive gear to
rotate freely so that misfed paper can easily be removed.
Also, the fusing drive is released by the fusing drive release solenoid [F]. To reduce
the warming up time, the machine cuts the drive to the fusing unit during warming
up. Just after the main switch is turned on, this solenoid is energized and the fusing
unit drive gear [D] is disengaged.
However, the fusing unit drive is not released when the temperature is lower than
15°C.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-78 SM
6.13.3 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE SHIFT MECHANISM
[C]
[A]
[B]
The entrance guide [A] is adjustable for paper thickness to prevent creasing. The
left screw holes [B] on each side are used as the default setting.
If creasing occurs frequently in the fusing unit, adjust the entrance guide to the
right, by securing it with the other holes [C]. This allows more direct access to the
gap between the hot roller and the pressure roller.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-79 B205/B209/D007/D008
6.13.4 PRESSURE ROLLER

[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
The pressure springs [A] constantly apply pressure between the hot roller [B] and
the pressure roller [C].
Applied pressure can be changed by adjusting the position of the pressure springs.
The spring is positioned at the top [D] as the default setting.
The user moves lever [E] when using thicker copy paper or envelopes, to reduce
the pressure between the hot and pressure rollers.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-80 SM
6.13.5 CLEANING MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
The cleaning roller [A] is always in contact with the pressure roller [B]. It collects
toner and paper dust adhered to the surface of the pressure roller.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-81 B205/B209/D007/D008
6.13.6 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL
200oC
Sub
195oC
190oC
Main
180oC
130oC
100oC
Power Re-load ~ 3 pages ~ 20 pages

On or
~ 60 s
Temperature Control
Just after the main power switch is turned on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp to
obtain a fusing temperature of 190°C (Main fusing lamp), 195°C (Sub fusing lamp)
for the first 60s, or for the first three consecutive pages of printing, whichever
comes first. After that, the machine keeps the fusing temperature at 190°C for the
first 20 consecutive pages of printing. Then the fusing temperature is kept at
180°C.
The three-page and 60-second limits can be adjusted with SP1-105-8 and -9.
Note that the fusing temperature is higher if the user uses special paper in the 2nd
tray or thick paper mode from the bypass tray.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-82 SM
Fusing Lamp Control

Turning on and off the fusing lamp power causes fluorescent light in the room to
flicker. To reduce the flickering, use the following SP modes.
Fusing temperature detection cycle (SP mode 1-108)
The CPU checks the output from the fusing thermistor once a second (default
setting). The CPU compares the current and previous temperatures. Based on the
result, it then decides how long the fusing lamp power should be on during the next
one-second interval (also, if the current temperature is too high, the power will not
be needed).
Starting and stopping the fusing lamp power every second causes fluorescent
lighting in the room to flicker. To reduce this flickering, use SP1-108 to change the
cycle from 1 second to 2 seconds.
Fusing soft-start
In addition, whenever the fusing lamp power switches on, full power is applied to
the fusing lamp gradually, not all at once. This prevents the power in the room from
dropping suddenly. This feature is known as “Soft Start”. The machine does this by
gradually allowing more power to the fusing lamp over a number of zero-cross
cycles of the ac supply. The diagram below shows full power being applied
gradually over the duration of 3 zero-cross cycles. Soft start occurs every time the
fusing lamp power switches on (i.e., at some time during every second), not just at
the start of the print job.
NOTE: This feature is effective to counter flickering lights. However, generated
noise increases if the setting is changed from the default. If a radio or a TV
is close by the machine, the noise may have some effect on the image or
sound.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-83 B205/B209/D007/D008
6.13.7 OVERHEAT PROTECTION

If the hot roller temperature becomes higher than 231°C, the CPU cuts off the
power to the fusing lamp. At the same time, SC543 is generated.
Even if the thermistor overheat protection fails, there are four thermostats in series
with the common ground line of the fusing lamp. If the temperature of the
thermostat reaches 210°C, one of the thermostats opens, removing power from the
fusing lamp. At the same time, SC542 is generated and the machine stops
operating.
In addition to these protection devices, there is a backup temperature control circuit
on the SBCU. If the thermistor protection fails, or if a short circuit occurs on the
PSU board.
If the temperature exceeds 250 °C:
• This backup temperature control circuit switches off the fusing lamps
• The machine issues SC544.
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-84 SM
6.13.8 PAPER EXIT
[A]
The paper overflow detection sensor [A] is located at the paper exit section of the
fusing unit. When this sensor is activated, the machine detects that the paper stack
height exceeded a certain limit and stops printing.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-85 B205/B209/D007/D008
ENERGY SAVER MODES
6.14 ENERGY SAVER MODES

6.14.1 OVERVIEW
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(10 s to 4 hrs / Default: 60 s)
Stand-by Mode
Energy Saver Key On

-or-
Panel Off Timer Energy Saver Key On
(10 s to 4 hrs / Default: 60 s) Return Time Less than 3 s
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(10 s to 4 hrs / Default: 60 s) Energy Saver Mode
(Low Power Mode)
Operation Sw. On
Platen Cover Open/Close
Auto Off Mode Original Set ADF
Return Time Less Than

10 s
Off Mode
FAX: RX, etc.

Printer Data in After Printing
Off Stand-by
Mode
When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
This machine has two types of energy saver mode as follows.
1) Energy saver mode
2) Auto Off mode
These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes.
• Panel off timer (energy saver mode timer) :
User Tools> System Settings> Timer Setting> Panel Off Timer
• Auto off timer:
User Tools> System Settings> Timer Setting> Auto Off Timer
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-86 SM
ENERGY SAVER MODES
6.14.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE

Entering the energy saver mode
The operation manual uses the term ‘panel off mode’ for the timer.
The machine enters energy saver mode when one of the following is done.
• The panel off timer runs out
• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for one second
Note that the default setting of the panel off timer is 60 s, which is the same as the
auto off timer. In this condition, if the machine is not touched for 60 s, it will go
straight to auto off mode. If the user wants an energy saver mode and an auto off
mode, the panel off timer must be set to a shorter value than the auto off timer,
What happens in energy saver mode
When the machine enters energy saver mode, the fusing lamp drops to a certain
temperature, and the operation panel indicators are turned off except for the
Energy Saver LED and the Power LED.
If the CPU receives an image print out command from an application (e. g. to print
incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the fusing temperature rises to print
the data.
Return to stand-by mode

If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:
• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
• Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed
• An original is placed in the ADF
• The ADF is lifted
• A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
Descriptions
The recovery time from energy saver mode is about 3 s. Detailed
Operation Energy
Mode Fusing Temp. +24V System +5V
Switch Saver LED
Energy
On On 150oC On On
Saver
SM 6-87 B205/B209/D007/D008
ENERGY SAVER MODES
6.14.3 AUTO OFF MODE

There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The difference
between Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machine’s condition when it
enters Auto Off mode.
NOTE: The machine will not enter the Auto Off mode for at least 90 sec. after the
machine is turned on when applications other than Copy (printer/scanner, printer,
etc.) are installed.
Entering off stand-by and off modes
The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off mode when:
• The auto off timer runs out
• The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off
If one or more of the following conditions exists, the machine enters Off Stand-by
mode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters Off Mode.
• Error or SC condition
• An optional G4 unit is installed
• Image data is stored in the memory
• During memory TX or polling RX
• The handset is off hook
• An original is in the ADF
• The ADF is open
Off Stand-by mode
The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects a
ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply is
activated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes
the print job.
Off Mode
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,
or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the
system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Returning to stand-by mode
The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The
recovery time is about 10 s.
Energy
Operation System
Mode Saver Fusing Lamp +24V Note
Switch +5V
Mode
Off
Off Stand-by Off Off On On
(On when printing)
+5VE is
Off Off Off Off Off Off
supplied
B205/B209/D007/D008 6-88 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
7. SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 SPECIFICATIONS
B205/B209/D007/D008
Configuration: Desktop
Copy Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Originals: Sheet/Book
Original Size: Maximum A3/11" x 17"
Copy Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17"
Minimum: A5/81/2" x 51/2" lengthwise
Custom sizes
2nd paper tray
Width: 100 ~ 297 mm (3.9" ~ 11.5")
Length: 148 ~ 432 mm (5.8" ~ 17.0")
By-pass tray (Option):
Width: 90 ~ 305 mm (3.5" ~ 12.0")
Length: 148 ~ 1,260 mm (5.8" ~ 49.6")
Copy Paper Weight: Paper Tray:
60 ~ 105 g/m2, 16 ~ 28 lb (1st paper tray)
52 ~ 157 g/m2, 16 ~ 43 lb (2nd paper tray)
By-pass (Option):
52 ~ 157 g/m2, 16 ~ 42 lb
Reproduction Ratios: 5 Enlargement and 7 Reduction
A4/A3 Version LT/DLT Version

400% 400%
200% 200%
Enlargement 141% 155%
122% 129%
115% 121%
Full Size 100% 100%
93% 93%
87% 85%
82% 78%
Reduction 71% 73%
65% 65%
50% 50%
25% 25%
Specifications
Zoom: 25% to 400% in 1% steps (Platen mode)

25% to 200% in 1% steps (ADF mode)
Power Source: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A (for North America)
220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 7 A (for Europe/Asia)
110 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 13 A (for Taiwan)
SM 7-1 B205/B209/D007/D008
Specifications
Power Consumption: 115V Model (B205/B209/D007/D008)

Mainframe Only
B205/D007 B209/D008
Warm-up 1.27 kW 1.27 kW
Standby about 150 W about 160 W
During Printing about 690 W about 790 W
Maximum 1.17 kW 1.17 kW
Complete System
Power Consumption: 220V Model (B205/B209/D007/D008)

Mainframe Only
B205/D007 B209/D008
Complete System
NOTE: 1) Full system: Mainframe + ADF + 1-bin Sorter + Paper Tray Unit +
Duplex Unit + Bridge Unit + Finisher
2) Without the Option heaters, fax unit, and printer controller
Noise Emission (Sound Power Level):
Stand-by (Mainframe only): 40 dB(A)
Stand-by (Full System) 44 dB(A)
Operating (Mainframe only): 63 dB(A)
Operating (Full System): B205/D007 68.5 dB(A)
B209/D008 69 dB(A)
NOTE: 1) The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779.
2) Full System: Mainframe + ADF + 1-bin Sorter + Paper Tray Unit +
Duplex Unit + Bridge Unit + Finisher
B205/B209/D007/D008
Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 x 604 x 709 mm (21.7" x 23.8" x 28.0")
Measurement Conditions:
• With the paper tray unit or LCT
• Without the ADF
Weight: Less than 55 kg (121.3lb)
B205/B209/D007/D008 7-2 SM
Specifications
Copying Speed (copies/minute):
B205/D007 A4, 11" x 81/2" LEF A3/11" x 17"

Non-memory copy mode 25 16
Memory copy mode 25 16
B209/D008 A4, 11" x 81/2" LEF A3/11" x 17"
Non-memory copy mode 30 17
Memory copy mode 30 17
NOTE: Measurement Conditions

1) Not APS mode
2) A4/LT and A3/DLT copying
3) Full size
B205/B209/D007/D008
Warm-up Time: Less than 10 seconds (20°C, 68°F) from power on with the
operation switch.
Less than 12 seconds (20°C, 68°F) from power on with the main
power switch.
First Copy Time: Less than 4.4 sec. (A4), less than 5.0 sec. (LT)
Measured under the following conditions:
• When the polygonal mirror motor is rotating.
• From the 1st paper tray
• Not APS mode
• Full size
Copy Number Input: Ten-key pad, 1 to 999 (count up or count down)
Manual Image Density: 7 steps
Paper Tray Capacity: Paper Tray: 500 sheets x 2
(Special paper in the 2nd paper tray: 50 sheets)
Paper Tray Unit (Option): 500 sheets x 2
LCT (Option): 1000 sheets x 2
By-pass Tray (Option): 100 sheets
(A4, B5, A5, B6, 81/2" x 11", 51/2" x 81/2")
10 sheets (A3, B4, 11" x 17", 81/2" x 13")
1 sheets (non-standard sizes)
NOTE: Copy paper weight: 80g/m2 (20 lb)
Toner Replenishment: Cartridge exchange (360 g/cartridge)
Specifications
Toner Yield: 11 k copies (A4 sideways, 6% full black, 1 to 1 copying, ADS mode)
Copy Tray Capacity: Copy Tray: 500 sheets (without 1-bin tray)
250 sheets (with 1-bin tray)
Memory Capacity: Standard 128 MB, Optional memory 256 MB
SM 7-3 B205/B209/D007/D008
Specifications
7.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

7.2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
12 13 1 2
11
3
4
10
5
9 8 7
B205/B209/D007/D008 7-4 SM
Specifications
B205
Item No. D007/D008
B209
Code Code Note
13 B205 D007 Unique
Machine Copier
13 B209 D008 Unique
Paper Tray Unit-2 tray (Option) 8 B390 B390
LCT (Option) 7 B391 B391
Platen Cover (Option) 1 B406 B406
1000-sheet finisher (Option) 10 B408 B408
1-bin Tray (Option) 3 B413 B413
Duplex Unit (Option) 5 B414 B414
By-pass Tray (Option) 6 B415 B415
Interchange Unit (Option) 4 B416 B416
Bridge Unit (Option) 11 B417 B417
500-sheet finisher (Option) 9 B442 B442
Key Counter Bracket (Option) B452 B452 Common with
Shift Tray (Option) 12 B459 B459 B205/B209
Data Overwrite Security Unit B735 B735
Copy Data Security Unit B770 B770
HDD (Option) B773 B773
ARDF (Option) 2 B810 B810
256 MB Memory DIMM (Option) G818 G818
FAX
Handset (Option) B433 B433
Fax Unit (Option) B766 B766
Options G3 Interface Unit (Option) B768 B768
Memory – 32 MB (Option) G578 G578
PRINTER, PRINTER/SCANNER
Printer Unit (Option) B846 D313 Unique
Printer/Scanner Unit (Option) B767 D310 Unique
RPCS Printer Unit (Option) — D314 RPCS w/o HDD
Printer Enhance Option — D318- PCL with HDD
10, -11,
-12
Scanner Enhance Option — D318- Scanner support
20, -21,
-22
IEEE1394 Interface Board B581 B581
(FireWire - Option) Common with
File Format Converter (Option) B609 B609 B205/B209
Bluetooth Interface Unit B736 B826
PostScript 3 (Option) B757 B318-00 Unique
IEEE1284 Interface Board B679 B679
Specifications
(Centronics) Common with

IEEE 802.11b Wireless – LAN G813 G813 B205/B209
(Option)
Note: USB 2.0 and the NIB are built into the controller board. These items are not
options (installation is not necessary). However, to use these functions they must
be enabled with SP5985. Also, a printer kit or printer/scanner kit must be installed.
SM 7-5 B205/B209/D007/D008
Specifications
7.2.2 OPTIONS TABLE

Copier options
B205/B209
No. Option Note
D007/D008
1 ARDF (Option) Install either no. 1 or 2.
2 Platen Cover (Option) Install either no. 1 or 2.
3 Paper Tray Unit – two-tray (Option) Install either no. 3 or 4.
4 LCT (Option) Install either no. 3 or 4.
5 1-bin Tray (Option) Δ Requires no.9.
6 Shift Tray (Option) Install either no. 6 or 10.
7 Duplex Unit (Option) Δ Requires no.9.
8 By-pass Tray (Option)
9 Interchange Unit (Option)
10 Bridge Unit (Option) Δ No. 10 requires no.11 or
12.
Install either no. 6 or 10.
11 1000-sheet Finisher (Option) Δ Install either no. 11 or 12
Requires no.10, and either
no.3 or 4
12 500-sheet Finisher (Option) Δ Install either no. 11 or 12
Requires no.10, and either
no.3 or 4
13 Memory 256 MB (Option)
14 Key Counter Bracket
= Available Δ = Requires another option
Fax option
All options for the fax unit are available when the fax unit has been installed.
Printer/scanner options
1. Two board slots are available, but only one of the following boards can be
installed:
• IEEE1284 Interface Board B679 (Centronics)
• IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN G813
• IEEE1394 Interface Board B581 (FireWire) (B205/B209 only)
• Bluetooth Interface Unit B736
2. The printer/scanner options require:
• 256 MB Memory Unit G818 (DIMM)
• For more details see the Printer/Scanner manuals for the B205/B209 or
D007/D008.
B205/B209/D007/D008 7-6 SM
APPENDIX
RSS SET UP
APPENDIX 1 (FOR B205/B209/D007/D008)

1. RSS (REMOTE SERVICE SYSTEM)
1.1 RSS SET UP
[C]
[B] [D]
B027R705.WMF
[A]
B027R515.WMF
[G]
[I]
[H]
B027I305.WMF [F] [E] B089I900.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove the connector cover [A] (1 clip) and disconnect the cable.
2. Remove the rear cover [B] (4 screws).
3. Remove the duplex connector cover [C] (1 screw) and the lower rear cover [D]
(2 screws).
4. Install the RSS board [E] to the bracket [F] (4 screws).
5. Install the RSS board assembly to the machine (2 screws).
6. Install the harness [G] between the RSS board and the IPU board (CN107).
When connecting only one machine to the line adapter, skip step 7.
Appendix
7. Set the jumper switch [H] on the RSS board as shown (default setting: 1-2).
8. Remove the cover [I] from the lower rear cover.
SM APPENDIX-1 B205/B209/D007/D008
RSS SET UP
[A]
B027I901.WMF
Line Adapter
B027I902.WMF
Machine No. 1 2 3 4 5
Jumper Set 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 1-2
PI device code 0 1 2 3 4
9. Reassemble the machine.

10. Connect the modular cord [A] to the line adapter as shown.
11. Install the line adapter (refer to chapter 2-1 L-ADP Installation Procedure in the
CSS Service Manual).
When connecting only one machine to the line adapter, skip step 13.
13. Enter the Copier SP mode and set the PI device code with SP5-821 (default 0).
NOTE: After changing the value, turn the main power switch off and on to
enable the PI device code.
B205/B209/D007/D008 APPENDIX-2 SM
SP MODE SETTINGS
1.2 SP MODE SETTINGS

After installing the machine and line adapter, change the value of SP5-816 (CSS
Function) to 1.
Check the values of the following SP modes. Ensure they are set correctly.
NOTE: SP5-507 is only for the Japanese version. Do not change.
SP No. Correct Setting
SP5-501-1 (PM Alarm Interval) 120k
SP5-504 (Jam Alarm Setting) 3
SP5-505 (Error Alarm Setting) 50
SP5-508-1 (CC Call – Remain of Jam) 1 (On)
SP5-508-2 (CC Call – Continuous Jam Occurrence) 1 (On)
SP5-508-3 (CC Call - Cover Open) 1 (On)
SP5-508-4 (New CC Call Mode) 1 (New Mode)
1.3 CHECKING ITEMS USING RSS

1.3.1 READ ONLY ITEMS
Item
Paper end
Toner end
Staple end
Toner near end
Door open
Paper jam information
Machine condition
Paper size information
System configuration
Vsg, Vsp, Vsdp, Vt data
Fax information (Total No. of Tx, Total No. of Rx, etc)
Printer information (Total No. of print by Emulation, etc)
Related SP Modes:
SP7-001~-003, -101, -206, -506, -502~507, 002, 803, -001, 402, 403, 801
SP8-001~-006, -011~-017, -021~-027, -061~-062, -064, -071~072, -074, -111, -121, -131, -
141, -151, -161, -191~193, 195, -196, -205, -211~-216, -221, -231, -241, -251, -291, -301, -
381~-387, -391, -401~-404, -411, -421, -422, -424, -431, -441~-444, -451, -461~-464, -471,
-481, -484, -521, -522, -524, -531, -633, -643, -651, -661, -671, -681, -683, -691, -701, -741,
-781, -831, -841, -861, -871, -881, -901, -911, -941
Appendix
CHECKING ITEMS USING RSS
1.3.2 AUTO CALL AND READ ITEMS

SC Calls
The SC calls are generated according to the SC level as follows. Please note that
the SC levels of this copier are defined differently from other copiers.
SC Level Definition SC Auto Call Condition

Fusing unit SCs which cannot be reset An SC call is generated
A
by customer. immediately
SCs that disable only the features which An SC call is generated when the
B use the defective item. SC occurs two times within 10
copies.
SCs that are not shown on the An SC call is not generated.
C
operation panel.
SCs caused by incorrect sensor An SC call is generated when the
D detection; these can be reset by turning SC occurs two times within 10
the main power switch off and on. copies.
CC Manual Calls
The CC manual call may be generated by the customer, when “1: New Mode” is
selected with SP5-508-4 (the default is “1”). There are two types of CC manual
calls as follows.
CC Code Definition
When the number of jams specified by SP5-508-12 are detected
consecutively:
a). When “0:Auto Call” is selected with SP5-508-22, CC101 will be
generated automatically.
Manual Call: b). When “1: Manual Call” is selected with SP5-508-22, the Manual call key
CC 101 appears on the LCD. Upon pressing the key, a “Manual Call: CC101” is
generated immediately. “Manual Call:CC101” will be listed as an MC in
the Call List screen of the Concorde system, and “Manual Call:CC101”
will be indicated in the “Symptom” column of the call detail screen.
The default setting of SP5-508-22 is “1: Manual Call”.
When in a paper jam or an original jam condition and a cover is open for
longer than the time specified by SP5-508-13, one of the following will occur
after all doors are closed.
a). When “0: Auto Call” is selected with SP5-508-23, CC202 will be
generated automatically.
Manual Call:
b). When “1: Manual Call” is selected with SP5-508-23, the Manual call key
CC 202
appears on the LCD. Upon pressing the key, a “Manual Call: CC202” is
generated immediately. “Manual Call:CC202” will be listed as an MC in
the Call List screen of the Concorde system, and “Manual Call:CC202”
will be indicated in the “Symptom” column of the call detail screen.
The default setting of SP5-508-23 is “1: Manual Call”.
CHECKING ITEMS USING RSS
CC Auto Call
The CC auto call will be automatically generated when “0: Previous Mode” is
selected with SP5-508-4 (default is “1”). There are three types of CC auto calls as
follows.
CC Code Definition
When a paper jam is detected five times consecutively, CC101 is
CC 101
automatically generated.
When a paper jam condition is not reset for 15 minutes, CC201 is
CC 201
automatically generated.
When a cover is left open for 15 minutes, CC202 is automatically
CC 202
generated.
Alarm Calls
There are four types of Alarm Calls as follows:
Type Definition
When the PM counter reaches 120,000, a PM Alarm Call is automatically
PM
reported to the Concorde system.
An alarm call is generated after the specified total number of originals goes
Original Count
through the ARDF.
When the SC alarm counter reaches 5, an SC Alarm Call is automatically
SC generated. The SC alarm counter counts the number of SCs and it
decreases when an SC does not occur for a specified number of copies.
When Jam alarm counter reaches 10, a Jam Alarm Call is automatically
generated. The Jam Alarm counter counts the number of paper jams and it
Jam
decreases when a paper jam does not occur for a specified number of
copies.
Appendix
JAM HISTORY
1.3.3 READ AND WRITE ITEMS

SP mode UP Mode
Print registration Paper Tray Priority
Fusing Temperature APS Priority
Charge Bias Panel Tone
Blank Margin Max. Copy Quantity
Development Bias System Auto Reset Timer
Transfer Roller Bias Copier Auto Reset Timer
Scanner Speed Energy Saver Timer
Scanner Registration Auto Tray Switching
PM Alarm A3/DLT Double Count
Jam Alarm Set Date / Set Time
Error Alarm AOF
Supply Calls Auto Off Timer
CC Calls SADF Auto Reset
Machine Serial Number
ID2 Code
Service TEL Number Setting
Remote Service Items
Staple Position Adjustment
Fax Bit Switches
Printer Bit Switches
Total Counters
1.3.4 EXECUTE ITEMS

Item
SC reset
PM counter reset
SC/Jam counter reset
1.4 JAM HISTORY

The jam history is read as shown below.
The last 5 digits of the total counter

value when the jam occurred
Paper Size
Jam Condition
B027I903.WMF
JAM HISTORY
1.4.1 JAM CONDITION TABLE

Copier
Code Meaning
01 Jams at power on.
03 Paper does not reach the upper relay sensor (from paper tray unit)
04 Paper does not reach the lower relay sensor.
05 Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor (optional paper tray unit).
06 Paper does not reach the LCT relay sensor.
07 Paper does not reach the upper relay sensor (from by-pass)
10 Paper does not reach the registration sensor (from duplex)
11 Paper does not reach the registration sensor.
12 Paper does not reach the paper exit sensor
13 Paper does not reach the bridge relay sensor
14 Paper does not reach the bridge exit sensor
15 Paper does not reach the duplex entrance sensor.
16 Paper does not reach the duplex exit sensor
17 Paper does not reach the 1-bin tray exit sensor.
20 Paper does not reach the finisher entrance sensor
21 Paper does not reach the finisher shift tray exit sensor.
23 Paper does not reach the finisher staple tray paper sensor.
24 The finisher stack feed out belt H.P sensor does not turn on.
26 Finisher paper taking out error
27 Finisher drive error
28 Finisher tray lift error
29 Finisher jogger drive error
30 Finisher tray shift drive error
31 Finisher staple error
32 Finisher stack feed-out error
33 Finisher feed out error
34 Finisher no response
53 Paper caught at the upper relay sensor (from paper tray unit)
54 Paper caught at the lower relay sensor.
55 Paper caught at the vertical transport sensor (optional paper tray unit).
56 Paper caught at the LCT relay sensor.
57 Paper caught at the upper relay sensor (from by-pass)
61 Paper caught at the registration sensor.
62 Paper caught at the paper exit sensor.
63 Paper caught at the bridge relay sensor.
64 Paper caught at the bridge exit sensor.
65 Paper caught at the duplex entrance sensor.
66 Paper caught at the duplex exit sensor.
67 Paper caught at the 1-bin tray exit sensor.
Appendix
JAM HISTORY
Document Feeder
Code Meaning
01 Jam at power on.
05 Original does not reach the registration sensor.
06 Original does not reach the original exit sensor.
07 Original does not reach the original reverse sensor.
55 Original caught at the registration sensor.
56 Original caught at the original exit sensor.
57 Original caught at the original reverse sensor.
1.4.2 PAPER SIZE

Code Paper Size Code Paper Size
05 A4 sideways 86 A5 lengthwise
06 A5 sideways 87 A6 lengthwise
07 A6 sideways 8D B4
0E B5 sideways 8E B5 lengthwise
0F B6 sideways 8F B6 lengthwise
11 Prepaid reply post card sideways 91 Prepaid reply post card lengthwise
12 Post card sideways 92 Post card lengthwise
24 8.5" x 14" sideways A0 11" x 17"
26 8.5" x 11" sideways A4 8.5" x 14" lengthwise
2C 8.5" x 5.5" sideways A6 8.5" x 11" lengthwise
84 A3 AC 8.5" x 5.5" lengthwise
85 A4 lengthwise
OTHERS
1.5 OTHERS
1.5.1 SC630 [RDS COMMUNICATION ERROR]
Frequent occurrence of SC630 indicates a problem in the customer’s
communication line or line adapter. To maintain the communications environment
in good working order, it is necessary to make planned inspections periodically.
1.5.2 PM PROCEDURE OR OTHER MAINTENANCE

Before beginning PM or other maintenance procedures, SP5-816-2 should be set
to "0". This will disable the RSS function. When maintenance is completed, SP5-
816-2 should be set to "1". This will re-enable the RSS function.
NOTE: The RSS function will remain disabled for four hours. Therefore, if
maintenance for longer than four hours is required, SP5-816-2 should be
set to "0" again to disable RSS.
Appendix
PAPER TRAY UNIT
B390
PAPER TRAY UNIT B390
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION..............................................1

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................ 1
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 2
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 3
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.............................................. 4
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 5
2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................6

2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM ....................................... 6
2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM .......................................................................... 7
2.3 PAPER END DETECTION ........................................................................... 9
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION ................................................................... 10
2.5 PAPER SIZE DETECTION......................................................................... 12
2.6 SIDE AND END FENCES .......................................................................... 13
Side Fences........................................................................................... 13
End Fence ............................................................................................. 13
3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...........................................14

3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT............................................................... 14
3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT ...................................................... 15
3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT................................................................ 15
3.4 RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ............................................................ 16
3.5 UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT .................................... 17
3.6 LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ................................... 18
3.7 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT .................................................................. 19
3.8 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT ................................................... 20
3.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ............................... 20
3.10 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT ................................................. 21
SM i B390
SPECIFICATIONS
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: A5 to A3
HLT lengthwise to DLT
Paper Weight: 60 ~ 105 g/m2, 16 ~ 28 lbs.
Paper Tray
B390
500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lbs.) x 2 trays
Unit
Tray Capacity:
Paper Feed System: Feed roller and friction pad
Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end)
Power Source: 24 VDC, 5 VDC (from the copier/printer)
120 Vac:
120 V version, from the copier/printer when the
optional tray heater is installed
220 ~ 240 Vac:
230 V version, from the copier/printer when the
optional tray heater is installed
Power Consumption: Max: 30 W (Copying/printing)
23 W (Optional Tray Heater On)
Average: 17 W (Copying/printing)
15 W (Optional Tray Heater On)
Weight: 25 kg (55 lbs)
Size (W x D x H): 550 mm x 520 mm x 271 mm
SM 1 B390
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
5
1
2
3
7 6
B390V101.WMF
1. Upper paper feed roller 5. Upper bottom plate

2. Lower paper feed roller 6. Lower bottom plate
3. Upper tray 7. Optional tray heater
4. Lower tray
B390 2 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1
2
20
3
4
Paper Tray
B390
Unit
5
19 6
18 7
17 10
16 11
12
15 13
14
1. Tray main board 11. Lower paper height 1 sensor

2. Upper lift sensor 12. Vertical transport sensor
3. Upper lift motor 13. Upper paper end sensor
4. Upper paper height 2 sensor 14. Lower paper end sensor
5. Upper paper height 1 sensor 15. Lower paper size switch
6. Upper paper feed clutch 16. Upper paper size switch
7. Relay clutch 17. Optional tray heater
8. Tray cover switch 18. Lower lift motor
9. Lower paper feed clutch 19. Lower lift sensor
10. Lower paper height 2 sensor 20. Tray motor
SM 3 B390
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Symbol Name Function Index No.
Motors
M1 Tray Drives all rollers. 20
M2 Upper Lift Lifts the upper tray bottom plate. 3
M3 Lower Lift Lifts the lower tray bottom plate. 18
Sensors
Upper Lift Detects when the paper in the upper tray is at
S1 2
the correct feed height.
Lower Lift Detects when the paper in the lower tray is at
S2 19
the correct feed height.
Upper Paper End Informs the copier/printer when the upper tray
S3 13
runs out of paper.
Lower Paper End Informs the copier/printer when the lower tray
S4 14
runs out of paper.
S5 Vertical Transport Detects misfeeds. 12
Upper Paper Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray.
S6 5
Height 1
Upper Paper Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray.
S7 4
Height 2
Lower Paper Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray.
S8 11
Height 1
Lower Paper Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray.
S9 10
Height 2
Switches
SW1 Tray Cover Detects when the tray cover is opened. 8
SW2 Upper Paper Size Determines what paper size is in the upper tray. 16
SW3 Lower Paper Size Determines what paper size is in the lower tray. 15
Magnetic Clutches
Upper Paper Starts paper feed from the upper tray.
MC1 6
Feed
Lower Paper Starts paper feed from the lower tray.
MC2 9
Feed
MC3 Relay Drives the relay rollers. 7
PCBs
Tray Main Controls the paper tray unit and communicates
PCB1 1
with the copier/printer.
Others
Optional Tray Removes humidity from the paper in the trays.
H1 17
Heater
B390 4 SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT
Paper Tray
B390
Unit
3
8
7
B390V103.WMF
1. Tray motor 5. Lower paper feed clutch

2. Drive belt 6. Relay roller
3. Upper paper feed clutch 7. Lower paper feed roller
4. Relay clutch 8. Upper paper feed roller
SM 5 B390
PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM
2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM
[A] [B]
[C]
B390D104.WMF
The paper tray holds 500 sheets. The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of
paper from the paper tray to the copier/printer. The friction pad [B] allows only one
sheet to feed at a time. The friction pad applies pressure to the feed roller with a
spring [C].
B390 6 SM
PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

[B]
[A]
[D]
Paper Tray
[C]
B390
Unit
[F]
[K] [G]
B390D106.WMF [H]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[I]
[J]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B390D107.WMF
The paper size switch detects when the tray is pushed in.
When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, the pin [A] for the lift motor
pressure shaft engages the lift motor coupling [B] and the pin [C] for the bottom
plate lift shaft in the tray engages the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D]. The
pin [E] on the rear of the tray pushes the lock lever so that the lift motor can lift the
bottom plate pressure lever.
The lift motor turns on, and turns clockwise as viewed on the diagram. The main
pressure spring [K] pulls the bottom plate pressure lever, and this lifts the tray
bottom plate.
When the top of the stack touches the feed roller, the motor cannot pull up the
plate any more, so it pulls the actuator [G] into the lift sensor [F].
The pressure of the feed roller on the paper is now too high, so the lift motor
reverses to reduce this pressure. It reverses for 300 ms or 600 ms, depending on
the paper size. For smaller paper, it reverses the larger amount (600 ms) to reduce
the pressure more.
SM 7 B390
PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
The paper size thresholds for this feature depend on SP1-908-8, 9, 17, and 18.
(Note that there are two paper size thresholds for each tray: small and middle.
Some models only use the small threshold.) The amount of reverse depends on SP
1-908-1, 2, 3, 10, 11, and 12. (See the table later in this section for details of how
these SP modes work.)
For A4-width paper or wider, a projection [H] on the side fence engages the
secondary pressure spring [J] through a lever [I] . Then, the secondary pressure
spring [J] applies paper feed pressure in addition to the main pressure spring [K], to
ensure that extra pressure is applied to wider paper.
As stated earlier, various SP modes control this mechanism. The following table
summarizes them.
No Middle Size Programmed With Middle Size Programmed

Paper width: Paper width:
Tray 1: More than 1-908-8 Tray 1: More than 1-908-9
(Default: Wider than HLT)
Amount of reverse: Amount of reverse:

Tray 1: 1-908-1 Tray 1: 1-908-1
Tray 2: 1-908-10 Tray 2: 1-908-10
(Default 300 ms)
Tray 1: 1-908-8 or less Tray 1: More than 1-908-8, up to
Tray 2: 1-908-17 or less and including 1-908-9
(Default: HLT or narrower) Tray 2: More than 1-908-17, up to
and including 1-908-18
Amount of reverse: Amount of reverse:

Tray 1: 1-908-2 Tray 1: 1-908-3
Tray 2: 1-908-11 Tray 2: 1-908-12
(Default: 600 ms)
Paper width:
Tray 1: 1-908-8 or less
Amount of reverse:
Tray 1: 1-908-2
Tray 2: 1-908-11
When the paper tray is pulled out, the pins [A, C] disengage from the couplings [B,
D], and the bottom plate drops. To make it easier to push the tray in, the lift motor
rotates backwards 1.7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling
[D] to the original position.
B390 8 SM
PAPER END DETECTION
2.3 PAPER END DETECTION
[A]
Paper Tray
[B]
B390
Unit
[C]
B390D105.WMF
If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler
[A] and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout
[C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.
When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper
end feeler causes it to lift up.
SM 9 B390
PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
[B]
[A]
[C]
[C]
B390D107.WMF
The amount of paper in the tray is detected by the combination of on/off signals
from two paper height sensors [A] and [B].
When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves
the actuator up.
The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier/printer.
Amount of Paper Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2

Near End OFF ON
30% ON ON
70% ON OFF
100% OFF OFF
When the tray contains paper of a small width, the paper feed pressure may
become too low when the thickness of the remaining stack of paper has
decreased. The lift motor rotates forward 300 ms after the sensor detects a certain
amount of paper remaining in the tray to increase paper feed pressure, simulating
the pressure generated by a full tray.
B390 10 SM
PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
The amount of remaining paper depends on SP modes 1-908-6, 7, 15, and 16. The
amount of forward rotation depends on SP1-908-4, 5, 13, and 14. Note that there
are two paper size thresholds for each tray: small and middle (this is the same as
for the paper lift mechanism described earlier). Some models only use the small
threshold. The paper size thresholds depend on SP1-908-8, 9, 17, and 18.
The following table summarizes how these SP modes work.
Paper Tray
With Middle Size
No Middle Size Programmed
B390
Unit
Programmed
(Default: Wider than HLT)
Amount of forward rotation: Amount of forward rotation:

None None
Tray 1: 1-908-8 or less Tray 1: More than 1-908-8, up
Tray 2: 1-908-17 or less to and including 1-908-9
(Default: HLT or narrower) Tray 2: More than 1-908-17, up
to and including 1-908-18
Amount of remaining paper: Amount of remaining paper:

Tray 1: 1-908-6 Tray 1: 1-908-7
Tray 2: 1-908-15 Tray 2: 1-908-16
(Default: When near-end is
detected)
Amount of forward rotation: Amount of forward rotation:

Tray 1: 1-908-4 Tray 1: 1-908-5
Tray 2: 1-908-13 Tray 2: 1-908-14
(Default: 300 ms)
Paper width:
Amount of remaining paper:

Tray 1: 1-908-6
Tray 2: 1-908-15
Amount of forward rotation:

Tray 1: 1-908-4
Tray 2: 1-908-13
SM 11 B390
PAPER SIZE DETECTION
2.5 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
SW
[B]
1 2 3 4
Size
A3, F (81/2" x 13") O O O P
A4 Lengthwise O P O P
A4 Sideways O P P P
A5 Sideways, O O P P
11" x 17"
B4, 81/2" x 14" P O P P [A]
B5 Sideways,
P P P P
81/2" x 11"
B5 Lengthwise,
P P O P
11" x 81/2"
* (Asterisk) P P O O
O: ON (Not pushed)
P: OFF (Pushed)
B390D108.WMF
There are four paper size microswitches [A] on the front right plate of the paper tray
unit. The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator [B] behind the paper size
indicator plate, which is on the front right of the tray.
Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To
determine which size has been installed, the CPU reads which microswitches the
actuator has switched off.
The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If
the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper
indicator will light.
When the paper size actuator is at the “*” mark, the paper tray can be set up to
accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using user tools. If the paper
size for this position is changed without changing the user tool setting, a paper jam
will result.
B390 12 SM
SIDE AND END FENCES
2.6 SIDE AND END FENCES
[A]
Paper Tray
B390
Unit
[D]
[B]
B390D110.WMF
[C]
B390D109.WMF
Side Fences
If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or
bend. This may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be
incorrect. To correct this, each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each
side fence can be secured with a screw [B], for customers who do not want to
change the paper size.
End Fence
As the amount of paper in the tray decreases, the bottom plate [C] lifts up
gradually. The end fence [D] is connected to the bottom plate. When the tray
bottom plate rises, the end fence moves forward and pushes the back of the paper
stack to keep it squared up.
SM 13 B390
FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[C]
[B]
[A]
B390R723.WMF

2. Move the release lever [B] to the front.
3. Pull the feed roller [C] to the operation side and remove it.
4. Replace the feed roller.
B390 14 SM
TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT
Paper Tray
B390
Unit
[A]
B390R101.WMF
[B]
[C]
B390R103.WMF
3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws).
2. Replace the tray main board [B] (4 screws and 8 connectors).
3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the rear cover (4 screws).
2. Disconnect 8 connectors from the tray main board [B].
3. Remove the tray main board with the bracket (2 screws).
4. Remove the tray motor [C] (6 screws and 1 connector).
SM 15 B390
RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
3.4 RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
B390R101.WMF
[D]
[C]
[E]
[F]
B390R102.WMF

2. Remove the right cover [B] (2 screws).
3. Remove the snap ring [C].
4. Remove the bushing [D].
5. Remove the stopper bracket [E] (2 screws).
6. Replace the relay clutch [F] (1 connector).
B390 16 SM
UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
3.5 UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
Paper Tray
B390
Unit
[A]
B390R101.WMF
[B]
[F]
[D]
[C]
[E]
B390R102.WMF

2. Remove the bracket [B] (2 screws).
3. Remove the snap ring [C].
4. Remove the bushing [D].
5. Remove the stopper bracket [E] (2 screws).
6. Replace the upper paper feed clutch [F] (1 connector).
SM 17 B390
LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
3.6 LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
[A]
B390R101.WMF
[C]
[B] B390R102.WMF

2. Remove the snap ring [B].
3. Replace the lower paper feed clutch [C].
B390 18 SM
LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT
3.7 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT
Paper Tray
B390
Unit
[A]
B390R101.WMF
[B]
[D]
[E]
[C]
[F]
B390R104.WMF
1. Pull out the paper tray.

2. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws) and the bracket [B] (2 screws).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector [C].
4. Remove the spring [D].
5. Remove the lift motor unit [E] (3 screws).
6. Remove the lift motor [F] (2 screws).
SM 19 B390
PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT
3.8 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[C]
[B]
[A]
B390R106.WMF
1. Remove the paper tray.

2. Remove the paper end sensor bracket [A] (1 screw and 1 connector).
3. Replace the paper end sensor [B].
NOTE: After replacing the sensor, pull the sensor cable towards the right side of
the frame [C] so that it does not touch the paper in the tray.
3.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
B390R105.WMF
1. Open the right door [A].

2. Remove the right guide plate [B] (2 screws).
3. Remove the vertical transport sensor bracket [C] (1 screw and 1 connector).
4. Replace the vertical transport sensor [D].
B390 20 SM
PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT
3.10 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT
[B]
Paper Tray
B390
Unit
[A]
B390R108.WMF
1. Remove the upper and lower paper trays.

2. Remove the inner cover [A] (2 screws).
3. Replace the paper size switch [B] (1 connector).
SM 21 B390
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
B391
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................ 1
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ........................................... 4
2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ............................................5

2.1 PAPER FEED............................................................................................... 5
2.2 REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE ............................ 6
2.3 TRAY LIFT.................................................................................................... 7
2.4 NEAR END/END DETECTION..................................................................... 8
2.5 RIGHT TRAY SIDE FENCE ......................................................................... 9
2.6 LEFT TRAY REAR FENCE .......................................................................... 9
2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION................................................... 10
3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...........................................11

3.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME.................................. 11
3.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ...................................................................... 11
3.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE ....................................................... 12
3.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR .......................................................... 12
3.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ................................................................................... 13
3.6 TRAY MOTOR............................................................................................ 14
3.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH AND RELAY CLUTCH......................................... 15
3.8 PAPER FEED UNIT ................................................................................... 16
3.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END,
AND RELAY SENSORS ............................................................................ 17
3.10 REAR FENCE MOTOR ............................................................................ 18
3.11 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/REVERSE ROLLERS........................................ 19
SM i B391
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: A4 sideways/LT sideways
Paper Weight: 60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2, 16 lb ~ 28 lb
Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb)
Remaining Paper Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near end)
Power Source: 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 26 W (Max.)/14 W (Ave.)
Capacity Tray
Weight: 25 kg (55 lbs)
Large
B391
SM 1 B391
10 1 2 3 4
B391D101.WMF
9 8
1. Pick-up Roller 7. Paper Height Sensors 1, 2, 3

2. Upper Limit Sensor 8. Lower Limit Sensor
3. Paper Feed Roller 9. Left Paper End Sensor
4. Relay Sensor 10. Paper Height Sensors 4,5
5. Relay Roller
6. Reverse Roller
B391 2 SM

1
2
3
Capacity Tray
8 9
Large
6
B391
7
20
B391D102.WMF
19
18 10
17 11
12
13
14
16
B391D103.WMF
15
1. Main Board 12. Paper Height Sensors 1, 2, 3

2. Tray Sensor (Switch) 13. Lower Limit Sensor
3. Relay Clutch 14. Side Fence Solenoid
4. Paper Feed Clutch 15. Rear Fence Return Sensor
5. Tray Motor 16. Rear Fence Motor
6. Tray Lift Motor 17. Rear Fence Home Position
Sensor
7. Tray Heater (option)
18. Left Tray Paper End Sensor
8. Right Tray Paper End Sensor
19. Paper Height Sensors 4, 5
9. Upper Limit Sensor
20. Right Cover Switch
10. Relay Sensor
11. Side Fence Open/Closed Sensors
SM 3 B391
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Motors
M1 Tray Motor Drives all rollers. 5
M2 Tray Lift Motor Drives the paper tray up or down. 6
Rear Fence Moves the rear fence to transfer the paper
M3 Motor stack from the paper storage (left) side of the 16
tray to the paper feed (right) side.
Sensors
Right Tray Informs the copier/printer when the paper in
Paper End the right side (paper feed side) of the tray has
been used up. If there is a paper stack in the
S1 8
left side (paper storage side), this is moved
into the right tray. If there is no paper stack in
the left side, paper end is indicated.
Relay Detects the copy paper coming to the relay
S2 10
roller and checks for misfeeds.
Upper Limit Detects when the paper is at the correct
S3 9
paper feed height.
Lower Limit Detects when the tray is completely lowered,
S4 13
to stop the LCT motor.
Paper Height Detects the amount of paper remaining in the
S5 12
1, 2, 3 right side of the tray.
Paper Height Detects the amount of paper remaining in the
S6 19
4, 5 left side of the tray.
Rear Fence Detects when the rear fence is at H.P.
S7 17
Home Position
S8 Tray (Switch) Detects whether the tray is correctly set. 2
Side Fence Detects whether the side fence is opened on
S9 11
Open/Closed closed.
Rear Fence Detects when the rear fence has moved the
S10 15
Return paper stack from the left side to the right side.
Left Tray Informs the copier/printer when there is no
S11 Paper End paper in the left side (paper storage side) of 18
the tray.
Solenoids
Side Fence Controls open-close movement of the side
SOL1 14
fence.
Magnetic Clutches
MC1 Paper Feed Drives the paper feed roller. 4
MC2 Relay Drives the relay roller. 3
PCBs
Main Controls the LCT and communicates with the
PCB1 1
copier/printer.
Switches
SW1 Right Cover Detects whether the right cover is open. 20
B391 4 SM
PAPER FEED
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 PAPER FEED
[B]
[A]
Capacity Tray
Large
B391
[C]
B391D104.WMF
This products uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism.

The paper feed unit consists of the pickup roller [A], paper feed roller [B], reverse
roller [C], and grip and transport rollers.
There is a torque limiter in the back of the reverse roller (ferrite powder type).
SM 5 B391
REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE
2.2 REVERSE ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE
[E] [C]
[A]
[B]
B391D107.WMF
[E]
[A]
[D]
B391D108.WMF
To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, the
reverse and pickup rollers are set so that they release automatically.
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the reverse roller [B] is away
from the paper feed roller [C] and the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper position.
When the paper tray is set into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E]. This
causes the pick-up roller [D] to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper
and the reverse roller [B] to move up and contact the paper feed roller.
B391 6 SM
TRAY LIFT
2.3 TRAY LIFT
[F]
[G]
[A]
[B]
Capacity Tray
Large
B391
[E] [D]
B391D110.WMF
[C]
When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray switch [A] on the back face
turns on and the tray lift motor [B] starts up. The base plate lift shaft [C] is coupled
to the lift motor at shaft [D], so the base plate of the tray is lifted. After a short while,
the top of the paper stack contacts the pick-up roller and lifts it up.
When this occurs, the actuator enters the upper limit sensor, the sensor turns off
and the lift motor stops. When paper in the tray is used up, the pick-up roller is
gradually lowered, and the actuator leaves the upper limit sensor (turning the
sensor on). When this happens, the lift motor begins turning again. The tray will
then be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit sensor (turning the sensor off
again).
When the tray is removed from the copier, the coupling between the lift motor [B]
and base plate lift shaft [C] is broken and the base plate goes into a controlled free
fall (using a damper [E] to slow the fall and prevent damage).
SM 7 B391
NEAR END/END DETECTION
2.4 NEAR END/END DETECTION

This tray can hold two stacks of paper, so the machine needs to monitor the status
of both these stacks. There are seven sensors to do this.
In the right tray (paper feed side), three height sensors measure the height of the
stack, and an end sensor detects when all the paper is used up. As the amount of
paper remaining in the tray decreases, the base plate rises and the actuator
activates the paper height sensors. When paper runs out in the right tray, the stack
in the left tray is moved across to the right tray.
There are also two height sensors ([F] in the diagram on the previous page) and an
end sensor in the left tray (paper storage side) ([G] in the diagram on the previous
page). When there is no paper in both trays, paper end is detected.
The machine determines the amount of remaining paper based on the sensor
outputs, as shown in the following table.
Paper end sensor 1: = Low (no paper), = High (paper present)
Other sensors: = Low (paper present), = High (no paper)
Amount of paper
100% 75% 50%
Paper Height Sensor 1
Paper Height Sensor 2 –
Paper Height Sensor 3 – – –
Paper End Sensor 1
Paper End Sensor 2
Amount of paper
25% Near-end End
Paper Height Sensor 1 –
Paper Height Sensor 2 – – – – –
Paper Height Sensor 3 – – – – – – –
Paper End Sensor 1
Paper End Sensor 2
The following diagram is the sensor layout, as viewed from the front.
Paper Storage Side Paper Feed Side
Paper End
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 1
Paper Height Paper Height

Sensor 5 Sensor 2
Paper Height Paper Height

Sensor 4 Sensor 3
Paper End
Sensor 2
B391D112.WMF
B391 8 SM
RIGHT TRAY SIDE FENCE
2.5 RIGHT TRAY SIDE FENCE
[B] [C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
Capacity Tray
Large
B391
[G]
[H]
B391D109.WMF
When the paper in the right tray is used up, the side fence solenoid [F] activates
and stays on until the side fence open/closed sensor [E] detects that the fence is
open. The rear fence [A] then moves the stack of paper from the left tray into the
right tray, as described in the following section. When the stack has been
transferred to the right tray, the rear fence return sensor [G] detects the rear fence
and then the cpu turns off the side fence open solenoid (closing the side fence).
The side fence open/closed sensor [D] detects when the side fence is closed.
When it is not closed, the user is prompted at the operation panel to free the
mechanism.
2.6 LEFT TRAY REAR FENCE

If the right tray paper end sensor detects that there is no paper in the tray (while
the left tray sensor detects that there is still paper in the left tray), the right side
fence [C] opens and the rear fence motor [H] turns on. The rear fence of the left
tray moves and the paper stack is then transferred from the left tray to the right
tray.
When the left tray rear fence activates the rear fence return sensor, the machine
detects that the paper stack has been transferred to the right tray and the rear
fence motor rotates in the opposite direction. When the rear fence HP sensor [B]
comes on, the motor stops.
SM 9 B391
RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION
2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION
[A]
[B]
[C]
B391D106.WMF
[E] [D]
B391D111.WMF
The paper end sensor [A] detects when copy paper in the right tray runs out.
When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the paper end feeler [B] and
causes the actuator to come between the LED and photo diode of the sensor.
When paper runs out, the feeler drops and the actuator leaves the photointerruptor,
and the machine detects that there is no paper in the tray.
When the tray is being pulled out, the lever [E] lifts the pick-up roller and this also
lifts up the feeler.
B391 10 SM
DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME

3.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME
While pressing the stopper attached to the

guide rail, pull out the large capacity tray.
NOTE: When reinstalling the tray, set the
tray on the guide rail and carefully
push the tray in, making sure to keep
the tray level.
Capacity Tray
Large
[A]
B391
B391R101.WMF
3.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR

LT A4
[C] [B]
[A]
B391R102.WMF
1. Pull out the large capacity tray.

2. Remove the left tray rear side fence [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove the rear fence bracket [B] (1 screw).
4. Remove the connector of the rear fence HP sensor.
5. Replace the rear fence HP sensor [C] (1 screw).
NOTE: When securing the sensor in place, be sure to fasten the screw in the
proper position.
SM 11 B391
CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE
3.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE
[A]
[B]
B391R103.WMF
1. Remove the screws of all side fences [A], [B].

2. The position of the rear fence HP sensor can then be changed (see Rear
Fence HP Sensor Removal).
3. The paper size display can then be changed with an SP mode.
NOTE: When securing the right tray side fence, fasten the screw after setting the
paper in the right tray and adjusting the fence to the width of the paper.
3.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR

[C]
[A]
[B]
B391R104.WMF
1. Pull out the large capacity tray.

2. Remove the left tray side fence [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove the rear fence bracket [B] (1 screws).
4. Replace the left tray paper end sensor [C] (1 connector).
B391 12 SM
TRAY LIFT MOTOR
3.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR
[A]
B391R105.WMF
Capacity Tray
Large
B391
[B]
B391R106.WMF
1. Remove the brackets (1 screw for each).

3. Remove the tray lift motor [B] (3 screws, 1 connector).
SM 13 B391
TRAY MOTOR
3.6 TRAY MOTOR
[A]
[C]
[B]
B391R107.WMF

2. Remove bracket #1 [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove bracket #2 [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the tray motor [C] (6 screws, 1 connector).
B391 14 SM
PAPER FEED CLUTCH AND RELAY CLUTCH
3.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH AND RELAY CLUTCH
[A]
[D]
Capacity Tray
Large
B391
[B]
[C]
B391R108.WMF

2. Remove bracket #1 [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove bracket #2 [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove all bushings.
5. Remove the paper feed clutch [C] and relay clutch [D].
6. Replace the required clutch.
NOTE: Make sure to properly secure both clutches before completing installation.
SM 15 B391
PAPER FEED UNIT
3.8 PAPER FEED UNIT
[A]
[B]
[C] B391R109.WMF
[E]
B391R110.WMF
[D]
1. Remove the paper feed clutch and relay clutch (see Paper Feed Clutch and
Relay Clutch Replacement).
2. Remove pulleys A [A], B [B], and C [C].
3. Remove the paper feed harness from the main board.
4. Open the vertical transport guide plate [D].
5. Remove the paper feed unit [E] (2 screws).
B391 16 SM
UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS
3.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND

RELAY SENSORS
[A] [B]
Capacity Tray
[D]
Large
B391
[C]
B391R111.WMF
1. Remove the paper feed unit (see Paper Feed Unit Replacement).
2. Replace the required sensor.
• Upper limit [A]
• Relay [B]
• Right tray paper end [C]
NOTE: When replacing the upper limit [A] and paper end sensor [C], please be
sure to do so while pushing the release lever [D].
SM 17 B391
REAR FENCE MOTOR
3.10 REAR FENCE MOTOR
[B] [D]
[E]
[A]
B391R112.WMF [C]
B391R113.WMF
[F]
[G]
[H]
B391R114.WMF
1. Pull out the paper feed tray unit.

2. Remove the paper feed tray front cover [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove the left side fence [B].
4. Remove the rear fence drive gear [C] (1 screw). This is in order to free the end
fence [D].
5. Move the end fence to the right (toward the center).
6. Remove the end fence (1 screw).
7. Remove the end fence bracket [E] (2 screws).
8. Remove the bracket [F] (1 screw).
9. Remove the bracket [G] of the rear fence motor assembly (2 screws).
10. Remove the rear fence motor assembly (2 screws).
11. Replace the motor [H] (1 connector).
B391 18 SM
PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/REVERSE ROLLERS
3.11 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/REVERSE ROLLERS
[C]
Capacity Tray
Large
B391
B391R115.WMF
[A] [B]
1. Remove the paper tray unit (see Paper Tray Unit Replacement).
2. Remove the snap ring (1 each for the paper feed and reverse rollers).
3. Remove the pick up roller [A].
4. Replace each roller [B], [C].
NOTE: Install the paper feed rollers the correct way round, as shown in the
illustration. If the rollers are installed incorrectly, this will cause the one-way
clutch to lock.
SM 19 B391
1,000-SHEET FINISHER
B408
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1

1.1 MAIN PCB .................................................................................................... 1
1.2 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................ 2
1.3 MOTORS...................................................................................................... 3
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR.................................................................................... 3
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR .............................................................................. 3
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR ........................... 4
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR .......................................................... 4
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS........................................................................... 5
1.4.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................... 5
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR .................................................................. 6
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR..................................................... 6
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR .............................................................. 7
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR ............................................................... 7
2. TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................................8
2.1 JAM DETECTION......................................................................................... 8
3. SERVICE TABLES...........................................................................9
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ............................................................................. 9
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ..........................................................10

4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 10
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................... 11
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION............................................ 13
4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15
4.5 JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 16
Upper Tray Mode ................................................................................... 16
Sort/Stack Mode .................................................................................... 16
Staple Mode........................................................................................... 16
4.6 UPPER TRAY............................................................................................. 17
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS ................................................ 18
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM ..................................................................... 19
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 20
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE................................................................................. 21
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM .......................................................................... 22
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM ........................................... 23
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM ........................................................... 24
SM i B408
MAIN PCB
CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning
NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.

: See or Refer to  : Screws  : Connector  : Clip ring
 : E-ring
1.1 MAIN PCB
[A]
[B]
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
B408R109.WMF B408R110.WMF
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Main PCB [B] ( x 4, All )
SM 1 B408
STAPLER UNIT
1.2 STAPLER UNIT

1. Side cover [A] ( x 2) [B]
[C]
2. Open exit guide plate [B]
3. Upper side cover [C] ( x 2)
[A]
B408R102.WMF
[D]
4. Front cover support plate [D] ( x 1)
[E]
5. Front cover [E]
[F]
6. Front inner cover [F] ( x 2)
B408R113.WMF
7. Harness [G]
8. Unhook the spring [H]
9. Turn the stapler unit [I] and take it
out. [J]
10. Bracket [J] ( x 2)
[H]
[G] [I]
B408R114.WMF
B408 2 SM
MOTORS
1.3 MOTORS
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR
1. Rear cover ( 1.1)
2. Shift motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1) [A]
B408R123.WMF
1000-Sheet
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR
Finisher
B408
2. Stapler motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
[A]
B408R124.WMF
SM 3 B408
MOTORS
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR

2. Motor assembly [A] ( x 4,  x 2)
[A]
3. Upper transport motor [B] ( x 4)
4. Exit motor [C] ( x 4)
[B]
[C]
B408R112.WMF
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR
1. Main PCB ( 1.1)

2. Lower transport motor [A] ( x 2,  x
1)
[A]
B408R111.WMF
B408 4 SM
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS

[A]
1.4.1 PREPARATION
1. Front cover and inner cover ( 1.2) [B]

2. Upper side cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Upper tray [B] ( x 1)
[C]
B408R116.WMF
[E]
4. Lower side cover [C] ( x 2)
1000-Sheet
Finisher
5. Loosen the 2 screws [D]. [D]
B408
6. Lower the lower tray guide plate [E].
B408R117.WMF
7. Guide plate [F] ( x 4)
[F]
B408R118.WMF
SM 5 B408
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR
1. Stack height sensor assembly [A] ( x

1) [A]
2. Stack height sensor [B] ( x 1)
[B]
B408R121.WMF
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR
1. Stapler tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
B408R120.WMF
[A]
B408 6 SM
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR
1. Lower tray lift motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
[A]
B408R119.WMF
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
1. Stack feed-out motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
[A]
B408R122.WMF
SM 7 B408
JAM DETECTION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Mode
Jam Content
Shift Staple
Entrance sensor: The entrance sensor does not turn on
On check within the normal time after the main
machine exit sensor turns on
Entrance sensor: The entrance sensor does not turn off

Off check within the normal time after it turns on.
Lower tray exit sensor: The lower tray exit sensor does not turn
On check on within the normal time after the
entrance sensor turns off.
Tray exit sensor: The tray exit sensor does not turn off

Off check within the normal time after it turns on.
Stapler tray entrance sensor: The stapler tray entrance sensor does
On check not switch on within the normal time
after the entrance sensor switched on.
Stapler tray entrance sensor: The staple tray entrance sensor does
Off check not turn off within the normal time after it
turns on.
Lower tray exit sensor: The lower exit sensor does not turn on
On check after the feed-out pawl feeds out the
outputs.
Lower tray exit sensor: The lower exit sensor turns on when the
Off check feed-out pawl returns to its home
position after feeding out the outputs.
B408 8 SM
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those listed in
the table below.
SW100
Description
1 2
0 0 Normal operation mode (Default)
1 0 Packing mode.
• Before packing the machine, do the following: Set switch 1 to 1 then back to
zero. The lower tray moves to the lowest position. Then turn off the main switch.
• After unpacking the machine, do the following: After turning the main switch back
on, the lower tray returns to home position automatically.
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
SM 9 B408
GENERAL LAYOUT
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
2 3
1
13 4
5
6
12
7
11
10
8
9
B408D101.WMF
1. Upper Tray 8. Stapler

2. Upper Tray Exit Roller 9. Stack Feed-out Belt
3. Entrance Roller 10. Positioning Roller
4. Tray Junction Gate 11. Shift Roller
5. Upper Transport Roller 12. Lower Tray
6. Stapler Junction Gate 13. Lower Tray Exit Roller
7. Lower Transport Rollers
B408 10 SM
1 2 3
11
4
5
10
9 7
8 6 12
B408D102.WMF
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
19
13
18 14
20
15
16
21 17
B408D103.WMF
1. Upper Cover Switch 12. Jogger Fence HP Sensor

2. Paper Limit Sensor 13. Positioning Roller Solenoid
3. Entrance Sensor 14. Stapler HP Sensor
4. Exit Guide Plate Motor 15. Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor
5. Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor 16. Stapler Tray Paper Sensor
6. Front Door Safety Switch 17. Stapler Hammer Motor
7. Stack Height Sensor 18. Staple Sheet Sensor
8. Lower Tray Exit Sensor 19. Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor
9. Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch 20. Stapler Rotation HP Sensor
10. Shift HP Sensor 21. Staple Sensor
11. Shift Motor
SM 11 B408
22
32
31
30
29
28
27 23
26
25
24 B408D104.WMF
22. Tray Junction Gate Solenoid

23. Lower Tray Lift Motor
24. Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor
25. Stapler Motor
26. Jogger Fence Motor
27. Stack Feed-out Motor
28. Main Board
29. Lower Transport Motor
30. Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
31. Exit Motor
32. Upper Transport Motor
B408 12 SM

Motors
Upper Drives the entrance roller and upper transport
M1 32
Transport rollers.
Lower Drives the lower transport rollers and the
M2 29
Transport positioning roller.
M3 Jogger Fence Drives the jogger fences. 26
M4 Staple Hammer Drives the staple hammer. 17
M5 Stack Feed-out Drives the stack feed-out belt. 27
M6 Exit Guide Plate Opens and closes the exit guide plate. 4
M7 Exit Drives the exit roller. 31
M8 Lower Tray Lift Moves the lower tray up or down. 23
M9 Shift Moves the shift roller from side to side. 11
M10 Stapler Moves the stapler unit from side to side. 25
Sensors
Entrance Detects copy paper entering the finisher and
S1 3
checks for misfeeds.
1000-Sheet
Paper Limit Detects when the paper stack height in the
Finisher
S2 2
B408
upper tray is at its limit.
Jogger Fence Detects when the jogger fence is at home
S3 12
HP position.
S4 Shift HP Detects when the shift roller is at home position. 10
Stack Feed-out Detects when the stack feed-out belt is at home
S5 19
Belt HP position.
S6 Stapler HP Detects when the stapler is at home position. 14
Exit Guide Plate Detects when the exit guide plate is at home
S7 5
HP position.
Stapler Tray Detects copy paper entering the stapler tray and
S8 15
Entrance checks for misfeeds.
S9 Lower Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds. 8
S10 Stack Height Detects the top of the copy paper stack. 7
Lower Tray Detects when the lower tray is at its lower limit
S11 24
Lower Limit position.
Stapler Tray Detects when there is copy paper in the stapler
S12 16
Paper tray.
S13 Staple Sheet Detects the leading edge of the staple sheet. 18
Stapler Rotation Detects when the staple hammer is at home
S14 20
HP position.
Staple Detects whether there are staples in the staple
S15 21
cartridge.
Solenoids
Tray Junction Drives the tray junction gate.
SOL1 22
Gate
Stapler Junction Drives the stapler junction gate.
SOL2 30
Gate
SM 13 B408

Positioning Moves the positioning roller.
SOL3 13
Roller
Switches
Lower Tray Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit
SW1 9
Upper Limit position.
Front Door Cuts the dc power when the front door is
SW2 6
Safety opened.
Upper Cover Cuts the dc power when the upper cover is
SW3 1
opened.
PCBs
Main Controls the finisher and communicates with the
PCB1 28
copier/printer.
B408 14 SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
1
2 4 5
B408D106.WMF
B408D105.WMF
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
7
B408D107.WMF
1. Exit Motor 6. Lower Tray Lift Motor

2. Upper Transport Motor 7. Stack Feed-out Motor
3. Lower Transport Motor 8. Jogger Motor
4. Shift Motor 9. Stapler Motor
5. Exit Guide Plate Motor
SM 15 B408
JUNCTION GATES
4.5 JUNCTION GATES
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B408D108.WMF
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combination of the tray junction gate [A] and stapler junction gate [B].
These gates are controlled by the tray junction gate solenoid [C] and stapler
junction gate solenoid [D].
Upper Tray Mode

The tray junction gate solenoid remains off. The copies go up to the upper tray.
Sort/Stack Mode
The tray junction gate solenoid turns on and the stapler junction gate solenoid
remains off. The copies are sent to the lower tray directly.
Staple Mode
The tray junction gate solenoid and the stapler junction gate solenoid both turn on.
The copies go down to the jogger unit.
B408 16 SM
UPPER TRAY
4.6 UPPER TRAY
[A]
B408D109.WMF
When the paper limit sensor [A] switches on during feed-out for each of three
1000-Sheet
Finisher
consecutive sheets of paper, paper overflow is detected.
B408
SM 17 B408
LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
[G]
[B] [F]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
B408D112.WMF
The vertical position of the lower tray [A] depends on the height of the copied paper
stack on the lower tray. The stack height sensor feeler [B] contacts the top of the
stack, and the lower tray lift motor [C] controls the tray height.
When the lower tray reaches its lowest possible position, the actuator [D] turns on
the lower tray lower limit sensor [E], and copying stops.
Tray Up
When the copy paper on the tray is removed, the stack height sensor [F] turns off
and the tray lifts up. Then, the tray stops when the sensor turns on again (the tray
pushes up the feeler).
If the stack height sensor fails, the lower tray upper limit switch [G] detects the tray
and stops the motor. This is a safety measure against stack height sensor failure.
Sort/Stack Mode (Tray Down)

Every five sheets of paper, the tray goes down until the sensor turns off again.
Then, it goes up until the sensor is on again.
Staple Mode (Tray Down)

After a stapled copy is fed out, the tray goes up for 220 ms and stops for 300 ms.
Then, it goes down for 1 second, waits for 500 ms, then goes up until the sensor
turns on.
B408 18 SM
PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
[F] [C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408D110.WMF
B408
In the sort/stack mode, the shift roller [A] moves from side to side to separate the
sets of copies.
The horizontal position of the shift roller is controlled by the shift motor [B] and the
shift gear disk [C]. After the trailing edge of the copy passes the upper transport
roller, the shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the link [D].
After the paper is delivered to the lower tray [E], the shift roller moves to its home
position, which is detected by the shift HP sensor [F]. Then, when the trailing edge
of the next copy passes the upper transport roller, the shift roller shifts again. This
operation is done every sheet.
When the trailing edge of each page in the next set of copies passes the upper
transport roller, the shift roller shifts in the opposite direction.
SM 19 B408
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
B408D113.WMF [B] [F]
[E]
[A]
[C]
B408D114.WMF
[D]
In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned
when it arrives in the jogger unit.
For the vertical paper alignment, the positioning roller solenoid [A] turns on shortly
after the stapler tray entrance sensor [B] turns off, and the positioning roller [C]
pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper [D].
For the horizontal paper alignment, the jogger front fence [E] and the rear fence [F]
move to the waiting position, which is 18 mm away from the side of the paper.
When aligning the paper vertically, the jogger fence moves in 14 mm from the
waiting position. After the vertical position has been aligned, the jogger fence
pushes the paper 4 mm against the rear fence to align the paper horizontally. Then
the jogger fence moves back to the previous position.
B408 20 SM
EXIT GUIDE PLATE
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE
[B] [C] [A]

[D]
1000-Sheet
B408D111.WMF
Finisher
B408
When stacking a large size of paper (such as A3, DLT) in the jogger unit, the
leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers. To prevent the paper from
running into the exit rollers and not being aligned correctly, the exit guide plate [A]
is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers. This operation is done for all
paper sizes, but is only needed for the larger sizes.
The exit guide plate motor [B] and exit roller release cam [C] control the exit guide
plate movement. When the exit guide plate motor starts, the cam turns and the exit
guide plate moves up. When stapling is finished, the exit guide plate motor turns on
again to close the exit guide plate. When the exit guide plate HP sensor [D] turns
on, the motor stops.
SM 21 B408
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM
[E] [B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
B408D116.WMF
The staple hammer motor [A] drives the staple hammer.

The staple sheet sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the staple sheet at the
stapling position to prevent the hammer from operating if there are no staples at
the stapling position.
If there is no staple cartridge in the stapler unit or no staples in the staple cartridge,
staple end is indicated on the operation panel. The stapler sensor [C] detects this.
The stapler rotation HP sensor [D] checks whether the staple hammer mechanism
returns to home position after each stack has been stapled.
When excessive load is applied to the staple hammer motor, the copier detects a
staple jam. When a staple jam has occurred, the jammed staple is inside the staple
cartridge [E]. Therefore, the jammed staple can be removed easily after pulling out
the staple cartridge.
B408 22 SM
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
B408D117.WMF
The stapler motor moves the stapler [A] from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
1000-Sheet
Finisher
B408
If two-staple-position mode is selected, the stapler moves to the front stapling
position first, then moves to the rear stapling position. However, for the next copy
set, it staples in the reverse order (at the rear side first, then at the front side).
After the job is completed, the stapler moves back to its home position. The stapler
HP sensor [B] detects this.
SM 23 B408
PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B408D118.WMF
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl
[B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift roller. The shift roller takes over stack feed-out after the leading edge
reaches this roller.
Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor, the stack-
feed-out motor turns off until the shift rollers have completely fed the stack out to
the lower tray. Then, the stack-feed-out motor turns on again until the pawl [B]
actuates the stack feed-out belt home position sensor [D].
B408 24 SM
1-BIN TRAY UNIT
B413
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 OVERALL INFORMATION .............................................................. 1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................ 1
1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT....................................................... 2
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ........................................................ 3
2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ........................................... 4

2.1 BASIC OPERATION..................................................................................... 4
3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................ 5

3.1 PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL.......................................................................5
SM i B413
SPECIFICATIONS
1. OVERALL INFORMATION
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: Standard Size:
A5 Lengthwise to A3
HLT Lengthwise to DLT
Non-standard Size:
Paper Width: 90 ~ 297 mm
Paper Length: 148 ~ 432 mm
Paper Weight: 60 ~ 105 g/m², 16 ~ 28 lbs.
Tray Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lbs.)
Power Source: 5 VDC, 24 VDC (from the copier)
Power Consumption: 17 W
Weight: 1.1 kg
1-Bin Tray
B413
Unit
SM 1 B413
B413V500.WMF
1
4
5
B413V501.WMF
1. Exit Rollers
2. Junction Gate Gear
3. Drive Gear
4. Paper Tray
5. Paper Sensor
6. Junction Gate (Interchange Unit)
B413 2 SM
B413V502.WMF 2
1. Paper Sensor
2. 1-bin Sorter Exit Tray LED
(located in the copier)

Sensors
S1 Paper Detects when there is paper on the tray. 1
LEDs
1 Bin Exit Tray Indicates when there is paper in the tray. This
LED1 2
1-Bin Tray
sensor is located in the copier.

B413
Unit
SM 3 B413
BASIC OPERATION

2.1 BASIC OPERATION
[C]
[B]
[E]
B413D101.WMF
B413D103.WMF
[E]
[F]
B413D102.WMF
At the appropriate time after the leading edge of the first sheet of copy paper
reaches the copier’s registration roller, the junction gate solenoid [B] in the
interchange unit turns on to switch the junction gate to direct the paper to the tray
[C].
The junction gate solenoid turns off at the appropriate time after the paper is
directed to the tray. The main motor in the copier stops after the final sheet passes
through the paper sensor [E].
The paper sensor [E] turns on when there is paper in the tray, and the paper
indicator [F] turns on.
The tray can be opened for easier jam removal by swinging the tray to the left.
B413 4 SM
PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL

3.1 PAPER SENSOR REMOVAL
[A]
B413R101.WMF
[B]
1. Remove the 1-bin tray.

2. Remove the 1-bin sorter unit [A].
3. Remove the paper sensor [B] (1 connector).
1-Bin Tray
B413
Unit
SM 5 B413
DUPLEX UNIT
B414
DUPLEX UNIT B414
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................ 1
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 5

2.1 BASIC OPERATION..................................................................................... 6
LONGER THAN A4 SIDEWAYS/LT SIDEWAYS..................................... 6
UP TO A4 SIDEWAYS/LT SIDEWAYS.................................................... 7
2.2 FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM ............................................................... 8
WHEN PAPER IS FED INTO DUPLEX UNIT: ......................................... 8
INVERSION AND EXIT:........................................................................... 8
3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT .............................................9

3.1 COVER REMOVAL ...................................................................................... 9
3.2 ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT .................................................... 10
3.3 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT................................................................ 11
SM i B414
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: Standard sizes
A5 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Width: 140 to 297 mm
Length: 182 to 432 mm
Tray Capacity: 1 sheet
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V
Dimensions (W x D x H): 90 x 495 x 452 mm
Weight: 6 kg
Duplex Unit
B414
SM 1 B414
2
1
3
6
7
B414V500.WMF
1. Inverter Gate 5. Middle Transport Roller

2. Entrance Sensor 6. Lower Transport Roller
3. Inverter Roller 7. Exit Sensor
4. Upper Transport Roller
B414 2 SM
1 2
6 5
B414V501.WMF
Duplex Unit
B414
1. Entrance Sensor 5. Transport Motor
2. Inverter Gate Solenoid 6. Exit Sensor
3. Inverter Motor 7. Duplex Unit Open Switch
4. Main Board
SM 3 B414

Motors
M1 Inverter Drives the inverter roller. 3
M2 Transport Drives the upper and lower transport rollers. 5
Sensors
Entrance Detects the trailing edge of the copy paper to
turn on the inverter gate solenoid and turn on
S1 1
the inverter motor in reverse. Checks for
misfeeds.
S2 Exit Checks for misfeeds. 6
Switches
Duplex Unit Detects whether the duplex unit is opened or
SW1 7
Open not.
Solenoids
SOL1 Inverter Gate Controls the inverter gate. 2
PCBs
Main Controls the duplex unit and communicates
PCB1 4
with the copier.
B414 4 SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT
6 B414V502.WMF
Duplex Unit
B414
1. Inverter Roller 4. Transport Motor
2. Inverter Motor 5. Lower Transport Roller
3. Upper Transport Roller 6. Middle Transport Roller
SM 5 B414
BASIC OPERATION
2.1 BASIC OPERATION
To increase the productivity of the duplex unit, copies are printed as follows.
Longer than A4 sideways/LT sideways

The duplex unit can store only one sheet of copy paper.
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper (if
shaded, this indicates the second side).
2 ⇒ 1 ⇒ 4 ⇒ 3 ⇒ 6 ⇒ 5 ⇒ 8 ⇒ 7
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
B414D519.WMF
B414D518.WMF
B414 6 SM
BASIC OPERATION
Up to A4 sideways/LT sideways
The duplex unit can store two sheets of copy paper
Example: 8 pages. The number [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
number [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper (if
shaded, this indicates the second side).
2 ⇒ 4 ⇒ 1 ⇒ 6 ⇒ 3 ⇒ 8 ⇒ 5 ⇒ 7
1 2 1 3 2 4 3 4
B414D520.WMF
Duplex Unit
B414
B414D517.WMF
SM 7 B414
FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM
2.2 FEED IN AND EXIT MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[G]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[F]
B414D504.WMF
B414D505.WMF
When paper is fed into duplex unit:

As soon as the paper arrives from the interchange unit, it is sent to the inverter
section [C] (the inverter gate solenoid [A] remains off during this process).
The inverter section can hold a sheet of paper up to A3 size. Because of this, the
cover guide used in the previous model has become obsolete and has been
eliminated from the design.
Inversion and Exit:

Shortly after the trailing edge of the paper passes the entrance sensor [G], the
inverter gate solenoid [A] switches on and the inverter gate [B] switches over to
direct the paper to the exit path [E]. The inverter roller [D] then changes its rotation
direction and the paper goes to the exit transport area [F]. The paper is then sent to
the registration rollers in the main copier via the transport rollers.
B414 8 SM
COVER REMOVAL

3.1 COVER REMOVAL
[A]
B414R501.WMF
Duplex Unit
1. Remove the duplex unit cover [A] (4 screws).
B414
SM 9 B414
ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT
3.2 ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
B414R502.WMF
1. Remove the duplex unit cover. (Refer to section 3.1.)

2. Remove the sensor holder [A] (1 screw).
3. Replace the entrance sensor [B] (1 connector, 1 screw).
B414 10 SM
EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
3.3 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
B414R503.WMF
Duplex Unit
B414
1. Open the duplex unit [A].
2. Remove the sensor bracket [B] (1 screw).
3. Replace the exit sensor [C] (1 connector).
SM 11 B414
BY-PASS TRAY
B415
BY-PASS TRAY B415
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................ 1

2.1 BASIC OPERATION..................................................................................... 3
2.2 PAPER SIZE DETECTION........................................................................... 4

3.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER/FRICTION PAD/PAPER END SENSOR................ 5
3.2 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD................................................................... 6
3.3 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 7
SM i B415
SPECIFICATIONS
1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
A6 lengthwise to A3
Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm
Tray Capacity: 50 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Paper Feed System: Friction Pad Paper Feed
1 2
3
By-Pass Tray
B415
B415V500.WMF
1. Paper Feed Roller

2. Paper End Sensor
3. Paper Size Sensor Board
SM 1 B415
2
1
B415V501.WMF
1. Paper End Sensor

2. Paper Feed Clutch
3. Paper Size Sensor Board

Sensors
Paper End Informs the copier/printer when the by-pass
S1 1
tray runs out of paper.
Paper Size Detects the paper width.
S2 3
Sensor Board
Magnetic Clutches
MC1 Paper Feed Starts paper feed from the by-pass tray. 2
B415 2 SM
BASIC OPERATION
2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 BASIC OPERATION
[A]
[B]
[C]
B415D503.WMF
The by-pass unit uses a friction pad paper feed mechanism. The transport roller
gear in the main copier/printer drives the gear on the paper feed clutch [B] through
a series of gears.
When paper is placed in the tray, the paper end sensor [C] switches off. When the
Start button is pressed, the paper feed clutch [B] is activated and the paper feed
roller [A] feeds the paper one sheet at a time.
By-Pass Tray
B415
SM 3 B415
PAPER SIZE DETECTION
2.2 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B415D504.WMF
The paper size sensor board [B] monitors the paper width. The rear side fence [A]
is connected to the terminal plate. The pattern for each paper width is unique.
Therefore, the copier/printer determines which paper has been placed in the by-
pass tray by the signal output from the board. However, the copier will not
determine the paper length from the by-pass tray hardware (refer to Original Size
Detection in the manual for the base copier for details on how paper length is
determined).
B415 4 SM
PAPER FEED ROLLER/FRICTION PAD/PAPER END SENSOR
3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER/FRICTION PAD/PAPER END
SENSOR
[A]
B415R501.WMF
[C] [D]
By-Pass Tray
B415
B415R505.WMF
[B]
1. Remove the upper cover [A] (2 screws).

2. Remove the paper end sensor bracket [B] (1 screw).
3. Remove the paper feed roller [C] (snap-fit).
4. If removing the friction pad [D], do so at this time.
SM 5 B415
PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD
3.2 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD
[B]
[A]
[C]
B415R502.WMF
[H]
[F]
[G]
[D]
[E]
B415R503.WMF

2. Remove the by-pass tray [B] (1 connector, 2 release levers [C]).
3. Remove the lever [D] (1 snap ring, 1 pin).
4. While pushing the release lever [E], remove the paper tray [F].
5. Remove the by-pass width sensor [G].
NOTE: When installing the by-pass width sensor [G], move the side fence inward
all the way so that the seal on the side face gear faces the surface with the
seal [H] on the by-pass width sensor.
B415 6 SM
PAPER FEED CLUTCH
3.3 PAPER FEED CLUTCH
[D]
[B]
[A]
B415R504.WMF
[C]

2. Remove the spring.
3. Remove the drive gear and drive gear bracket [B] (1 E-ring, 1 spring).
4. Remove the paper feed clutch bracket [C] (2 screws).
5. Remove the paper feed clutch [D] (1 connector).
By-Pass Tray
B415
SM 7 B415
INTERCHANGE UNIT
B416
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................ 1
1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 3
2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION ...............................................................4

2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM.................................................................. 4
To the Exit Tray or Bridge Unit
(for the Upper Tray on top of the Bridge Unit, or the Finisher) ................. 4
To the 1-bin Tray ..................................................................................... 4
To the Duplex Unit ................................................................................... 4

3.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT.................................................................. 5
SM i B416
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Weight: 1.6 kg
Interchange
B416
Unit
SM 1 B416
2 3
4
1
7
6 B416V501.WMF
1. 1-bin Tray (Option)

2. Exit Sensor
3. Duplex Junction Gate
4. Duplex Unit (Option)
5. Exit Junction Gate
6. Fusing Unit (Inside the Copier)
7. Exit Roller
8. Bridge Unit
B416 2 SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
2 3
B416V503.WMF
5
4
Interchange
B416
Unit
B416V504.WMF
1. Exit Junction Gate Solenoid 4. Exit Roller

2. Exit Sensor 5. Drive Gear
3. Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid
SM 3 B416
JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
B416D504.WMF
[F] [A]
[E]
[B] [G]
B416D505.WMF
[A]
B416D506.WMF
Depending on the selected mode, the copies are directed up, left, or right by the
exit junction gate [A] and the duplex junction gate [B]. These are controlled by the
exit junction gate solenoid [C] and the duplex junction gate solenoid [D].
To the Exit Tray or Bridge Unit (for the Upper Tray on top of the Bridge
Unit, or the Finisher)
The exit junction gate solenoid stays off and the paper is directed to the copier exit
unit [E].
To the 1-bin Tray

The exit junction gate solenoid turns on and the duplex junction gate solenoid stays
off. The paper is directed to the 1-bin tray [F].
To the Duplex Unit

The exit junction gate solenoid and the duplex junction gate solenoid both turn on
and the paper is directed to the duplex unit [G].
B416 4 SM
EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

3.1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
B416R501.WMF
Interchange
B416
Unit
1. Remove the interchange unit.
2. Remove the upper cover [A] of the interchange unit.
3. Remove the exit sensor [B] (1 connector).
SM 5 B416
BRIDGE UNIT
B417
BRIDGE UNIT B417
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................ 1
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 5
2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION ...............................................................6
2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM.................................................................. 6
3.1 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT ........................................ 7
3.2 TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ....................................................... 8
3.3 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT.............................................................. 8
SM i B417
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
A6 lengthwise to A3
HLT to DLT
Non-standard sizes
Power Source: DC24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer)
Weight 3.0 kg (6.6 lbs)
Bridge Unit
B417
SM 1 B417
8 9 10 1
2
7 6 5 4
B417V500.WMF
1. Upper Exit Roller 6. 2nd Transport Roller

2. Tray Exit Sensor 7. 3rd Transport Roller
3. Junction Gate 8. Left Exit Roller
4. Cooling Fan 9. Relay Sensor
5. 1st Transport Roller 10. Paper Tray
B417 2 SM

6 5
7 4
8
B417V501.WMF
1
1. Left Guide Switch 5. Cooling Fan Motor

2. Right Guide Switch 6. Relay Sensor
3. Junction Gate Solenoid 7. Bridge Unit Drive Motor
4. Tray Exit Sensor 8. Bridge Unit Control Board
Bridge Unit
B417
SM 3 B417

Motors
M1 Cooling Fan Cools the transport unit. 5
M2 Bridge Unit Drive Drives the bridge unit. 7
Sensors
S1 Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds. 4
S2 Relay Checks for misfeeds. 6
Switches
SW2 Right Guide Detects when the right guide is opened. 2
SW3 Left Guide Detects when the left guide is opened. 1
Solenoids
Junction Gate Moves the junction gate to direct the
SOL1 paper to the upper tray (on top of the 3
bridge unit) or to the finisher.
PCBs
Bridge Unit Control Controls the bridge unit.
PCB1 8
Board
B417 4 SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT
5
4
6
1 2
B417V502.WMF
1. Left Exit Roller

2. 2nd Transport Roller
3. 1st Transport Roller
4. Upper Exit Roller
5. 3rd Transport Roller
6. Bridge Unit Drive Motor
Bridge Unit
B417
SM 5 B417
JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
2.1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
B417D104.WMF
The junction gate [B] directs any paper reaching the bridge unit to either the upper
tray (on top of the bridge unit) or to the finisher, depending on which has been
selected.
If the junction gate solenoid [A] has been activated, the junction gate [B] points
downward and directs the paper to the upper tray [D] (dotted line path in
illustration). When the solenoid is off, the junction gate points upward and the
paper is fed out to the finisher [C] by the transport and exit rollers (solid line).
B417 6 SM
BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT

NOTE: When taking apart the bridge unit, first take the unit out of the copier.
3.1 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[D]
[C]
B417R103.WMF
1. Remove the bridge unit from the copier. (See the Installation Procedure in the
base copier manual.)
2. Remove the rear cover [C] (2 screws).
3. Remove the bridge unit drive motor [D] (2 screws, 1 connector).
Bridge Unit
B417
SM 7 B417
TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
3.2 TRAY EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A] [C]
[B]
B417R104.WMF
2. Remove the rear cover (2 screws). See Bridge Unit Drive Motor Replacement.
4. Remove the exit guide [B] (2 screws).
5. Remove the tray exit sensor [C] (1 connector).
3.3 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[D]
B417R102.WMF
2. Stand the bridge unit up as shown in the illustration and remove the sensor [D].
B417 8 SM
500-SHEET FINISHER
B442
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 EXTERIOR ................................................................................................... 1
1.2 ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE / PAPER EXIT UNIT....................................... 4
1.3 ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE ....................................................................... 5
1.4 PAPER EXIT UNIT GEAR / PADDLE ROLLER SOLENOID ........................ 5
1.5 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................ 6
1.6 JOGGER TRAY UNIT .................................................................................. 6
1.7 PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER ................................................................. 7
1.8 MAIN MOTOR .............................................................................................. 7
1.9 JOGGER MOTOR ........................................................................................ 8
1.10 CONTROL BOARD .................................................................................... 8
1.11 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT................................................................................. 9
2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ...........................................................10
2.1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ....................................................... 10
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................................... 10
Mechanical component layout ............................................................... 10
Drive layout............................................................................................ 11
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ................................ 12
2.2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ..................................................... 14
2.2.1 OUTPUT TRAY MECHANISM .......................................................... 14
Stack height detection............................................................................ 14
Output tray up/down mechanism ........................................................... 15
2.2.2 PAPER FEED .................................................................................... 16
Overview................................................................................................ 16
Straight feed out mode........................................................................... 16
Shift sorting mode .................................................................................. 17
Stapling mode........................................................................................ 19
2.2.3 JAM CONDITIONS ............................................................................ 20
2.2.4 ERROR DETECTION ........................................................................ 20
3 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION............................................21
3.1 SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................................... 21
SM i B442
EXTERIOR

1.1 EXTERIOR
NOTE: This manual uses several symbols. The meanings for these symbols are
as follows:
: See or refer to : screw : connector : clip
Front cover
[A]: : Front cover (1)
500-Sheet
Finisher
B442
[A]
B442R101.WMF
Rear cover
[A]: Rear cover (1)
[A]
B442R102.WMF
SM 1 B442
EXTERIOR
Top cover
[A]: Top cover (2 links)
[A]
Front lower guide

B442R105.WMF
[A]
B442R116.WMF
[B]
B442R104.WMF
[A]: Output tray (2)

[B]: Front lower guide (2)
NOTE: 1) When re-attaching the lower guide, be sure that it is not in contact with
the exit lower guide and that the exit lower guide moves smoothly.
2) Make sure that the blue and black cables are in the correct position, as
engraved on the inside of the front lower guide.
B442 2 SM
EXTERIOR
Right cover
[A]: Grounding plate (1)
[B]: Right cover (2)
[B]
[A] B442R103.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
B442
SM 3 B442
ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE / PAPER EXIT UNIT
1.2 ENTRANCE UPPER GUIDE / PAPER EXIT UNIT
[H]
[A]
[G]
[F]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C] B442R106.WMF
• Front, rear, and top covers and front lower guide ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Entrance upper guide (2, 1)
[B]: Paddle gear spring
[C]: Paddle gear (1)
[D]: Paddle gear holder
[E]: Bushing (1)
[F]: Paper exit unit holder (1)
[G]: Rear paper exit unit holder (1)
[H]: Exit unit
[a]
NOTE: Keep the paper exit unit stays in
the upper position. Rotate the
paddle roller into the position
shown in the illustration [a]. Then,
insert the paddle gear, making
sure that the pawl on the gear’s [b]
outer frame is resting on the clutch
link [b].
B442R107.WMF
B442 4 SM
ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE
1.3 ENTRANCE LOWER GUIDE
• Entrance upper guide ( 1.2 Entrance [D]

upper guide / Exit unit)
• Exit unit ( 1.2 Entrance upper guide /
Exit unit)
[A]
[A]: Release tension bracket (1)
[B]: Reverse roller gear bracket (2)
[C]: Timing belt
[D]: Entrance lower guide
NOTE: When re-assembling the tension [B]
bracket, rotate the main motor [C]
counter clockwise to tighten the
timing belt. B442R108.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
B442
1.4 PAPER EXIT UNIT GEAR / PADDLE ROLLER
SOLENOID
• Front cover ( 1.1 Exterior)

[A]: Gear bracket (3)
[B]: Paper exit unit gear [C]
[C]: Paddle roller solenoid (1)
[B]
B442R109.WMF [A]
SM 5 B442
STAPLER UNIT
1.5 STAPLER UNIT

• Rear cover ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]: Stapler unit bracket (2, 1)
[B]: Stapler unit (3)
[A]
[B]
B442R115.WMF
1.6 JOGGER TRAY UNIT

• Entrance upper guide and paper exit unit
( 1.2 Entrance upper guide / paper exit [B]
unit)
• Entrance lower guide ( 1.2 Entrance
lower guide)
• Paper exit unit gear and Paddle roller
solenoid ( 1.4 Paper exit unit gear /
Paddle roller solenoid)
• Stapler unit ( 1.5 Stapler unit)
[A]: Jogger tray unit holders (2) [A]
[B]: Jogger tray unit (1, 3)
NOTE: Be sure to connect the black cable
to the paper exit sensor and the
blue one to the jogger home B442R110.WMF
position sensor.
B442 6 SM
PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER
1.7 PAPER EXIT SENSOR FEELER

• Jogger tray unit ( 1.6 Jogger tray unit)
• Jogger motor ( 1.9 Jogger motor)
[A]: Paper exit sensor feeler
[A]
B442R121.WMF
1.8 MAIN MOTOR

• Right cover ( 1.1 Exterior)
[A]
[A]: Release tension bracket (1)
500-Sheet
Finisher
[B]: Main motor (2, 1)
B442
[B] B442R113.WMF
SM 7 B442
JOGGER MOTOR
1.9 JOGGER MOTOR
• Front lower guide ( 1.1 Exterior)

[A]: Jogger motor (2, 3)
[A]
B442R114.WMF
1.10 CONTROL BOARD
• Front lower guide ( 1.1 Exterior)

[A]: Control board (1, 12)
B442R112.WMF
[A]
B442 8 SM
OUTPUT TRAY UNIT
1.11 OUTPUT TRAY UNIT

[D]
[A]
[E]
[B] [C]
B442R117.WMF B442R118.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
[G]
B442
[F]
B442R119.WMF
[A]: Output tray cover (2)

[B]: Tray holder (1)
[C]: Links
[D]: Connector cover
[E]: Output tray motor link unit (1)
[F]: Rear cover (1)
[G]: Output tray motor (1)
NOTE: When re-attaching the motor link

unit, the arrows on each of the
gears need to face each other as
shown in the illustration.
B442R120.WMF
SM 9 B442
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
2.1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
Mechanical component layout
9 8
10 7
6
1
5
B442D101.WMF
2
3 4
1. Output tray 6. Lower entrance guide

2. Stack height detection lever 7. Upper entrance guide
3. Paper exit roller 8. Paper exit unit
4. Jogger tray 9. Paddle roller
5. Reverse roller 10. Lower exit guide
B442 10 SM
Drive layout
500-Sheet
Finisher
B442
4 1
B442D103.WMF
5 6
1. Main motor 5. Output tray link gears

2. Exit roller timing belt 6. Paper exit unit drive gear
3. Main motor timing belt 7. Reverse roller
4. Output tray motor 8. Paper exit roller
SM 11 B442
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
1
2
18
3
17
4
16
5
15
14
13 6
12 7
B442D102.WMF
11
10 9 8
See the next page for the component description table.
B442 12 SM
Symbols Name Function Index No.

Motors
M1 Main Drives all the rollers 6
M2 Jogger Drives the jogger fence 9
M3 Output Tray Drives the tray up and down 12
M4 Stapler Drives the stapler 16
Sensors
S1 Entrance Detects paper at the entrance 3
S2 Exit Detects paper at the exit 15
S3 Stack height Detects the top of the paper stack 13
S4 Lever Detects the position of stack height lever 14
Jogger home Detects the position of the jogger fence
S5 2
position
S6 Top cover Detects if the top cover is open 1
Tray upper limit Detects when the tray is lifted to the upper
S7 11
limit
Stack near-limit Detects when the tray is at its lowest limit
S8 10
(almost full)
500-Sheet
Finisher
B442
Solenoids
SOL1 Exit unit gear Moves the paper exit unit up and down 7
SOL2 Paddle roller Switches paddle roller rotation on and off. 5
Stack height Moves the stack height lever into contact
SOL3 8
lever with the top of the stack.
PCBs
PCB1 Main control Controls all finisher functions 4
Switches
SW1 Paper exit unit Switches DC for the stapler unit on and off. 18
SW2 Staple unit cover Cuts DC when staple unit cover is open.
17
SM 13 B442
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
2.2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.2.1 OUTPUT TRAY MECHANISM
Stack height detection
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
B442D104.WMF
Stack height detection lever [A]: Driven by stack height lever solenoid [B].
Two sensors detect the height of the stack in the output tray: the stack height [C]
and lever [D] sensors.
Stack height
Lever sensor Status
sensor
The stack height is below the target. The output tray is
Off Off
lifted to the target position.
Off On Target position
The stack height is more the target. The output tray is
On On
lowered to the target position.
On Off The stack height detection lever is at home position.
Off: Actuator not in sensor
At the start of a print job, the solenoid turns off. The stack height detection lever
comes down, to detect the current stack level.
When a sheet of paper is being fed out, the solenoid turns on and the lever goes
back up to home position (inside the unit).
After paper has been fed out, the solenoid turns on again, and the lever detects the
level of the stack.
B442 14 SM
Output tray up/down mechanism
[D] [E]
[B]
500-Sheet
Finisher
B442
[A]
[C] B442D105.WMF
Overview
The output tray motor [A] lifts/lowers the tray if the stack height is not at the target
position.
Gears [B] and [C] keep the angle of the tray constant at any tray position.
Output Tray Downward Movement

The top of the paper stack is checked after every page (or set of pages) has been
fed out. If the top of the stack is higher than the target level, the output tray motor
moves the tray down.
When the stack near-limit sensor [D] detects the actuator on gear [C], a stack near-
limit signal is transferred to the main frame. The tray cannot move any lower. The
next time the top of the stack height is above the target level, printing stops.
Output Tray Upward Movement

If paper is removed from the stack, the top of the stack will be lower than the target
level, and the output tray motor moves the tray up.
When the tray upper limit sensor [E] detects the actuator on gear [B], the tray
cannot be moved up any more, so the motor stops.
SM 15 B442
2.2.2 PAPER FEED

Overview
The following paper feed out modes can be selected at the printer driver.
Mode Description
Straight feed out mode Paper is fed directly to the output tray without shifting or stapling.
Shift sorting mode Alternate sets are shifted before being fed to the output tray.
Stapling mode All sets are shifted and stapled, then fed to the output tray.
Straight feed out mode
Before the job, the exit unit [A] is up, and the exit unit gear solenoid [B] is on,
pulling lever [C] away from the exit unit gear [D].
At the start of the job, the stack height detection lever detects the top of the stack.
[A]
[F]
[J]
[E]
[H] [I]
[G]
[D]
[B]
[C] [G]
[C]
B442D109.WMF
B442D106.WMF
The tray moves up or down if the top of the stack is not at the correct level.
When the paper exit sensor in the main frame turns on, the finisher main motor
starts. It drives the exit unit gear [D] through idle gear [E]. The gear pulls paper exit
unit [A] down, using the paper exit link [F]. The link also moves the paper exit roller
[H] up through the exit roller drive gear [G].
When the motor starts, the solenoid switches off and a spring pushes lever [C] into
contact with the exit unit gear [D].
When a part of the exit unit gear without threads [I] faces the idle gear, the gear
stops turning (see the left-hand diagram). The lever [C] catches a peg on the exit
unit gear, to make sure that it stops at the correct position. The paper exit rollers
[H] now contact each other and the main motor feeds out the paper.
When the last page has been fed out, the solenoid turns on to pull the lever away
from the gear. The gear starts turning, to lift the exit unit to the standby position.
When the other part of the exit unit gear without threads [J] faces the idle gear, the
exit unit gear stops. Then, the main motor stops and the solenoid turns off.
B442 16 SM
Shift sorting mode

[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
B442D111.WMF
500-Sheet
Finisher
B442
[E] [F]
B442D113.WMF
At the start of the job, and for odd numbered sets of copies, the mechanism is the
same as the straight feed out mode. However, even numbered sets are fed back to
the jogger tray, which shifts the sets to one side before feeding them out.
This section describes what happens for even-numbered sets (sets 2, 4, 6 etc) of
the job.
A short time after the entrance sensor [A] detects the first page of the set, the
paper exit unit solenoid turns on to restart the rotation of the paper exit unit gear,
raising the paper exit unit to the standby position. It stays there until after the last
page of the set.
The paper cannot feed out, so it drops into the jogger tray [B]. The paddle roller
solenoid [C] turns on and the paddle roller [D] feeds the paper to the reverse roller
[E]. The reverse roller feeds the paper to the end fence [F] of the jogger tray.
SM 17 B442
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B442D107.WMF
After the paper reaches the end fence [A], the jogger fence [B] shifts the paper
across. The jogger motor [C] drives the jogger fence. The home position sensor [D]
detects when the jogger fence has returned to home position.
When the next set begins, the paper exit unit moves down, and the machine
operates the same way as straight feed out mode. At this time, the entire set in the
jogger tray is fed out at the same time as the first page of the next set. However,
the set coming from the jogger tray has been shifted to one side.
If the last set is an even-numbered set, the paper exit unit must be pulled down to
feed the final set out of the jogger tray. Then the exit unit moves back up to the
standby position.
The capacity of the jogger tray is 30 sheets. If the set contains more than 30 sheets,
the machine feeds out the first 30 from the jogger tray, then continues with the rest
of the set, using the jogger tray.
B442 18 SM
Stapling mode
[B]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[C]
B442D112.WMF
[B]
500-Sheet
Finisher
B442D114.WMF
B442
[A]
[G]
B442D106.WMF
The stapler is attached to the jogger tray, so all sets go to the jogger tray.
After all pages of a set have entered the jogger tray and been shifted across, the
paper exit link [A] pulls the paper exit unit [B] down until knob [C] on the exit unit
pushes the link lever [D] for the exit unit switch [E]. This turns on the exit unit switch.
When this switch is on, dc is supplied to the stapler unit [F] and the main motor is
turned off.
The exit unit switch is activated when the exit unit is pulled part-way down. After
stapling the set of prints, the paper exit unit is pulled down again until the unit
comes in contact with the paper exit roller [G], and the stapled set is fed out.
SM 19 B442
2.2.3 JAM CONDITIONS

Sensors Conditions
Remaining paper detection Entrance Either the entrance or exit sensor detects
Exit paper just after the unit is initialized.
Non-feed at the entrance The entrance sensor is not activated within a
Entrance certain period after the paper exit sensor
detects paper.
Jamming at the entrance The entrance sensor is not de-activated after
Entrance paper is fed 1.3 times the length of the
paper.
Non-feed inside the unit The exit sensor is not activated within a
(Straight feed out mode only) Exit certain period after the entrance sensor
detects paper.
Jamming at the exit The exit sensor is not de-activated after
Exit
paper is fed for a certain period.
Jogger tray The exit sensor is de-activated during paper
Exit
shifting or stapling.
2.2.4 ERROR DETECTION

Conditions
Jogger motor error Jogger home position sensor does not shut off after jogger
motor starts.
Jogger motor home position Jogger home position sensor does not turn on after paper
detection error shifting.
Stapler error Stapler home position sensor (inside stapler unit) does not
turn on after stapling.
Output tray upper limit error Tray upper limit sensor is activated.
Output tray motor error The output tray is away from the target position for more
than 10 seconds.
Stack height detection error The stack height detection lever does not return to its home
position before going to detect the stack height.
NOTE: The above errors are indicated as “Finisher jam” at the first occurrence.
If the same error happens again in the next job, “finisher error” is indicated.
B442 20 SM
SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: A3, B4, A4, B5 sideways (Metric)
DLT, LG, LT (Inch)
Paper Weight 52 ~ 128 g/m2, 14 ~ 34 lb.
Staple Capacity: 20 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG : 80 g/m2, 20 lb)
30 sheets (A4, B5 sideways, LT : 80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Stack Capacity (Maximum): 500 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
250 sheets (A3, B4, DLT and LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Stapling Positions: 1
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (3,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source: 24 V DC, 5 V DC (from the copier/printer)
500-Sheet
Finisher
Weight: 8.3 kg (18.4 lbs.)
B442
SM 21 B442
INTERNAL SHIFT SORT TRAY
B459
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................ 1
1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................................... 2
2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ............................................3

2.1 BASIC OPERATION..................................................................................... 3
2.2 PRIMARY MECHANISMS ............................................................................ 4
2.2.1 TRAY SHIFT........................................................................................ 4
2.2.2 HALF TURN DETECTION................................................................... 5

3.1 TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT .................................................................. 6
3.1.1 TRAY COVER REMOVAL................................................................... 6
3.1.2 TRAY COVER ATTACHMENT ............................................................ 6
3.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT .................... 7
3.2.1 REPLACING THE TRAY MOTOR ....................................................... 7
3.2.2 REPLACING THE HALF TURN SENSOR:.......................................... 7
SM i B459
SPECIFICATIONS
1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: Standard Size:
A5 lengthwise to A3
Non-standard Size:
Paper Width: 90 ~ 297 mm
Paper Length: 148 ~ 432 mm
Paper Weight: 60 ~ 105 g/m², 16 ~ 28 lbs.
Tray Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lbs.): B4 or larger
250 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lbs.): A4 or smaller
Power Source: 5 VDC, 24 VDC (from the copier)
Weight: 1.1 kg
Internal Shift
Sort Tray
B459
SM 1 B459
COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT

3 2
1
4
B459D101.WMF
1
5
4
B459D102.WMF
1. Half Turn Sensor

2. Tray Cover
3. Slip Disc
4. Tray Motor
5. Driver PCB
B459 2 SM
BASIC OPERATION

2.1 BASIC OPERATION
[A]
B459D500.WMF
The shift tray allows copies to be sorted into separate piles on one tray.
From the left-right movement of the tray cover [A], the piles of copies are offset into
two positions, slightly overlapping one another.
Internal Shift
Sort Tray
B459
SM 3 B459
PRIMARY MECHANISMS
2.2 PRIMARY MECHANISMS

2.2.1 TRAY SHIFT
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B459D103.WMF
As stated above, the shift tray cover [A] moves from left to right to create two
possible positions for the copies to stack up. This motion is driven by the tray motor
[B], which connects to the slip disc [C] via a small shaft. The shaft is connected at
the rotational center of the disc. However, there is an off-centered white square
attached to the top surface of the disc. When the tray cover is attached to the unit,
this square fits into a groove [D] (approximately equal to its width) that runs
lengthwise along the underside of the tray
When the motor is running, the disc rotation causes the off-centered white square
to change position. Since the square only has freedom of movement along the
groove [D], the only net motion of the tray is from left to right.
B459 4 SM
PRIMARY MECHANISMS
2.2.2 HALF TURN DETECTION
[C]
[A]
[B]
B459D103.WMF
Half turn detection is performed through a combination of two components: the slip
disc [A] and half turn sensor [C].
The slip disc has a rim extending below the top surface. However, the rim only
extends 180° around the disc. The half turn sensor is below the edge of the disc,
opposite the tray motor. The sensor is positioned so that the rim of the disc passes
between the LED and photo diode when the disc turns.
While the motor [B] is rotating the disc and moving the tray cover, the disc rim is
not between the diode and LED. After the disc has turned its maximum 180°, the
rim passes between these two parts and blocks the signal to the LED, stopping the
motor. The tray stays in place until the motor is activated again to move the tray
across to receive another copy of the original.
Internal Shift
Sort Tray
B459
SM 5 B459
TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT

3.1 TRAY COVER REPLACEMENT
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
B459R101.WMF
3.1.1 TRAY COVER REMOVAL
1. Remove the tray cover [A] by pressing on the two pawls [B] on the left side of
the cover.
3.1.2 TRAY COVER ATTACHMENT

NOTE: The right side of the tray cover should be attached first.
1. Fit the pawls [C] (just below the cover fin) around the thin bar [D] on the shift
tray.
2. Align the square [E] so that it fits into the groove in the underside of the tray
cover and does not interfere with the attachment of the cover.
3. Complete the attachment by inserting the left side pawls [B] into place.
B459 6 SM
TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT
3.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR

REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
B459R102.WMF
3.2.1 REPLACING THE TRAY MOTOR
1. Remove the slip disc [A].

2. Remove the tray motor [B] from the motor holder (1 connector).
3.2.2 REPLACING THE HALF TURN SENSOR:
1. Remove the half turn sensor [C] (1 connector).

Internal Shift
Sort Tray
B459
SM 7 B459
FAX OPTION TYPE 3030
B766


details
 Screw
 Connector
 E-ring
 Clip ring
 Clamp
Sideways, LEF
Lengthwise, SEF
(Long Edge Feed)
(Short Edge Feed)

WARNING
DEATH.
CAUTION
Important
IMPORTANT
machine.
WARNING
1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
3. Never touch telephone wires that are not insulated or terminals unless
the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when you install or modify telephone lines.
5. Do not use a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical
storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
6. Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
CAUTION
1. Switch off the main switch and disconnect the power cord before you
install the fax unit.
2. The fax unit has a lithium battery. An explosion can occur if a battery of
this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an
equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Note to users in Australia: Unit shall be connected to Telecommunication

Network through a line cord which meets the requirements of ACA Technical
Standard TS008.
B766
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 FAX UNIT B766............................................................................................ 1
1.2 OPTIONAL 32 MB MEMORY ....................................................................... 4
1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT B768......................................................................... 5

2.1 FCU .............................................................................................................. 9
3. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................10
3.1 ERROR CODES......................................................................................... 10
3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................... 22
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................... 25
IP-Fax Transmission .............................................................................. 25
IP-Fax Reception ................................................................................... 28
4. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................30
4.1 SERVICE TABLES ..................................................................................... 30
4.2 BIT SWITCHES .......................................................................................... 38
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 38
4.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES.............................................................................. 48
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 54
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES........................................................ 59
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................. 67
4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES............................................................................ 73
4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES ............................................................... 79
4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES........................................................... 79
4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES ........................................................................... 79
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 85
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ......................................... 94
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ....................................................... 94
4.4.2 PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 95
Fax Parameters ..................................................................................... 95
E-mail Parameters ................................................................................. 98
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................. 100
5. DETAILS.......................................................................................109
5.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................. 109
5.2 BOARDS .................................................................................................. 110
5.2.1 FCU ................................................................................................. 110
FACE3 (Fax Application Control Engine)............................................. 110
Modem (FAME) ................................................................................... 110
DRAM .................................................................................................. 110
SM i B766
Memory Back-up.................................................................................. 110
5.2.2 MBU................................................................................................. 111
ROM .................................................................................................... 111
SRAM .................................................................................................. 111
Memory Back-up.................................................................................. 111
Switches .............................................................................................. 111
5.2.3 SG3 BOARD.................................................................................... 112
NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)................................. 112
FROM .................................................................................................. 112
SDRAM................................................................................................ 112
AFE (Analog Front End)....................................................................... 112
CODEC (COder-DECoder) .................................................................. 112
REG ..................................................................................................... 112
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH ................................................................................. 113
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION ............................................................................. 113
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission.................. 114
Immediate Transmission...................................................................... 114
JBIG Transmission............................................................................... 114
Adjustments ......................................................................................... 114
5.3.2 RECEPTION.................................................................................... 115
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ...................................................... 116
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT................................................................................... 116
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER .................................................................... 117
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ............................................. 118
Mail Transmission ................................................................................ 118
Mail Reception ..................................................................................... 120
Handling Mail Reception Errors ........................................................... 122
Secure Internet Reception ................................................................... 122
Transfer Request: Request By Mail ..................................................... 123
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode) ............................................................ 124
Subject and Level of Importance ......................................................... 124
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type .................................. 124
Subjects Displayed on the PC ............................................................. 124
E-mail Messages ................................................................................. 125
Message Disposition Notification (MDN).............................................. 125
Handling Reports ................................................................................. 126
5.5 IP-FAX ...................................................................................................... 127
6. SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................128
6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................. 128
6.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS ........................................ 129
6.3 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................... 130
6.4 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 131
6.5 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION .................................................................. 132
B766 ii SM
FAX UNIT B766
1. INSTALLATION
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
1.1 FAX UNIT B766
[C]
[B] [A]
[D]
[E]
B766I101.WMF
B766I102A.WMF
CAUTION
Do the following before you install this option:
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is a printer option in the
machine.
2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.
1. Remove the application cover [A] of the controller ( x 1)

2. Remove the cover plate [B] ( x 2).
3. On the MBU [C], set the jumper [D] from OFF to ON.
4. Push down the MBU. Make sure that it is installed correctly
Important: SC819 occurs if the MBU is loose.
NOTE: If installing the optional G3 Interface Unit (B768), it should be installed
at this point. See 1.3 G3 Interface Unit B768.
5. Insert the fax unit [E] into the slot and attach it ( x 3).
SM 1 B766
FAX UNIT B766
6. If there is no HDD installed in the

mainframe, insert the SD [A] that has the
address book into Slot 2 of the controller
board.
7. Attach the application cover [B] ( x 1).
[A]
[B]
8. Attach the FCC decal [C] to the application B766I105.WMF
cover as shown, if you do this procedure on

the NA model. Go to the next step if you do
not have the NA model.
9. Attach the serial number label [D] to the
application cover as shown.
[D]
[C]
10. Replace the blank keytops with the new B766I104.WMF
keytops { Copy SW, | Facsimile SW,

} On Hook Dial on the operation panel. {
|
}
B766I900.WMF
B766 2 SM
FAX UNIT B766
Fax Option
Type 3030
11. Attach the G3 decal [A] as shown.
B766
[A]
B766I903.WMF
12. If the ADF has been installed, install

the stamp cartridge [B] in the ADF as
shown.
13. Connect the telephone line to the
“LINE” jack at the left of the machine.
14. Connect the machine’s power cord.
Then turn on the main power switch.
NOTE: The machine must be connected
to a correctly grounded socket outlet.
[B]
B766I902.WMF
Important
• After you turn the machine on, if you see a message that tells you the SRAM
has been formatted due to a problem with SRAM, turn the machine off and
on again to clear the message.
15. Be sure to set the clock (date and time) with the User Tools.
16. Go into service mode and program the serial number into the fax unit with
SP3102. You can find the serial number on the serial number label (attached to
the machine in Step 9).
SM 3 B766
OPTIONAL 32 MB MEMORY
1.2 OPTIONAL 32 MB MEMORY
[B]
[A]
B766I151A.WMF
1. Remove the FCU [A] from the machine. ( 1.1)

2. Attach the DIMM [B] to the FCU board as shown.
B766 4 SM
G3 INTERFACE UNIT B768
Fax Option
Type 3030
1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT B768
B766
You can install one of these units (single-port option) or two of them (dual-port
option).
CAUTION
Do the following before you install this option:
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is a printer option in the
machine.
2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network.
[B]
[A]
[C] [D] B766I915.WMF
[F]
[E]
B766I914.WMF
1. Connect the ribbon cable [A], blue side up, to the CCU DRV board [B].
2. Attach the CCU DRV board to the back of the G3 unit ( x 4).
3. Connect the ribbon cable to the FCU [C], blue side up.
4. Attach the film plate [D] to keep the ribbon cable in the correct position.
5. Remove the connector cover [E] and disconnect the cable. Then remove the
rear cover [F] of the copier ( x 4)
SM 5 B766
6. Remove the application cover [A] of the

controller ( x 1)
7. Remove the cover plate [B] ( x 2). [A]
[B]
B766I101.WMF
8. Remove the left scanner cover [C]

( x 1) and the cover below the
scanner [D] ( x 2).
[C]
[D]
B766I103.WMF
Do the procedures below for either the

single-port or dual-port unit.
Single Port
1. Attach the G3 Unit [A] to the back of [A]
the mainframe ( x 3).
2. Connect the harness [B], red stripe up,
to the CCU I/F board ( x 1)
NOTE: Attach the end of the
harnesses without the clamp to the
CCU I/F, red stripe to left.
3. Fasten the ground wire [C] ( x 2).
4. Attach the plate [D] ( x 2).
[D]
[C] [B]
B766I916.WMF
Single Port
B766 6 SM
Fax Option
Type 3030
Dual Port
B766
You need two G3 Interface Units to create the Dual G3 port.
Do the following if you install the second port for an installation where the single
port is already installed:
1. Remove the G3 board [A] ( x 2,
 x 1) from a G3 interface unit.
2. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 2) and the
harness [C].
[B]
[C]
[A] B766I917.WMF
3. Install the G3 board [D] (removed in step

1) in the upper slot of the other G3
interface unit. You will install this unit in
the machine.
4. Remove the bracket [E] ( x 2). Then
install the harness [F] (removed in step 2).
[E]
5. Install the bracket [E] ( x 2).
[F]
B766I918.WMF
[D]
6. Attach the G3 Unit [G] to the back of

[G]
the mainframe ( x 3).
5. Connect the harness [H] to the CCU
I/F board ( x 1)
NOTE: Attach the end of the
harnesses without the clamp to the
CCU I/F.
6. Fasten the ground wire [I] ( x 2).
7. Attach the plate [J] ( x 2).
[J]
[I] [H]
B766I919.WMF
Dual Port
SM 7 B766
FCU Unit (Single or Dual Port) [A] [D]

1. Attach the harness clamp [A] to the
notch.
2. Remove the FCU unit [B] ( x 2) if it
[C]
has been installed.
3. Check the jumper [C]. Make sure that
it is set to ON.
4. Insert the FCU Unit [B] about half way
into the slot.
NOTE: Slide the ferrite core up slightly
at [D] to allow insertion of the FCU unit.
5. Connect the FCU harness [D] to the
CCU DRV board.
[B]
6. Run the harness through the clamp. B766I920.WMF
Then clamp the harness ( x 1).

7. Insert the FCU unit fully into the
controller slot. Then attach it ( x 2).
8. On the rear cover, use a cutter or pair
of wire cutters to remove the knockout
[F]
for Line 2 [E].
-or-
Remove the knockout for Line 2 and
Line 3 [F] if you install the dual ports.
9. Reattach the rear cover [G] ( x 4)
and connector cover [H].
[E]
10. Reassemble the machine.
[G]
11. Connect the telephone lines to the [H]
back of the machine at LINE 2 (single B766I921.WMF
port) or LINE 2 and LINE 3 (dual port).

12. Connect the machine’s power cord. Then turn the main switch on.
13. Go into the Fax SP mode and set Bit 1 of Communication Switch 16 to "1" if
you install the single port.
-or-
Go into the Fax SP mode and set Bit 3 of Communication Switch 16 to "1" if
you install the dual ports.
14. Print the system parameter list. Make sure that “G3-2“ (single port) or
“G3-3“ (dual port) is listed as an option.
15. Set up the items required for PSTN-2 communication.
B766 8 SM
FCU
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
2.1 FCU
1. When you replace the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU
board and install it on the new FCU board.
2. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools:
User Tools> System Settings> Timer Setting> Set Date/Time
NOTE:
• Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1).
• Do SP6101 to print the system parameters, and check the settings.
SM 9 B766
ERROR CODES
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the
error code display and on the service report.
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

0-00 DIS/NSF not detected within • Check the line connection.
40 s of Start being pressed • Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
• The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
• Replace the NCU or FCU.
• Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
• If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
0-01 DCN received unexpectedly • The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
• The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
0-03 Incompatible modem at the • The other terminal is incompatible.
other end
0-04 CFR or FTT not received • Check the line connection.
after modem training • Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
• Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• Replace the FCU or NCU.
• The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
• If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be
a bad line.
Cross reference
• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
0-05 Unsuccessful after modem • Check the line connection.
training at 2400 bps • Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
• Check for line problems.
Cross reference
• See error code 0-04.
B766 10 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3030
0-06 The other terminal did not • Check the line connection.
B766
reply to DCS • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• The other end may be defective or incompatible;
try sending to another machine.
Cross reference
0-07 No post-message response • Check the line connection.
from the other end after a • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
page was sent • Replace the NCU or FCU.
• The other end may have jammed or run out of
paper.
• The other end user may have disconnected the
call.
• Check for a bad line.
• The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
0-08 The other end sent RTN or • Check the line connection.
PIN after receiving a page, • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
because there were too • Replace the NCU or FCU.
many errors
• The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
settings.
• The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
• Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
0-14 Non-standard post message • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
response code received • Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
sending to another machine.
• Noisy line: resend.
settings.
Cross reference
SM 11 B766
ERROR CODES

0-15 The other terminal is not The other terminal is not capable of accepting the
capable of specific following functions, or the other terminal’s memory
functions. is full.
• Confidential rx
• Transfer function
• SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
0-16 CFR or FTT not detected • Check the line connection.
after modem training in • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
confidential or transfer mode • Replace the NCU or FCU.
settings.
• The other end may have disconnected, or it may
be defective; try calling another machine.
• If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line
problem.
Cross reference
0-20 Facsimile data not received • Check the line connection.
within 6 s of retraining • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Try calling another fax machine.
• Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first
line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
• Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line) • Check the connections between the FCU, NCU, &
from the other end not line.
received within 5 s of the • Check for line noise or other line problems.
previous EOL signal • Replace the NCU or FCU.
• The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
• Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
0-22 The signal from the other • Check the line connection.
end was interrupted for • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
more than the acceptable • Replace the NCU or FCU.
modem carrier drop time
• Defective remote terminal.
(default: 200 ms)
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
• Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1
B766 12 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3030
0-23 Too many errors during • Check the line connection.
B766
reception • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or
rx error criteria.
Cross reference
• Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0
and 1
0-30 The other terminal did not • Check the line connection.
reply to NSS(A) in AI short • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
protocol mode • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
• Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
0-32 The other terminal sent a • Check the protocol dump list.
DCS, which contained • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
functions that the receiving
machine cannot handle.
0-52 Polarity changed during • Check the line connection.
communication Retry communication.
0-55 FCE does not detect the • FCU firmware or board defective.
SG3-V34. • SG3-V34 firmware or board defective.
0-56 The stored message data • SG3-V34 firmware or board defective.
exceeds the capacity of the
mailbox in the SG3-V34.
0-70 The communication mode • The other terminal did not have a compatible
specified in CM/JM was not communication mode (e.g., the other terminal was
available a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)
(V.8 calling and called • A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal
terminal) when polling rx was initiated from the calling
terminal.
0-74 The calling terminal fell back • The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due
to T.30 mode, because it to noise, etc.
could not detect ANSam • ANSam was too short to detect.
after sending CI. • Check the line connection and condition.
• Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-75 The called terminal fell back • The terminal could not detect ANSam.
to T.30 mode, because it • Check the line connection and condition.
could not detect a CM in • Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
response to ANSam
(ANSam timeout).
SM 13 B766
ERROR CODES

0-76 The calling terminal fell back • The called terminal could not detect a CM due to
to T.30 mode, because it noise, etc.
could not detect a JM in • Check the line connection and condition.
response to a CM • Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).
0-77 The called terminal fell back • The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to
to T.30 mode, because it noise, etc.
could not detect a CJ in • A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass
response to JM JM to the other end.
(JM timeout). • Check the line connection and condition.
• Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-79 The called terminal detected Check for line noise or other line problems.
CI while waiting for a V.21 If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to
signal. T.30 mode.
0-80 The line was disconnected • The guard timer expired while starting these
due to a timeout in V.34 phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low
phase 2 – line probing. signal level can cause these errors.
0-81 The line was disconnected If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
due to a timeout in V.34 • Try making a call at a later time.
phase 3 – equalizer training. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
0-82 The line was disconnected dedicated tx parameters.
due to a timeout in the V.34 • Try increasing the tx level.
phase 4 – control channel
• Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
start-up.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
0-83 The line was disconnected
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
due to a timeout in the V.34
control channel restart • Try increasing the tx level.
sequence. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
0-84 The line was disconnected • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
V.34 phase 4 – control • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
channel start-up.
0-85 The line was disconnected • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
V.34 control channel restart. • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
0-86 The line was disconnected • The other terminal was incompatible.
because the other terminal • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
requested a data rate using
MPh that was not available
in the currently selected
symbol rate.
0-87 The control channel started • The receiving terminal restarted the control
after an unsuccessful channel because data reception in the primary
primary channel. channel was not successful.
• This does not result in an error communication.
0-88 The line was disconnected • Try using a lower data rate at the start.
because PPR was • Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
B766 14 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3030
2-11 Only one V.21 connection • Replace the FCU.
B766
flag was received
2-12 Modem clock irregularity • Replace the FCU.
2-13 Modem initialization error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
• Update the modem ROM.
• Replace the FCU.
2-23 JBIG compression or • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
reconstruction error • Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
2-24 JBIG ASIC error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
• Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
2-25 JBIG data reconstruction • JBIG data error
error (BIH error) • Check the sender’s JBIG function.
2-26 JBIG data reconstruction • Update the MBU ROM.
error (Float marker error)
2-27 JBIG data reconstruction
error (End marker error)
2-28 JBIG data reconstruction
error (Timeout)
2-29 JBIG trailing edge maker • FCU defective
error • Check the destination device.
2-50 The machine resets itself for • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
a fatal FCU system error FCU.
2-51 The machine resets itself • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
because of a fatal FCU.
communication error
2-53 Snd msg() in the manual • The user did the same operation many times, and
task is an error because the this gave too much load to the machine.
mailbox for the operation
task is full.
4-01 Line current was cut • Check the line connector.
• Check the connection between FCU and NCU.
• Replace the FCU or the NCU.
4-10 Communication failed • Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
because of an ID Code programmed correctly, then resend.
mismatch (Closed Network) • The machine at the other end may be defective.
or Tel. No./CSI mismatch
(Protection against Wrong
Connections)
5-10 DCR timer expired • Replace the FCU.
5-20 Storage impossible because • Temporary memory shortage.
of a lack of memory • Test the SAF memory.
5-21 Memory overflow • Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board
5-23 Print data error when • Test the SAF memory.
printing a substitute rx or • Ask the other end to resend the message.
confidential rx message • Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board.
5-25 SAF file access error • Replace the FCU or EXMEM board.
SM 15 B766
ERROR CODES

6-00 G3 ECM - T1 time out • Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
during reception of facsimile • Replace the FCU or NCU.
data
6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
was received
6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was
received
6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected • Check the line connection.
• Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
• Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile data • Check the line connection.
frame not received within 18 • Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
s of CFR, but there was no • Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
line fail
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding • Defective FCU.
error • The other terminal may be defective.
6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received • The other end pressed Stop during
in reply to PPS.NULL communication.
• The other terminal may be defective.
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received • Check for a noisy line.
• Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
machines.
• See code 6-05.
6-10 G3 ECM - error frames still • Check for line noise.
received at the other end • Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
after all communication dedicated tx parameter for that address).
attempts at 2400 bps • Check the line connection.
6-21 V.21 flag detected during • The other terminal may be defective or
high speed modem incompatible.
communication
6-22 The machine resets the • Check for line noise.
sequence because of an • If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
abnormal handshake in the FCU.
V.34 control channel • Defective remote terminal.
6-99 V.21 signal not stopped • Replace the FCU.
within 6 s
13-17 SIP user name registration • Double registration of the SIP user name.
error • Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP
server is not sufficient.
13-18 SIP server access error • Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.
• Defective SIP server.
B766 16 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3030
14-00 SMTP Send Error Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server.
B766
Occurs for any error other than 14-01 to 16. For
example, the mail address of the system
administrator is not registered.
14-01 SMTP Connection Failed Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout)
because the server could not be found.
• The PC is not ready to transfer files.
• SMTP server not functioning correctly.
• The DNS IP address is not registered.
• Network not operating correctly.
• Destination folder selection not correct.
14-02 No Service by SMTP SMTP server operating incorrectly, or the
Service (421) destination for direct SMTP sending is not correct.
• Contact the system administrator and check that
the SMTP server has the correct settings and
operates correctly.
• Contact the system administrator for direct SMTP
sending and check the sending destination.
14-03 Access to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because the
Denied (450) access is denied.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly. Contact the
system administrator to determine if there is a
problem with the SMTP server and to check that
the SMTP server settings are correct.
• Folder send destination is incorrect. Contact the
system administrator to determine that the SMTP
server settings and path to the server are correct.
• Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the user
name and password settings are correct.
• Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact the
system administrator to determine if there is a
problem at the destination at that the settings at
the destination are correct.
14-04 Access to SMTP Server • SMTP server operating incorrectly
Denied (550) • Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly
14-05 SMTP Server HDD Full Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD
(452) on the server is full.
• Insufficient free space on the HDD of the SMTP
server. Contact the system administrator and
check the amount of space remaining on the
SMTP server HDD.
• Insufficient free space on the HDD where the
destination folder is located. Contact the system
administrator and check the amount of space
remaining on the HDD where the target folder is
located.
• Insufficient free space on the HDD at the target
destination for SMTP direct sending. Contact the
system administrator and check the amount of
space remaining on the target HDD.
SM 17 B766
ERROR CODES

14-06 User Not Found on SMTP The designated user does not exist.
Server (551) • The designated user does not exist on the SMTP
server.
• The designated address is not for use with direct
SMTP sending.
14-07 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because the
Failed (4XX) transmission failed.
• PC not operating correctly.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly
• Destination folder setting incorrect.
• Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
14-08 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because the
Failed (5XX) transmission failed.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly
• Destination folder setting incorrect.
• Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
• Software application error.
14-09 Authorization Failed for • POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization failed.
Sending to SMTP Server • Incorrect setting for file transfer
14-10 Addresses Exceeded Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the limit
for the SMTP server.
14-11 Buffer Full The send buffer is full so the transmission could not
be completed. Buffer is full due to using Scan-to-
Email while the buffer is being used send mail at the
same time.
14-12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the detected
size of the file was too large.
14-13 Send Cancelled Processing is interrupted because the user pressed
Stop.
14-30 MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because:
• The number of files created with other
applications on the Document Server has
exceeded the limit.
• HDD is full or not operating correctly.
• Software error.
14-31 UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created:
• Not enough space in UFS area to handle both
Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.
• HDD full or not operating correctly.
• Software error.
14-32 Cancelled the Mail Due to Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled
Error Detected by NFAX due to a software error.
14-33 No Mail Address For the Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail
Machine address of the network administrator is registered.
14-34 Address designated in the Operational error in normal mail sending or direct
domain for SMTP sending SMTP sending.
does not exist • Check the address selected in the address book
for SMTP sending.
• Check the domain selection.
B766 18 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3030
14-50 Mail Job Task Error Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was
B766
cancelled:
• Address book was being edited during creation of
the notification mail.
• Software error.
14-51 UCS Destination Download Not even one return notification can be downloaded:
Error • The address book was being edited.
• The number for the specified destination does not
exist (it was deleted or edited after the job was
created).
14-60 Send Cancel Failed The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the
send operation.
14-61 Notification Mail Send Failed All addresses for return notification mail failed.
for All Destinations
15-01 POP3/IMAP4 Server Not At startup, the system detected that the IP address
Registered of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not been registered
in the machine.
15-02 POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been
Information Not Registered registered.
15-03 Mail Address Not Registered The mail address has not been registered.
15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
15-11 Connection Error The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be
found:
• The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server is
not stored in the machine.
• The DNS IP address is not registered.
15-12 Authorization Error POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:
• Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
• Access was attempted by another device, such as
the PC.
• POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
15-13 Receive Buffer Full Occurs only during manual reception. Transmission
cannot be received due to insufficient buffer space.
The buffer is being used for mail send or Scan-to-
Email.
15-14 Mail Header Format Error The mail header is not standard format. For
example, the Date line description is incorrect.
15-15 Mail Divide Error The e-mail is not in standard format. There is no
boundary between parts of the e-mail, including the
header.
15-16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because it is too large.
15-17 Receive Timeout May occur during manual receiving only because
the network is not operating correctly.
15-18 Incomplete Mail Received Only one portion of the mail was received.
15-31 Final Destination for The format of the final destination for the transfer
Transfer Request Reception request was incorrect.
Format Error
SM 19 B766
ERROR CODES

15-39 Send/Delivery Destination The transmission cannot be delivered to the final
Error destination:
• Destination file format is incorrect.
• Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.
15-41 SMTP Receive Error Reception rejected because the transaction
exceeded the limit for the “Auth. E-mail RX” setting.
15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error The delivery destination address was specified with
Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
15-43 Address Format Error Format error in the address of the Off Ramp
Gateway.
15-44 Addresses Over The number of addresses for the Off Ramp
Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
15-61 Attachment File Format The attached file is not TIFF format.
Error
15-62 TIFF File Compatibility Error Could not receive transmission due to:
Resolution error
• Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without
extended memory.
• Resolution is not supported.
• Page size error
• The page size was larger than A3.
• Compression error
• File was compressed with other than MH, MR, or
MMR.
15-63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be
received because the TIFF header is incorrect:
• The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported.
• The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
• Software error.
15-64 TIFF Decompression Error The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF
decompression error:
• The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted.
• Software error.
15-71 Not Binary Image Data The file could not be received because the
attachment was not binary image data.
15-73 MDN Status Error Could not find the Disposition line in the header of
the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the
firmware.
15-74 MSDN Message ID Error Could not find the Original Message ID line in the
header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem
with the firmware.
15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error Could not receive the transmission because the
destination buffer is full and the destination could
not be created (this error may occur when receiving
a transfer request or a request for notification of
reception).
B766 20 SM
ERROR CODES
Fax Option
Type 3030
15-81 Repeated Destination Could not repeat receive the transmission because
B766
Registration Error the destination buffer is full and the destination
could not be created (this error may occur when
receiving a transfer request or a request for
notification of reception).
15-91 Send Registration Error Could not receive the file for transfer to the final
destination:
• The format of the final destination or the transfer
destination is incorrect.
• Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.
15-92 Memory Overflow Transmission could not be received because
memory overflowed during the transaction.
15-93 Memory Access Error Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction
of SAF memory.
15-94 Incorrect ID Code The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer request, because the ID code in the
incoming e-mail did not match the ID code
registered in the machine.
15-95 Transfer Station Function The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer because the transfer function was
unavailable.
22-00 Original length exceeded the Divide the original into more than one page.
maximum scan length Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the
scan resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
22-01 Memory overflow while Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
receiving Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an another
fax machine, if the machine’s printer is busy or out
of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
22-02 Tx or rx job stalled due to The job started normally but did not finish normally;
line disconnection at the data may or may not have been received fully.
other end Restart the machine.
22-04 The machine cannot store • Update the ROM
received data in the SAF • Replace the FCU.
22-05 No G3 parameter • Defective FCU board or firmware.
confirmation answer
23-00 Data read timeout during Restart the machine.
construction Replace the FCU
25-00 The machine software • Update the ROM
resets itself after a fatal • Replace the FCU.
transmission error occurred
F0-xx V.34 modem error Replace the FCU.
F6-xx SG3-V34 modem error Update the SG3-V34 modem ROM.
Replace the SG3-V34 board.
• Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.
SM 21 B766
IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING
3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of
the network is causing the problem.
Communication
Item Action Remarks
Route
1. Connection with • Check that the LAN
the LAN cable is connected to
the machine.
• Check that the LEDs
on the hub are lit.
General LAN
2. LAN activity • Check that other
devices connected to
the LAN can
communicate through
the LAN.
1. Network settings on • Check the network • Is the IP address
the PC settings on the PC. registered in the
TCP/IP properties in
the network setup
correct? Check the IP
address with the
administrator of the
network.
2. Check that PC can • Use the “ping” • At the MS-DOS
Between IFAX connect with the command on the PC prompt, type ping then
and PC machine to contact the the IP address of the
machine. machine, then press
Enter.
3. LAN settings in the • Check the LAN • Use the “Network”
machine parameters function in the User
• Check if there is an Tools.
IP address conflict • If there is an IP
with other PCs. address conflict,
inform the
administrator.
1. LAN settings in the • Check the LAN • Use the “Network”
machine parameters function in the User
Between • Check if there is an Tools.
machine and e- IP address conflict • If there is an IP
mail server with other PCs. address conflict,
inform the
administrator.
B766 22 SM
Communication
Item Action Remarks
Fax Option
Route
Type 3030
B766
2. E-mail account on • Make sure that the • Ask the
the server machine can log into administrator to
the e-mail server. check.
• Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
Between 3. E-mail server • Make sure that the • Ask the
machine and e- client devices which administrator to
mail server have an account in check.
the server can • Send a test e-mail
send/receive e-mail. with the machine’s
own number as the
destination. The
machine receives the
returned e-mail if the
communication is
performed
successfully.
1. E-mail account on • Make sure that the • Ask the
the Server PC can log into the e- administrator to
mail server. check.
• Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
2. E-mail server • Make sure that the • Ask the
client devices which administrator to
have an account in check.
the server can • Send a test e-mail
Between e-mail
send/receive e-mail. with the machine’s
server and
internet own number as the
destination. The
machine receives the
returned e-mail if the
communication is
performed
successfully.
3. Destination e-mail Make sure that the e-
address mail address is actually
used.
Check that the e-mail
address contains no
incorrect characters
such as spaces.
SM 23 B766
Communication
Item Action Remarks
Route
4. Router settings Use the “ping” command • Ask the
to contact the router. administrator of the
Between e-mail
Check that other devices server to check.
server and
connected to the router
internet
can sent data over the
router.
1. Error message by • Check whether e- • Inform the
e-mail from the mail can be sent to administrator of the
network of the another address on LAN.
Between e-mail destination. the same network,
server and
using the application
internet e-mail software.
• Check the error e-
mail message.
B766 24 SM
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING
Fax Option
Type 3030
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING
B766
IP-Fax Transmission
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name
Check Point Action
1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.
2 Specified IP address/host name correct? Check the IP address/host name.
3 Firewall/NAT is installed? Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using
another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
4 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.
5 IP address of local machine registered? Register the IP address.
6 Remote terminal port number setting other Send by specifying the port number.
than 1720?
7 Specified port number correct? Confirm the port number of the remote fax.
8 DNS server registered when host name Contact the network administrator.
specified?
9 Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Check whether the remote fax is a T38
terminal.
10 Remote fax switched off or busy? Check that the remote fax is switched on.
11 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the network administrator to
increase the bandwidth.
Raise the delay level.
IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3
IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS
speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1.
12 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled
the transmission.
SM 25 B766
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway

Check Point Action
2 VoIP Gateway T.38 standard? Contact the network administrator.
3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
5 Is the IP address/host name of the specified Check the IP address/host name.
Gateway correct?
6 Number of the specified fax correct? Check the remote fax number.
9 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.
10 DNS registered when host name specified? Contact the network administrator.
11 Remote fax a G3 fax? Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax.
12 G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway? Check that G3 fax is connected.
13 Remote G3 fax turned on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.
14 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the network administrator to
Raise the network delay level.
IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS
speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1.
B766 26 SM
Cannot send by Alias Fax number.
Fax Option
Type 3030
Check Point Action
B766
2 Number of specified Alias fax correct? Confirm the Alias of the remote fax.
Error Code: 13-14
3 Firewall/NAT installed? Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using
5 Gatekeeper installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
6 Gatekeeper power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
7 IP address/host name of Gatekeeper correct? Check the IP address/host name.
8 DNS server registered when Gatekeeper host Contact the network administrator.
name specified?
9 Enable H.323 SW is set to on? Check the settings.
See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0
10 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address of the local fax.
11 Alias number of local fax registered? Register the Alias number of the local fax.
12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper? Contact the network administrator.
13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Check whether the remote fax is a T38
terminal.
14 Remote fax switched off or busy? Contact the network administrator.
15 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the system administrator to
Raise the delay level.
Lower the modem transmission baud rate.
IPFAX SW 05
16 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled
the transmission.
SM 27 B766
IP-Fax Reception
Cannot receive by IP Address/Host name.
Check Point Action
3 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.
4 Port number specified at remote sender Request the sender to specify the port
fax (if required)? number.
5 Specified port number correct (if required)? Request the sender to check the port number.
specified on sender side? Note: The sender machine displays this error
code if the sender fax is a Ricoh model.
7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the system administrator to increase
the bandwidth.
Lower the start modem reception baud rate on
the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
8 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled the
transmission.
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.

Check Point Action
2 Firewall/NAT is installed? Cannot breach the firewall. Request the
remote fax to send by using another method
(Fax, Internet Fax)
3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
5 IP address/host name of specified VoIP Request the remote fax to check the IP
Gateway correct on sender’s side? address/host name.
specified on sender side?
7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the network administrator to increase
the bandwidth.
8 G3 fax connected? Check that G3 fax is connected.
9 G3 fax power switched on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.
B766 28 SM
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number.
Fax Option
Type 3030
Check Point Action
B766
2 Firewall/NAT is installed? Cannot the breach firewall. Request the remote
fax to send by using another method (Fax,
Internet Fax)
3 Gatekeeper installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
Note: The sender machine displays this error
code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model.
4 Power to Gatekeeper switched on? Contact the network administrator.
5 IP address/host name of Gatekeeper Request the sender to check the IP
correct on the sender’s side? address/host name.
6 DNS server registered when Gatekeeper Contact the network administrator.
host name specified on sender’s side? Note: The sender machine displays this error
7 Enable H.323 SW is set to on? Request the sender to check the settings.
User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0
Note: Only if the remote sender fax is a Ricoh
fax.
8 Local fax IP address registered? Register the IP address.
9 Local fax Alias number registered? Register the Alias number.
10 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the system administrator to increase
the bandwidth.
Lower the start modem reception baud rate on
the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
11 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled the
transmission.
12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper? Contact the network administrator.
SM 29 B766
SERVICE TABLES
4. SERVICE TABLES
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.
4.1 SERVICE TABLES

SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) Section 4.2 Bit Switches
1 Mode No. Function
101 System Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for system settings
for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
102 Ifax Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for internet fax
settings for the fax option
103 Printer Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings
for the fax option
104 Communication Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for communication
settings for the fax option
105 G3-1 Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol
settings of the standard G3 board
106 G3-2 Switch
settings of the optional G3 board
107 G3-3 Switch
settings of the optional G3 board
108 G4 Internal Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
109 G4 Parameter Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
B766 30 SM
SERVICE TABLES
111 IP fax Switch
Fax Option
001 – 016 00 – 0F
Type 3030
Change the bit switches for optional IP fax
B766
parameters
SP2-XXX (RAM Data)

2 Mode No. Function
101 RAM Read/Write
001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly.
Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses
102 Memory Dump
001 G3-1 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board.
Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses
002 G3-2 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
board.
003 G3-3 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
board.
004 G4 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.
103 G3-1 NCU Parameters

001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard
G3 board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
SM 31 B766
SERVICE TABLES
SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings)

3 Mode No. Function
101 Service Station
001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.
002 Select Line Select the line type.
102 Serial Number
000 Enter the fax unit’s serial number.
103 PSTN-1 Port Settings
001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line.
If the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or
“PABX(FLASH)”.
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the
G3-1 line.
003 Memory Lock If the customer does not want to receive
Disabled transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, turn this SP on.
001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
“PABX(FLASH)”.
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-
2 line.

line, change this SP to on.
004 Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
Disabled send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.

001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
“PABX(FLASH)”.
002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-
3 line.
line, change this SP to on.
004 Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
Disabled send any fax messages on the G3-3 line.
106 ISDN Port Settings
001 Select Line Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
002 PSTN Access Number
003 Memory Lock
Disabled
B766 32 SM
SERVICE TABLES
3 Mode No. Function
Fax Option
Type 3030
106 004 Transmission
B766
Disabled
107 IPFAX Port Settings
001 H323 Port
002 SIP Port
003 RAS Port
004 Gatekeeper port
005 T.38 Port
006 SIP Server Port
007 IPFAX Protocol Select "H323" or "SIP".
Priority
201 FAX SW
001 – 032 00 – 1F
SP4-XXX (ROM Versions)

4 Mode No. Function
101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.
102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.
106 001 G4 ROM Version Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
107 001 Charge ROM Version Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
SM 33 B766
SERVICE TABLES
SP5-XXX (Initializing)
5 Mode No. Function
101 Initialize SRAM
000 Initializes the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in
the SAF memory, and clock.
102 Erase All Files
000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
103 Reset Bit Switches
000 Resets the bit switches and user
parameters.
104 Factory setting
000 Resets the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM and
files in the SAF memory.
105 Initialize All Bit Switches
000 Initializes all the current bit switch settings.
106 Initialize Security Bit Switches
000 Initializes only the security bit switches. If
you select automatic output/display for the
user parameter switches, the security
settings are initialized.
B766 34 SM
SERVICE TABLES
Fax Option
Type 3030
SP6-XXX (Reports)
B766
6 Mode No. Function
101 System Parameter List
000 Touch the “ON” button to print the system
parameter list.
102 Service Monitor Report
000 Touch the “ON” button to print the service
monitor report.
103 G3 Protocol Dump List
001 G3 All Prints the protocol dump list of all
Communications communications for all G3 lines.
002 G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all
Communications) communications for the G3-1 line.
103 003 G3-1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-1 line.
004 G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of all
(All Communications) communications for the G3-2 line.
005 G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
006 G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of all
(All Communications) communications for the G3-3 line.
007 G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of the last
104 G4 Protocol Dump List
001 Dch + Bch 1 Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
002 Dch
003 Bch 1 Link Layer
004 Dch Link Layer
005 Dch +Bch 2
006 Bch 2 Link Layer
105 All Files print out

000 Prints out all the user files in the SAF
memory, including confidential messages.
NOTE: Do not use this function, unless the
customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
files stored using the memory lock
feature.
106 Journal Print out
001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication
records on the report.
002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication
records after the specified date.
SM 35 B766
SERVICE TABLES
107 Log List Print out

001 All log files These log print out functions are for
002 Printer designer use only.
003 SC/TRAP Stored
004 Decompression
005 Scanner
006 JOB/SAF
007 Reconstruction
008 JBIG
009 Fax Driver
010 G3CCU
011 Fax Job
012 CCU
013 Scanner Condition
108 IP Protocol Dump List
001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for the IP fax line.
002 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the IP fax line.
B766 36 SM
SERVICE TABLES
SP7-XXX (Test Modes)
Fax Option
Type 3030
These are the test modes for PTT approval.
B766
7 Function
101 G3-1 Modem Tests
102 G3-1 DTMF Tests
103 Ringer Test
104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
109 Recorded Message Test
111 G3-2 DTMF Tests
112 G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)
113 G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)
114 G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)
115 G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
116 G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)
118 G3-3 DTMF Tests
119 G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)
120 G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)
121 G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)
122 G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)
123 G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)
124 IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used
125 IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used
126 IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used
131 IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used
132 IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used
SP9-XXX (Design Switch Mode)

9 Mode No. Function
702 Design Switch DFU
SM 37 B766
BIT SWITCHES
4.2 BIT SWITCHES
WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”,
as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner
that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other
areas, such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List printed by the machine.
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0 Dedicated transmission Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated
parameter programming transmission parameters.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated
transmission parameters.
1 Not used Do not change
2 Technical data printout on the 1: Instead of the personal name, the following data
Journal are listed on the Journal for each G3
0: Disabled communication.
1: Enabled
e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04
(1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
Note:
EQM and rx level are fixed at “FFFF” in tx mode.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at “00” for transmission records and
ECM reception records.
2 Rx level calculation
Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -
16 to get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.

So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
B766 38 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
3 Not used Do not change this setting.
4 Line error mark print When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed on
0: OFF, 1: ON (print) the printout if a line error occurs during reception.
5 G3/G4 communication This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameter display parameters (see below). This is normally disabled
0: Disabled because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
1: Enabled Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
6 Protocol dump list output after This is only used for communication
each communication troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
0: Off transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always reset
1: On this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at “1”, the list is only
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps
312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps
Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
Compression mode MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
Communication ECM: With ECM
mode NML: With no ECM
Width and A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction
reduction B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/line
Note:
“40” is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short
protocol.
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
SM 39 B766
BIT SWITCHES

0 Not used Do not change these settings.
2 Force after transmission stall With this setting on, the machine resets itself
0: Off automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to
1: On complete the job.
4 File retention time 1: A file that had a communication error will not be
0: Depends on User Parameter erased unless the communication is successful.
24 [18(H)]
1: No limit
6-7 Memory read/write by RDS (0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
Bit 7 6 Setting (0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,
0 0 Always disabled but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow
0 1 User selectable RDS operations to take place. RDS will
1 0 User selectable automatically be locked out again after a certain
1 1 Always enabled time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that
if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch
off until this time limit has expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.

0 Length of time that RDS is 00 - 99 hours (BCD).
to temporarily switched on when
7 bits 6 and 7 of System Switch This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
02 are set to “User selectable” Switch 02 are set to “User selectable”.
The default setting is 24 hours.

0-2 Not used Do not change these settings.
3 Printing dedicated tx 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
parameters on Quick/Speed printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes
Dial Lists each).
0: Disabled The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
1: Enabled dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are
printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service
technicians).
B766 40 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
0 Margin setting for Create 71 to 99 (BCD) %. This setting determines the
to Margin Transmission reduction ratio when the user uses the Create
7 Margin Transmission feature.
Default setting:1001 0011 (93%)

0 Addition of image data from If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
confidential transmissions on page of confidential messages will be printed on
the transmission result report transmission result reports.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1 Inclusion of communications on 0: Communications that reached phase C (message
the Journal when no image tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
data was exchanged. 1: Communications that reached phase A (call
0: Disabled 1: Enabled setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
This will include telephone calls.
2 Automatic error report printout 0: Error reports will not be printed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
failed communications.
3 Printing of the error code on the 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
error report
0: No 1: Yes
5 Power failure report 1: A power failure report will be automatically printed
0: Disabled 1: Enabled after the power is switched on if a fax message
disappeared from the memory when the power was
turned off last.
6 Conditions for printing the This switch becomes effective only when system
protocol dump list switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
0: Print for all communications 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol
1: Print only when there is a dump list only for communications with errors.
communication error
7 Priority given to various types This bit determines which set of priorities the
of remote terminal ID when machine uses when listing remote terminal names
printing reports on reports.
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
number Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
1: Dial label > Tel. number > Quick/Speed Dial number.
RTI > CSI
SM 41 B766
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 0A SP No. 1-101-011

0 Automatic port selection When "1" is selected, a suitable port is automatically
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled selected if the selected port is not used.
3 Continuous polling reception This feature allows a series of stations to be polled
0: Disabled 1: Enabled in a continuous cycle. This will continue until the
polling reception file is erased.
The dialing interval is the same as memory
transmission.
4 Dialing on the ten-key pad 0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
when the external telephone is external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when
off-hook the external telephone is not by the machine, or if a
0: Disabled 1: Enabled wireless telephone is connected as an external
telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machine’s ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
5 On hook dial 0: On hook dial is disabled.
6-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E SP No. 1-101-015

0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.
2 Enable/disable for direct Direct sending cannot operate when the capture
sending selection function is on during sending. Setting this switch to
0: Direct sending off "1" enables direct sending without capture. Setting
1: Direct sending on this switch to "0" masks the direct sending function
on the operation panel so it cannot be selected.
3 Action when the external 0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external
handset goes off-hook handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not
0: Manual tx and rx operation possible.
1: Memory tx and rx operation 1: The display stays in standby mode even when
(the display remains the same) the external handset is used, so that other people
can use the machine for memory tx operation.
Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this
setting.
B766 42 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
System Switch 0F SP No. 1-101-016
B766
0 Country/area code for functional This country/area code determines the factory
to settings (Hex) settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.
7 00: France 11: USA However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter
01: Germany 12: Asia settings and communication parameter RAM
02: UK 13: Japan addresses.
03: Italy 14: Hong Kong Cross reference
04: Austria 15: South Africa NCU country code:
05: Belgium 16: Australia SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
06: Denmark 17: New Zealand SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2
07: Finland 18: Singapore SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
08: Ireland 19: Malaysia
09: Norway 1A: China
0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan
0B: Switz. 1C: Korea
0C: Portugal 20: Turkey
0D: Holland 21: Greece
0E: Spain 22: Hungary
0F: Israel 23: Czech
10: --- 24: Poland

0 Threshold memory level for Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB
to parallel memory transmission N can be between 00 - FF(H)
7 Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB

0 TTI printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information
0: Superimposed on the page that the customer considers to be important (G3
data transmissions).
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
1 TSI (G3) printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TSI (G3) overprints
0: Superimposed on the page information that the customer considers to be
data important.
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
2 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
3 TTI used for broadcasting 1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected for all
0: The TTIs selected for each destinations during broadcasting.
Quick/Speed dial are used
1: The same TTI is used for all
destinations
4-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
SM 43 B766
BIT SWITCHES

0 TTI printing position in the main TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
to scan direction Input even numbers only.
7 This setting determines the print start position for
the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is
moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file
number which is on the top right of the page. On an
A4 page, if the TTI is moved over by more than 50
mm, it may overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)


0 Not used Do not change the settings.
1 Going into the Energy Saver 1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver
mode automatically mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is
0: Enabled active even in the Energy Saver mode.
1: Disabled
4-5 Interval for preventing the If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine
machine from entering Energy does not go to Energy Saver mode during the
Saver mode if there is a selected period.
pending transmission file. After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for
Bit 5 4 Setting transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver
0 0 1 min mode.
0 1 30 min
1 0 1 hour
1 1 24 hours
6-7 Not used Do not change

0 Parallel Broadcasting 1: The machine sends messages simultaneously
0: Disabled using all available ports during broadcasting.
1: Enabled
1 Priority setting for the G3 line. This function allows the user to select the default G3
0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 or 3 line type. The optional SG3 unit(s) are required to
1: PSTN-2 or 3 > PSTN-1 use the PSTN-2 or 3 setting.

B766 44 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
6 Extended scanner page 0: After installing the memory expansion option, the
memory after memory option scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB from 2
is installed MB.
0: Disabled 1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memory
1: Enabled expansion option, the scanner page memory is
extended to 12 MB. But the SAF memory decreases
to 18 MB.
7 Special Original mode 1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form
0: Disabled or letterhead which has a colored or printed
1: Enabled background, change this bit to “1”. “Original 1” and
“Original 2” can be selected in addition to the “Text”,
“Text/Photo” and “Photo” modes.
System Switch 1A
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-7 LS RX memory capacity Sets the value to x4KB. When the amount of
threshold setting available memory drops below this setting, RX
00-FF (0-1020 Kbyte: Hex) documents are printed to conserve memory.
Initial setting 0x80 (512 KB)
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1D SP No. 1-101-030

0 RTI/CSI/CPS code display 0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the top line
0: Enable of the LCD panel during communication.
1: Disable 1: Codes are switched off (no display)
2 Destination telephone number When "1" is selected, the destination telephone
display limitation number display is limited and redial is disabled.
0: OFF, 1: ON
SM 45 B766
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1E SP No. 1-101-031

0 Communication after the 0: When this switch is on and the journal history
Journal data storage area has becomes full, the next report prints. If the journal
become full history is not deleted, the next transmission cannot
0: Impossible be received. This prevents overwriting
1: Possible communication records before the machine can
print them.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax communications
are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the
oldest communication records.
Note: This setting is effective only when Automatic
Journal printout is enabled but the machine cannot
print the report (e.g., no paper).
1 Action when the SAF memory 0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
has become full during the successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
scanning 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
0: The current page is erased. the file is erased and no pages are transmitted.
1: The entire file is erased.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory
transmission.
2 RTI/CSI display priority This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is
0: RTI 1: CSI displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
3 File No. printing 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4 Action when authorized If authorized reception is enabled but the user has
reception is enabled but stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not machine will not be able to receive any fax
yet programmed messages.
If the customer wishes to receive messages from
0: All fax reception is disabled any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block
1: Faxes can be received if the messages from senders that do not include an RTI
sender has an RTI or CSI or CSI, change this bit to “1”, then enable
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at “0 (default setting)”.
5-7 Not used Do not change the settings
B766 46 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
System Switch 1F SP No. 1-101-032
B766
1 Report printout after an original 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
jam during SAF storage or if overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
the SAF memory fills up Change this bit to “1” if the customer does not want
0: Enabled to have a report in these cases.
1: Disabled Memory tx – Memory storage report
Parallel memory tx – Transmission result report
3 Received fax print start timing 0: The machine prints each page immediately after
(G3 reception) the machine receives it.
0: After receiving each page 1: The machine prints the complete message after
1: After receiving all pages the machine receives all the pages in the memory.

7 Action when a fax SC has 0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other
occurred than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically
0: Automatic reset resets itself.
1: Fax unit stops 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the
fax unit stops.
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See “Troubleshooting”
SM 47 B766
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.2 I-Fax Switches

I-fax Switch 00 SP No. 1-102-001
Original Width of TX This setting sets the maximum size of the original
Attachment File that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are
reserved for future use or not used.)
0 A4 0: Off (not selected), 1: On (selected)
1 B4 If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”, the
2 A3 larger size has priority. For example, if both Bit 2
3-6 Reserved and Bit 1 are set to “1” then the maximum size is
“A3” (Bit 2).
7 Not used
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the
receiving machine at the destination, so the sending
machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving
machine. The original width selected with this switch
is used as the RX machine’s original width setting,
and the original is reduced to this size before
sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than
the receiving machine can accept, the machine
detects this and this causes an error.
B766 48 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
Original Line Resolution of TX These settings set the maximum resolution of the
Attachment File original that the destination can receive.
0 200x100 Standard 0: Not selected
1 200x200 Detail 1: Selected
2 200x400 Fine If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”, the
3 300 x 300 Reserve higher resolution has priority. For example, if both
4 400 x 400 Super Fine Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to “1” then the resolution is
set for "Bit 2 200 x 400.
5 600 x 600 Reserve
6 Reserve
7 mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.
0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
When on (set to “1”), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
NOTE: Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver
to determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the
mm/inch selection is determined by the sender fax.
When this switch is Off (0):
• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
• Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
• Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
• Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
• Images received in mm are converted to inches.
SM 49 B766
BIT SWITCHES

0 RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
• When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the “From” address and
“Subject” address are printed as header information.
• When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
1 Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error

This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail
attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This
allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended
destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
2-3 Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the
transmission was received normally at the destination.
00: “Dispatched”
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
“dispatched” in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The “dispatched” string is included in the Subject string.
01: “Displayed”
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
“displayed” in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The “displayed” string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
NOTE: A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to
“00” (for “dispatched”) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error.
If any setting other than “displayed” (01) causes a problem, change the setting
to “01” to enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
4 Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
NOTE: Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer
mail, which contains the media accept feature field.
5-6 Not Used
B766 50 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
7 Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
NOTE: The “1” setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to
have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x
400 resolution.

0 Original Output at Transfer Station
This setting determines whether the original is output at the transfer station when it is
received from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission. This feature is the
same as for G3 transfer transmissions.
0: Received original not output at the transfer station.
1: Received original output. The original is printed after the transfer station has
transferred it to the destinations, so its output confirms that the original has been
transferred.
1 Transfer Result Report
This setting determines when a Transfer Result Report is generated and returned to
the transfer requestor.
0: Returns the report after each transfer.
1: Returns the report only if an error occurred during transfer.
2 Destination Error Handling for Reception Transfer Request
This setting restricts transfer transmission based on whether the final destinations are
correct or not.
0: The transfer station transmits to correct destinations only (addresses with no errors
in them).
1: If any address has an error in it, the transfer station transfers no transmissions and
returns a transfer transmission failure report to the requestor that initiated the
transfer.
There is no negotiation between the transfer initiator and the transfer station to
determine whether the final destination addresses are correct or not. This setting
determines whether or not the transfer station transfers the transmissions if there is a
mistake in even one of the final destination addresses.
3 Polling ID Check for Reception of Transfer Request
This setting determines whether the polling IDs of incoming transmissions are checked
to ensure that the polling IDs match.
0: Receives and transfers only messages that have matching polling IDs.
1: Receives and transfers all messages, even if the polling IDs do not match.
4-7 Not Used
SM 51 B766
BIT SWITCHES

0 Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI
of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI
or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the
Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine
automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
1 Subject corresponding to mail post database
0: Standard subject
1: Mail post database subject
The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following
three cases:
1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch.
2) When memory sending or delivery specified by F code is applied by the SMTP
server
3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function).
Note: This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up for
memory sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and when operators are
using FOL (to prevent problems when receiving transmissions).
2-7 Not Used

0 Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive
transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast
to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
1-7 Not Used
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-007
I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-008
B766 52 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
0-7 Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores
fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds
incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory
available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then
stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
NOTE: The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the
amount of memory.

4-7 Restrict TX Retries This setting determines the number of retries when
connection and transmission fails due to errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-011
I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-012
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-013
I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-014
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-015
I-fax Switch 0F SP No. 1-102-016

0 Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or
output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
1-7 Not used
SM 53 B766
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.3 Printer Switches

Printer Switch 00 SP No. 1-103-001
0 Select page separation marks 0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is printed
0: Off in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a
1: On [2] is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd
page.
1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two
pages, for example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom
right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed
in the upper right corner of the 2nd page.
Note: This helps the user to identify pages that have
been split because the size of the paper is smaller
than the size of the document received. (When A5 is
used to print an A4 size document, for example.)
1 Repetition of data when the 1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the
received page is longer than previous page are repeated at the top of the next
the printer paper page.
0: Off 0: The next page continues from where the previous
1: On page stopped without any repeated text.
2 Prints the date and time on This switch is only effective when user parameter 02
received fax messages - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
0: Disabled received fax messages) is enabled.
1: Enabled 1: The machine prints the received and printed date
and time at the bottom of each received page.

3-4 Maximum print width used in These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer
the setup protocol switch 01 is “1”.
Bit 4 3 Setting
0 0 Not used
0 1 A3
1 0 B4
1 1 A4
7 Received message width 0: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
restriction in the protocol signal the print width depending on the paper size
to the sender available from the paper feed stations.
0: Disabled Refer to the table on the next page for how the
1: Enabled machine chooses the paper width used in the setup
protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and
4 above.
B766 54 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the
Fax Option
Type 3030
setup protocol
B766
Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)
A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width
B5 256 mm width
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width
No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width

0 1st paper feed station usage for 0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax
fax printing messages and reports.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled 1: The specified paper feed station will not be used
1 2nd paper feed station usage for printing fax messages and reports.
for fax printing
0: Enabled Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed station
1: Disabled which has been specified by User Parameter Switch
2 3rd paper feed station usage 0F (15), or which is used for the Specified Cassette
for fax printing Selection feature.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3 4th paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4 LCT usage for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
SM 55 B766
BIT SWITCHES

0 Length reduction of received 0: Incoming pages are printed without length
data reduction.
0: Disabled (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4
1: Enabled to 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)
4 Page separation setting when Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled
to sub scan compression is with switch 03-0 above).
7 forbidden For example, if this setting is set to "10", and A4 is
00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex) the selected paper size:
Default: 6 mm • If the received document is 10 mm or less longer
than A4, then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page
prints.
• If the received document is 10 mm longer than
A4, then the document is split into 2 pages.

0 Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.
to <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
4 “N” is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting)
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
5 Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken
6 place.
 0 1   0 1
 =4 mm, =10 mm, =15 mm, = Not used
 0  0 1  1
7 Not used. Do not change the setting.
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
B766 56 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
0 Printing while a paper cassette
is pulled out, when the Just
Size Printing feature is Cross reference
enabled. Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5
0: Printing will not start
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

0 Reduction for Journal printing 1: The Journal is reduced to 91% to ensure that
0: Off there is enough space in the left margin for punch
1: On holes or staples.
4 List of destinations in the 1: Only destinations where communication failure
Communication Failure Report occurred are printed on the Communication Failure
for broadcasting Report.
0: All destinations
1: Only destinations where
communication failure occurred

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 57 B766
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015

0 Paper size selection priority 0: A paper size that has the same width as the
0: Width received data is selected first.
1: Length 1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
1 Paper size selected for This switch determines which paper size is selected
printing A4 width fax data for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has
0: 8.5" x 11" size both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: A4 size
2 Page separation 1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page
0: Enabled separation to print a received fax message, the
1: Disabled machine does not print the message (Substitute
Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
3 Printing the sample image on “Same size” means the sample image is printed at
to reports 100%, even if page separation occurs.
4 Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to
0 0 The upper half “0” to enable this switch.
only Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
0 1 50% reduction this feature.
in sub-scan only
1 0 Same size
1 1 Not used
7 Equalizing the reduction ratio 0: When page separation has taken place, all the
among separated pages pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
(Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
0: Enabled paper size when page separation has taken place.
1: Disabled Other pages are printed without reduction.
Printer Switch 0F SP No. 1-103-016

0 Smoothing feature (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine
to Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting receives halftone images from other manufacturers
1 0 0 Disabled fax machines frequently.
0 1 Disabled
1 0 Enabled
1 1 Not used
2 Duplex printing 1: The machine always prints received fax
0: Disabled messages in duplex printing mode:
1: Enabled
3 Binding direction for Duplex 0: Sets the binding for the left edge of the stack.
printing 1: Sets the binding for the top of the stack.
0: Left binding
1: Top binding
B766 58 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES
B766
Communication Switch 00 SP No. 1-104-001
0 Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities
to in receive mode to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30
1 Bit 1 0 Modes protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
2 Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities
to in transmit mode to be used in the transmission and to be declared in
3 Bit 3 2 Modes phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
5 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems
Reception occur using JBIG compression.
0: Only basic supported
1: Basic and optional both
supported
6 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems
Transmission occur using JBIG compression.
0: Basic mode priority
1: Optional mode priority
7 Closed network (reception) 1: Reception will not go ahead if the polling ID code
0: Disabled of the remote terminal does not match the polling ID
1: Enabled code of the local terminal. This function is only
available in NSF/NSS mode.
SM 59 B766
BIT SWITCHES

0 ECM If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all
0: Off 1: On communications.
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are
switched off automatically.
2 Wrong connection prevention (0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
to method sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of the
3 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the
0 0 None dialed telephone number. This does not work when
0 1 8 digit CSI manually dialed.
1 0 4 digit CSI (1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last
1 1 CSI/RTI 4 digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the other end does not
identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always
go ahead.
Note: This function does not work when dialing is

done from the external telephone.
4-5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 Maximum printable page length The setting determined by these bits is informed to
to available the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
7 Bit 7 6 Setting protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
0 0 No limit
0 1 B4 (364 mm)
1 0 A4 (297 mm)
1 1 Not used

0 G3 Burst error threshold If there are more consecutive error lines in the
0: Low 1: High received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response. The Low and High
threshold values depend on the sub-scan resolution,
and are as follows.
100 dpi 6(L) Æ 12(H)
200 dpi 12(L) Æ 24(H)
300 dpi 18(L) Æ 36(H)
400 dpi 24(L) Æ 48(H)
1 Acceptable total error line ratio If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
0: 5% 1: 10% acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
2 Treatment of pages received 0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
with errors during G3 reception
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed
B766 60 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
3 Hang-up decision when a 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is
negative code (RTN or PIN) is received.
received during G3 immediate 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
transmission receives RTN or PIN.
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
ECM is being used.

0 Maximum number of page 00 - FF (Hex) times.
to retransmissions in a G3 This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
7 memory transmission Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 0A SP No. 1-104-011

0 Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission upon redialing transmission failed the previous time.
0: From the error page 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
1: From page 1 normal memory transmission.
SM 61 B766
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0B SP No. 1-104-012

0 Use of Economy Transmission These bits determine whether the machine uses the
during a Transfer operation to Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying
end receivers out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
1 Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
the Next Transfer Stations
2 Use of Label Insertion for the This bit determines whether the machine uses the
End Receivers in a Transfer Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a
operation Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
3 Conditions required for 0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine
Transfer Result Report will always send a Transfer Result Report back to
transmission the Requesting Station after completing the Transfer
0: Always transmitted Request, even if there were no problems.
1: Only transmitted if there was 1: The machine will only send back a Transfer
an error Result Report if there were errors during
communication, meaning one or more of the End
Receivers could not be contacted.
4 Printout of the message when When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station,
acting as a Transfer Station this bit determines whether the machine prints the
0: Disabled 1: Enabled fax message coming in from the Requesting
Terminal.
5 Action when there is no fax After the machine receives a transfer request, the
number in the programmed machine compares the last N digits of the
Quick/Speed dials which meets requesting terminal’s own fax number with all the
the requesting terminal’s own Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (N
fax number is the number programmed in communication switch
0: Transfer is disabled 0C.)
1: Transfer is enabled 0: If there is no matching number programmed in
the machine, the machine rejects the transfer
request.
1: Even if there is no matching number programmed
in the machine, the machine accepts the transfer
request. The result report will be printed at the
transfer terminal, but will not be sent back to the
requesting terminal.
B766 62 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
Communication Switch 0C SP No. 1-104-013
B766
0 Number of digits compared to 00 – 1F (0 to 31 digits)
to find the requester’s fax number After the machine receives a transfer request, the
4 from the programmed machine compares the own telephone number sent
Quick/Speed Dials when acting from the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/Speed
as a Transfer Station Dials programmed in the machine, starting from
Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the
end of the telephone numbers the machine
compares.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to
the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine
compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the
machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick
Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and Quick
Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will send the
report to Quick 05.
Default setting – 05(H) = 5 digits
Communication Switch 0D SP No. 1-104-014

0 The available memory 00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
to threshold, below which ringing (e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
7 detection (and therefore One page is about 24 kbytes.
reception into memory) is
disabled The machine refers to this setting before each fax
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
any fax messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
Communication Switch 0E SP No. 1-104-015

0 Minimum interval between 06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
to automatic dialing attempts (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
7 This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F – Not used (do not change the settings.)
SM 63 B766
BIT SWITCHES

0 Memory transmission: 01 – FE (Hex) times
to Maximum number of dialing
7 attempts to the same
destination
Communication Switch 11 – Not used (do not change the settings.)

0 Memory transmission: Interval 01 – FF (Hex) minutes
to between dialing attempts to the
7 same destination
Communication Switch 13 – Not used (do not change the settings.)

0 Inch-to-mm conversion during 0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch
transmission format are transmitted without conversion.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF
memory in mm format are transmitted without
conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF
memory, the fax unit always converts the data into
mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored

data in the SAF memory to the format which was
specified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before
transmission.
6 Available unit of resolution in For the best performance, do not change the factory
to which fax messages are settings.
7 received
Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit The setting determined by these bits is informed to
0 0 mm the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
0 1 inch protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
1 0 mm and inch
(default)
1 1 Not used
Communication Switch 15 – Not used (do not change the settings)
B766 64 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
1 Optional G3 unit (G3-2) Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional
0: Not installed G3 unit.
1: Installed
2 Not used
3 Select PSTN connection This switch enables the G3-2.
0: Off 0: Off, no connection
1: On 1: Recognizes and enables G3-2.
This switch can be used only after G3-2 has been
installed.

0 SEP reception 0: Polling transmission to another maker’s machine
0: Disabled using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled.
1: Enabled
1 SUB reception 0: Confidential reception to another maker’s
0: Disabled machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
1: Enabled disabled.
2 PWD reception 0: Disables features that require PWD (Password)
0: Disabled signal reception.
1: Enabled
7 Action when there is no box Change this setting when the customer requires.
with an F-code that matches
the received SUB code
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)

Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 65 B766
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 1B SP No. 1-104-028

0 Extension access code (0 to 7) If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
to to turn V.8 protocol On/Off procedure, set this bit to “1” to disable V.8.
7 0: On Example: If “0” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
1: Off to 1. When the machine detects “0” as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (Alternatively, if “3” is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C SP No. 1-104-029

0 Extension access code (8 and Refer to communication switch 1B.
to 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off Example: If “8” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
1 0: On to 1. When the machine detects “8” as the first
1: Off dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (If “9” is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
B766 66 SM
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
G3 Switch 00 SP No. 1-105-001
0 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
1 communication (tx and rx) the communication.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
0 0 Disabled the T.30 protocol.
0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
1 0 All the time all through the communication. Make sure that you
1 1 Not used reset these bits after testing.
2 Monitor speaker during 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
memory transmission transmission.
G3 Switch 01 SP No. 1-105-002

1 Select V.8 protocol for manual This switch switches the V.8 protocol for manual
RX function receiving off and on.
0: No
1: Yes
4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
6 Forbid CED/AMsam output Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off), unless
0: Off communication problem is caused by a CED or
1: On (Forbid output) ANSam transmission.
G3 Switch 02 SP No. 1-105-003

0 G3 protocol mode used Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
0: Standard and non-standard only communicate with machines that send T.30-
1: Standard only standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
5 Use of modem rate history for 0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
transmission using start from the highest modem rate.
Quick/Speed Dials 1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
0: Disabled communications with the same machine when
1: Enabled determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
6 Not Used Do not change the settings.
7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.
SM 67 B766
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 03 SP No. 1-105-004

0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
(Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
1 Not Used Do not change the settings.
2 V.8 protocol 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
0: Disabled Note:
1: Enabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
4 CTC transmission conditions 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)
0: After one PPR signal mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
received modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
1: After four PPR signals condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
received (ITU-T standard) 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
N Transmit ≤ NRe send
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames

NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to

drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

5 Modem rate used for the next 1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back before
page after receiving a negative sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN) received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6 Not Used Do not change the settings
7 Select detection of reverse This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in
polarity in ringing ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3
0: Off ringing). Do not change this setting
1: On 0: No detection Æ Outside Japan
1: Detection Æ Inside Japan only
B766 68 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
G3 Switch 04 SP No. 1-105-005
B766
0 Training error detection 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
to threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
3 below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
G3 Switch 05 SP No. 1-105-006

0 Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
0 0 1 1 7.2 k need to change this for specific receivers.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
0 1 1 0 14.4 k protocol should be disabled manually.
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
to 7.2 kbps. kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
5 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
SM 69 B766
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007

0 Initial Rx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) reception.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
0 0 1 1 7.2 k during reception.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
4 Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the
to reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting the machine in receive mode.
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 disabled manually.
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, Cross reference
V.17/V.33 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
G3 Switch 07 SP No. 1-105-008

0 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
to (tx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting the modem and the telephone exchange.
0 0 None Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
0 1 Low specific receivers.
1 0 Medium
1 1 High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
• Communication error
• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34

communications.
B766 70 SM
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 07 SP No. 1-105-008
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
to (rx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
0 0 None
0 1 Low Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
1 0 Medium the following symptoms occurs.
1 1 High • Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.

communications.
4 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “1”.
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0A SP No. 1-105-011

1 Maximum allowable carrier These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
drop during image data time.
reception Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) frequent.
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
2 Select cancellation of high- This switch setting determines if high-speed
speed RX if carrier signal lost receiving ends if the carrier signal is lost when
while receiving receiving during non-ECM mode
0: Off
1: On
3 Not used Do not change the settings
4 Maximum allowable frame This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
interval during image data (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
reception. between ECM frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
frequent.
SM 71 B766
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 0A SP No. 1-105-011

6 Reconstruction time for the When the sending terminal is controlled by a
first line in receive mode computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
0: 6 s 1: 12 s data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
G3 Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings).

G3 Switch 0C Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0D Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0E SP No 1-105-015
0-7 Set CNG send time interval
Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the 3-
second CNG interval.
High order bit 3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms
3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) ≤ N ≤ FF (2250 ms)
Low order bit 00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms
3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) ≤ N ≤ 0F (3700 ms)
G3 Switch 0F SP No. 1-105-016

0 Alarm when an error occurred If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
in Phase C or later error communication, change this bit to “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1 Alarm when the handset is off- If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the
hook at the end of handset is off-hook at the end of fax communication,
communication change this bit to “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B766 72 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES
B766
These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.
G3-3 switches are the same as for G3-2 switches.
G3-2 Switch 00 SP No. 1-106-001
0-1 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
communication (tx and rx) the communication.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
0 0 Disabled the T.30 protocol.
0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
1 0 All the time all through the communication. Make sure that you
1 1 Not used reset these bits after testing.
2 Monitor speaker during 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
memory transmission transmission.
G3-2 Switch 01 SP No. 1-106-002

4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
6 Forbid CED/AMsam output Do not change this setting, unless the
0: Off communication problem is caused by a CED or
1: On (Forbid output) ANSam transmission.
SM 73 B766
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 02 SP No. 1-106-003

0 G3 protocol mode used Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
0: Standard and non-standard only communicate with machines that send T.30-
1: Standard only standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
5 Use of modem rate history for 0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
transmission using start from the highest modem rate.
Quick/Speed Dials 1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
0: Disabled communications with the same machine when
1: Enabled determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.
G3-2 Switch 03 SP No. 1-106-004

0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
(Echo countermeasure) DIS frame twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
2 V.8 protocol 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
0: Disabled Note:
1: Enabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
B766 74 SM
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 03 SP No. 1-106-004
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
4 CTC transmission conditions 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)
0: After one PPR signal mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
received modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
1: After four PPR signals condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
received (ITU-T standard) 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
N Transmit ≤ NRe send
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames

NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to

drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

5 Modem rate used for the next 1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back before
page after receiving a negative sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN) received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
7 Select detection of reverse This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in
polarity in ringing ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3
0: Off ringing). Do not change this setting
1: On 0: No detection Æ Outside Japan
1: Detection Æ Inside Japan only
G3-2 Switch 04 SP No. 1-106-005

0 Training error detection 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
to threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
3 below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
SM 75 B766
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 05 SP No. 1-106-006

0 Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
0 0 1 1 7.2 k need to change this for specific receivers.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
to 7.2 kbps. kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
5 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007

0 Initial Rx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) reception.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
0 0 1 1 7.2 k during reception.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
B766 76 SM
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
4 Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the
to reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting the machine in receive mode.
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 disabled manually.
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, Cross reference
V.17/V.33 V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
G3-2 Switch 07 SP No. 1-106-008

to (tx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
0 0 None Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
0 1 Low specific receivers.
1 0 Medium
1 1 High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
• Communication error

communications.
to (rx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between
0 0 None
0 1 Low Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
1 0 Medium the following symptoms occurs.
1 1 High • Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.

communications.
4 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “1”.
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SM 77 B766
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0A SP No. 1-106-011

0 Maximum allowable carrier These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
1 drop during image data time.
reception Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) frequent.
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
2 Select cancellation of high- This switch setting determines if high-speed
speed RX if carrier signal lost receiving ends if the carrier signal is lost when
while receiving receiving during non-ECM mode
0: Off
1: On
4 Maximum allowable frame This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
interval during image data (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
reception. between ECM frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
frequent.
6 Reconstruction time for the first When the sending terminal is controlled by a
line in receive mode computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
0: 6 s 1: 12 s data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
G3-2 Switch 0B- Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0C- Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
B766 78 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES
B766
The G4 internal switches (SW00 to 1F) are displayed but do not change these
settings.
4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES

The G4 parameter switches (SW00 to 0F) are displayed but do not change these
settings.
4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES

IP Fax Switch 00 SP No. 1-111-001
IP Fax Transport Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax
1
0: TCP, 1: UDP
IP Fax single port selection Selects single data port.
2
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax double ports (single data Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port.
3 port) selection
IP Fax Gatekeeper Enables/disables the gatekeeper for IP-Fax.
4
IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse Reverses the T30 bit signal.
5
0: LSB first, 1: MSB first
IP Fax max bit rate setting When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does
0: Not affected, 1: Affected not affect the value of the DIS/DCS.
6
When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects
the value of the DIS/DCS.
IP Fax received telephone number When "0" is selected, fax data is received
confirmation without checking the telephone number.
0: No confirmation, 1: Confirmation When "1" is selected, fax data is received only
7 when confirming that the telephone number
from the sender matches the registered
telephone number in this machine. If this
confirmation fails, the line is disconnected.
SM 79 B766
BIT SWITCHES

IP Fax delay level setting
Selects the acceptable delay level. Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Level 0 is the highest quality 0 0 0 0 Level 0
0-3 Default is "0000" (level 0). 0 0 0 1 Level 1
0 0 1 0 Level 2
0 0 1 1 Level 3
IP Fax preamble wait time setting Selects the preamble wait time.
[00 to 0f]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary switch
4-7 combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).

0 IP Fax bit signal reverse setting When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse
0: Maker code setting method is decided by the maker code.
1: Internal bit switch setting When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse
method is decided by the internal bit switch.
NOTE: When communicating between IP Fax
devices, LSB first is selected.)
1 IP Fax transmission speed setting Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax
0: Modem speed communication.
1: No limitation
2 SIP transport setting This bit switch sets the transport that has
0: TCP priority for receiving IP Fax data.
1: UDP This function is activated only when the
sender has both TCP and UDP.
B766 80 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
0 Effective field limitation for G3 Limits the effective field for standard G3
standard function information function information.
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
1 Switching between G3 standard Enables/disables switching between G3
and G3 non standard standard and G3 non-standard.
0: Enable switching
1: G3 standard only
2 AI modem rate function Enables/disables the AI modem rate.
3 ECM frame size selection at Selects the ECM frame size for sending.
transmitting
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
4 DIS detection times for echo Sets the number of times for DIS to detect
prevention echoes.
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
5 CTC transmission selection When "0" is selected, the transmission
0: PPRx1 condition is decided by error frame numbers.
1: PPRx4 When "1" is selected, the transmission
condition is based on the ITU-T method.
6 Shift down setting at receiving Selects whether to shift down when negative
negative code codes are received.
0: OFF, 1: ON

0 TCF error threshold Sets the TCF error threshold level.
1 [00 to 0f]
2 The default is "1111" (0fH).
3
SM 81 B766
BIT SWITCHES

Modem bit rate setting for transmission
0-3 Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1

0 0 0 1 2400 bps
0 0 1 1 4800 bps
0 0 1 1 7200 bps
0 1 0 0 9600 bps
0 1 0 1 12.0 Kbps
0 1 1 0 14.4 Kbps
0 1 1 1 16.8 Kbps
1 0 0 0 19.2 Kbps
1 0 0 1 21.6 Kbps
1 0 1 0 24.0 Kbps
1 0 1 1 26.4 Kbps
1 1 0 0 28.8 Kbps
1 1 0 1 31.2 Kbps
1 1 1 0 33.6 Kbps
Modem setting for transmission
4-5 Sets the modem for transmission.
The default is "00" (V29).
Bit 5 Bit 4
0 0 V29
0 1 V17
1 0 V34
1 1 Not used
B766 82 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
Modem bit rate setting for reception
Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
0 0 0 1 V27ter
0-3 0 0 1 0 V27ter, V29
0 0 1 1 V27ter, V29, V33 (invalid)
0 1 0 0 V27ter, V29, V17
0 1 0 1 V27ter, V29, V17, V34
Modem setting for reception

Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17).
Bit 3 Bit 1 Bit 1
0 0 1 V27ter
4-7 0 1 0 V27ter, V29
0 1 1 Not used
1 0 0 V27ter, V29, V17
1 0 1 V27ter, V29, V17,
V34

0 TSI information Adds or does not add TSI information to
0: Not added, 1: Added NSS(S).
1 DCN transmission setting at T1 Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1
timeout timeout.
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted
3 Hang up setting at DIS reception Sets whether the machine disconnects after
disabled DIS reception.
0: No hang up
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN
4 Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done at
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times the same bit rate.
5 Space CSI transmission setting at When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
no CSI registration When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted all spaces.
SM 83 B766
BIT SWITCHES

0-1 T1 timer adjustment Bit 1 Bit 0
Adjusts the T1 timer. 0 0 35 sec
The default is "00" (35 seconds). 0 1 40 sec
1 0 50 sec
1 1 60 sec
2-3 T4 timer adjustment Bit 3 Bit 2
Adjust the T4 timer. 0 0 3 sec
The default is "00" (3 seconds). 0 1 3.5 sec
1 0 4 sec
1 1 5 sec
4-5 T0 timer adjustment
Bit 5 Bit 4
0 0 75 sec
0 1 120 sec
1 0 180 sec
1 1 240 sec
Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the interval between "setup" data
transmission and T.38 phase decision. If your destination return is late on the
network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the longer interval timer.
The default is "00" (75 seconds).
B766 84 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
Type 3030
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS
B766
The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units
that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The
factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by
RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter
programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this
will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code
unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
NOTE: The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.
Change the fourth digit from “5” to “6” (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the
settings for the first optional G3 interface unit and from “5” to “7” (e.g.
680700) for the settings for the second optional G3 interface unit.
Address Function Unit Remarks

680500 Country/Area code for NCU
parameters
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, or
use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001
Country/Area Decimal Hex

France 00 00 Hong Kong 20 14
Germany 01 01 South Africa 21 15
UK 02 02 Australia 22 16
Italy 03 03 New Zealand 23 17
Austria 04 04 Singapore 24 18
Belgium 05 05 Malaysia 25 19
Denmark 06 06 China 26 1A
Finland 07 07 Taiwan 27 1B
Ireland 08 08 Korea 28 1C
Norway 09 09 Greece 33 21
Sweden 10 0A Turkey 32 20
Switzerland 11 0B Greece 33 21
Portugal 12 0C Hungary 34 22
Holland 13 0D Czech 35 23
Spain 14 0E Poland 36 24
Israel 15 0F
USA 17 11
Asia 18 12
680501 Line current detection time 20 ms Line current detection is

680502 Line current wait time disabled.
680503 Line current drop detect time Line current is not
detected if 680501
contains FF.
680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
(high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit disabled.
(low byte)
SM 85 B766
NCU PARAMETERS

680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit disabled.
(low byte)
680508 PSTN dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680508 contains FF(H),
680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (address
68050B PSTN dial tone continuous tone time 68050D / 68050E).
68050C PSTN dial tone permissible drop time
Italy: See Note 2.
68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW)
68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
68050F PSTN ring-back tone detection time 20 ms Detection is disabled if
this contains FF.
680510 PSTN ring-back tone off detection 20 ms
time
680511 PSTN detection time for silent period 20 ms
after ring-back tone detected (LOW)
680512 PSTN detection time for silent period 20 ms
after ring-back tone detected (HIGH)
680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680514 PSTN busy tone frequency upper disabled.
limit (low byte)
680515 PSTN busy tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680516 PSTN busy tone frequency lower disabled.
limit (low byte)
680517 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680518 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit disabled.
(low byte)
680519 PABX dial tone frequency lower limit Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
disabled.
68051A PABX dial tone frequency lower limit
(low byte)
68051B PABX dial tone detection time 20 ms If 68051B contains FF,
68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (680520 /
68051E PABX dial tone continuous tone time 680521).
68051F PABX dial tone permissible drop time
680520 PABX wait interval (LOW)
680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)
680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms If both addresses contain
680523 PABX ringback tone off detection 20 ms FF(H), tone detection is
time disabled.
680524 PABX detection time for silent 20 ms If both addresses contain
period after ringback tone detected FF(H), tone detection is
(LOW) disabled.
B766 86 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
680525 20 ms
Type 3030
PABX detection time for silent
B766
period after ringback tone detected
(HIGH)
680526 PABX busy tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680527 PABX busy tone frequency upper disabled.
limit (low byte)
680528 PABX busy tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
680529 PABX busy tone frequency lower disabled.
limit (low byte)
68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1 20 ms
68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1
68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2
68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2
68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3
68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3 20 ms
680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4
680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4
680532 Busy tone continuous tone detection
time
680533 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-
OFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance (±)
Bit 1 0
0 0 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always
0 1 50% be kept at 0.
1 0 25%
1 1 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection

680534 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
upper limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680535 International dial tone frequency disabled.
upper limit (low byte)
680536 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
lower limit (high byte) FF(H), tone detection is
680537 International dial tone frequency disabled.
lower limit (low byte)
680538 International dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680538 contains FF,
680539 International dial tone reset time the machine pauses for
(LOW) the pause time (68053D /
68053A International dial tone reset time 68053E).
(HIGH)
68053B International dial tone continuous Belgium: See Note 2.
tone time
68053C International dial tone permissible
drop time
68053D International dial wait interval (LOW)
SM 87 B766
NCU PARAMETERS

68053E International dial wait interval (HIGH)
68053F Country dial tone upper frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
limit (HIGH) FF(H), tone detection is
680540 Country dial tone upper frequency disabled.
limit (LOW)
680541 Country dial tone lower frequency If both addresses contain
limit (HIGH) FF(H), tone detection is
680542 Country dial tone lower frequency disabled.
limit (LOW)
680543 Country dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680543 contains FF,
680544 Country dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
680545 Country dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (680548 /
680549).
680546 Country dial tone continuous tone
time
680547 Country dial tone permissible drop 20 ms
time
680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW)
680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
68054A Time between opening or closing the 1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
DO relay and opening the OHDI SP2-103-012 (parameter
relay 11).
68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.
SP2-103-013 (parameter
12).
68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.
SP2-103-014 (parameter
13).
68054D Time between final OHDI relay 1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
closure and DO relay opening or SP2-103-015 (parameter
closing 14).
This parameter is only
valid in Europe.
68054E Minimum pause between dialed 20 ms See Note 3 and 8. SP2-
digits (pulse dial mode) 103-016 (parameter 15).
68054F Time waited when a pause is SP2-103-017 (parameter
entered at the operation panel 16). See Note 3.
680550 DTMF tone on time 1 ms SP2-103-018 (parameter
17).
680551 DTMF tone off time SP2-103-019 (parameter
18).
680552 Tone attenuation level of DTMF -N x 0.5 –3.5 SP2-103-020 (parameter
signals while dialing dBm 19).
See Note 5.
680553 Tone attenuation value difference -dBm x 0.5 SP2-103-021 (parameter
between high frequency tone and 20).
low frequency tone in DTMF signals The setting must be less
than –5dBm, and should
not exceed the setting at
680552h above.
See Note 5.
B766 88 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
680554 -N x 0.5 –3.5
Type 3030
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level SP2-103-022 (parameter
dBm
B766
after dialling 21). See Note 5.
680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level -dBm x 0.5 See Note 5
after dialling
680556 Not used Do not change the
settings.
680557 Time between 68054Dh (NCU 1 ms This parameter takes
parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU effect when the country
parameter 15) code is set to France.
setting.
680559 Grounding time (ground start mode) 20 ms The Gs relay is closed for
this interval.
68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms The OHDI relay is open
for this interval.
68055B International dial access code (High) BCD For a code of 100:
68055C International dial access code (Low) 68055B - F1
68055C - 00
68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited for
each pause input after
the PSTN access code. If
this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address 68054F
is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
68055E Progress tone detection level, and Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
cadence detection enable flags 0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.

68055F Not used Do not change the
to settings.
680564
680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD For a code of 0:
680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD 680565 - FF
680566 - FF
to settings.
680571
680572 Acceptable ringing signal frequency: 1000/ N SP2-103-003 (parameter
range 1, upper limit (Hz). 02).
680573 Acceptable ringing signal frequency: SP2-103-004 (parameter
range 1, lower limit 03).
range 2, upper limit 04).
range 2, lower limit 05).
SM 89 B766
NCU PARAMETERS

680576 Number of rings until a call is 1 SP2-103-007 (parameter
detected 06).
The setting must not be
zero.
680577 Minimum required length of the first 20 ms See Note 4.
ring SP2-103-008 (parameter
07).
680578 Minimum required length of the 20 ms SP2-103-009 (parameter
second and subsequent rings 08).
680579 Ringing signal detection reset time 20 ms SP2-103-010 (parameter
(LOW) 09).
68057A Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-011 (parameter
(HIGH) 10).
68057B Not used Do not change the
to settings.
680580
680581 Interval between dialing the last digit 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
and switching the Oh relay over to
the external telephone when dialing
from the operation panel in handset
mode.
680582 Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time

Bit 3 2 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

to settings.
6805A0
6805A1 Acceptable CED detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
6805A2 Acceptable CED detection frequency disabled.
6805A3 Acceptable CED detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
6805A4 Acceptable CED detection frequency disabled.
6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms
± 20 ms
6805A6 Acceptable CNG detection frequency BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain
6805A7 Acceptable CNG detection frequency disabled.
B766 90 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
6805A8 BCD (Hz)
Type 3030
Acceptable CNG detection frequency If both addresses contain
B766
6805A9 Acceptable CNG detection frequency disabled.
6805AA Not used Do not change the
setting.
6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 3000 ms
6805AD Number of CNG cycles required for The data is coded in the
detection same way as address
680533.
6805AE Not used Do not change the
settings.
6805AF Acceptable AI short protocol tone Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain
(800Hz) detection frequency upper FF(H), tone detection is
limit (high byte) disabled.
6805B0 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)
6805B1 Acceptable AI short protocol tone Hz(BCD) If both addresses contain
(800Hz) detection frequency lower FF(H), tone detection is
limit (high byte) disabled.
6805B2 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
6805B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI short 20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms
protocol tone
6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N – 3 dBm SP2-103-002 (parameter
01).
6805B5 PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 –3.5 (dB)
level See Note 7.
6805B6 PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 –3 (dB)
level See Note 7.
6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm
6805B8 PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
level
6805B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
level
6805BD Modem turn-on level (incoming -37-0.5N
signal detection level) (dBm)
6805BE Not used Do not change the
to settings.
6805C6
6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 – Not used.
Bit 4 – V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.
6805C8 Not used Do not change the
to settings.
6805D9
6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1s
SM 91 B766
Rev. 10/2006 NCU PARAMETERS

6805E0 Maximum wait time for post 0: 12 s 1: Maximum wait time for
bit 3 message 1: 30 s post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can be
changed to 30 s.
Change this bit to “1” if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
6805E3 Voltage setting to detect off-hook for 0: Auto Do not change these
voltage/DP detection for an 1: Fixed V settings
externally connected line.
Here is a summary of the fixed voltage settings (1:
Fixed) for an externally connected line.
0 0 0 0 Not used
0 0 0 1 2.75 V
0 0 1 0 5.5 V
1 0 0 0 22 V
1 1 1 1 41.25 V
⇒ 6805E4 Threshold for ring level Change bit 2 to 1
bit 2 This will increase the threshold for ringing level
detection.
⇒ 6805E4 On-Hook impedance level Change bit 3 0 to 1
bit 3 This will decrease the on-hook impedance
level
⇒ 6805E5 Selection of positive and Bit 0= 0: Automatically judged
bits negative sides of the signal Bit 0= 1: Manually select to use either positive
0 and 1 waveform for incoming call or negative side
detection Bit 1= 0: Use positive side of waveform
Bit 1= 1: Use negative side of waveform
B766 92 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
Fax Option
Type 3030
NOTES
B766
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: – 0.5 x N680552/680554–3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone: – 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
NOTE: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds
closing and Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds
opening and Di closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI
short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher
than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the
sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and
68054E.
SM 93 B766
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail
Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience
problems, store that terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and
adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be
described.
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.

2. Enter Address Book Management mode ([User Tools]> System Settings> Key
Operator> Address Book Management).
3. Select the address book that you want to program.
4. For the fax parameter, select "Fax Dest.", for the E-mail parameter, select "E-
mail", then press “Start”. Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights
green.
5. The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed. Press the bit number that you
wish to change.
6. To scroll through the parameter switches, either:
7. Select the next switch: press “Next”
or
Select the previous switch: “Prev.” until the correct switch is displayed.
Then go back to step 6.
8. After the setting is changed, press “OK”.
9. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
B766 94 SM
Fax Option
Type 3030
4.4.2 PARAMETERS
B766
Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters
are disabled.
Switch 00
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 01
0 Tx level If communication with a particular remote terminal
to Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting often contains errors, the signal level may be
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
0 0 0 0 1 -1 communications with that terminal until the results
0 0 0 1 0 -2 are better.
0 0 0 1 1 -3
0 0 1 0 0 -4 If the setting is “Disabled”, the NCU parameter 01
: setting is used.
:
0 1 1 1 1 -15 Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled left.
5 Cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
to Bit 7 6 5 Setting frequencies because of the length of wire between
7 0 0 0 None the modem and the telephone exchange when
0 0 1 Low calling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.
0 1 0 Medium
0 1 1 High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
1 1 1 Disabled the following symptoms occurs.
• Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the

left.
If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is

used.
SM 95 B766
Switch 02
0 Initial Tx modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal always
to Bit3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
3 0 0 0 0 Not used high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these
0 0 0 1 2,400 bits.
0 0 1 0 4,800
0 0 1 1 7,200 For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4
0 1 0 0 9,600 must be changed to 0.
0 1 0 1 12,000
0 1 1 0 14,400 Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
0 1 1 1 16,800 left. If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting
1 0 0 0 19,200 is used.
1 0 0 1 21,600
1 0 1 0 24,000
1 0 1 1 26,400
1 1 0 0 28,800
1 1 0 1 31,200
1 1 1 0 33,600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Other settings: Not used

Switch 03
0 Inch-mm conversion before tx The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting scanning. If “inch only” is selected, the printed copy
0 0 Inch-mm may be slightly distorted at the other end if that
conversion machine uses mm-based resolutions.
available
0 1 Inch only If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 Not used used.
1 1 Disabled
2 DIS/NSF detection method (0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
to Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
3 0 0 First DIS or transmission. The machine will then wait for the
NSF second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
0 1 Second DIS or
NSF If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 Not used used.
1 1 Disabled
4 V.8 protocol If transmissions to a specific destination always end
0: Off at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
1: Disabled disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.
B766 96 SM
Switch 03
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
5 Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are informed
in transmit mode to the other terminal during transmission.
0: MH only If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1: Disabled used.
6 ECM during transmission For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
0 0 Off the (0, 0) setting.
0 1 On Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
1 0 Not used are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
1 1 Disabled If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.
Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM 97 B766
E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters
disabled).
Switch 00
0 HM Compression mode Switches HM compression on and off for files attached
for e-mail attachments to e-mails for sending.
0: Off
1: On
1 HR Compression mode Switches HR compression on and off for files attached
for e-mail attachments to e-mails for sending.
0: Off
1: On
2 MMR Compression mode Switches MMR compression on and off for files
for e-mail attachments attached to e-mails for sending.
0: Off
1: On
7 Designates the bits to The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
reference for compression Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
method of e-mail selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
attachments
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)
1: No registration.
Switch 01
0 Original width of e-mail Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A4.
attachment: A4
0: Off
1: On
1 Original width of e-mail Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as B4.
attachment: B4
0: Off
1: On
2 Original width of e-mail Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A3.
attachment: A3
0: Off
1: On
reference for original size Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
of e-mail attachments selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
1: No registration.
B766 98 SM
Fax Option
Type 3030
Switch 02
B766
0 Line resolution of e-mail Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as
attachment: 200 x 100 200 x100.
0: Off
1: On
attachment: 200 x 200 200 x 200.
0: Off
1: On
attachment: 200 x 400 200 x 400.
0: Off
1: On
attachment: 400 x 400 400 x 400.
0: Off
1: On
reference for original size Bits 00, 01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores
of e-mail attachments the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02, 04.
1: No registration.

SM 99 B766
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.”
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)

680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Not used
B766 100 SM
Fax Option
Type 3030
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report
B766
printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report
printout)
Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include sender’s name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages
(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages.
0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
1 1 The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Scan sequence in Book transmission
0: Left page then right page, 1: Right page then left page
Bit 7: Not used
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
SM 101 B766

Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature
are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09) : Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: 2 into 1 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Reception file printout 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission
results 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection
0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) – up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer
/Scanner) is pressed
0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station)
0: Off, 1: On
B766 102 SM
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 1 1st paper feed station
0 1 0 2nd paper feed station
0 1 1 3rd paper feed station
1 0 0 4th paper feed station
1 0 1 LCT
Other settings Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800E0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size
paper is not available.
0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800E1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 0: IFAX Group Destination Selection/Release Method
0 Priority Select Mode
Select the priority destination according to input mode. The Group
button reflects either email or fax input mode. Released as soon as
the entry mode is selected, regardless of the current entry mode.
1 All Select Mode
Acquires all registered members regardless of entry mode. If both
email and fax are registered, both are selected. The Group button
reflects either email or fax input mode. All registered members are
released, regardless of the entry mode. If both email/fax are
registered, both are released.
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Inclusion of the “Add” button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is
selected for broadcasting
0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bit 7: Press “Start” key without an original when using the on hook dial or the
external telephone,
0: displays “Cannot detect original size”.
1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
SM 103 B766

Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet
finisher)
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassette
selection feature becomes empty.
0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added.
1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not
specified by this feature.
Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait Tx
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-
scan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used.
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax
(LAN fax) driver
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 min.
0 0 0 1 1 min.
Ø Ø
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.
Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message
0: Disabled (print only when error occurs), 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
B766 104 SM

Fax Option
Type 3030
Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
B766
6800E7(H) – User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17) : Not used
Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4)
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 File retention impossible
0 1 24 hours
1 0 File retention impossible
1 1 72 hours
Bit 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: RDS operation
0: Not acceptable
1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
NOTE: This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
6800EA(H) to 6800EF(H) - User parameter switch 26 to 31 (SWUSR_1A to 1F)
: Not used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the
specified type
0: Paper output priority
Priority order
1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4. Folder
1: Electric putout order
Priority order
1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax number
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used

6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22)
Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
SM 105 B766
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches – Not used

680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches – Not used
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches
680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service station’s fax number (SP3-101)
6801B0 to 6801B9(H) - Own fax PABX extension number
6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN)
6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) – Not used
6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used
6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used
6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used
6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used
680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680287 to 6802C6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See following note.
6802C7 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See following note.
680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex)
680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex)-
NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for
TTI), add a stop code (00[H]) after the last character.
680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),
02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680381(H) - Year (BCD)
680382(H) - Month (BCD)
680383(H) - Day (BCD)
680384(H) - Hour
680385(H) - Minute
680386(H) - Second
680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 2 to 7; Not used
B766 106 SM
680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
680406 to 68040A – Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)
680406(H) - Suffix (BCD)
680407(H) - Version (BCD)
680408(H) - Year (BCD)
680409(H) - Month (BCD)
68040A(H) - Day (BCD)
68040B to 68040F – Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)
68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD)
68040C(H) - Version (BCD)
68040D(H) - Year (BCD)
68040E(H) - Month (BCD)
68040F(H) - Day (BCD)
680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)
680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)
69ED04 to 69F003(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
69ED04(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69ED84(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F004(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F084(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F104(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F184(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F204(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
SM 107 B766
6A0DC0(H) - Stand-by port number for H.232 connection

6A0DC2(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
6A0DC4(H) - RAS port number
6A0DC6(H) - Gatekeeper port number

6A0DC8(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
6A0DCA(H) - Port number of SIP server
6A0DCC(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
6A0DCD(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A0DCE(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6BEBFE(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper limit (High)
Defaults: NA: 06, EU: 06, ASIA: 06
6BEBFF(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper Limit (Low)
6BEC00(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (High)
6BEC01(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (Low)
6BEC02(H) –Dial tone detection waiting time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 64, EU 64, ASIA: 64
6BEC03 to 6BEC04 – Dial tone detection monitoring time (20 ms)
Defaults
Area 6BEC03 6BEC04
NA F4 01
EU F4 01
ASIA F4 01
6BEC05(H) – Dial tone detect judge time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 64, EU: 1B, ASIA: 32
6BEC06(H) – Dial tone disconnect permission time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 11, EU: 0F, ASIA: 11
B766 108 SM
OVERVIEW
5. DETAILS
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
5.1 OVERVIEW
　　　FCUIF
MBU
to SBCU
Memory DIMM
CCUDRV
GWFCU3
CCUIF
SG3 SG3
B766D901.WMF
The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an MBU.
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with
the controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. Also, the FCU has an
NCU circuit.
Fax Options:
1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This
allows full dual access. Two extra G3 interface options can be installed.
2. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory
(used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big
enough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
SM 109 B766
BOARDS
5.2 BOARDS
5.2.1 FCU
SAF SDRAM DIMM FCU　　

BACKUP (16MB) (32 MB)
FCUIF
DMA BUS
SBCU
PCI BUS
FACE3
CPU BUS
v.34
SRAM FROM MODEM Line
(256kB) (3MB) NCU
Circuit
Speaker
TEL
BACKUP Drive
& RESET
MBU
CCUIF CCUDRV
G3 G3
Speaker
B766D902.WMF
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface
to the base copier’s engine, and all the fax options.
FACE3 (Fax Application Control Engine)
• CPU
• Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
• DMA control
• Clock generation
• DRAM backup control
Modem (FAME)
• V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
DRAM
• The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
SAF memory : 4MB
Working memory : 4MB
Page memory : 8MB
• The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
Memory Back-up
• A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.
B766 110 SM
BOARDS
Fax Option
Type 3030
5.2.2 MBU
B766
On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains
the system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system
data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.
ROM
• 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage
2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)
SRAM
• The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a
lithium battery.
Memory Back-up
• A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in
the SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches
Item Description
SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
SM 111 B766
BOARDS
5.2.3 SG3 BOARD
G3 Board
SG3-D
SG3-D
NCCP
CPU FROM SDRAM
(Ru30) (1MB) (8MB)
DPRAM
DMAC
FCU DCR
JBIG Line
DSP
CODEC AFE NCU
(modem)
+5V +3.3V
REG
B766D903.WMF
The SG3 board allows up to three simultaneous communications when used in

combination with the FCU and optional G3 boards. The NCU is on the same board
as the common SG-3 board. This makes the total board structure smaller. But, the
specifications of the SG3 board do not change.
NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)
• Controls the SG3 board.
• CPU (RU30)
• DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block.
• DMA controller
• JBIG
• DSP V34 modem (RL5T892): Includes the DTMF Receiver function
• DCR for MH, MR, MMR, and JBIG compression and decompression
FROM
• 1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage
SDRAM
• 4Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working memory
AFE (Analog Front End)
• Analog processing
CODEC (COder-DECoder)
• A/D & D/A conversions for modem
REG
• Generates +3.3 V from the +5V from the FCU
B766 112 SM
VIDEO DATA PATH
Fax Option
Type 3030
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH
B766
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION
SCANNER
SBCU
FBI FCU
FACE3
Page Memory
DCR
SAF SG3
DCR QM-CODER DCR QM-CODER
Modem Modem NCCP
NCU NCU
Analog G3 Analog G3
B766D904.WMF
SM 113 B766
VIDEO DATA PATH
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch
format. The SBCU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the SBCU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR
or raw format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the
image is rotated in page memory before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-
compresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU
transmits the data to the line.
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the
receiving terminal. The SBCU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the SBCU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for
transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
• Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.
When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line
type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
• Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the page memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the
line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the
line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
Adjustments
• Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): System
switch 16 bit 1
B766 114 SM
VIDEO DATA PATH
Fax Option
Type 3030
5.3.2 RECEPTION
B766
Analog G3 Analog G3
NCU NCU
Modem Modem
QM-CODER
SAF DCR
CCD (DCR) DCR QM-CODER

NCCP
Page Memory
FACE3
FBI
SG3 FCU
SBCU
Printer
B766D905.WMF
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF
memory. (The data goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error
lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image
rotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is
transferred to the SBCU.
If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends
on the telephone number dialled by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a
different telephone number from the main fax board).
JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line),
the data is sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in
the page memory, and transferred to the SBCU.
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog
line), the data is sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.
SM 115 B766
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4.1 MULTI-PORT
When the optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can take
place at the same time through the two or three lines at once.
Available protocol
Option Available Line Type
Combinations
Standard only PSTN G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit (single) PSTN + PSTN G3 + G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit (double) PSTN + PSTN +PSTN G3 + G3 +G3
B766 116 SM
Fax Option
Type 3030
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER
B766
Scanner Controller
Comoressed
MMR
Page
SBCU
Memory
HDD
FCU
FBI
FACE3 DCR Modem NCU To

PSTN
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
B766D906.WMF
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The IPU
video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board.
Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and
compresses the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation
will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory before compression.
For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU
decompresses the image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if
necessary for transmission. the NCU transmits the data to the line.
The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax
application. The stored documents in the document sever can be used for the fax
transmission in many times. More than one document and the scanned document
can be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted.
• When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
• The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
• Up to 9,000 pages can be stored. (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax
application.
• Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
• Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as “FAX001”. But it is
possible to change the file name, user name and password.
• Up to 30 files can be selected at once.
NOTE: 1) The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy
application. The storing time is longer than the copier storing.
2) When selecting “Print 1st page”, the stored document will be reduced to
A4 size.
SM 117 B766
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

Mail Transmission
This machine supports T.37 full mode. (ITU-, RFC232). The difference between
T.37 simple mode and full mode is as follows.
Function T.37 Simple Mode T.37 Full Mode
Resolution 200 x 100 200 x100
200 x 200 200 x 200
200 x 400
400 x 400 (if available)
RX Paper Width A4 A4, B4, A3
RX Data Compression Method MH MH (default), MR, MMR,
Signals Image data Image data transmission,
transmission only exchange of capability
information between the two
terminals, and
acknowledgement of receipt of
fax messages
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file.
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From Mail address of the sender
Reply To Destination requested for reply
To Mail address of the destination
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content Type Multipart/mixed
Attached files: image/tiff
Content Transfer Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Message Body MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how files
are attached to e-mail messages)
Direct SMTP Transmission

Internet Fax documents can be sent directly to their destinations without going
through the SMTP server. (Internet Faxes normally transmit via the SMTP server.)
For example:
e-mail address: [email protected]
SMTP server address: gts.abcd.com
In this case this feature destination e-mail address ([email protected]) is read as the
SMTP server address "gts.abcd.com" and the transmissions bypass the SMTP
server.
B766 118 SM
Selectable Options
Fax Option
Type 3030
These options are available for selection:
B766
• With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.
Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution
will be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled
with IFAX SW01.
• The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory
capacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory TX.
• The default compression is TIFF-F format.
• IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
• IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
Secure Internet Transmission

• SMTP Authentication:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication
• POP Before SMTP:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP
SM 119 B766
Mail Reception
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:
• POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
• IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
• SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Mail Reception
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure
The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is
adjustable in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval
SMTP Reception
• The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS
server, and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
• Enable SMTP reception:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be
received with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the
MX record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on
the setting:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP
1) The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:
User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery
Settings
2) If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver
mail from designated senders, the machine’s “Auth. E-mail RX” feature must
be set (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings).
3) If the “SMTP RX File Delivery Setting” is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving,
and if there is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with
an error. (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings)
4) If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail
transmission is lost, and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and
outputs an error report.
B766 120 SM
Auth. E-mail RX
Fax Option
Type 3030
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must
B766
be limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1) Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
[email protected] Matches and is delivered.
[email protected] Does not match and is not delivered.
[email protected] Does not match and is not delivered.
2) Conditions
• The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
• If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming
mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and
the SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an error
report is not output.
• If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming
mail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered
unconditionally.
SM 121 B766
Handling Mail Reception Errors

Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the
server to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends
information about the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the “From”
or “Reply-to” field of the message). If there is an incomplete received message in
the machine memory, it will be erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error
notification after a certain number of attempts.
The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the
following are detected:
1. Unsupported MIME headers.
Supported types of MIME header
Header Supported Types
Content-Type Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff
Charset US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled,
and some garbage may appear in the data.
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
2. MIME decoding errors

3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format
4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted
Remaining SAF capacity error

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF
capacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-
mail will be received when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after
substitute reception files have been printed). The error handling method for this
type of error is the same as for “Abnormal files”.
If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine
operates in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to “Abnormal
files” above).
Secure Internet Reception
To enable password encryption and higher level security:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption
(set to “On”)
B766 122 SM
Transfer Request: Request By Mail
Fax Option
Type 3030
B766
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Transfer Request
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From E-mail address of the requesting terminal
To Destination address (Transfer Station address)
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content-Type Multipart/mixed
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Mail body (text part) RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)
RELAY: #01#*X#**01….
Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F.
SM 123 B766
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)

The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject,
designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.
Subject and Level of Importance
You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subject
can also be prefixed with an “Urgent” or “High” notation.
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type
Mail Type
Subject Entry --- Entry Condition
1. “CSI” (“RTI”) Fax Message No.
No Subject 2. “RTI” CSI not registered +
Entry 3. “CSI” RTI not registered File No.
4. None CSI, RTI not registered
1. “CSI” (“RTI”) Normal:
Return Receipt
(dispatched).
2. “RTI” CSI not registered You can select
Confirmation
From “displayed” with IFAX
of Reception
SW02 Bits 2 and 3.
3. “CSI” RTI not registered Error:
Return Receipt
4. None CSI, RTI not registered (processed/error)
RTI or CSI of
the station
Mail delivery
designated for
Mail delivery, delivery
memory
RTI or CSI of Mail sending from G3
transfer, Fax Message No. + File
From sender memory
SMTP Number
receiving and Mail address
Memory sending
delivery of sender
SMTP receiving and
Mail address
delivery (Off Ramp
of sender
Gateway)
Mail error
--- Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
notification
Items of the table above are in the Subject.
Subjects Displayed on the PC
B766D907.WMF
E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with:
B766 124 SM
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
Fax Option
Type 3030
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with:
B766
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail
Message
Limitations on Entries
Item Maximum
Number of Lines 5 lines
Line Length 80 characters
Name Length 20 characters
Message Disposition Notification (MDN)

Internet/LAN Fax Boards – E-mail Options
The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been
received correctly or not. This confirmation is done in four steps.
1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this
request (known as MDN):
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
2. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
3. Send confirmation of mail reception
4. Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other party’s machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions
below are met:
• The other party’s machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
• The other party’s machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
- Setting up the Receiving Party -

The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:
1) The “Disposition Notification To” field is in the received mail header
(automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page,
if MDN is enabled), and
2) Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter
Setting SW21 (15 [H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is
as follows:
Normal reception: “Return Receipt (dispatched)” in the Subject line
IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) “Return Receipt (displayed)” in the Subject line
Error: “Return Receipt (processed/error)” in the Subject line
SM 125 B766
Handling Reports
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender’s
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a “Q” in the
Mode column.
2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt
Response
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the
mail receiver’s journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column
and an “A” in the Mode column.
3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail
• After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail
sender’s journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is
annotated with “OK” in the Result column.
• When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an “E”
in the Result column.
• The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate
communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of “OK” or “E” in
the Result column.
• If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group
destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See “How
to set up Mail Delivery”), the Result column of the Journal is updated every
time a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5
destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communication
with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:
If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E,
even if subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the
destination for the first error only.
Report Sample
DATE TIME ADDRESS MODE TIME PAGE RESULT
MAY. 5 10:15 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SM 0'09" 2 --

10:16 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'05" 1 --
10:17 s_tadashi@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'09" 2 OK
10:19 m_masataka@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMA 0'05" 1 --
B766D909.WMF
B766 126 SM
IP-FAX
Fax Option
Type 3030
5.5 IP-FAX
B766
What is IP-FAX?
Internet/LAN Fax Boards – IP-FAX
T.38 Packet Format
TCP is selected by default for this machine, but you can change this to UDP with
IPFAX SW 00 Bit 1.
UDP Related Switches
IP-Fax Switch 01
0-3 Select IP FAX Delay Level Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too
Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting many transmission errors are occurring on the
0 0 0 0 Level 0 network.
0 0 0 1 Level 1 If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise this
0 0 1 0 Level 2 setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing the delay
0 0 1 1 Level 3 time allows the recovery of more lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the number of
redundant packets.
Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3: 4 Redundant packets
Settings
User parameter switch 34 (22[H]), bit 0
IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage 0: No, 1: Yes
IP Fax Switches: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)
SM 127 B766
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
6. SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Type: Desktop type transceiver
Circuit: PSTN (max. 3ch.)
PABX
Connection: Direct couple
Original Size: Book (Face down)
Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
(Single-sided document)
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(Double-sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD
Resolution: G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note1
16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note 1
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note 1
NOTE: 1. Optional Expansion Memory required
Transmission Time: G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using
memory for an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at
standard resolution
Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR
JBIG
Protocol: Group 3 with ECM
Modulation: V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),

V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)
Data Rate: G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
I/O Rate: With ECM: 0 ms/line
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
B766 128 SM
CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS
Memory Capacity: ECM: 128 KB
Fax Option
Type 3030
SAF
B766
Standard: 4 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24
MB)
Page Memory
Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 12 MB (4 MB + 8
MB)
(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
6.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed.
Item Standard
Quick Dial 2000
Groups 100
Destination per Group 500
Destinations dialed from the ten-key pad overall 500
Programs 100
Auto Document 6
Communication records for Journal stored in the 200
memory
Specific Senders 30
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory
are installed.
Without the With the Expansion

Expansion Memory Memory
Memory Transmission
400 400
file
Maximum number of
page for memory 1000 1000
transmission
Memory capacity for
memory transmission 320 2240
( Note1)
NOTE: Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the standard
resolution, the auto image density mode and the Text mode.
SM 129 B766
IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
6.3 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS

Connectivity Protocol
Local area network Transmission:
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T SMTP, TCP/IP
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394) Reception:
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN) POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
Resolution Data rate
Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi 100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi 10 Mbps (10base-T)
NOTE: To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit
Authentication method
4 must be set to “1”.
SMTP-AUTH
Transmission Time POP before SMTP
1 s (through a LAN to the server) A-POP
Condition: ITU-T #1 test document Remark
(Selerexe Letter) The machine must be set up as an e-
MTF correction: OFF mail client before installation. Any
TTI: None client PCs connected to the machine
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi through a LAN must also be e-mail
Communication speed: 10 Mbps clients, or some features will not work
Correspondent device: E-mail server (e.g. Autorouting).
Line conditions: No terminal access
Document Size
Maximum message width is A4/LT.
Note: To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX
SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2 (A3)
must be set to “1”.
E-mail File Format
Single/multi-part
MIME conversion
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
B766 130 SM
IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Fax Option
Type 3030
6.4 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
B766
Network: LAN: Local Area Network
Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX,
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394),
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Scan line density: 8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200x100dpi (standard character),

8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200x200dpi (detail character),
8 x 15.4lines/mm (fine character: optional expansion
memory required),
16 x 15.4lines/mm, 400x400dpi (super fine
character: optional expansion memory required)
Original size: Maximum A3 or 11"x 17" (DLT)
Maximum scanning size: Standard: A3, 297mm x 432mm

Irregular: 297mm x 1200mm
Transmission protocol: Recommended: T.38 Annex protocol,

TCP, UDP/IP communication
Compatible machines: IP-Fax compatible machines
IP-Fax transmission Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax

function: compatible fax through a network.
Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax
connected to the public telephone lines via a VoIP
gateway.
IP-Fax reception function: Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax
through a network.
Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax
connected the public telephone lines via a VoIP
gateway.
SM 131 B766
FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION
6.5 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION
6 5 4 B766I912.WMFF
Component Code No. Remarks

FCU 3
MBU B766 2 Included with fax unit
FCU Interface 1
CCU Drive Board 5
Interface Board B768 6 Included with optional G3 unit.
G3 Board 7
Expansion Memory G578 4 Common with B180.
Handset Type 1018 B433 USA only. Common with B180
Marker Type 30 H903 Refill for stamp ink.
B766 132 SM
PRINTER/SCANNER OPTION
B767
PRINTER OPTION
B846


details
 Screw
 Connector
 E-ring
 Clip ring
 Clamp
Sideways, LEF
Lengthwise, SEF
(Long Edge Feed)
(Short Edge Feed)

WARNING
DEATH.
CAUTION
Important
IMPORTANT
machine.
B767/B846
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 1
Board, SD Card Slots............................................................................... 1
Board Slots .............................................................................................. 2
1.2 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD ......................................... 3
1.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 3
1.2.2 MERGING APPLICATIONS ................................................................ 4
1.2.3 UNDO EXEC ....................................................................................... 5
1.3 INSTALLING CONTROLLER OPTIONS ...................................................... 6
1.3.1 P/S UNIT (B767), P UNIT (B846), 256 MB MEMORY (G818)............. 6
Accessories ............................................................................................. 6
Printer/Scanner Installation...................................................................... 7
1.3.2 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD (B679)........................................... 11
1.3.4 IEEE 802.11B INTERFACE KIT (G813) ............................................ 14
1.3.5 BLUETOOTH UNIT (B736)................................................................ 17
1.3.6 POSTSCRIPT 3 UNIT (B757)............................................................ 18
1.3.7 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609)................................................ 19
1.4 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS .................................................................... 20
2. DETAILS.........................................................................................21
2.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 21
3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................22
3.1 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE....................................................................... 22
3.2 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE ..................................................................... 23
4. SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................................24
4.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS .......................................................................... 24
4.2 SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................................... 25
4.2.1 PRINTER CONTROLLER (GENERAL) ............................................. 25
4.2.2 USB SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... 26
4.2.3 IEEE 802.11B SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................... 26
4.2.4 IEEE 1394 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................... 26
4.2.5 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................... 26
4.2.6 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... 27
4.2.7 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES ........................................................... 27
PRINTER ............................................................................................... 24
PRINTER DRIVERS .............................................................................. 27
SCANNER ............................................................................................. 28
SM i B767/B846
OVERVIEW
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 OVERVIEW
Board, SD Card Slots
The machine controller box has two board slots and three SD card slots. Make
sure that each board and SD card is put in the correct slot.
C1
C2
Scanner B767
Printer B846
Printer/
Slot 1
Slot 2
C3
B767I901.WMF
The names of the slots for the boards and SD cards are embossed on the face of
the controller plate.
Slot 1, Slot 2
The optional boards are inserted here (see the next page).
SD Card Slots
C1 Printer/Scanner B767, or Printer Option B846. The printer/scanner option or
printer option also requires installation of the 256 MB memory.
C2 PostScript3 B757 or Data Overwrite Security B770. The DOS option can be
moved to the PostScript SD card if both options will be used.
C3 Service slot for firmware version updates, moving applications to other SD
cards, and downloading/uploading NVRAM contents.
SM 1 B767/B846
OVERVIEW
Board Slots
Two slots are available for the following boards:

B767I101.WMF
Slot Board
1 or 2 File Format Converter B609 (MLB)
1 or 2 Bluetooth Interface Unit B736*1
1 or 2 IEEE802.11b G813 – Wireless LAN*1
1 or 2 IEEE1284 Interface Board B679 – Centronics*1
1 or 2 IEEE1394 Interface Board B581 – FireWire*1
*1 Only one of these boards can be installed at one time.
B767/B846 2 SM
MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD
1.2 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD

1.2.1 OVERVIEW
The machine has three SD card slots:
• C1 is for the printer/scanner option only.
• C2 is for the PostScript3 or the Data
Overwrite Security SD card. If both
C1
options must be installed, the DOS
application must be moved to the PS3
SD card.
• C3 is used for servicing only. Otherwise,
C2
this slot should always be empty.
Slot 1
Slot 2
C3
Scanner B767
Printer B846
Printer/
B767I902.WMF
Important
• The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program
to the target SD card.
• Do not use an SD card if it was used with a computer before this time. Correct
operation is not guaranteed if this type of SD card is used.
• The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the
application program. The service technician may occasionally need to check the
SD card and its data to solve problems. SD cards must be stored in a safe
location at the work site.
• A licensing agreement prohibits copying of the PostScript SD card. However, you
can copy an application from another SD card to the PS SD card.
• If an SD card was used to combine applications on that card, that SD card
cannot be used for a different function.
SM 3 B767/B846
1.2.2 MERGING APPLICATIONS

Do this procedure to put more than one application on one SD card.
This procedure shows you how to move the DOS application to the PS3 SD card.
1. Turn off the copier.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x2).
3. Put the Source (DOS) SD card in C3. This card contains the application that
you want to copy.
NOTE: The PS SD card cannot be the source card because it cannot be
copied.
4. Put the Target (PS3) SD card in C2. The application on the card in C3 will be
copied to this card.
5. Open the front door.
6. Turn the copier on.
7. Go into the SP mode and select SP5873 001.
8. Touch "Execute".
9. Read the instructions on the display and touch "Execute" to start copying.
10. When the display tells you copying is completed, touch "Exit".
11. Turn the copier off.
12. Remove the Source SD card from C3. Keep the target SD card in C2.
14. Go into the User Tools mode and check that all the applications on the SD card
in C2 are enabled:
User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version> Next
15. Turn the copier off again, then:
• Attach the SD card slot cover.
• Attach the rear cover of the machine.
Important!
• After an SD card is copied, it cannot be used. But it must be kept by the
customer, to serve as proof of purchase by the customer.
• The original card can also be used to perform an undo procedure (SP 5873
002). Before you store the card in a safe place, label it carefully so that you
can identify it easily if you need to do the undo procedure (see the next
page).
B767/B846 4 SM
1.2.3 UNDO EXEC
1. Turn the main switch off.

2. Put the SD card with the merged applications in C2.
3. Put the original destination SD card (the one that is kept by the customer) into
C3.
NOTE: The SD card in C3 must be the original SD card for the application you
want to move from C2 to C3. You cannot use a different blank SD card
in C3.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Go into the SP mode and do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec).
6. Follow the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
8. Remove the SD cards from the slots.
Scanner B767
Printer B846
Printer/
SM 5 B767/B846
INSTALLING CONTROLLER OPTIONS
1.3 INSTALLING CONTROLLER OPTIONS

1.3.1 P/S UNIT (B767), P UNIT (B846), 256 MB MEMORY (G818)
Accessories
Description Q'ty
1. HDD...................................................................................1
2. Standoff (double) ...............................................................1
3. Standoff (single).................................................................1
4. Harness Clamps ................................................................1
5. Screws ..............................................................................2
6. Stamp Cartridge*1 ..............................................................1
7. Ferrite Core........................................................................1
8. HDD Harness.....................................................................1
9. AC Harness .......................................................................1
10. Printer/scanner SD card, or P SD Card .............................1
11. NA Keytop Set*2 ................................................................1
12. EU Keytop Set*2 ................................................................1
*1 Not provided with the Printer Unit (B846).
*2 Only scanner keytop set is not used for the Printer Unit (B846)
NOTE: The Optional Memory (G818) is required for both Printer/Scanner Unit
(B767) and the Printer Unit (B846)
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 8
10
12 11 B767I102.WMF
B767/B846 6 SM
Printer/Scanner Installation
CAUTION
[A]
1. Remove cover [A] ( x1).
2. Remove controller board [B] ( x1).
[B]
B767I103.WMF
Scanner B767
Printer B846
Printer/
[C]
3. Install the 256 MB memory DIMM [C].
B767I104.WMF
[D]
4. Attach:
• Harness clamp [D]
• Double standoff [E] [G]
• Single standoff [F]
5. Attach the HDD [G] to the controller
board ( x2).
[E]
B767I105.WMF
[F]
SM 7 B767/B846
6. Connect the HDD harness [A] ( x2). [A]

7. Connect the AC harness [B] ( x2, [B]
 x1)
around both cables.
B767I106.WMF
9. Insert the Printer/Scanner SD card [C]

in SD card slot C1. [C]
10. Remove the "USB" knockout [D] and

"NIC" knockout [E].
11. Reattach the application cover.
[D] [E]
B767I107.WMF
12. Attach the ferrite core [F] to the LAN [F]

cable [G].
[G]
B767I903.WMF
B767/B846 8 SM
13. Connect the LAN cable [A] to the "NIC"

connection.
14. Connect the USB cable [B] to the "USB"
connection.
North America Only
15. Open the clamp [C] and close it around [B]
the USB cable. [A]
USB
LAN
[C] B767I109.WMF

Scanner B767
16. Remove the 1st, 2nd, 4th, and 5th
Printer B846
blank key tops.
Printer/

NOTE: The 3rd blank keytop from
the top is reserved for the "Fax"
keytop. Do not remove it at this time.
17. Replace the blank keytops:
Copy
Document Server
Printer
Scanner (P/S Unit only)
B767I108.WMF
18. Attach the stamp cartridge [D] if the ARDF

is installed. (P/S Unit only)
[D]
B502I006.WMF
SM 9 B767/B846
19. Connect the machine’s power cord and turn the main power switch on.
20. Enable the network and USB functions.
Important: The NIB and USB functions must be enabled with SP5985. These
functions are built into the controller.
• To enable the Ethernet function, enter the SP mode and set SP5985-001 (On
Board NIC) to "1" (Enable).
• To enable the USB function, enter the SP mode and set SP5985-002 (On
Board USB) to “1" (Enable).
21. If there was no HDD in the machine before you installed the printer/scanner
unit or printer unit, do SP5846 41 to let the user get access to the address book.
Important
• This SP must be done immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a
machine that previously had no HDD.
• The first time the machine power is turned on with the new HDD installed, the
system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it
on the new HDD. But, only the system administrator can get access to the
new address book on the HDD at this time.
• If you do SP5846 41 immediately after power on, then all users can use the
address book.
22. If there was no HDD in the machine before you installed the printer/scanner
unit or printer unit, do SP5853 to copy the preset stamp data to the hard disk.
Then turn the main power switch off/on.
B767/B846 10 SM
1.3.2 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD (B679)

Accessories
Description Q'ty
1. IEEE 1284 Interface Board B679......................................... 1
CAUTION
NOTE: You can only install one of these network interfaces: IEEE 802.11b
(Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), IEEE1394 (FireWire),
Bluetooth.
Scanner B767
Printer B846
Printer/
[A]
[B]
B767I904.WMF
1. Remove the cover [A] of board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1)

2. Install the interface board [B] ( x2 knob screws)
NOTE: Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob-screws. Do not tighten manually,
because this can disconnect the board.
3. Reattach the application cover ( x1)
SM 11 B767/B846

Accessories
Description Q'ty
CAUTION
NOTE: You can only install one of these network interface boards: IEEE 802.11b
(Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), IEEE1394 (FireWire), or
Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
B767I905.WMF
1. Remove the cover [A] of board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1).

2. Install the interface board [B] ( x1 knob screw).
NOTE: Use a screwdriver to tighten the knob-screw. Do not tighten manually,
3. Reattach the application cover ( x1).
B767/B846 12 SM
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 1394. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
1. Press the “User Tools/Counter”key.
2. On the touch panel, press “System Settings”.
3. Press “Interface Settings”.
4. Press “IEEE1394”.
5. Press the following soft keys on the touch panel. Then select the following
settings:
• “IP Address”. Select the “AUTO-Obtain (DHCP) ” or “Specify”. When you
select “Specify”, you can set the IP Address and Subnet Mask manually.
• “IP over 1394”.
• Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables IP over 1394
as the default setting for the printing method.
• “SCSI Print”. Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables
Scanner B767
SCSI Print as the default setting for the printing method.
Printer B846
Printer/
• “Bi-directional SCSI Print”. Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI
print.
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394
The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.
SP No. Name Function

5839 004 Device Name Sets the name of the device used on the network.
Example: RNPXXXXXXXXXX
5839 007 Cycle Master Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE
1394 standard bus.
5839 008 BCR Mode Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting for
the Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus
for when IRM is not in use. The following three settings
are available: “Standard,” “IRM Color Copy,” and
“Always Effective.”
5839 009 IRM 1394a Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394a is
Check conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.
5839 010 Unique ID Enables the “Node_Unique_Id” setting for enumeration
on the standard IEEE 1394 bus.
5839 011 Logout Determines how successive initiator login requests are
handled during login in for SBP-2.
5839 012 Login Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.
5839 013 Login MAX Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range:
1 ~ 62.
SM 13 B767/B846
1.3.4 IEEE 802.11B INTERFACE KIT (G813)

Accessories
Description Q'ty
1. IEEE 802.11b Board ..............................................................1
2. PCI Card ................................................................................1
3. Antenna cap ..........................................................................1
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
B767I906.WMF
CAUTION
NOTE: You can only install one of the following network interfaces at the same
time: IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics),
IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth.
1. Remove the cover [A] of board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1)
2. Attach the interface board [B] to the controller board ( x1 knob screw).
3. With the printed side facing the front of the machine, insert the interface card
[C] board.
4. Attach the antenna cap [D].
B767/B846 14 SM
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

settings for IEEE 802.11b. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
NOTE: You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.
1. Press the “User Tools/Counter” key.
NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or
wireless LAN.
3. Select “Interface Settings”> “Network”> “Network I/F Setting”
4. Press “IEEE 802.11b”. Only the wireless LAN options show.
5. Communication Mode. Select either “802.11 Ad hoc”, “Ad hoc” or
“Infrastructure”.
6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
Scanner B767
7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Printer B846
Printer/
Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)
NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different
countries.
8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is
designed to protect wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is required
on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128
bit WEP keys.
WEP:
Selects “Active” or “Inactive”. (“Inactive” is default.)
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit 10 characters
SM 15 B767/B846
9. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then
select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,
1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the
closest machine or access point. This depends on which mode is selected.
NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and
the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the
distance between the machine and the closest access point.
11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)
10. Press “Return to Default” to initialize the wireless LAN settings.
Press “Yes” to initialize the following settings:
• Transmission mode
• Channel
• Transmission Speed
• WEP
• SSID
• WEP Key
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN
The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11b

5840 006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the
country.
5840 007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings
allowed for your country.
5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
UP mode Name Function
SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
WEP Mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that can
be used for the WEP Key entry.
B767/B846 16 SM
1.3.5 BLUETOOTH UNIT (B736)

Accessories
Description Q'ty
1. Bluetooth Unit B736.............................................................1
2. PCI Card..............................................................................1
3. Cap ......................................................................................1
[A]
Scanner B767
Printer B846
Printer/
[C]
[D]
[B]
B767I907.WMF
CAUTION
NOTE: You can only install one of these network interfaces at the same time: IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), IEEE1394
(FireWire), Bluetooth.
1. Remove the cover [A] of board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1).
2. Attach the interface board [B] to the controller board ( x2 knob screws).
3. Install the Bluetooth card [C] in the slot in the Bluetooth unit.
SM 17 B767/B846
1.3.6 POSTSCRIPT 3 UNIT (B757)

Accessories
Description Q'ty
1. PostScript 3 Emulation SD Card............................................1
2. Decal .....................................................................................1
[B]
[A]
B767I708.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove the application cover [A] ( x1).

2. With the printed side of the SD card [B] facing the rear of the machine, install
4. Attach the “Adobe PostScript 3” decal to the front cover.
B767/B846 18 SM
1.3.7 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609)

Accessories
Description Q'ty
1. File Format Converter Board B609 ...................................... 1
[A]
Scanner B767
Printer B846
Printer/
[B]
B767I909.WMF
CAUTION
Important: This option also requires installation of the Printer/Scanner Unit B767
or the Printer Unit B846.
1. Remove the cover [A] of Board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1).
2. Install the board [B] ( x2 knob screws).
SM 19 B767/B846
CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS
1.4 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS

1. Connect the machine’s power cord and turn on the main switch.
2. Go into the printer user mode and print the configuration page.
User Tools> Printer Settings> List Test Print> Config. Page
NOTE: The same data can also be printed with printer SP1-004 – Print
Summary. All installed options are listed in the “System Reference”
column.
B767/B846 20 SM
Rev. 02/2006 OVERVIEW
2. DETAILS
⇒2.1 OVERVIEW
Enhanced and New Printer Features Table for B205/B209
B089/B093
Feature versus Description
B205/B209
Sample Print Enhanced Outputs a single hard copy of the document so it can be
checked for errors or irregularities. If the sample copy
looks acceptable, the user can enter a number to print
additional copies. This feature can be used before setting
up large copy jobs.
Locked Print Enhanced Printing a document requires a password entry. This
feature is useful for protecting sensitive information.
Hold Print New Documents are stored on the printer HDD (similar to a
locked print) but printing does not require a password
entry.
Stored Print New Documents are stored on the printer HDD and printed as
needed. This is useful for documents that are printed
Scanner B767
frequently (applications, catalogs, etc.)
Printer B846
Printer/
B205/B209 Printer Features Comparison Table
Model Feature Storage Sort Multiple File Save at File Save
Capacity by Print/Delete Power Password After
User Off Printing
ID
B089/B093 Sample 30*1 No No No Yes (4-digit) No
Print
Locked No No No NO No
Print
B205/B209 Sample 100*1 Yes Yes Yes Yes (4-8 No
Print digits)
Locked Yes Yes Yes No No
Print
Hold Yes Yes Yes No No
Print
Stored Yes Yes Yes Optional (4- Yes
Print 8 digits)
*1 Total number of files (includes all job types).
SM 21 B767/B846
PRINTER SERVICE TABLE
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE
SP Number/Bit SW Initial
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit SW 1 00H Adjusts the bit switch settings.
002 Bit SW 2 00H Note: These bit switches are
003 Bit SW 3 00H currently not being used
004 Bit SW 4 00H
005 Bit SW 5 00H
006 Bit SW 6 00H
007 Bit SW 7 00H
008 Bit SW 8 00H
SP Number/Name Function/[Setting]
1003 Clear setting
001 Initialize Printer System Initializes the settings in the printer
feature settings of UP mode.
002 Clear CSS Counter DFU
003 Delete Program DFU
1004 Print Summary Prints the printer summary sheet.
1005 Display Version. Displays the version of the controller
firmware.
1006 Sample/Proof Print [0~1/0/1]
0: Link with Doc. Server
1: Enable
SP Function/[Setting]
7910 PDL Part No. Information
Returns a text string for the version.
RPCS 150 R55 156 PDF 162
PS 151 RTIFF 157 BMLinks 163
RPDL 152 PCL 156 PICTBRIDGE 164
R98 153 PCLXL 159 FONT 180
R16 154 MSIS 160 FONT1 181
RPGL 155 MSIS (OPT) 161 FONT2 182
FONT3 183
7911 PDL Version Information Returns a text string for the version.
RPCS 150 R55 156 PDF 162
R98 153 PCLXL 159 FONT 180
R16 154 MSIS 160 FONT1 181
FONT3 183
B767/B846 22 SM
SCANNER SERVICE TABLE
3.2 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE

1004 Compression Type Selects the compression type for binary
picture processing.
[1-3/1/1]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
1005 Erase Margin Creates an erase margin for all edges of the
scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the
original, create a margin.
[0 – 5/0/1mm]
1009 Forbid Using TWAIN Sets the system not to use the network
TWAIN scanner driver.
0: Not forbidden (can use TWAIN)
1: Forbid using TWAIN driver.
2021 Compression level (grayscale)
Scanner B767
Printer B846
These SP codes set the compression ratio for the grayscale processing mode that
Printer/
can be selected with the notch settings on the operation panel.
Range: 5 (lowest ratio) ÅÆ 95 (highest ratio)
2021 1 Level 3 (Middle I-Qual) [5~95/40/1/step]
2021 2 Level 2 (High I-Qual) [5~95/50/1/step]
2021 3 Level 4 (Low I-Qual) [5~95/30/1/step]
2021 4 Level 1 (Highest I-Qual) [5~95/60/1/step]
2021 5 Level 5 (Lowest I-Qual) [5~95/20/1/step]
Compression Notch Assignment
5
3
1
2
4
B767I910.WMF
SM 23 B767/B846
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
4. SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

B767I101.WMF
No. Item Code Remarks

File Format Converter (MLB) B609 Slot 1 or 2
Bluetooth Interface Unit*1 B736
IEEE802.11b – Wireless LAN*1 G813
IEEE1284 Interface Board – Centronics*1 B679
IEEE1394 Interface Board – FireWire*1 B581
6 Memory 256 MB G818 Not shown
7 USB 2.0 --- Built into controller board
8 NIB Network Interface ---
9 PostScript 3*2 B757 SD Card (C2)
10 Printer Scanner Unit B767 SD Card (C1)
11 Printer Unit B846 SD Card (C1)
*2 If both PS3 and DOS (Data Overwrite Security B735) are required, DOS must be
moved to the PS3 SD card with SP5878 1. ( Error! Reference source not found.)
B767/B846 24 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
4.2 SPECIFICATIONS
4.2.1 PRINTER CONTROLLER (GENERAL)
Printing Speed: Maximum 25 ppm (A4/LT LEF): B205
Maximum 30 ppm (A4/LT LEF): B209
Printer Languages: PCLXL/PCL5e
PostScript 3 (option)
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream) - an original Ricoh PDL)
Resolution (Driver): RPCS 200/600 dpi
PS3 600 dpi
PCL5e 300/600 dpi
PCLXL 600 dpi
Resident Fonts: PCL TrueType: 10, Intellifont: 35, International: 13, Bitmap: 1
PS3 Option fonts PS3
Connectivity Std. RJ-45 network port (100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, USB 2.0)
Option IEEE1394 (FireWire), IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN), Bluetooth,
Scanner B767
Printer B846
IEEE1284 (Centronics Parallel)
Printer/
Network Protocols TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, SMB (NetBIOS over TCP/IP), AppleTalk (Auto
Switching)
RAM: Maximum 384 MB (Resident 128 MB + Additional 256 MB)
Note: Additional 256 MB is required for the printer/scanner unit and
printer unit.
SM 25 B767/B846
SPECIFICATIONS
4.2.2 USB SPECIFICATIONS

USB connectivity is built into the controller.
Interface USB 1.1, USB 2.0

Data rates 480 Mbps (high speed), 12 Mbps (full speed), 1.5 Mbps (low speed)
High speed mode is only supported by USB 2.0.
4.2.3 IEEE 802.11B SPECIFICATIONS
Standard applied IEEE802.11b

Data transmission rates Speed Distance
11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)
Network protocols TCP/IP, Apple Talk, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, SMB
Bandwidth 2.4GHz
(divided over 14 channels, 2400 to 2497 MHz for each
channel)
4.2.4 IEEE 1394 SPECIFICATIONS
Interface IEEE 1394 (firewire)

Number of Ports 2 ports
Data Transmission Speed 400 Mbps, 200 Mbps, 100 Mbps
Available Features, SCSI print IP over 1384
Functions, Protocols Print Print, Scan
SBP-2 TCP/IP
4.2.5 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission Specifications Based on Bluetooth V1.1

Data Transfer Speed 1 Mbps
Profile Hard Copy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP),
Serial Port Profile (SPP), BIP
Distance Between Devices 10 m (The maximum distance when using outdoors,
otherwise depends on the office environment.)
B767/B846 26 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
4.2.6 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS

Standard Scanner Resolution: Main scan/Sub scan 600 dpi
Scanning Speed 52 ipm, E-mail/Scan-to-Folder/Network Delivery Scanner (A4 LEF,
Text 200 dpi, MH Compression)
Available scanning Resolution 100 ~ 1200 dpi; When used as a Network TWAIN
Range: scanner.
100, 200, 300, 400, 600 dpi; When used as a network
delivery scanner or for sending
e-mail
Grayscales: 8 bits/pixel
Interface: Ethernet 10/100BASE TX, IP over IEEE1394, Wireless LAN
802.11b
Compression Method: MH, MR, MMR (Binary Picture Processing)
JPEG (Grayscale Processing)
Video Memory Capacity: 384 MB
Image Storage Capacity: Number of originals per file: Maximum 1,000 pages
Maximum of files: 3000 files
Max. Storage on Doc. Svr. 9,000 pages (B&W (ITUT No. 1/200 dpi MMR)
Scanner B767
Printer B846
Printer/
4.2.7 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
PRINTER
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run
installer allows you to select which components to install.
PRINTER DRIVERS
Printer Windows Windows Windows 2000, XP,
Macintosh
Language 95/98/Me NT4.0 Server 2003
PCL 6 Yes Yes Yes No
PCL 5e Yes Yes Yes No
PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes
RPCS Yes Yes Yes No
NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86
platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC,
Alpha, or MIPS platforms.
2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows
2000/XP/Server 2003, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each
operating system is provided with the driver.
SM 27 B767/B846
SPECIFICATIONS
Utility Software
Software Description
Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 (Win A font management utility with screen fonts for
95/98/Me, NT4, 2000) the printer.
SmartNetMonitor for Admin (Win 95/98/Me, A printer management utility for network
NT4, 2000/XP/Server 2003) administrators. NIB setup utilities are also
available.
SmartNetMonitor for Client (Win 95/98/Me, A printer management utility for client users.
NT4, 2000/XP/Server 2003) Peer-to-peer printing utility and
parallel/recovery printing functions are
included.
1394 Utility (Win 2000/XP) A utility for removal IEEE 1394 printers.
LAN-Fax M3 Driver (Win 95/98/Me, NT4, This driver allows use of the LAN-Fax
2000/XP) functions by installing the LAN-Fax driver,
Address Book, and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet
Editor.
Printer Utility for Mac This software provides several convenient
functions for printing from Macintosh clients.
USB Printing Support A utility for the USB 2.0 board. A computer
running Windows 98 SE or Windows ME
requires installation of this utility.
Acrobat Reader A utility that allows reading PDF files.
SCANNER
The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM.
Scanner Driver
• Network Twain Driver for Win95/98/Me/NT4/2000/XP/Server 2003
Scanner Utilities
• Scan Router V2 Lite for Win95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP
• Desk Top Binder V2 Lite for Win95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003
B767/B846 28 SM
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
B810
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
B810
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVERS................................................................... 1
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ................................................................................ 2
1.3 LEFT COVER ............................................................................................... 2
1.4 PICK-UP ROLLER........................................................................................ 3
1.5 FEED BELT .................................................................................................. 3
1.6 SEPARATION ROLLER ............................................................................... 4
1.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS...................................... 4
1.8 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR ........................... 5
1.9 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE .............................................................................. 6
DF Feed Clutch........................................................................................ 6
Pick-up Solenoid ...................................................................................... 6
Transport Motor ....................................................................................... 6
DF Feed Motor......................................................................................... 6
1.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR......................................................................... 7
1.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR ................................ 8
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................9

2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................... 10
2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION............................................ 11
2.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 12
2.5 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.................................................................... 13
2.6 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE ................................................................. 16
2.7 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION .................................................................... 17
2.8 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT.......................................................... 18
2.8.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS............................................................. 18
2.8.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ........................................................... 19
2.8.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR............................................. 20
2.9 STAMP ....................................................................................................... 21
2.10 TIMING CHART........................................................................................ 22
2.11 CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION.......................................................... 23
2.12 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT .......................................................... 24
3. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................25
3.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 25
SM i B810
DF EXIT TABLE AND COVERS
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning
NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.

: See or Refer to  : Screws  : Connector  : Clip ring
 : E-ring
1.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVERS
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B386R506.WMF
1. Open the DF feed cover.

2. Front cover [A] ( x 3)
3. Rear cover [B] ( x 3)
4. Open the reverse table [C].
5. Original exit table [D] ( x 3)
SM 1 B810
ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
1.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
[A]
B386R500.WMF
1. Open the left cover.

2. Detach the paper feed unit by sliding it toward the front of the machine (spring-
loaded side) and then lifting the far side.
1.3 LEFT COVER
[B]
[A]
B386R507.WMF
1. Front and rear covers

2. Left cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Lower left stay unit [B] ( x 2)
B810 2 SM
PICK-UP ROLLER
1.4 PICK-UP ROLLER
Auto Reverse
Document
[A]
Feeder
B810
1. Original feed unit.
2. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1)
B386R501.WMF
1.5 FEED BELT

[A]
1. Original feed unit
2. Open the paper feed guide [A].
3. Belt holders [B]
4. Feed belt [C]
• Push in on the bottom of the roller
and lift slightly to remove the belt.
B386R204.WMF
[C]
[B]
B386R205.WMF
SM 3 B810
SEPARATION ROLLER
1.6 SEPARATION ROLLER
[A]
[C]
[B]
B386R502.WMF
1. Lift the original feed guide [A].

2. Separation roller cover [B]
3. Separation roller [C]
1.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B386R201.WMF
1. Open the left cover.

2. While pushing the left and right pawls [A], open the original feed guide plate [B].
3. Original set sensor [C]
4. Original reverse sensor [D]
B810 4 SM
ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR
1.8 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE
Auto Reverse
Document
SENSOR
Feeder
B810
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E] [D]
B386R503.WMF
B386R504.WMF
1. Open the original table [A].

2. Upper part of the table ( x 3)
3. Replace the width sensor board [B], length sensor (-1 [C] and -2 [D]) and
trailing edge sensor [E].
[F]
NOTE: To ensure proper detection of paper
size, after wiping off the sensor
board and terminal plate with a dry
cloth (or cloth with alcohol), apply
silicone grease (KS-660) to the
terminal plate [F].
B386R505.WMF
SM 5 B810
ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE
1.9 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B386R202.WMF
[E]
First remove the rear cover. Then follow the instructions below for each part
replacement:
DF Feed Clutch
1. DF feed clutch [A] ( x 1,  x 1)
Pick-up Solenoid
1. Pick-up solenoid [B] ( x 3,  x 1,  x 1)
Transport Motor
1. Bracket [C] ( x 2)
2. Transport motor [E] ( x 2,  x 1)
DF Feed Motor
1. Bracket [C] ( x 2)
2. DF feed motor [D] ( x 2,  x 1)
B810 6 SM
REGISTRATION SENSOR
1.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[B]
[A] B386R508.WMF
1. Front and rear covers

2. Transport guide plate [A]
3. Registration sensor [B]
SM 7 B810
STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR
1.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR
[A] [B]
[C]
B386R509.WMF
[D]
B386R203.WMF
1. Rear cover ( x 1)
2. Upper cover and the exit tray
3. Open the exit guide plate [A]. Detach the unit by inserting a screwdriver into
one of the small openings [B] on either side of the guide plate holder and
pushing firmly.
4. Stamp solenoid [C] ( x 1)
5. Original exit sensor [D] ( x 1)
B810 8 SM
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2
19 B386D201.WMF
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
1. Separation Roller 11. Reverse Roller

2. Paper Feed Belt 12. Junction Gate
3. Pick-up Roller 13. Exit Roller
4. Original Set Sensor 14. Original Exit Sensor
5. Original Trailing Edge Sensor 15. Stamp
6. Original Width Sensor Board 16. 2nd Transport Roller
7. Original Length Sensor 1 17. Original Exposure Guide
8. Original Length Sensor 2 18. Registration Sensor
9. Original Table 19. 1st Transport Roller
10. Reverse Table
SM 9 B810
1 2 3
17 4
5
16 6
15 7
8
14
13
9
12 10
11 B386D202.WMF
1. DF Feed Clutch 10. DF Feed Motor

2. Feed Cover Sensor 11. DF Transport Motor
3. Original Width Sensor Board 12. Original Exit Sensor
4. Original Length Sensor 1 13. Stamp Solenoid
5. DF Pick-up Solenoid 14. Original Trailing Edge Sensor
6. Original Length Sensor 2 15. Original Set Sensor
7. Junction Gate Solenoid 16. Original Reverse Sensor
8. DF Drive PCB 17. Registration Sensor
9. DF Position Sensor
B810 10 SM
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
Motors
DF Feed Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and
M1 10
reverse table rollers.
M2 DF Transport Drives the transport and exit rollers 11
Sensors
S1 DF Position Detects whether the DF is lifted or not. 9
Registration Detects the leading edge of the original to turn
off the DF feed and transport motors, detects
S2 17
the original exposure timing, and checks for
original misfeeds.
Feed Cover Open Detects whether the feed-in cover is opened or
S3 2
Sensor not.
Original Width Detects the original width.
S4 3
Sensor Board
S5 Original Length - 1 Detects the original length. 4
S6 Original Length - 2 Detects the original length. 6
S7 Original Set Detects if an original is on the feed table. 15
Original Exit Detects the leading edge of the original to turn
on the junction gate solenoid and checks for
original misfeeds.
Detects the trailing edge of the original to turn
S8 12
off the transport and feed motor and junction
gate solenoid.
In single-sided mode, used to detect original
misfeeds.
Original Trailing Detects the trailing edge of the last original to
Edge stop copy paper feed and to turn off the
S9 14
transport motor, and checks for original
misfeeds.
Original Reverse Detects when the original is fed from the
S10 16
Sensor reverse area during duplex scanning.
Solenoids
DF Pick-up Controls the up-down movement of the original
SOL1 5
table.
SOL2 Stamp Energizes the stamper to mark the original. 13
SOL3 Junction Gate Opens and closes the junction gate. 7
Magnetic Clutches
DF Feed Transfers transport motor drive to the pick-up
MC1 1
roller and feed belt.
PCBs
DF Drive Interfaces the sensor signals with the copier,
PCB1 and transfers the magnetic clutch, solenoid and 8
motor drive signals from the copier.
SM 11 B810
DRIVE LAYOUT
2.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
4
3 5
2 6
1
10
9
8
B386D203.WMF
7
1. Separation Roller 6. DF Feed Motor

2. Original Feed Belt 7. Reverse Table Roller
3. Pick-up Roller 8. 2nd Transport Roller
4. DF Feed Clutch 9. Exit Roller
5. DF Transport Motor 10. 1st Transport Roller
DF Feed Motor: Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and reverse table rollers
DF Transport Motor: Drives the transport and exit rollers
B810 12 SM
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
2.5 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[A]
[B]
[C]
B386D503.WMF
The original size detection mechanism consists of the original width sensor board
[A] and two original length sensors-1 [B] and -2 [C]. Based on the combined output
of the length sensors and the width sensor board, the machine can detect the size
of the original. This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table on the
next page.
Note that the width sensor’s terminal plate is attached to the original guide, so the
widths of the originals must all be the same.
SM 13 B810
Original Original Original Width-3 Original Original

NA EU
Width-1 Width-2 P4 P3 P2 P1 Length-1 Length-2
A3 (297 x 420) P L L ON — — — ON ON
B4 (257 x 364) P L H — ON — — ON ON
A4 (Lengthwise)
P H L — — ON — ON —
(210 x 297)
A4 (297 x 210)
P L L ON — — — — —
(Sideways)
B5 (182 x 257)
P H H — — — ON ON —
(Lengthwise)
B5 (257 x 182)
P L H — ON — — — —
(Sideways)
A5 (148 x 210)
H H — — — ON — —
(Lengthwise)
A5 (210 x 148)
P H L — — ON — — —
(Sideways)
11" x 17" (DLT) P L L ON — — — ON ON
11" x 15" P L L ON — — — ON ON
10" x 14" P L H — ON — — ON —
8.5" x 14" (LG) P H L — — ON — ON —
8.5" x 13" (F4) P H L — — ON — ON —
8" x 13" (F) P P H L — — ON — ON —
8.5" x 11"
P H L — — ON — ON —
(Lengthwise)
8.5" x 11"
P L L ON — — — — —
(Sideways)
10" x 8"
P L H — ON — — ON —
(Lengthwise)
5.5" x 8.5"
(Lengthwise) P H H — — — ON — —
(HLT)
5.5" x 8.5"
P H L — — ON — — —
(Sideways) (HLT)
Key
: No, P: Yes
ON: Paper present
NA: North America, EU: Europe
NOTE: 1) P1-P4 represent the four positions on the width sensor board. ON
indicates the presence of the terminal plate in a given position. “Original
Width-1” and “Original Width-2” are the outputs from the sensor board to
the DF main board. The state of these outputs (L or H) depends on the
position of the terminal plate on the sensor board (P1, P2, P3, or P4).
For example, if the terminal plate is at P4, both outputs are L.
2) A reading of “L” on either of the width sensor outputs indicates that the
terminal plate is connecting the GND pattern with the width sensor
output signal line.
3) The machine cannot detect more than one size of originals in the same
job.
B810 14 SM
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
Original Width Sensor Board
B810
GND Pattern
Original Width 1
Original Width 2
Original Side P4 P3 P2 P1
Guide Position
A3/A4S B4/B5S A4L/A5S B5L/A5L
The signal is "L" when the terminal plate is connected to the GND pattern.
B386D501.WMF
SM 15 B810
MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE
2.6 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE

This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original size
mode.
Because this ADF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for original
document width detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, but
the document length detection method is different. Therefore, the scanning speed
is slightly slower.
Document length detection

From when the registration sensor switches on until it switches off, the CPU counts
the transport motor pulses. The number of pulses determines the length of the
original.
Feed-in cycle
When the original size for the copy modes listed below cannot be determined, the
image cannot be correctly scaled (reduced or enlarged) or processed until the
original’s length has been accurately detected. The length must be determined
before the image is scanned.
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Centering
Erase Center/Border
Booklet
Image Repeat
The originals follow this path:

1. Length detection Î Scanning glass Î Inverter table
2. Inverter table Î Scanning glass Î Inverter table (restores the original order)
3. Inverter table Î Scanning glass (image scanned) Î Exit tray
Normal feed-in
In a copy mode other than those listed above, when the reduction/enlargement
ratio has been determined, the originals are scanned normally. In order to store the
scanned images, a large area of memory (the detected original width x 432 mm
length) is prepared. Next, only the portion of the image up to the detected original
length is read from memory and printed.
B810 16 SM
PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
2.7 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
B386D504.WMF
[F]
[G]
B386D505.WMF
The original is set with the image facing up. The original pushes actuator [A] and
the original set sensor [E] is activated.
After pressing the start button, the pick-up solenoid [D] is activated and the lift plate
[C] lifts the original up until it comes in contact with the pick-up roller [B]. The pick-
up roller then feeds the top sheet of paper.
After being fed from the pick-up roller, the topmost sheet is separated from the
stack by the separation roller and sent to the first transport roller.
The mechanism is an FRR system, consisting of the original feed belt [F] and
separation roller [G].
SM 17 B810
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
2.8 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

2.8.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C] [D] B386D506.WMF
The DF feed motor feeds the separated original to the first transport roller [A] at
maximum speed. When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge, the
motor stops for a short while. Then the feed and transport motors turn on again,
and feed the original through scanning area at a lower speed (the scanning area
contains the original exposure guide [D] and DF exposure glass [C]). After
scanning, the original is fed out by the second transport roller [E] and exit roller [F].
B810 18 SM
2.8.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[G] [F]
[A] [E]
[D]
[B] [C]
B386D204.WMF
[A] [E]
[D]
[F]
B386D205.WMF
When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the original, the DF
feed motor (which drives the feed roller) and transport motor (which drives the
transport roller) both switch off. After a brief interval, the transport motor alone
reactivates to drive the first [A] and second transport roller [G] and the exit roller
[F]. The front side of the original is then scanned.
When the original exit sensor [C] detects the leading edge of the original, the
junction gate solenoid is activated and the junction gate [D] opens. The original is
then transported towards the reverse table [H].
Soon after the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor [C], the junction
gate solenoid switches off and the junction gate [D] is closed. When the original
has been fed onto the reverse table, the DF feed motor switches on in reverse. The
original is then fed by the reverse roller [E] and then by the exit roller [F] and first
transport roller [A] to the scanning area (where the reverse side will be scanned).
SM 19 B810
[H]
B386D206.WMF
[I]
[J]
B386D207.WMF
The original is then sent to the reverse table [H] a second time to be turned over.
This is done so that the duplex copies will be properly stacked front side down in
the exit tray [J] in the correct order.
2.8.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR

During one-to-one copying, copy paper is fed to the registration roller in advance
(while the original is still being scanned), to increase the copy speed. The trailing
edge sensor monitors the stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the
trailing edge of the last page has been fed in. The main CPU then stops the copier
from feeding an unwanted extra sheet of copy paper.
B810 20 SM
STAMP
2.9 STAMP
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
[C]
[A]
[B]
B386D507.WMF
This function is only for fax mode.

There is a stamp [A] between the 2nd transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C], and
its solenoid is controlled by the copier directly.
When the original reaches the stamp position, the DF feed motor stops. At 300
milliseconds after stopping the DF feed motor, the stamp solenoid turns on if the
page was sent successfully (immediate transmission) or stored successfully
(memory transmission). After stamping, the DF feed motor starts again to feed out
the document, and its speed is about 1.3 times the normal speed.
The stamping position on the original can be changed by adjusting SP6-010.
SM 21 B810
SM
B386D101.WMF
1000ms
LT SIDEWAYS STAMP MODE (DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE)
Original Feed Original Scan Start Stamp & Reverse Original Scan Start Stamp & Reverse Original Scan Start Stamp & Reverse Original Scan Start Stamp & Reverse
RXD
Feed Completion Original Size Feed Completion Original Size
Original Set Size Code Next Original Check Stamp Stop Position Original Stop Stamp Stop Position Exit Completion Original Not Set Stamp Stop Position Original Stop Stamp Stop Position Exit Completion
Next Original
Check
TXD
Feed motor turns if sub-scan Feed motor turns if sub-scan
is 238mm or more. is 238mm or more.
MAX
Feed Motor READ
OFF
MAX
Transport READ
Motor
OFF
DF Feed ON
Clutch OFF
22
DF Pick-up ON
Solenoid OFF
Rreverse ON
Solenoid OFF
Stamp ON
Solenoid OFF
Original Set ON
Sensor OFF
2.10 TIMING CHART
JAM 3 JAM 4
ON
Exit Sensor
OFF
Reverse ON
Sensor OFF
JAM 5
Trailing Edge ON
Sensor OFF
JAM 1A, 1B JAM 2
Registration ON
Sensor OFF
TIMING CHART
JAM 8
ENABLE
FGATE
DISABLE
B810
CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION
2.11 CONDITION OF JAM DETECTION
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
JAM 1A: If the registration sensor does not turn on within 114 mm x 2 since the
feed motor started (twice the distance between the original set position
and the (registration sensor).
JAM 1B: Duplex mode only: If the registration sensor does not turn on within 161
mm x 1.5 since the feed motor started (1.5 times the distance between
the original reverse position and the registration sensor).
JAM 2: If the registration sensor does not turn off within 1260 mm x 1.1 since the
feed motor started (1.1 times the distance between the paper stop
position at registration and the maximum original length).
JAM 3: If the original exit sensor does not turn on within 92 mm x 1.5 since the
feed motor started (1.5 times the distance between registration sensor
and exit sensor)
JAM 4: If the original exit sensor does not turn off within original length + 120
mm since the transport motor started after the exit sensor turns on
JAM 5: Duplex mode only: If the original reverse sensor does not turn on within
161 mm x 1.4 since the feed motor started (1.4 times the distance
between the original reverse position and the registration sensor).
JAM 6: If the feeding original is removed.
JAM 7: If the cover is opened or the ADF is lifted while the ADF is in operation.
JAM 8: If an area outside the maximum scannable area is selected.
JAM 9: If scanning of the previous original is not completed when the registration
sensor detects the leading edge of the current original.
SM 23 B810
OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
2.12 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

The DF CPU controls the transport motor, DF feed motor, DF feed clutch, junction
Gate solenoid, stamp solenoid, and pick-up solenoid. The DF CPU also monitors
all DF sensors and provides updated status information when prompted at regular
intervals by the mainframe, which may then take action based on this information.
The DF–mainframe connection is checked automatically just after power is
supplied to the mainframe.
Main ADF Control

Interface
Frame CPU
DF Feed Motor
Driver
DF Transport
Registration Sensor Motor
Original Set Sensor
DF Position Sensor
Feed Cover Open Sensor DF Feed Clutch
Original Width Sensor Board
Original Length Sensor 1
Original Length Sensor 2 Junction Gate
Original Trailing Edge Sensor Solenoid
Original Exit Sensor Driver
Original Reverse Sensor
DF Pick-up
Solenoid
ADF Control Board Stamp Solenoid
B386D500.WMF
B810 24 SM
DIP SWITCHES
3. SERVICE TABLES
Auto Reverse
Document
Feeder
B810
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
SW100
Description
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Normal operating mode (Default)
0 0 0 1 No function
0 0 1 0 Free run with two-sided original 100%
0 0 1 1 DF feed clutch operates
0 1 0 0 Free run with one-sided original 32.6%
0 1 0 1 DF pick-up solenoid operates
0 1 1 0 Motors rotate
0 1 1 1 No function
1 0 0 0 Free run with one-sided original 100%
1 0 0 1 Junction gate solenoid operates
1 0 1 0 Free run without two-sided original 100%
1 0 1 1 No function
1 1 0 0 Free run without one-sided original 100%
1 1 0 1 Stamp solenoid operates
1 1 1 0 Free run with two-sided original 32.6%
1 1 1 1 Free run without two-sided original 100%
SM 25 B810
PRINTER/SCANNER OPTION
D318
PRINTER/SCANNER OPTION D318
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................... 1
1.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 1
Board, SD Card Slots............................................................................... 2
Board Slots .............................................................................................. 3
1.2 PRINTER AND P/S OPTIONS ..................................................................... 4
1.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 4
Kit Contents ............................................................................................. 6
Installation................................................................................................ 8
1.2.2 PRINTER ENHANCE, SCANNER ENHANCE OPTIONS ................. 12
Accessory Check ................................................................................... 12
Installation.............................................................................................. 12
Important Notes About SD Cards........................................................... 13
1.2.3 APPLICATION MERGE MAPS.......................................................... 14
SD Application Merge Maps...................................................................14
Basic ...................................................................................................... 15
Printer Function...................................................................................... 15
Printer/Scanner Function - Full .............................................................. 15
1.3 INSTALLING OTHER OPTIONS ................................................................ 16
1.3.2 IEEE 802.11B INTERFACE KIT (G813) ............................................ 17
1.3.3 BLUETOOTH UNIT (B826)................................................................ 20
1.3.4 POSTSCRIPT 3 UNIT (D318)............................................................ 21
1.3.5 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609)................................................ 22
1.3.6 BROWSER UNIT TYPE B (B720) ..................................................... 23
Accessories............................................................................................ 23
Installation.............................................................................................. 23
1.4 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS .................................................................... 24
2. DETAILS........................................................................................ 25
2.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 25
3. SERVICE TABLES........................................................................ 27
3.1 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE....................................................................... 27
3.2 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE ..................................................................... 28
4. SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................... 29
4.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS .......................................................................... 29
4.2 SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 30
4.2.1 PRINTER CONTROLLER (GENERAL) ............................................. 30
4.2.2 USB SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... 31
4.2.3 IEEE 802.11B SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................... 31
4.2.4 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................... 31
4.2.5 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... 32
4.2.6 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES............................................................ 32
PRINTER ............................................................................................... 32
Printer Drivers ........................................................................................ 32
SCANNER ............................................................................................. 33
SM i D318
NOTE:
Due to marketing considerations, various options are pre-configured into a basic
copier. The following table lists the model numbers of all pre-configured models
available in the Ricoh US Market.
Ricoh
Product Code Gestetner Lanier Savin
Aficio
D007 DSm725e LD325 MP 2510 8025e
DSm725esp LD325SP MP 2510SP 8025esp
DSm725espf N/A MP 2510SPF 8025espf
DSm725espi N/A MP 2510SPi 8025espi
DSm725ep N/A MP 2510P 8025eP
D008 DSm730e LD330 MP 3010 8030e
DSm730esp LD330SP MP 3010SP 8030esp
DSm730espf N/A MP 3010SPF 8030espf
DSm730espi N/A MP 3010SPi 8030espi
DSm730ep N/A MP 3010P 8030eP
Many of the options described in this document are pre-configured in the available
units. This service manual describes all installation and service information as if the
options required field installation. This will enable removal, replacement and
adjustment of the various configurations.
D318 ii SM
OVERVIEW
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 OVERVIEW
This section describes the installation procedures for printer, scanner, and other
options for D007/D008 Series machines.
Printer/Scanner Options
The options listed in the table below are for D007/D008 machines only.
No. Item SD Card Slot Merge Options
D310 Printer/Scanner Unit Type 3010 C1 DOS
D313 *2 Printer Unit Type 3010 C1 DOS, Scanner Enhance
D314 RPCS Printer Unit Type 3010 C1 DOS, Scanner
Enhance*1, Printer
Enhance
D318 PostScript3 Unit Type 3010 C2 None
D318 Printer Enhance Option Type 3010 Merge: C3 Æ C1
D318 Scanner Enhance Option Type 3010 Merge: C3 Æ C1
Network Enhancement Option Type
3010 includes:
• D318 Printer Enhancement Option
Scanner
Printer/
Option
D318
Type 3010
• D318 Scanner Enhancement Option
Type 3010
• HDD
• 256MB Memory
*1 The HDD unit is required for merging the Scanner Enhance option with RPCS.
*2 Europe and Asia only
Other Options
The options listed in the table below are with both D007/D008 and B205/B209
Series machines.
No. Item Slots
B609 File Format Converter Type B Board Slot 1 or 2.
B826 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245 Board Slot 1 or 2. Only one of these
G813 IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type H boards can be installed at one time.
B679 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A
B735 Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D SD card slot C1, or merge to SD Slot
C1.
B720 Browser Unit Type A SD card slot C3 (Install, then remove)
G818 Memory Unit Type E 256 MB Controller Board
B773 Hard Disk Drive Option Type 3030 Controller Board
NOTE: For more details about merging applications from SD card slot C3 to C1,
see Section 1.2.2.
SM 1 D318
OVERVIEW
Board, SD Card Slots

The machine controller box has two board slots and three SD card slots. Make
sure that each board and SD card is put in the correct slot.
C1
C2
Slot 1
Slot 2
C3
Board Slot 1, Slot 2
The names of the board slots are on the controller plate. The optional boards are
inserted in either Slot 1 or Slot 2 (see the next page).
SD Card Slots C1, C2, C3
The names of the SD card slots (C1, C2, C3) are on the controller plate.
Slot SD Card
C1 RPCS Printer Unit
-or-
Printer Unit*
-or-
Printer/Scanner Unit
-or-
Data Overwrite Security (if no printer unit is installed).
C2 PostScript3
C3 Service slot for firmware version updates, moving applications to other SD cards, and
downloading/uploading NVRAM contents.
*Europe and Asia only. See Note page ii.
D318 2 SM
OVERVIEW
Board Slots
Two slots are available for the boards.

Scanner
Printer/
Option
D318
Slot Board
1 or 2 File Format Converter B609 (MLB)
1 or 2 Bluetooth Interface Unit B826*1
1 or 2 IEEE802.11b G813 – Wireless LAN*1
1 or 2 IEEE1284 Interface Board B679 – Centronics*1
SM 3 D318
PRINTER AND P/S OPTIONS
1.2 PRINTER AND P/S OPTIONS

1.2.1 OVERVIEW
This section describes the installation of the following items:
• RPCS Printer Unit
• Printer Unit
• Printer/Scanner Unit
• 256 Memory. Optional memory is required for each unit.
• HDD unit
• Printer Enhance Option
• Scanner Enhance Option
The three main units are:

• RPCS Printer Unit Type 3010. For customers who require only basic copying
and printing and the RPCS printer language. The HDD is not required but the
256 MB memory must be installed.
• Printer Unit Type 3010*. For customers who do not require the extended
scanning features but need more printing capability (both RPCS and PCL printer
languages are provided). The 256 MB memory is required.
• Printer/Scanner Unit Type 3010. For customers who require the full range of
DS features (advanced scanning and printing features such as "scan-to"
solutions, virtual mailboxes, PCL, etc.). The 256 MB memory unit and HDD are
required.
*Europe and Asia only
D318 4 SM
Separate Options
There are three separate options: HDD, 256 MB memory and PS3.
• HDD. Provided with the following kits: Printer Enhance Option, Printer Unit, and
Printer/Scanner Unit. Refer to the illustration on previous page. If an HDD has
already been installed as a separate item, the HDD unit in the machine does not
need to be replaced with the HDD from the kit.
• 256 MB memory. Provided with selected options. However, every unit (RPCS,
Printer Unit, P/S unit) requires installation of the 256 MB memory.
• PostScript 3 Unit. The PS3 option can be used with the RPCS Unit, the Printer
Unit, or the Printer/Scanner Unit.
Enhance Options
There are two enhance options:
• Printer Enhance Option Type 3010. Updates the RPCS unit by adding PCL.
• Scanner Enhance Option Type 3010. Updates the RPCS unit or Printer Unit by
adding the advanced scanning features.
• Network Enhancement Option. Includes the following PCL and Scanning
Features:
• D318 Printer Enhancement Option Type 3010
Scanner
• D318 Scanner Enhancement Option Type 3010
Printer/
Option
D318
• HDD
• 256 MB Memory
SM 5 D318
Kit Contents
Check the accessories and their quantities against the list below and the illustration
on the next page. This is a common list for all the kits.
Common Accessory Table
This common accessory table lists all the items of the following units and options
for the D007/D008:
• RPCS: RPCS Printer Unit
• PU: Printer Unit *
• P/S: Printer/Scanner Unit
• PEO: Printer Enhance Unit
• SEO: Scanner Enhance Unit
* Europe and Asia only
Kit Contents
Description Qty
RPCS PU P/S PEO SEO
256 MB Memory*1 1 No No No No No
1. SD Card 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2. HDD*2 1 No Yes Yes Yes No
3. Standoff (double) 1 No Yes Yes Yes
4. Standoff (single) 1 No Yes Yes Yes
5. Harness Clamps 1 No Yes Yes Yes
6. Screws 2 No Yes Yes Yes
7. Stamp Cartridge 1 No No Yes No Yes
8. Ferrite Core 1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
9. HDD Harness 1 No Yes Yes Yes
10. DC Harness 1 No Yes Yes Yes
3
11. NA Keytop Set* 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
12. EU Keytop Set*3 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes
*1 The 256 Memory is a separate option and it is not provided in all kits. However, one memory unit
is required for the installation of every print unit.
*2 The HDD can be installed anytime as a separate option. If an HDD unit has already been
installed, it does not need to be replaced with the HDD unit from the Printer Enhance Option,
Printer Unit, or Printer/Scanner Unit kit.
*3 The number of keytops provided varies:
Kit Keytops
Copy Document Server Printer Scanner
RPCS Unit 1 1
Printer Unit 1 1 1
Printer/Scanner Unit 1 1 1 1
Printer Enhance Unit 1
Scanner Enhance Unit 1
D318 6 SM
5 6
3 4
7 8
9
2
1
10
Scanner
11
Printer/
Option
D318
12
SM 7 D318
Installation
CAUTION
[A]
1. Remove cover [A] ( x1).
2. Remove controller board [B] ( x2).
[B]
[C]
3. Install the 256 MB memory [C].
[D]
NOTE
• The RPCS Printer Unit does not require
the HDD unit. [G]
4. For the HDD unit attach:
• Harness clamp [D]
• Double standoff [E]
• Single standoff [F]
[E]
5. Attach the HDD [G] to the controller
board ( x2).
[F]
D318 8 SM
6. Connect the HDD harness [A] ( x2). [A]

7. Connect the DC harness [B] ( x2, [B]
= x1)
around both cables.
9. Insert the RPCS, printer or

printer/scanner SD card [C] in SD card [C]
slot C1.
10. Remove the "USB" knockout [D] and
"NIC" knockout [E].
Scanner
Printer/
Option
D318
11. Reattach the cover.
[D] [E]
12. Attach the ferrite core [F] to the LAN [F]

cable [G].
[G]
SM 9 D318
13. Connect the LAN cable [A] to the "NIC"

connection.
14. Connect the USB cable [B] to the "USB"
connection.
North America Only
15. Open the clamp [C] and close it around [B]
the USB cable. [A]
USB
LAN
[C]
16. Remove the 1st, 2nd, 4th, and 5th

blank key tops.

NOTE: The 3rd blank keytop from
the top is reserved for the "Fax"
keytop. Do not remove it at this time.
17. Replace the blank keytops with the
keytops received in the kit.
Copy
Document Server
Printer
Scanner
18. Attach the stamp cartridge [D] if the ARDF

is installed.
[D]
D318 10 SM
19. Connect the machine power cord and turn the main power switch on.
20. Enable the NIB and/or USB function.
• To enable the NIB function, enter the SP mode and set SP5985-001 (On
Board NIC) to "1" (Enable).
• To enable the USB function, enter the SP mode and set SP5985-002 (On
Board USB) to “1" (Enable).
21. If there was no HDD in the machine before you installed:
• Printer Enhance Option
• Printer Unit
• Printer/Scanner Unit
(1) Do SP5846 41 so the user can use the address book.
(2) Do SP5853 to copy the preset stamp data to the hard disk. Then turn the
main power switch off/on
Important
• This SP must be done immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a
machine that previously had no HDD.
Scanner
Printer/
Option
• The first time the machine power is turned on with the new HDD installed,
D318
the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and
writes it on the new HDD. However, only the system administrator can use
the new address book on the HDD at this time.
• If you do SP5846 41 immediately after power on, then all users can use the
address book.
SM 11 D318
1.2.2 PRINTER ENHANCE, SCANNER ENHANCE OPTIONS

Accessory Check
Refer to the "Common Accessory Table" on page 6.
Installation
The installation of the printer enhance option and scanner enhance option is done
with SP5873 001 (Application Merge).
NOTE:
• If you are going to update the RPCS unit with both the printer and scanner
enhance options, the order of execution is not important.
• For more details about merging more than one application with SD card in slot
C1, refer to the merge maps on page 14.
1. Turn off the copier.
2. Remove the cover ( x1).
3. Confirm that the RPCS Unit or Printer Unit SD card is in SD card Slot C1.
4. Put the option SD Card (Printer Enhance Option or Scanner Enhance Option)
in SD card slot C3.
5. Open the front door.
7. Go into the SP mode and select SP5873 001.
8. Touch "Execute".
9. Read the instructions on the display and touch "Execute" to start.
10. When the display tells you copying is completed, touch "Exit", then turn the
copier off.
11. Remove the option SD card from C3.
13. Go into the User Tools mode and confirm that update was successful.
14. Turn the copier off again, then reattach the cover.
15. Return the copied SD card to the customer for safekeeping, or tape it to the
faceplate of the controller.
D318 12 SM
To undo an option update

2. Confirm that the RPCS Unit or Printer Unit SD card is in SD card Slot C1.
3. Put the original option SD card (Printer Enhance Option or Scanner Enhance
Option D318) in SD card slot C3.
5. Go into the SP mode and do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec).
6. Follow the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
8. Remove the option SD card from Slot C3..
10. Go into the User Tools mode and confirm that undo was successful.
11. Turn the copier off again, then reattach the cover.
Scanner
Printer/
Option
D318
Important Notes About SD Cards
Here are some basic rules about merging applications on SD cards.
• The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program
to the target SD card.
• The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the
application program. The service technician may occasionally need to check the
SD card and its data to solve problems. SD cards must be stored in a safe
location at the work site.
• Once the merge is completed, the SD card from which the application was
copied cannot be used again, but the customer must keep the card to serve as
proof of purchase.
• An SD card from which an application has been moved to another SD card can
be restored to full operation with SP5873 002 (Undo).
• Before storing the card from which an application has been copied, label it
carefully so that you can identify it easily if you need to do the undo procedure
later.
SM 13 D318
1.2.3 APPLICATION MERGE MAPS

SD Application Merge Maps
The tables below map all the possible configurations for the installation of the SD
card options for the D007/D008
This is the key for the abbreviations in the tables.
RPCS RPCS Printer Unit Type 3010
PU Printer Unit Type 3010
P/S Printer/Scanner Unit Type 3010
PEO Printer Enhance Option Type 3010
SEO Scanner Enhance Option Type 3010
DOS Data Overwrite Security Type D
PS3 PostScript 3 Unit Type 3010
How to Read the Tables

The shaded areas in the "Slot 1" rows indicate which applications must be merged
with the underlined SD cards. The merge operation must be done with SP5873.
C1 RPCS RPCS Printer Unit SD card must reside in C1.
↑PEO The Printer Enhance Option (PEO) and Scanner Enhance Option
(SEO) must be merged with the RPCS SD card in C1 using SP5873
↑SEO 001.
Important: Where 2 or more merge operations are required with
SP5873 001, the merges can be done in any order.
C2 PS3 The PostScript 3 Unit must reside in C2.
C3 Slot C3 is also used for firmware update and application merge. During
the merge execution with SP5873 001, the application on the SD card
in C3 is copied to the SD card in Slot 1.
The VM Card will reside in slot C3. The browser unit will be merged on
to the HDD from Slot C3.
NOTE: Return the copied SD card to the customer for safekeeping, or tape it to the
D318 14 SM
Basic
No HDD With HDD
C1 C1 DOS
C2 C2
C3 C3
Printer Function
Printer Function: No HDD
C1 RPCS
C2
C3
Printer Function: With HDD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C1 RPCS RPCS RPCS RPCS RPCS RPCS RPCS
↑DOS ↑DOS ↑DOS ↑PEO
C2 PS3 PEO PS3 PEO

C3
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Scanner
Printer/
C1 RPCS RPCS RPCS PU PU PU PU
Option
D318
↑PEO ↑DOS ↑DOS ↑DOS ↑DOS
↑PEO ↑PEO
C2 PS3 PS3 PS3 PS3
C3
Note: In configurations 3 and 6 above, note that the print enhance option (PEO)
may reside in C2 if the PS3 option is not used.
Printer/Scanner Function - Full

1 2 3 4 5 6
C1 P/S P/S P/S P/S RPCS RPCS
↑DOS ↑DOS ↑SEO ↑SEO
C2 PS3 PS3 PS3

C3
7 8 9 10 11 12
C1 RPCS RPCS RPCS RPCS RPCS RPCS
↑PEO ↑PEO ↑DOS ↑DOS ↑PEO ↑PEO
↑SEO ↑SEO ↑SEO ↑SEO ↑DOS ↑DOS
↑SEO ↑SEO
C2 PS3 PS3 PS3
C3
SM 15 D318
INSTALLING OTHER OPTIONS
1.3 INSTALLING OTHER OPTIONS

Accessories
Description Q'ty
CAUTION
NOTE: You can install only one of these network interfaces at the same time: IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), or Bluetooth.
[A]
[B]
1. Remove the cover [A] of board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1)

2. Install the interface board [B] ( x2 knob screws)
3. Reattach the cover ( x1)
D318 16 SM
1.3.2 IEEE 802.11B INTERFACE KIT (G813)

Accessories
Description Q'ty
1. IEEE 802.11b Board ..............................................................1
2. PCI Card ................................................................................1
3. Antenna cap ..........................................................................1
[A]
[C]
Scanner
Printer/
Option
D318
[D]
[B]
CAUTION
NOTE: You can only install one of the following network interfaces at the same
time: IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), or
Bluetooth.
1. Remove the cover [A] of board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1)
2. Attach the interface board [B] to the controller board ( x1 knob screw).
3. With the printed side facing the front of the machine, insert the interface card
[C] board.
SM 17 D318
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

settings for IEEE 802.11b. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
NOTE: You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.
1. Press the “User Tools/Counter” key.
NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or
wireless LAN.
3. Select “Interface Settings”> “Network”> “Network I/F Setting”
4. Press “IEEE 802.11b”. Only the wireless LAN options show.
5. Communication Mode. Select either “802.11 Ad hoc”, “Ad hoc” or
“Infrastructure”.
6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)
NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different
countries.
8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is
designed to protect wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is required
on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128
bit WEP keys.
WEP:
Selects “Active” or “Inactive”. (“Inactive” is default.)
Range of Allowed Settings:
D318 18 SM
9. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then
select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,
1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the
closest machine or access point. This depends on which mode is selected.
NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and
the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the
distance between the machine and the closest access point.
11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)
10. Press “Return to Default” to initialize the wireless LAN settings.
Press “Yes” to initialize the following settings:
• Transmission mode
• Channel
• Transmission Speed
• WEP
• SSID
Scanner
• WEP Key
Printer/
Option
D318
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN
The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11b

5840 006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the
country.
5840 007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings
allowed for your country.
5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
UP mode Name Function
SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
WEP Mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that can
be used for the WEP Key entry.
SM 19 D318
1.3.3 BLUETOOTH UNIT (B826)

Accessories
Description Q'ty
1. Bluetooth Unit ......................................................................1
2. PCI Card..............................................................................1
3. Cap ......................................................................................1
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
CAUTION
NOTE: You can install only one of these network interfaces at the same time: IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284 (Parallel/Centronics), or Bluetooth.
1. Remove the cover [A] of board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1).
2. Attach the interface board [B] to the controller board ( x2 knob screws).
3. Install the Bluetooth card [C] in the slot in the Bluetooth unit.
D318 20 SM
1.3.4 POSTSCRIPT 3 UNIT (D318)

Accessories
Description Q'ty
1. PostScript 3 Emulation SD Card............................................1
2. Decal .....................................................................................1
[B]
[A]
Scanner
Printer/
Option
D318
CAUTION
1. Remove the cover [A] ( x1).

2. With the printed side of the SD card [B] facing the rear of the machine, install
3. Reattach the cover ( x1).
4. Attach the “Adobe PostScript 3” decal to the front cover.
SM 21 D318
1.3.5 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (B609)

Accessories
Description Q'ty
1. File Format Converter Board B609 ...................................... 1
[A]
[B]
CAUTION
Important: This option also requires installation of the Printer/Scanner Unit or the
Printer Unit.
1. Remove the cover [A] of Board Slot 1 or 2 ( x1).
2. Install the board [B] ( x2 knob screws).
3. Reattach the cover ( x1).
D318 22 SM
1.3.6 BROWSER UNIT TYPE B (B720)

Accessories
Description Q’ty
1. Browser Unit B720 SD Card ..................................................1
Installation
1. Switch the machine off.
2. Remove the cover [A]
( x1).
3. Push the SD card [B] into Slot C3.
[B] [A]
5. Push [User Tools].
6. Push [Login/Logout] on the operation
panel
Scanner
7. Login with the administrator user
Printer/
Option
D318
name and password.
8. Touch "Extended Feature Settings"
twice.
9. Touch "SD Card".
10. Touch the "Browser" line.
11. Under "Install to:", touch "Machine HDD" then touch "Next"
12. When you see "Ready to Install" check the information on the screen to confirm
your previous selection.
13. Touch "OK". You will see "Installing…" then "Completed".
14. Touch "Exit" twice to return to the copy screen.
15. Remove the SD card.
16. Return the copied SD card to the customer for safekeeping, or tape it to the
SM 23 D318
CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS
1.4 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS

1. Connect the machine’s power cord and turn on the main switch.
2. Go into the printer user mode and print the configuration page.
User Tools> Printer Settings> List Test Print> Config. Page
NOTE: The same data can also be printed with printer SP1-004 – Print
Summary. All installed options are listed in the “System Reference”
column.
D318 24 SM
OVERVIEW
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
Enhanced and New Features for B205/B209 and D007/D008
Feature B084/B093 Vs Description
B205/B209 and
D007/D008
Sample Print Enhanced Outputs a single hard copy of the document so it can
be checked for errors or irregularities. If the sample
copy looks acceptable, the user can enter a number
to print additional copies. This feature can be used
before setting up large copy jobs.
Locked Print Enhanced Printing a document requires a password entry. This
feature is useful for protecting sensitive information.
Hold Print New Documents are stored on the printer HDD (similar to a
locked print) but printing does not require a password
entry.
Stored Print New Documents are stored on the printer HDD and printed
as needed. This is useful for documents that are
Scanner
Printer/
Option
D318
printed frequently (applications, catalogs, etc.)
Accessibility New for In order to comply with Section 508 of the
D007/D008 Rehabilitation Act, this machine supports some 3rd
party utilities for visually impaired users.
Bi-directional New for Bi-directional Communication (BDC) is available
Communication D007/D008 without installing Smart Device Monitor for Client.
without SDM
for Client
SM 25 D318
OVERVIEW
B089/B093/B205/B209/D007/D008 Printer New Features Comparison Table

Model Feature Storage Sort Multiple File Save at File Save
Capacity by Print/Delete Power Password After
User Off Printing
ID
B089/B093 Sample 30*1 No No No Yes (4-digit) No
Print
Locked No No No NO No
Print
B205/B209 Sample 100*1 Yes Yes Yes Yes (4-8 No
D007/D008 Print digits)
Locked Yes Yes Yes No No
Print
Hold Yes Yes Yes No No
Print
Stored Yes Yes Yes Optional (4- Yes
Print 8 digits)
*1 Total number of files (includes all job types).

Important: The document server features and direct PDF printing are not available
with a D007/D008 Series machine where RPCS is used without a HDD unit
installed.
D318 26 SM
PRINTER SERVICE TABLE
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE
SP Number/Bit SW Initial
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit SW 1 00H Adjusts the bit switch settings.
002 Bit SW 2 00H Note: These bit switches are
003 Bit SW 3 00H currently not being used
004 Bit SW 4 00H
005 Bit SW 5 00H
006 Bit SW 6 00H
007 Bit SW 7 00H
008 Bit SW 8 00H
1003 Clear setting
001 Initialize Printer System Initializes the settings in the printer
feature settings of UP mode.
002 Clear CSS Counter DFU
Scanner
003 Delete Program DFU
Printer/
Option
D318
1004 Print Summary Prints the printer summary sheet.
1005 Display Version. Displays the version of the controller
firmware.
1006 Sample/Proof Print [0~1/0/1]
0: Link with Doc. Server
1: Enable
SP Function/[Setting]
7910 PDL Part No. Information
Returns a text string for the version.
RPCS 150 R55 156 PDF 162
R98 153 PCLXL 159 FONT 180
R16 154 MSIS 160 FONT1 181
FONT3 183
7911 PDL Version Information Returns a text string for the version.
RPCS 150 R55 156 PDF 162
R98 153 PCLXL 159 FONT 180
R16 154 MSIS 160 FONT1 181
FONT3 183
SM 27 D318
SCANNER SERVICE TABLE 21 July 2005
3.2 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE

1004 Compression Type Selects the compression type for binary
picture processing.
[1-3/1/1]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
1005 Erase Margin Creates an erase margin for all edges of the
scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the
original, create a margin.
[0 – 5/0/1mm]
1009 Forbid Using TWAIN Sets the system not to use the network
TWAIN scanner driver.
0: Not forbidden (can use TWAIN)
1: Forbid using TWAIN driver.
2021 Compression level (grayscale)
These SP codes set the compression ratio for the grayscale processing mode that
can be selected with the notch settings on the operation panel.
Range: 5 (lowest ratio) ÅÆ 95 (highest ratio)
2021 1 Level 3 (Middle I-Qual) [5~95/40/1/step]
2021 2 Level 2 (High I-Qual) [5~95/50/1/step]
2021 3 Level 4 (Low I-Qual) [5~95/30/1/step]
2021 4 Level 1 (Highest I-Qual) [5~95/60/1/step]
2021 5 Level 5 (Lowest I-Qual) [5~95/20/1/step]
Compression Notch Assignment
5
3
1
2
4
D318 28 SM
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
4. SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Scanner
Printer/
Option
D318

No. Item Code Remarks

File Format Converter (MLB) B609 Slot 1 or 2
Bluetooth Interface Unit*1 B826
IEEE802.11b – Wireless LAN*1 G813
IEEE1284 Interface Board – Centronics*1 B679
6 Memory 256 MB G818 Not shown
7 USB 2.0 --- Built into controller board
8 NIB Network Interface ---
9 PostScript 3*3 B318 SD Card (C2)
10 Printer Scanner Unit *3 D310 SD Card (C1)
11 Printer Unit *3 D313 SD Card (C1)
12 RPCS Printer Unit *3 D314 SP Card(C1)
*2 If both PS3 and DOS (Data Overwrite Security B735) are required, DOS must be
moved to the Printer/Scanner, Printer, or RPCS SD card with SP5878 1.
*3 D007/D008 Only
SM 29 D318
SPECIFICATIONS
4.2 SPECIFICATIONS
4.2.1 PRINTER CONTROLLER (GENERAL)
Printing Speed: Maximum 25 ppm (A4/LT LEF) D007
Maximum 30 ppm (A4/LT LEF): D008
Printer Languages: PCLXL/PCL5e
PostScript 3
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream - an original Ricoh PDL)
Resolution (Driver): RPCS 200/600 dpi
PS3 600 dpi
PCL5e 300/600 dpi
PCLXL 600 dpi
Resident Fonts: PCL TrueType: 10, Intellifont: 35, International: 13, Bitmap: 1
PS3 Option fonts PS3
Connectivity Std. RJ-45 network port (100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, USB 2.0)
Option IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN), Bluetooth, IEEE1284 (Centronics
Parallel)
Network Protocols TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, SMB (NetBIOS over TCP/IP), AppleTalk (Auto
Switching)
RAM: Maximum 384 MB (Resident 128 MB + Additional 256 MB)
Note: Additional 256 MB is required for all printer/scanner unit and printer
units.
D318 30 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
4.2.2 USB SPECIFICATIONS

USB connectivity is built into the controller.
Interface USB 1.1, USB 2.0

Data rates 480 Mbps (high speed), 12 Mbps (full speed), 1.5 Mbps (low speed)
High speed mode is only supported by USB 2.0.
4.2.3 IEEE 802.11B SPECIFICATIONS
Standard applied IEEE802.11b

Data transmission rates Speed Distance
11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)
Network protocols TCP/IP, Apple Talk, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, SMB
Bandwidth 2.4GHz
Scanner
Printer/
(divided over 14 channels, 2400 to 2497 MHz for each
Option
D318
channel)
4.2.4 BLUETOOTH SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission Specifications Based on Bluetooth V1.1

Data Transfer Speed 1 Mbps
Profile Hard Copy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP),
Serial Port Profile (SPP), BIP
Distance Between Devices 10 m (The maximum distance when using outdoors,
otherwise depends on the office environment.)
SM 31 D318
SPECIFICATIONS
4.2.5 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS

Standard Scanner Resolution: Main scan/Sub scan 600 dpi
Scanning Speed 52 ipm, E-mail/Scan-to-Folder/Network Delivery Scanner (A4 LEF,
Text 200 dpi, MH Compression)
Available scanning Resolution 100 ~ 1200 dpi; When used as a Network TWAIN scanner.
Range:
100, 200, 300, 400, When used as a network delivery scanner,
600 dpi; Scan-to-Folder, Scan-to-Email, or
Document Server storage.
Grayscales: 8 bits/pixel
Interface: Ethernet 10/100BASE TX, Wireless LAN 802.11b
Compression Method: MH, MR, MMR (Binary Picture Processing)
JPEG (Grayscale Processing)
Video Memory Capacity: 384 MB
Image Storage Capacity: Number of originals per file: Maximum 1,000 pages
Maximum of files: 3000 files
Max. Storage on Doc. Svr. 9,000 pages (B&W (ITUT No. 1/200 dpi MMR)
4.2.6 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES

PRINTER
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run
installer allows you to select which components to install.
Printer Drivers
Printer Windows Windows Windows 2000, XP,
Macintosh
Language 95/98/Me NT4.0 Server 2003
PCL 6 Yes Yes Yes No
PCL 5e Yes Yes Yes No
PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes
RPCS Yes Yes Yes No
NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86
platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC,
Alpha, or MIPS platforms.
2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows
2000/XP/Server 2003, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each
operating system is provided with the driver.
D318 32 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Utility Software
Software Description
Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 (Win A font management utility with screen fonts for
95/98/Me, NT4, 2000) the printer.
Smart Device Monitor for Admin (Win A printer management utility for network
95/98/Me, NT4, 2000/XP/Server 2003) administrators. NIB setup utilities are also
available.
DeskTopBinder – SmartDeviceMonitor for A printer management utility for client users.
Client (Win 95/98/Me, NT4, 2000/XP/Server Peer-to-peer printing utility and
2003) parallel/recovery printing functions are
included.
LAN-Fax M7 Driver (Win 95/98/Me, NT4, This driver allows use of the LAN-Fax
2000/XP) functions by installing the LAN-Fax driver,
Address Book, and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet
Editor.
PS Utility for Mac This software provides several convenient
functions for printing from Macintosh clients.
Acrobat Reader A utility that allows reading PDF files.
SCANNER
Scanner
Printer/
Option
D318
The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM.
Scanner Driver
• Network Twain Driver for Win95/98/Me/NT4/2000/XP/Server 2003
Scanner Utilities
• DeskTopBinder Lite for 2000/XP/Server 2003
SM 33 D318

B205 - B209 - D007 - D009 SM Ricoh 3025 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B205 - B209 - D007 - D009 SM Ricoh 3025 SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B205 - B209 - D007 - D009 SM Ricoh 3025 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B205/B209/D007/D008

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

© 2006 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1. RSS (REMOTE SERVICE SYSTEM) ............................. Appendix-1

PAPER BANK B390

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B391

1,000-SHEET FINISHER B408

1-BIN TRAY UNIT B413

DUPLEX UNIT B414

INTERCHANGE UNIT B416

BRIDGE UNIT B417

500-SHEET FINISHER B442

INTERNAL SHIFT SORT TRAY B459

FAX OPTION B766

DOCUMENT FEEDER B810

PRINTER/SCANNER OPTION D318

Symbol What it means

Cautions, Notes, etc.

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

WARNING FOR LASER UNIT

Safety Precautions for This Machine

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1-BIN TRAY UNIT B413

BRIDGE UNIT B417

1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A

1.2 COPIER INSTALLATION

Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.

1. ADF 2. Bridge Unit or Shift Tray

3. Duplex Unit 4. By-pass Tray

1.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

Unpack the copier

Does the user require the Memory Unit?

Does the user require the By-pass Tray?

Does the user require the Shift Tray?

Does the user require the Finisher?

Install the Finisher

Install the Duplex Unit and/or 1-bin Tray Unit

Install the ARDF or Platen Cover (if required)

1.2.3 ACCESSORY CHECK

1.2.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

5. Remove the front screw [A] ( x1)

8. Open the developer pack [A].

1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Remove the strips of tape.

3. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).

1.4 LCT INSTALLATION

1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Remove the strips of tape.

3. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).

8. Load paper into the LCT.

1.5 ARDF INSTALLATION

WARNING FOR LASER UNIT

5. Remove the front screw [A] ( x1)

3. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).

3. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).

2. Remove the left scale [A] ( x 2).

3. Install the unit holder [A] using the Allen key ( x 4 ).

= Necessary, --- = Not necessary

1. Install the platen cover [A] ( x 2).

5. Remove the 2nd paper lift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).

1. Remove the joint brackets [A] ( x 1 each).

1. Remove two joint brackets [A] ( x 1 each).